7SJ686 Manual AG en

Preface
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
SIPROTEC Functions 2
Multi-Functional Protec-
tion Device
Mounting and Commissioning 3
7SJ686 Technical Data 4
Appendix 5
V5.30
Literature
Device Manual
C53000-G1140-C357-G
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Subject to changes and errors. The information given in Copyright © Siemens 2022. All rights reserved.
this document only contains general descriptions and/or The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
performance features which may not always specifically document, or utilization and communication of the content
reflect those described, or which may undergo modifica- are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
tion in the course of further development of the products. including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
The requested performance features are binding only when utility model or a design, are reserved.
they are expressly agreed upon in the concluded contract.
Document version: C53000-G1140-C357-G.02 Trademarks
Edition: 11.2022
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGRA, SIGUARD, SIMEAS, SAFIR, SICAM,
Version of the product described: V5.30 and MindSphere are trademarks of Siemens. Any unauthor-
ized use is prohibited.
Preface
Purpose of the Manual

General information with regard to design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC 4 devices are set out in
the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of devices 7SJ686.
Target Audience
Protection-system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main-
tenance of selective protection, automation and control equipment, and operating personnel in electrical
installations and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to Multi-Functional Protection Device 7SJ686 V5.30 or higher. The DIGSI4 version must be
V4.95 or higher.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC Council Directive 2014/30/EU) and concerning electrical equipment for use within speci-
fied voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 2014/35/EU).
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with the Council
Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for EMC
directive, and with the standard EN 60255-27 for the low-voltage directive.
The device has been designed and produced for industrial use.
The product conforms with the international standards of the series IEC 60255 and the
German standard VDE 0435.
Standards
IEEE 37.90 (see chapter "Technical Data").
Additional Support
If you need more information on SIPROTEC 4 products, or this manual cannot provide the sufficient informa-
tion, contact our Customer Support Center.
Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Hotline: 8008289887, 4008289887
Fax: +86-025-5210 9237
e-mail: ea_support.cn@siemens.com
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 3

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Preface
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Automation Ltd.
Building 4, Hua Rui Industry Park, 88 Cheng Xin Avenue, Jiangning Economic & Technological Development
Zone, Nanjing, 211100, P.R.China
Tel: +86-025-51170188
Fax: +86-025-5210 9237
Website: http://www.siemens.com.cn/ea
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as
to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given attention.
Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this document are
people who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
4 SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Preface
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation
• Proper operation and maintenance

When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
Provisions for Ensuring Product Life

SIPROTEC 4 products have a design life of 15 years in the operating environment for which they are designed.
To ensure the product life of the product, the following regulations must be followed:
• Customers and users must carry out regular inspections and proper maintenance by qualified personnel
in accordance with the operation and maintenance manual provided by Siemens; maintenance records
and operational records are available to Siemens for query.
• All accessories connected to Siemens product must be regularly inspected and maintained.
• All operations must be adequately documented and available to Siemens for query.
• Customers must follow Siemens instructions (for example, update or replace) immediately after Siemens
has provided with written notice.
• If the relevant operation and maintenance instructions are not strictly followed, Siemens is not respon-
sible for related products.
• In case of any abnormal operation, customers and users must maintain the complete and unmodified
records to prove the liability arising from the abnormal operation. Siemens is entitled to use these
records to take measures to prevent such things from happening in the future. Therefore, when encoun-
tering abnormal running status, customers should notify Siemens in time.
• Customers shall not modify and adjust the parameters of the installed and commissioned devices before
obtaining the consent of Siemens.
To guarantee the product life, it is recommended to observe the following regulations at the same time:
• Customers must ensure that the life contact of the device are connected to the power monitoring system
SCADA and are monitored permanently. Customers should conduct on-site inspections once a month, to
judge the running status of the device through observing the self-test function ("ERROR" LED). If there is
any fault alarm indicated by life contact or "ERROR" LED (red "ERROR" LED lights up in HMI), customers
must notify Siemens immediately and deal with the fault according to the instructions from Siemens.
These instructions are available via phone calls, e-mails, manuals, product life cycle descriptions, user
letters, and so on.
• Customers must ensure function and protection action behavior test every 2 years.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Preface
• If the device has been stored for more than 2 years, connect to an auxiliary power and charge for 1 to 2
days. This will resume the electrical characteristics of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit
board.
• If repairs are required, Siemens reserves the right to provide customers with equivalent devices.
Typographic and Symbol Conventions

The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the device appear in the
text flow:
Parameter Names
Designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-for-word in the display of the
device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are marked in bold letters in
monospace type style. The same applies to titles of menus.
1234A
Parameter addresses have the same character style as parameter names. Parameter addresses contain the
suffix A in the overview tables if the parameter can only be set in DIGSI via the option Display additional
settings.
Parameter Options
Possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the
screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are additionally written in italics. The same
applies to the options of the menus.
Indications
Designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other devices or from the
switch gear are specially marked in the text.
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously derived
from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Device-internal logical input signal
Device-internal logical output signal
Internal input signal of an analog quantity
External binary input signal with number (binary input,

input indication)
External binary output signal with number
(example of a value indication)
External binary output signal with number (device indication) used as
input signal
Example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with address

1234 and the possible settings ON and OFF
Besides these, graphical symbols are used in accordance with IEC 60617-12 and IEC 60617-13 or similar.
Some of the most frequently used are listed below:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Preface
Analog input variable
AND-gate operation of input values
OR-gate operation of input values
Exclusive OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the

inputs is active
Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs are active or inactive

at the same time
Dynamic inputs (edge-triggered) above with positive, below with

negative edge
Formation of one analog output signal from a number of analog input

signals
Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and

parameter designator (name)
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)
Static memory (SR flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R),
output (Q) and inverted output (Q), setting input dominant
Static memory (RS-flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R),
output (Q) and inverted output (Q), resetting input dominant

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................21
1.1 Functional Configuration...................................................................................................22
1.2 Functional Characteristics................................................................................................. 28
2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................... 29
2.1 General.............................................................................................................................31
2.1.1 Functional Scope......................................................................................................... 31
2.1.1.1 Function Configuration.......................................................................................... 31
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 31
2.1.1.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 32
2.1.2 Protocol-Dependent Functions..................................................................................... 36
2.1.2.1 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 36
2.1.2.2 Setting...................................................................................................................36
2.1.2.3 Information List..................................................................................................... 36
2.1.3 Device Communication................................................................................................37
2.1.3.1 RSTP/PRP Used in the Device................................................................................... 39
2.1.3.2 Display of Port Information on the Device............................................................... 43
2.1.3.3 Notes.....................................................................................................................44
2.1.3.4 Communication Port Configuration........................................................................ 44
2.1.4 Power System Data......................................................................................................45
2.1.4.1 Functional Description........................................................................................... 45
2.1.4.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 45
2.1.4.3 Setting...................................................................................................................48
2.1.5 Power System Data (DIFF)............................................................................................50
2.1.5.1 Primary Data of Power System (Power System Data)............................................... 50
2.1.5.2 Protection Function Is Configured to Measurement Point/Winding Side................... 57
2.1.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 57
2.1.6 Power System Data (ATS).............................................................................................61
2.1.6.1 Settings................................................................................................................. 61
2.1.7 Power System Data 2................................................................................................... 64
2.1.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................... 64
2.1.7.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 64
2.1.7.3 Setting...................................................................................................................64
2.1.8 Oscillographic Fault Records........................................................................................ 66
2.1.8.1 Overview............................................................................................................... 66
2.1.8.2 Configuration.........................................................................................................66
2.1.9 Setting Groups............................................................................................................ 66
2.1.9.1 Overview............................................................................................................... 67
2.1.9.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 67

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
2.1.9.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 67
2.2 Directional Phase Overcurrent........................................................................................... 68
2.2.1 Function Overview...................................................................................................... 68
2.2.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Element..............................................................................70
2.2.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Element............................................................................... 78
2.2.4 Direction Determination.............................................................................................. 79
2.2.5 Compound Voltage Control..........................................................................................80
2.2.6 Settings.......................................................................................................................81
2.2.7 Information List........................................................................................................... 83
2.3 Directional Earth Overcurrent............................................................................................ 86
2.3.1 Function Overview...................................................................................................... 86
2.3.2 Definite-Time Earth Overcurrent Element..................................................................... 88
2.3.3 Inverse-Time Earth Overcurrent Element...................................................................... 94
2.3.4 Direction Determination.............................................................................................. 96
2.3.5 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................97
2.3.6 Settings.......................................................................................................................97
2.3.7 Information List......................................................................................................... 100
2.4 Displacement Voltage Protection..................................................................................... 102
2.4.1 Function Overview.................................................................................................... 102
2.4.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................103
2.5 Overload Protection........................................................................................................ 105
2.5.1 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................107
2.5.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................107
2.6 Under/Overvoltage Protection......................................................................................... 109
2.6.1 Measurement Principle.............................................................................................. 109
2.6.2 Overvoltage Protection.............................................................................................. 110
2.6.3 Undervoltage Protection............................................................................................ 111
2.6.4 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................113
2.6.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................115
2.7 Differential Protection..................................................................................................... 118
2.7.2 Differential Protection of Transformer........................................................................ 127
2.7.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................131
2.7.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................133
2.8 Current Comparison Protection....................................................................................... 136
2.8.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................137
2.8.3 Inter-Trip................................................................................................................... 140
2.8.4 Differential Protection Test Mode...............................................................................141
2.8.5 Self-Looping Mode.................................................................................................... 141
2.8.6 CT Broken Wire Blocking............................................................................................ 141

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
2.8.7 Remote Trip and Remote Transmission.......................................................................141

2.8.8 Fibre Optic Data Interface and Differential Topology...................................................142
2.8.9 Line Differential Protection Measurement Value......................................................... 143
2.8.10 Fibre Optic Communication Interface Measurement Values........................................ 143
2.8.11 Settings.....................................................................................................................143
2.9 Vector Line Differential Protection................................................................................... 148
2.9.2 Pickup Element..........................................................................................................149
2.9.3 Current Differential Protection................................................................................... 149
2.9.4 Trip Logic.................................................................................................................. 157
2.9.5 Inter-Trip................................................................................................................... 157
2.9.6 Remote Trip and Remote Transmission.......................................................................157
2.9.7 Self-Looping Mode.................................................................................................... 158
2.9.8 Test Mode................................................................................................................. 158
2.9.9 Fibre Optic Data Interface and Differential Topology...................................................159
2.9.10 Setting Notes for Power System Data......................................................................... 159
2.9.11 Line Differential Protection Measurement Value......................................................... 162
2.9.12 Oscillographic Fault Records...................................................................................... 162
2.9.13 Settings.....................................................................................................................163
2.10 Magnetic Balance Overcurrent Protection........................................................................ 169
2.10.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................170
2.10.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................170
2.11 Restricted Earth Fault Protection......................................................................................171
2.11.1 Application Example.................................................................................................. 171
2.11.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................176
2.11.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................177
2.12 Low Voltage Load Shedding............................................................................................ 179
2.12.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................182
2.13 Low Frequency Load Shedding........................................................................................ 184
2.13.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................186
2.14 Inrush Restraint...............................................................................................................189
2.14.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................190
2.15 Accelerate Overcurrent Protection................................................................................... 192

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
2.15.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................194

2.15.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................195
2.16 Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................................... 198
2.16.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................201
2.16.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................203
2.17 Earth Overcurrent Surge Arrester.....................................................................................204
2.17.1 Settings.....................................................................................................................205
2.18 Sensitive Earth fault........................................................................................................ 206
2.18.2 Direction Determination............................................................................................ 206
2.18.3 Logic......................................................................................................................... 207
2.18.4 Earth Fault Trip Test...................................................................................................210
2.18.5 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................211
2.18.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................212
2.19 Overexcitation Protection (U/f)........................................................................................ 214
2.19.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................215
2.19.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................218
2.20 Pole Discrepancy Detection............................................................................................. 219
2.20.2 Pole Discrepancy Contacts......................................................................................... 219
2.20.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................220
2.21 Earth Overcurrent Low V Side.......................................................................................... 222
2.21.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................223
2.22 Auto Reclose Function.....................................................................................................225
2.22.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................231
2.22.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................232
2.23 FC Circuit Operate Blocking............................................................................................. 235
2.23.1 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................235
2.24 Switch onto Fault Overcurrent Protection........................................................................ 236
2.24.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................236
2.24.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................241

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
2.25 Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)..............................................................................244

2.25.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................245
2.26 Startup Supervision of Motors......................................................................................... 247
2.26.2 Logic Diagram........................................................................................................... 249
2.26.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................249
2.26.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................250
2.27 Motor Restart Inhibit....................................................................................................... 252
2.27.2 Logic Diagram........................................................................................................... 257
2.27.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................257
2.27.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................258
2.28 Load Jam Protection........................................................................................................260
2.28.2 Logic Diagram........................................................................................................... 261
2.28.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................261
2.28.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................262
2.29 Thermal Overload Protection........................................................................................... 263
2.29.2 Logic Diagram........................................................................................................... 265
2.29.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................266
2.29.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................267
2.30 Undercurrent Protection of Motor....................................................................................269
2.30.1 Settings.....................................................................................................................269
2.31 Capacitor Current Diff Protection..................................................................................... 271
2.31.1 Settings.....................................................................................................................272
2.32 Capacitor Voltage Diff Protection.....................................................................................273
2.32.1 Settings.....................................................................................................................274
2.33 Capacitor Current Unbalance Protection.......................................................................... 275
2.33.1 Settings.....................................................................................................................276
2.34 Capacitor Voltage Unbalance Protection.......................................................................... 277
2.34.1 Settings.....................................................................................................................278
2.35 Synchronisation Function................................................................................................279
2.35.2 Synchrocheck............................................................................................................ 283

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
2.35.3 Asynchronous / Synchronous Mode............................................................................283

2.35.4 De-Energized Switching............................................................................................. 284
2.35.5 Direct Command/Blocking..........................................................................................284
2.35.6 Synchronisation Setting Groups................................................................................. 285
2.35.7 Cooperation with Control Device and External Control Commands............................. 285
2.35.8 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................286
2.35.9 Settings.....................................................................................................................288
2.36 Reverse-Power Protection................................................................................................291
2.36.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................292
2.37 External Trip Protection................................................................................................... 293
2.37.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................295
2.38 ARC Protection................................................................................................................ 297
2.38.2 ARC Protection Detection Methods.............................................................................298
2.38.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................299
2.38.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................299
2.39 Automatic Transfer System..............................................................................................302
2.39.2 Line Transfer............................................................................................................. 309
2.39.2.1 Line 1 -> Line 2 (Line 1 Is Main Power Supply, and Line 2 Is Standby).................... 309
2.39.2.2 Line 2 -> Line 1 Transfer Direction (Line 2 Is Main Power Supply, and Line 1 Is
Standby).............................................................................................................. 315
2.39.3 Busbar ATS................................................................................................................ 321
2.39.3.1 Primary Diagram.................................................................................................. 321
2.39.3.2 Ready and Unready Logic of Busbar Transfer Direction.......................................... 324
2.39.3.3 Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 Transfer Direction (Busbar 2 Is the Standby for Busbar 1)...... 325
2.39.3.4 Busbar 2 -> Busbar 1 Transfer Direction (Busbar 1 Is the Standby for Busbar 2)...... 327
2.39.4 Auto Restore Function............................................................................................... 328
2.39.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 328
2.39.4.2 Automatic Restore of Line Transfer....................................................................... 330
2.39.4.3 Automatic Restore of Busbar Transfer................................................................... 337
2.39.5 User-Defined ATS.......................................................................................................346
2.39.6 Load Shedding.......................................................................................................... 347
2.39.7 Low-Frequency Load Shedding Blocking ATS.............................................................. 348
2.39.8 Low-Voltage Load Shedding Blocking ATS.................................................................. 348
2.39.9 Settings.....................................................................................................................349
2.40 Analog Input................................................................................................................... 354
2.40.1 Analog Input............................................................................................................. 354
2.40.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................356

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
2.41 Analog Output................................................................................................................ 359

2.41.1 Analog Output...........................................................................................................359
2.41.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................359
2.42 Operation Box.................................................................................................................361
2.42.1 DC Operation Circuit Overview...................................................................................361
2.42.2 AC Operation Circuit Overview...................................................................................365
2.43 Monitoring Functions......................................................................................................366
2.43.1 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision..................................................................................... 366
2.43.1.1 Function Overview............................................................................................... 366
2.43.1.2 Settings............................................................................................................... 369
2.43.1.3 Information List................................................................................................... 369
2.43.2 Fuse Fault Monitoring................................................................................................369
2.43.2.2 Settings............................................................................................................... 370
2.43.3 VT Broken Wire Supervision....................................................................................... 371
2.43.3.2 Settings............................................................................................................... 374
2.43.4 CT Broken Wire Supervision....................................................................................... 374
2.43.4.2 Settings............................................................................................................... 375
2.43.5 CT Broken Wire Supervision (Only Applicable for 7SJ686-C/H/L/M).............................. 375
2.43.5.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 376
2.43.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 377
2.43.6 Parameterisation Errors..............................................................................................378
2.43.7 Cold Load Pickup Signal............................................................................................. 378
2.43.7.2 Settings............................................................................................................... 379
2.43.8 Voltage/Current Phase Sequence Supervision............................................................. 379
2.43.8.2 Settings............................................................................................................... 379
2.43.9 Voltage Supervision................................................................................................... 380
2.43.9.2 Settings............................................................................................................... 381
2.43.10 Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring................................................................................ 382
2.43.10.1 Functional Overview............................................................................................ 382
2.43.10.2 Basic Principle...................................................................................................... 382
2.43.10.3 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 383
2.43.10.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 384
2.43.11 Motor Online Monitoring........................................................................................... 385
2.43.11.1 Function Description............................................................................................ 385
2.43.11.2 Logic Diagram......................................................................................................386
2.43.11.3 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 386
2.43.11.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 387

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
2.44 Flexible Protection Function............................................................................................ 389

2.44.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................394
2.44.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................397
2.45 CFC Function.................................................................................................................. 401
2.45.1 DI_GET_GO_STATUS.................................................................................................. 401
2.45.2 SI_GET_GO_STATUS...................................................................................................401
2.45.3 TIME_GET.................................................................................................................. 402
2.45.4 RISE_DETECT_NEW.................................................................................................... 403
2.46 Smart Wireless Temperature Monitoring..........................................................................404
2.46.1 Smart Wireless Temperature Monitoring on the AIS Switchgear.................................. 404
2.46.1.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 404
2.46.1.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 405
2.46.2 Smart Wireless Temperature Monitoring on the GIS Switchgear..................................413
2.46.2.2 Logic Diagram......................................................................................................414
2.46.2.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 414
2.47 External RTD-BOX(ADAM Module 4015).......................................................................... 417
2.47.1 Application Example.................................................................................................. 417
2.47.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................418
2.48 Measurement Settings.................................................................................................... 420
2.48.1 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................420
2.48.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................420
3 Mounting and Commissioning................................................................................................................. 421

3.1 Mounting and Connections............................................................................................. 422
3.1.1 Configuration Information......................................................................................... 422
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications.............................................................................................423
3.1.2.1 General................................................................................................................423
3.1.2.2 Disassembly......................................................................................................... 424
3.1.2.3 CPU Board Jumper Settings.................................................................................. 428
3.1.2.4 Power Supply Board Jumper Settings.................................................................... 428
3.1.2.5 Jumper Settings of Binary Input Board.................................................................. 431
3.1.2.6 Jumper Settings of PT/CT Board ........................................................................... 432
3.1.2.7 Extension Board................................................................................................... 444
3.1.2.8 Reassembly.......................................................................................................... 449
3.1.3 Mounting and Commissioning................................................................................... 449
3.1.3.1 Panel Flush Mounting...........................................................................................449
3.2 Checking Connections.....................................................................................................451
3.2.1 Checking Data Connections of Time Synchronization and Communication Interfaces.. 451
3.2.2 Checking the System Connections............................................................................. 452
3.3 Checking Protection Data Interface..................................................................................455
3.4 Commissioning............................................................................................................... 456
3.4.1 Test Mode and Transmission Block............................................................................. 457

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
3.4.2 Testing the System (SCADA) Interface........................................................................ 457

3.4.3 Checking the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs...................................................... 459
3.4.4 Testing User-Defined Functions..................................................................................461
3.4.5 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing............................................................. 462
3.4.6 Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme....................................................................463
3.4.7 Direction Check with Load Current............................................................................. 463
3.4.8 Polarity Check for Voltage Input U4.............................................................................464
3.4.9 Earth Fault Check...................................................................................................... 466
3.4.10 Polarity Check for Current Input IE.............................................................................. 467
3.4.11 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices................................................ 469
3.4.12 Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests.............................................................. 470
3.5 USB Disk Operation Functions......................................................................................... 471
3.6 Final Preparation of the Device........................................................................................ 475
4 Technical Data.......................................................................................................................................... 477

4.1 General...........................................................................................................................479
4.1.1 Analog Inputs............................................................................................................ 479
4.1.2 Device Power Supply................................................................................................. 479
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs............................................................................... 480
4.1.4 Analog Input/Output..................................................................................................482
4.1.5 Operational Circuit.................................................................................................... 483
4.1.6 Communication Interfaces......................................................................................... 483
4.1.7 Electrical Tests...........................................................................................................485
4.1.8 Mechanical Vibration Tests........................................................................................ 488
4.1.9 Environment Tests.....................................................................................................488
4.1.10 Mechanical Dimensions............................................................................................. 489
4.2 Directional Phase Overcurrent......................................................................................... 490
4.3 Directional Earth Overcurrent.......................................................................................... 493
4.4 Displacement Voltage Protection..................................................................................... 496
4.5 Overload Protection........................................................................................................ 497
4.6 Differential Protection..................................................................................................... 498
4.7 Current Comparison Protection....................................................................................... 502
4.8 Vector Line Differential Protection................................................................................... 503
4.9 Magnetic Balance Overcurrent Protection........................................................................ 504
4.10 Restricted Earth Fault Protection......................................................................................505
4.11 Low Frequency Load Shedding........................................................................................ 506
4.12 Low Voltage Load Shedding............................................................................................ 507
4.13 Inrush Restraint...............................................................................................................508
4.14 Accelerate Overcurrent Protection................................................................................... 509
4.15 Earth Overcurrent Surge Arrester.....................................................................................511
4.16 Sensitive Earth fault........................................................................................................ 512
4.17 Overexcitation Protection (U/f)........................................................................................ 513
4.18 Pole Discrepancy Detection............................................................................................. 514
4.19 Earth Overcurrent Low V Side.......................................................................................... 515
4.20 Synchronisation Function................................................................................................516

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
4.21 Auto Reclose Function.....................................................................................................517

4.22 FC Circuit Operate Blocking............................................................................................. 518
4.23 External Trip Protection................................................................................................... 519
4.24 ARC Protection................................................................................................................ 520
4.25 Switch onto Fault Overcurrent Protection........................................................................ 522
4.26 Definite-Time Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)........................................................ 524
4.27 Inverse-Time Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)......................................................... 525
4.28 Startup Supervision of Motors......................................................................................... 527
4.29 Motor Restart Inhibit....................................................................................................... 529
4.30 Load Jam Protection........................................................................................................530
4.31 Thermal Overload Protection........................................................................................... 531
4.32 Undercurrent Protection of Motor....................................................................................533
4.33 Capacitor Current Diff Protection..................................................................................... 534
4.34 Capacitor Voltage Diff Protection.....................................................................................535
4.35 Capacitor Current Unbalance Protection.......................................................................... 536
4.36 Capacitor Voltage Unbalance Protection.......................................................................... 537
4.37 Reverse-Power Protection................................................................................................538
4.38 Under/Overvoltage Protection......................................................................................... 539
4.39 Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................................... 540
4.40 Automatic Transfer System..............................................................................................541
4.41 Flexible Protection Function............................................................................................ 542
4.42 Monitoring Functions......................................................................................................545
4.43 Voltage Supervision........................................................................................................ 546
4.44 CFC Function.................................................................................................................. 547
4.45 Additional Functions....................................................................................................... 552
4.46 Operating Ranges of Protection Functions....................................................................... 556
4.47 Switching Device Control................................................................................................ 558
4.48 Dimensions.....................................................................................................................559
4.48.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/3).................................................559
4.48.2 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/2).................................................560
5 Appendix.................................................................................................................................................. 561
5.1 Ordering Information and Accessories............................................................................. 562
5.1.1 Ordering Information.................................................................................................562
5.1.2 Accessories................................................................................................................564
5.2 Terminal Assignments..................................................................................................... 565
5.2.1 1/3 Housing...............................................................................................................565
5.2.2 1/2 housing............................................................................................................... 573
5.2.3 1/3 MINI Housing.......................................................................................................576
5.2.4 Extension Board Terminal Wiring Diagram..................................................................579
5.2.5 Connector Assignments............................................................................................. 580
5.3 Connection Examples......................................................................................................581
5.4 Current Transformer Requirements..................................................................................591
5.4.1 Accuracy Limiting Factors.......................................................................................... 591
5.4.2 Class Conversion........................................................................................................592

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table of Contents
5.4.3 Cable Core Winding Balance Current Transformer.......................................................592

5.5 Conversion Matrix for Transformer Differential Protection................................................594
5.5.1 7SJ686-H/-L Star-Delta Conversion Matrix with Linear Transformer Group Vector
Differential................................................................................................................ 594
5.5.2 7SJ686-M Star-Delta Conversion Matrix with Linear Transformer Group Vector
Differential................................................................................................................ 596
5.6 Default Settings.............................................................................................................. 599
5.6.1 LEDs.......................................................................................................................... 599
5.6.2 Binary Inputs............................................................................................................. 600
5.6.3 Binary Outputs.......................................................................................................... 603
5.6.4 Function Keys (Only Applicable to 1/2 Housing)......................................................... 604
5.6.5 Default Display.......................................................................................................... 604
5.6.6 Predefined CFC Charts............................................................................................... 607
5.7 Protocol-Dependent Functions........................................................................................ 609
5.8 Alarm Group Indications..................................................................................................610
5.9 Measured Values.............................................................................................................611
5.10 Menu Structure of the Protection Device......................................................................... 621
5.11 Terms............................................................................................................................. 623
Literature.................................................................................................................................................. 627

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
1 Introduction
1.1 Functional Configuration 22

1.2 Functional Characteristics 28

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Introduction
1.1 Functional Configuration

Refer to the following table for functional configurations of different devices.
Table 1-1 Functional Configurations (✓ in the manual indicates selected)
Capacitor Protection (Voltage Unbalance)

Capacitor Protection (Current Unbalance)
Mini Substation Transformer Protection

Line Current Comparison Protectiontial
Mini Motor Overcurrent Protection

Substation Transformer Protection
Capacitor Protection (Voltage Diff)
Capacitor Protection (Current Diff)
2 to 4 Side Differential Protection

2-Side Transformer (Differential)
Transformer Backup Protection

Motor Overcurrent Protection
Motor Differential Protection
Vector Line Differential
Mini Feeder Protection

Protection Functions
Reactor (Differential)
Feeder Protection
ATS Device
The 14th position of MLFB A B C D E F G H H J K L M M N A B K
3-stage non-directional over-
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
current protection
3-stage directional overcur- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.2 Directional Phase Overcurrent
rent protection
Undervoltage release ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Compound voltage release ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3 time-delays ✓
1-stage IEC inverse time non- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
directional overcurrent
1-stage IEC inverse time direc- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tional overcurrent
Low voltage side overcurrent ✓
protection
Low voltage side earth over- ✓
current protection
3-stage non-directional earth ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
overcurrent protection
3-stage directional earth over- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.3 Directional Earth Overcurrent
current protection
1-stage IEC inverse time non- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
directional earth overcurrent
protection
1-stage IEC inverse time direc- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tional earth overcurrent
protection
3 time-delays ✓
Transformer neutral point ✓
earth overcurrent protection
2.4 Displacement Voltage Protec- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tion

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Introduction






Feeder Protection
ATS Device
Overload start fan ✓ ✓
2.7 Differential Protection 2.6 Under/Overvoltage Protection 2.5 Overload Protection
Overload block on-load tap- ✓ ✓

changer
Overload protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2-stage definite time over- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

voltage protection
2-stage definite time under- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
voltage protection
Line 3 phases live ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Line 3 phases dead
Line single phase live moni-
toring
Differential high set trip ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Proportional differential ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Line-transformer-unit differ- ✓
ential
2nd and 5th harmonic ✓ ✓
restraint
2.8 Current Comparison Protection ✓

2.9 Vector Line Differential Protec- ✓
tion
2.10 Magnetic Balance Overcur- ✓
rent Protection
2.11 Restricted Earth Fault Protec- ✓
tion
2.12 Low Voltage Load Shedding ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.13 Low Frequency Load Shed- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ding
2.14 Inrush Restraint ✓ ✓

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Introduction






Feeder Protection
ATS Device
Instantaneous tripping at ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.15 Accelerate Overcurrent Protection
SOTF
Instantaneous tripping pre/ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
post reclosing
2.16 Breaker Failure Protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

2.17 Earth Overcurrent Surge ✓
Arrester
2.18 Sensitive Earth fault ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.19 Overexcitation Protection ✓
(U/f)
2.20 Pole Discrepancy Detection ✓
2.21 Earth Overcurrent Low V Side ✓ ✓
2.22 Auto Reclose Function ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.23 FC Circuit Operate Blocking ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.24 Switch onto Fault Overcur- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
rent Protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Introduction






Feeder Protection
ATS Device
2-stage definite time negative ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.25 Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)
sequence overcurrent protec-

tion
1-stage IEC inverse time nega- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tive sequence overcurrent
protection
2.26 Startup Supervision of Motors ✓ ✓ ✓

2.27 Motor Restart Inhibit ✓ ✓ ✓
2.28 Load Jam Protection ✓ ✓ ✓
2.29 Thermal Overload Protection ✓ ✓ ✓
2.30 Undercurrent Protection of ✓ ✓ ✓
Motor
2.31 Capacitor Current Diff Protec- ✓
tion
2.32 Capacitor Voltage Diff Protec- ✓
tion
2.33 Capacitor Current Unbalance ✓
Protection
2.34 Capacitor Voltage Unbalance ✓
Protection
2.35 Synchronisation Function ✓ ✓
2.36 Reverse-Power Protection ✓ ✓ ✓
2.37 External Trip Protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.38 ARC Protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.39 Automatic Transfer System ✓
2.40 Analog Input ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.41 Analog Output ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Introduction






Feeder Protection
ATS Device
Trip/close circuit supervision ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.43.1 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision
function (without operation

box, implemented by binary
input)
Control circuit wire broken ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
supervision (implemented by
operation box)
2.43.3 VT Broken Wire Supervision ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

2.43.4 CT Broken Wire Supervision ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.43.7 Cold Load Pickup Signal ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.43.8 Voltage/Current Phase ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Sequence Supervision
2.43.10 Circuit Breaker Wear ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Monitoring
2.43.11 Motor Online Monitoring ✓ ✓ ✓
2.44 Flexible Protection Function ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.46 Smart Wireless Temperature ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Monitoring

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Introduction
NOTE
i 7SJ686-H and 7SJ686-H-B are completely the same in functionality, except that these 2 types of devices
have different numbers of binary input/output, and use different housings. Except that ARC protection
cannot be configured, all other protection functions of 7SJ686-H-B are completely the same as 7SJ686-H.
Therefore, the protection functions of 7SJ686-H-B are not explained separately.
7SJ686-A and 7SJ686-A-B are completely the same in functionality, except that these 2 types of devices
have different numbers of binary input/output, and use different housings. Therefore, the protection func-
tions of 7SJ686-A-B are not explained separately. Its conditions of applicability are completely the same as
7SJ686-A.
7SJ686-M and 7SJ686-M-B are completely the same in functionality, except that these 2 types of devices
have different numbers of binary input/output, and use different housings. Therefore, the protection func-
tions of 7SJ686-M-B are not explained separately. Its conditions of applicability are completely the same as
7SJ686-M.
Mini feeder protection devices include 7SJ686-A-C, 7SJ686-A-D, and 7SJ686-A-E. 7SJ686-A-C, 7SJ686-A-D,
and 7SJ686-A-E are completely the same in functionality, except that these 3 types of devices have
different numbers of binary input/output. Therefore, the protection functions of 7SJ686-A-D and 7SJ686-A-
E are not explained separately. Their conditions of applicability are completely the same as 7SJ686-A-C.
Mini motor protection devices include 7SJ686-B-C, 7SJ686-B-D, and 7SJ686-B-E. 7SJ686-B-C, 7SJ686-B-D,
and 7SJ686-B-E are completely the same in functionality, except that these 3 types of devices have
different numbers of binary input/output. Therefore, the protection functions of 7SJ686-B-D and 7SJ686-B-
E are not explained separately. Their conditions of applicability are completely the same as 7SJ686-B-C.
Mini substation transformer protection devices include 7SJ686-K-C, 7SJ686-K-D, and 7SJ686-K-E. 7SJ686-K-
C, 7SJ686-K-D, and 7SJ686-K-E are completely the same in functionality, except that these 3 types of
devices have different numbers of binary input/output. Therefore, the protection functions of 7SJ686-K-D
and 7SJ686-K-E are not explained separately. Their conditions of applicability are completely the same as
7SJ686-K-C.
NOTE
i Device variants like 7SJ686-X and 7SJ686-X-Y that appear in the manual refer to different device variant.
The first letter X after 686 represents the 14th position of the MLFB order number. The second letter Y
represents the 9th position of the MLFB order number.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Introduction
1.2 Functional Characteristics
1.2 Functional Characteristics

• The number of event records stored is 512. The number of trip records stored is 16. All operations on the
device, such as soft-link on/off, modification of settings, etc., are recorded.
• The device supports a storage of 20 fault records, with a maximum of 5 s each time, a total recording
duration of 20 sec, and 60 customisable binary signals. Fault recording can be triggered by device pickup,
trip, binary input or ADC self-check faults.
• Remote parameter setting change function is supported, where the parameter setting 298Chg.
Setting. R in Power System Data should be set to ON.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
2 Functions
2.1 General 31
2.2 Directional Phase Overcurrent 68
2.3 Directional Earth Overcurrent 86
2.4 Displacement Voltage Protection 102
2.5 Overload Protection 105
2.6 Under/Overvoltage Protection 109
2.7 Differential Protection 118
2.8 Current Comparison Protection 136
2.9 Vector Line Differential Protection 148
2.10 Magnetic Balance Overcurrent Protection 169
2.11 Restricted Earth Fault Protection 171
2.12 Low Voltage Load Shedding 179
2.13 Low Frequency Load Shedding 184
2.14 Inrush Restraint 189
2.15 Accelerate Overcurrent Protection 192
2.16 Breaker Failure Protection 198
2.17 Earth Overcurrent Surge Arrester 204
2.18 Sensitive Earth fault 206
2.19 Overexcitation Protection (U/f) 214
2.20 Pole Discrepancy Detection 219
2.21 Earth Overcurrent Low V Side 222
2.22 Auto Reclose Function 225
2.23 FC Circuit Operate Blocking 235
2.24 Switch onto Fault Overcurrent Protection 236
2.25 Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) 244
2.26 Startup Supervision of Motors 247
2.27 Motor Restart Inhibit 252
2.28 Load Jam Protection 260
2.29 Thermal Overload Protection 263
2.30 Undercurrent Protection of Motor 269
2.31 Capacitor Current Diff Protection 271
2.32 Capacitor Voltage Diff Protection 273
2.33 Capacitor Current Unbalance Protection 275
2.34 Capacitor Voltage Unbalance Protection 277

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.35 Synchronisation Function 279

2.36 Reverse-Power Protection 291
2.37 External Trip Protection 293
2.38 ARC Protection 297
2.39 Automatic Transfer System 302
2.40 Analog Input 354
2.41 Analog Output 359
2.42 Operation Box 361
2.43 Monitoring Functions 366
2.44 Flexible Protection Function 389
2.45 CFC Function 401
2.46 Smart Wireless Temperature Monitoring 404
2.47 External RTD-BOX(ADAM Module 4015) 417
2.48 Measurement Settings 420

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
2.1 General
This chapter describes how to select set points for each function at maximum configuration and gives infor-
mation on how to determine set points. Formulas can also be provided if needed.
From the following information provided, you can learn about the specific application functions of the device.
Settings of different functions of the device can be maintained and operated through DIGSI software and front
USB port on the front panel. Some parameters can also be set using key board on the front panel of the
device. The specific process is detailed in SIPROTEC System Description.
2.1.1 Functional Scope
The relay contains protection functions as well as auxiliary functions. The hardware and firmware is designed
for this scope of functions. Additionally, the control functions can be matched to the system requirements.
Individual functions can be enabled or disabled during the configuration procedure. The interaction of func-
tions may also be modified.
2.1.1.1 Function Configuration

Example for the configuration of the functional scope:
A protected system consists of overhead lines and underground cables. Since automatic reclosing is only
needed for the overhead lines, the automatic reclosing function is not configured or Disabled for the relays
protecting the underground cables.
The available protection and additional functions must be configured as Enabled or Disabled. For indi-
vidual functions, a choice between several alternatives may be presented, as described below.
Functions configured as Disabled are not processed by the relay. There are no messages, and corresponding
settings (functions, limit values) are not queried during configuration.
NOTE
i Available functions and default settings depend on the ordering code of the relay (see 5.1.1 Ordering Infor-
mation for details).
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes
Functional Scope Setting

Configuration settings can be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI and transferred via the front
USB port. The operation via DIGSI is explained in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
For changing configuration parameters in the device, password no.7 is required (for parameter set). Without
the password, the settings can be read but cannot be modified and transmitted to the device. The functional
scope with the available options is set in the Functional Scope dialog box to match plant requirements.
Characteristics
Most settings are self-explanatory. The special features are described below. If you want to use the setting
group change function, set address 103 Grp Chge OPTION to Enabled.
Simple and fast changeover between up to four different setting groups is possible in service. Only one setting
group can be selected and used if this option is Disabled.
Parameter 161 SYNC function 1 and 162 SYNC function 2 can be set to ASYN/SYNCHRON or
SYNCHROCHECK. This function exits when Disabled is selected.
When Parameter 170 BREAKER FAILURE is set to enabled w/ 3I0>, overcurrent and zero-sequence over-
current are enabled after circuit breaker failure. When it is set to Enabled, only overcurrent is started after
circuit breaker failure. When it is set to Disabled, this function exits.
When no operational circuit is configured for the device, select 1 Binary Input or Disabled for 182 T/C
Cir. Sup..

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
When an operational circuit is configured for the device, select Enabled or Disabled for 182 T/C Cir.
Sup..
The flexible protection functions can be configured via the FLEXIBLE FUNC. parameter. Up to 20 functions
can be created. This is done by setting checkmarks at the functions. If the checkmark of a function is removed,
all settings and configurations made previously will be lost. After re-selecting the function, all settings and
configurations are in default setting. Setting of the flexible function is done in DIGSI under Parameters, Addi-
tional Functions and Settings. The configuration is done as usual under “Parameters” and “Configuration”.
2.1.1.3 Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled
Enabled
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled Enabled
Enabled
105 PROT. OBJECT 3 phase transf. 3 phase transf. Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
Reactor/Motor
2 sides transf.
112 DIFF. PROT. Diff. Prot Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-C
Mag. Bal. Prot
Enabled
Disabled
112 DIFF. PROT. Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-H/L
Enabled
113 DIFF. PROT. Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-M
Enabled
114 TRANSFORMER NO NO
YES
115 DMT/IDMT Ph Disabled Enabled Not applicable to 7SJ686-L
Enabled
116 DMT/IDMT E Disabled Enabled Not applicable to 7SJ686-L
Enabled
117 Coldload Pickup Disabled Enabled
Enabled
118 DMT Ph #2 Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-
Enabled side transformer)
119 DMT E #2 Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-
120 DMT Tran. E Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-
122 InrushRestraint Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/H (2-
Enabled side transformer) /J/K
123 SOTF DMT Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/F/N
Enabled
124 Over Load Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-
Enabled C/A-D/A-E/B/C/B-C/B-D/B-E/K/K-C/K-
D/K-E/H (2-side transformer) /J/M
125 FC Block Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/B/C
Enabled

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

126 Ext. Trip Prot. Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-
Enabled C/A-D/A-E/B/C/B-C/B-D/B-E/H/J/K/K-
C/K-D/K-E
128 Analog input1 Disabled Disabled Not applicable to 7SJ686-A-C/A-
Celsius D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E/M/N
Tap
Pressure
Original value
129 Analog input2 Disabled Disabled
Celsius
Tap
Pressure
Original value
131 Sens. E Fault Disabled Enabled Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/L/N
Enabled
132 REF PROT. Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-L
Enabled
133 REF PROT. #2 Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-L
Enabled
134 Analog input3 Disabled Disabled Not applicable to 7SJ686-A-C/A-
Celsius D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E/M/N
Tap
Pressure
Original value
135 Analog input4 Disabled Disabled
Celsius
Tap
Pressure
Original value
136 Analog output1 Disabled Disabled Not applicable to 7SJ686-A-C/A-
IL1 D/A-E/B-C/B-D/ B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E/M/N
IL2
IL3
I1
P
Q
S
User defined
137 Analog output2 Disabled Disabled
IL1
IL2
IL3
I1
P
Q
S
User defined

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

138 LVLSH Function Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-
Enabled C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/K/K-C/K-
D/K-E
139 LFLSH Function Disabled Disabled
Enabled
140 UNBALANCE LOAD Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-
Enabled C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/K/K-C/K-
D/K-E
141 STARTUP Mot. Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-B/B-C/B-
Enabled D/B-E/C
142 Therm.Overload Disabled Disabled
No ambient temp
With amb. temp.
143 Startup C.Mot. Disabled Disabled
Enabled
144 Load Jam Prot. Disabled Disabled
Enabled
145 DMT Acceler. Disabled Disabled Not applicable to 7SJ686-L/N
Enabled
146 Reverse-power Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/B/C
Enabled
147 Capa. I-unb. Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-D
Enabled
148 Capa. I-diff Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-D
Enabled
149 DMT E Surge Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-G
Enabled
150 O/U VOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Not applicable to 7SJ686-H/L/N
Enabled
151 DMT E LV Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-K/K-C/K-
Enabled D/K-E
153 PoleDiscrepancy Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
Enabled
154 FREQUENCY Prot. Disabled Disabled
Enabled
155 Capa. U-unb. Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-E
Enabled
156 Capa. U-diff Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-F
Enabled
157 Undercurrent Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-B/B-C/B-
Enabled D/B-E/C
158 OVEREXC. PROT. Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
Enabled
159 Displ. Voltage Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-
Enabled C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/J/K/K-C/K-
D/K-E
161 SYNC function 1 Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A and
SYNCHROCHECK 7SJ686-N

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

162 SYNC function 2 Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A
ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK
165 OTM bay cnt 0 0 Not applicable to A-C/A-D/A-E/B-
1 C/B-D/B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E
2
3
4
5
166 ADAM module cnt 0 0
1
2
167 Arre.Mon. count 0 0
1
168 Gas dens. count 0 0
1
2
3
4
169 T&H Ctlr. count 0 0
1
170 BREAKER FAILURE Disabled Disabled
Enabled
enabled w/ 3I0>
171 Auto Reclose Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-
Enabled C/A-D/A-E/M
172 CB WEAR MONIT. Disabled I2t-Method
Ix-Method
2P-Method
I2t-Method
173 Motor Monitor Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-B/B-C/B-
Enabled D/B-E/C
175 ARC Protection Disabled Enabled Not applicable to 7SJ686-L/M/N
Enabled
176 ATS Disabled Enabled only applicable to 7SJ686-N
Enabled
182 T/C Cir. Sup. Disabled Disabled When no operational circuit is
1 Binary Input configured for the device (the
16th digit of MLFB = 0 or 2)
182 T/C Cir. Sup. Disabled Disabled When an operational circuit is
Enabled configured for the device (the
16th digit of MLFB = 1 or 3)
Flexible Functions Flexible 01...20 Not applicable to 7SJ686-A-C/A-
D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E/L/N

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
2.1.2 Protocol-Dependent Functions

When the device is collecting AC binary inputs, set the parameter 641 BI_Use_AC_Input in General Device
Settings to YES. When the device is collecting DC binary inputs, set the parameter 641 BI_Use_AC_Input
to NO. The default setting of this parameter is NO. In the DC binary input system, if this parameter is set to
YES, a maximum of 20-ms delay of collected binary input occurs. For the AC operation box, you can only
select YES.
The device has energy-saving mode for the screen. If the device panel is not operated within 30 minutes, the
LCD display turns off and starts the energy-saving mode. You can restore the normal display mode by pressing
any key. This function is disabled as factory-set. You can enable this function by setting the parameter 642.
2.1.2.2 Setting

641 BI_Use_AC_Input YES NO
NO
642 LCD save energy YES NO
NO
2.1.2.3 Information List
No. Information Type of Comments

Informa-
tion
– >Light on SP
– Reset LED IntSP
– DataStop IntSP
– Test mode IntSP
– HWTestMod IntSP
– SynchClock IntSP_Ev
– Distur.CFC OUT
3 >Time Synch SP_Ev
5 >Reset LED SP
15 >Test mode SP
16 >DataStop SP
51 Device OK OUT
52 ProtActive IntSP
55 Reset Device OUT
56 Initial Start OUT
67 Resume OUT
68 Clock SyncError OUT
69 DayLightSavTime OUT
70 Settings Calc. OUT
71 Settings Check OUT
72 Level-2 change OUT
110 Event Lost OUT_Ev
113 Flag Lost OUT
125 Chatter ON OUT
140 Error Sum Alarm OUT
145 Error A/D Ref. OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

Informa-
tion
147 Error PwrSupply OUT
160 Alarm Sum Event OUT
177 Fail Battery OUT
191 Error Offset OUT
193 Alarm adjustm. OUT
236.2127 BLK. Flex.Fct. IntSP
320 Warn Mem. Data OUT
321 Warn Mem. Para. OUT
322 Warn Mem. Oper. OUT
323 Warn Mem. New OUT
545 PU Time VI
546 TRIP Time VI
18010 PT/CT board Err OUT
18011 PS board Err OUT
18012 BI/O board Err OUT
18013 Com board Er OUT
18014 Extend board Er OUT
18015 Error +/- 12V OUT
18016 Para. Changed OUT
18017 CPU board Err OUT
18019 Eth. B. L. Link OUT
18020 Eth. C. L. Link OUT
18021 Eth. D. L. Link OUT
18022 Lost GPS OUT
18536 BIO1 board Err OUT
2.1.3 Device Communication
The device supports Ethernet or serial port communication. However, it supports only one communication
mode at the same time.
When the Ethernet communication is selected, ports B, C, and D are system communication ports. In this case,
the communication protocols IEC 103, Modbus, and IEC 61850 are supported. The communication protocols
for ports B, C, and D can be combined in any way. A maximum of 3 communication protocols are supported
simultaneously. Meanwhile, the system communication ports support DIGSI connectivity. When the same
communication protocol (IEC 61850, IEC 103, or Modbus) is selected for port B and port C, the device can
support the RSTP/PRP protocol, while another communication protocol can be selected for port D to operate
along with the protocols selected for ports B and C at the same time.
When the serial communication is selected, ports B and C are system communication ports with RS485 inter-
face, supporting communication protocols IEC 103 and Modbus. The communication protocols for ports B and
C can be combined in any way. A maximum of 2 communication protocols is supported simultaneously. Mean-
whiled DIGSI can be selected for port C.
RSTP supports the Ethernet ring topology. In actual applications, the device can be grouped into an Ethernet
ring, as shown in the following figure:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
[dw_RSTP, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-1 RSTP Network Topology Structure
PRP supports the Ethernet star topology. In actual applications, an independent double network structure can
be formed using the two communication network ports of the device, as shown in the following figure:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
[dw_PRP_Internet, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-2 PRP Network Topology Structure
2.1.3.1 RSTP/PRP Used in the Device

RSTP is the abbreviation of Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. RSTP is defined by IEEE802.1W. 802.1W is evolved
from 802.1D. The protocol allows for fast convergence of the network when the network structure changes.
This protocol can be used in ring networks. It provides path redundancy through a certain algorithm, and
prunes the ring network into a loop-free tree network, thereby preventing messages from proliferation and
infinite looping in the ring network.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
The network communication module in the device has integrated an internal switch in ports B and C, with the
structure as follows:
[dw_Internal switch fabric, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-3 Internal Switch Structure
In DIGSI, open the Interface Settings, switch to the Redundancy, select Switch for Operating Method,
then you can enable the RSTP function. When the device works under the switch mode, ports B and C can be
used to establish an Ethernet ring network.
The following parameters are associated with the RSTP function. Generally, using the default parameters
would be fine.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
[RSTP_Parameter, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-4 RSTP Default Parameters
PRP is the abbreviation of Parallel Redundancy Protocol. Network nodes are usually connected to network
devices via dual Ethernet ports, that is, Doubly Attached Node using PRP (DANP). It establishes physical
connections to both LANs. In addition, single Ethernet port devices may also exist in a LAN, that is, Singly
Attached Node (SAN). It can establish connection with any of these LANs. When a DANP source node sends
messages to network A and network B at the same time, the DANP destination node receives and processes
these two messages from network A and network B, and discards the duplicate message, while the SAN desti-
nation node receives only one message. When network failure occurs in one of these LANs (network A), the
DANP destination node processes the message from the other LAN (network B).
When the Operation mode is set to Switch, if you set Hello time [s] to 1 and the to -1 , the device
communication uses PRP mode.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
Settings of the PRP redundancy mode for versions lower than DIGSI V4.93 are shown in the following figure:
[PRP_Display, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-5 PRP Redundancy Mode Settings Page Display - Used for Versions Lower than DIGSI V4.93

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
Settings of the PRP redundancy mode for DIGSIV4.93 and higher versions are shown in the following figure:
[PRP_DIGSI V4.93_1, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-6 PRP Redundancy Mode Settings Page Display - Used for DIGSI V4.93 and Higher Versions
2.1.3.2 Display of Port Information on the Device

You can check port status and port roles of RSTP/PRP on the LCD display of the device.
In Main menu > Property > Port > Port B Info/Port C Info, press the down button, and the content displayed
is the information related to RSTP/PRP of this device.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
[dw_RSTP_RPR info on display, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-7 Device Related Information
The block at the bottom right corner shows related information of RSTP/PRP:
Up: Indicates that the physical connection of this link exists. If the physical connection of the link does not
exist, "Down" is displayed here.
R: Indicates the port role of RSTP/PRP. R is the abbreviation of Root Port, that is, this port is the root port. There
can be A (Alternate port) or D (Designated port) accordingly.
F: Indicates the status of this port. F is the abbreviation of Forwarding, that is, this port is performing full data
forwarding. There can be relevant status such as L (Listening), L (Learning) or D (Discarding) accordingly.
2.1.3.3 Notes
If you upgrade the device firmware when the device is working in a ring network topology, you must break
the Ethernet ring (disconnect the network communication cables at ports B and C of the upgraded device).
Otherwise, a network storm may occur for a short time, thus affecting normal operation of other devices.
Limited by the RSTP algorithm, there are the following requirements for the number of devices on the ring
network:
The number of SIPROTEC4 + 3 ⋅ the number of external switches < 34

For example, if you use 1 external switch, the number of devices on the ring network must not exceed 30.
When the fault lamp of the device illuminates, all communication functions of the device are not affected.
2.1.3.4 Communication Port Configuration

Normal devices (Ethernet port, select W, X, Y for the 22nd digit of MLFB)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
DIGSI Configuration Interface Optional Protocol Physical Interface

Port B No Port B
IEC 60870-5-103
MODBUS
IEC 61850
Port C No Port C
IEC 60870-5-103
MODBUS
IEC 61850
Port D No Port D
IEC 60870-5-103
MODBUS
IEC 61850
MINI device (Ethernet Port, select X for the 22nd digit of MLFB)
Port B No Port D
IEC 60870-5-103
MODBUS
IEC 61850
Normal devices (RS485 serial port, select V for the 22nd digit of MLFB)
Port B No Port B
IEC 60870-5-103
MODBUS
Port C No Port C
IEC 60870-5-103
MODBUS
DIGSI
MINI device (RS485 serial port, select V for the 22nd digit of MLFB)
Port C No Port C
IEC 60870-5-103
MODBUS
DIGSI
2.1.4 Power System Data
2.1.4.1 Functional Description

The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment so that the device can adapt to its
desired application. These may be, for instance, nominal power system and transformer data, measured quan-
tity polarities and their physical connections, breaker properties (where applicable) etc. There are also certain
parameters that are common to all functions, i.e. not associated with a specific protection, control or moni-
toring function. The following section discusses these parameters.

On the device panel directly enter the address of a parameter or press the menu button to enter setting menu
selection so as to modify the corresponding settings in Power System Data.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
In DIGSI, double click a parameter to configure relevant settings. After opening a dialogue box under Power
System Data, you can set the parameters for SW Link Pieces, Power System Parameters, CT Parameters, PT
Parameters, Circuit Breaker Properties, and Protection Parameters.
SW Link Pieces
It includes all available SW link piece functions in the device. These functions are enabled or disabled
according to the settings of SW link pieces in the individual protection functions set under Settings.
Reverse Phase Sequence (Power System)

When the phase sequence of the customer's system is L1L3L2, opposite to the default setting L1L2L3 in the
device system, you can change the phase sequence of the device system via setting the parameter PHASE
SEQ. to L1 L3 L2 or via the binary input.
Polarity of Current Transformer (Power System)

You can identify the polarity of the current transformer of star connection via the parameter 201 CT Star-
point (the following figure corresponds to the situation of 2 current transformers). This set value is used to
set the current measurement direction of the device. (Forward: Towards the line). By modifying this value, you
also change the polarity of the zero-sequence current IE or IES.
[dw_CT polarity, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-8 Polarity of the Current Transformer
Voltage Wiring (Power System)

The parameter 213 determines the connection method of the voltage transformer. VT Connection =
UL1E,UL2E,UL3E indicates star connection of 3 phases. VT Connection = U12, U23 indicates connecting
2 phase-to-phase voltages and 1 zero-sequence voltage. The latter case is also applicable to connecting 2 line
PTs separately or connecting displacement voltage (zero-sequence voltage) alone. When there is the 4th
voltage-transformer input, the parameter 216 U4 transformer determines the connection method.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
NOTE
i The upper limit for each PT input voltage of the device is AC 300 V. For 220-V systems, only the Y connec-
tion of 3 phases is supported, and the voltage circuit jumpers of the PT/CT board are all connected to H. It is
not allowed to connect 380-V phase-to-phase voltage to the PT circuit of the device directly.
Grounding Method (Power System)

The parameter 245 SystemStarpoint indicates the wiring method of the neutral point of the system:
Solid Earthed, Coil Earthed, and Isolated.
Measuring CT (Power System)

The parameter 241 With meas. CT indicates if measurement CT is installed on the device itself. When the
16th digit of MLFB is selected as With Measuring CT, this parameter is optional and the default setting is YES.
Rated Value of Current Transformer (CT)

With the parameters 204 CT PRIMARY and 205 CT SECONDARY, you can enter information based on the
transformer ratio of the current transformer. You must ensure that the rated secondary current of the current
transformer matches the set rated current. Otherwise, the primary current value calculated by the device has
deviations. With the parameters 217 IE-CT PRIM and 218 IE-CT SEC, the information entered must corre-
spond to the primary/secondary current ratio of the current transformer. Under normal wiring circumstances
(the polar end is connected with IE of the transformer, like Figure 5-16), the parameters 217 IE-CT PRIM
and 204 CT PRIMARY must be set to an equal value.
If the device is equipped with sensitive zero-sequence current input, the parameter 218 IE-CT SEC is set to
1A. In this case, the settings are unchangeable.
To correctly calculate the phase current IL2, the primary rated value of the zero-sequence current transformer
used to calculate IL2 (address 217) must be less than the primary rated value of the phase current transformer
(address 204).
When the parameter 241 With meas. CT is set to YES, the parameters 242 Meas. CT Prim and 243
Meas. CT Sec are visible and settable.
Rating of Voltage Transformer (PT)

With the parameters 202 Unom PRIMARY and 203 Unom SECONDARY, you can enter information based on
the rated primary voltage and rated secondary voltage (phase-to-phase voltage) of the connected voltage
transformer. The settings of 3-phase PT primary and secondary voltage ratings are still adopted for the PT
transformer ratio of U4.
NOTE
i If the phase-to-ground voltage is 220 V, the parameter 202 Unom PRIMARY must be set to 0.38 kV and
the parameter 203 Unom SECONDARY must be set to 380 V.
Trip and Close Command Duration (Circuit Breaker)

The parameter 210 TMin TRIP CMD is used to set the minimum time that the trip contact keeps closed
continuously. This set value is applicable to all protection functions of trip.
The parameter 211 TMax CLOSE CMD is used to set the maximum time that the close contact keeps closed
continuously. This set value is applicable to the automatic reclosing function. This set value must be long
enough to ensure reliable closure of the close contact of the circuit breaker. If any other protection function
trips during the close command, it is interrupted to ensure that the fault is cut off, regardless of the duration
of the close command.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
Current Supervision (Circuit Breaker)

The parameter212 BkrClosed I MIN is the setting of the current monitoring system. This parameter is
used for various protection functions (for example: voltage protection with current supervision, circuit breaker
failure protection, and cold load pickup). If the current value of any phase is greater than the set value, the
circuit breaker is deemed as closed.
Earth Fault Protection (Protection Parameter Option)

According to MLFB, the direct measurement value IE of the 4th current or the sum 3I0 of 3-phase current
values can be used as the earth fault protection current criteria. If the device is equipped with sensitive zero-
sequence current input (with measurement range starting from 1 mA), the calculation result of 3I0 is used for
earth fault protection.
Voltage Protection (Protection Parameter Option)

In a 3-phase connection system, the 3 phase-to-phase voltage (Uphph) or phase-to-ground voltages (Uph-n),
or the positive sequence voltage (U1) or negative sequence voltage (U2) can all be connected into elements of
overvoltage protection. In a 3-phase connection system, the voltage measurement value for low voltage is
taken from the positive sequence voltage (U1), phase-to-phase voltage (Uphph) or phase-to-ground voltage
(UPH-N). These values can be configured via the parameters 614 OP.QUANT. U>(>) and 615 OP.QUANT.
U<(<).
2.1.4.3 Setting
This table shows predefined settings for specific regions. In the configuration bar, secondary rated current
corresponding to the current transformer is marked.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
201 CT Starpoint towards Line towards Line Not applicable to 7SJ686-
towards OBJ L/N
towards Busbar
202 Unom PRIMARY 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 10.00 kV
203 Unom SECONDARY 100 .. 381 V 100 V
204 CT PRIMARY 1 .. 50000 A 600 A
205 CT SECONDARY 1A 1A
5A
209 PHASE SEQ. L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Not applicable to 7SJ686-N
L1 L3 L2
210 TMin TRIP CMD 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 0.15 sec
211 TMax CLOSE CMD 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 1.00 sec
212 BkrClosed I MIN 1A 0.03 .. 1.00 A 0.03 A
5A 0.15 .. 5.00 A 0.15 A

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

213 VT Connection UL1E,UL2E,UL3E UL1E,UL2E,UL3E Not applicable to 7SJ686-L
U12, U23
U12, U23, Ux
U12, U23, USYN
216 U4 transformer Not connected Udelta transf.
Udelta transf.
Ux transformer
Usy2 transf.
217 IE-CT PRIM 1 .. 50000 A 60 A
218 IE-CT SEC 1A 1A
5A
241 With meas. CT YES YES
NO
242 Meas. CT Prim 10 .. 50000 A 600 A
243 Meas. CT Sec 1A 1A
5A
245 SystemStarpoint Solid Earthed Isolated
Coil Earthed
Isolated
246 W.Operation Box YES YES
NO
247 Ix Prim 1 .. 50000 A 600 A Only applicable to 7SJ686-
248 Ix Sec 1A 1A C/D/G/H/J/K
5A
260 Trans.RatedVolt 0.4 .. 800.0 kV 11.0 kV Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
270 U_diff/unb.Prim 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 10.00 kV Only applicable to 7SJ686-
271 U_diff/unb.Sec 100 .. 381 V 100 V E/F
277 UN GEN/MOTOR 0.4 .. 800.0 kV 10.0 kV Only applicable to 7SJ686-
278 SN GEN/MOTOR 0.20 .. 5000.00 MVA 70.00 MVA C/H
4016 Displ. U Meas. UE UE Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
3U0
4017 UN-PRI VT U4 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 10.00 kV Not applicable to 7SJ686-
4018 UN-SEC VT U4 100 .. 381 V 100 V L/N
4020 OL Meas.Value Prot. CT Prot. CT Not applicable to 7SJ686-
Meas. CT D/E/F/G/H/L/N
613 (I)DMT E with IE (measured) IE (measured) Not applicable to 7SJ686-L
3I0 (calcul.)
614 OP.QUANT. U>(>) ULL ULL Not applicable to 7SJ686-
Uph-e D/E/F/G/H/L
U1
U2
615 OP.QUANT. U<(<) U1 ULL Operating Quantity for
ULL Undervolt. Prot.
Uph-e
620 Diff.Type VLD.Prot CCP. Prot Only applicable to 7SJ686-
CCP. Prot M

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

Informa-
tion
5145 >Reverse Rot. SP >Reverse Phase Rotation
5147 Rotation L1L2L3 OUT Phase Rotation L1L2L3
5148 Rotation L1L3L2 OUT Phase Rotation L1L3L2
2.1.5 Power System Data (DIFF)
In actual applications, it is required to enter some power plant and power system related data into the protec-
tion device to automatically adjust the internal functions in the device. The data needed include rated data of
the substation, polarity and wiring methods for transformers of individual measurement quantities, if neces-
sary, circuit breaker data, and other data. Some of these data are applicable to all functions, that is, unrelated
to the specific protection, control, or monitoring function. These parameters, which can only be modified
through the DIGSI software installed on your PC, are discussed in this section.
2.1.5.1 Primary Data of Power System (Power System Data)
Terminology
The topological structure of the protected object includes all information: How to configure one or more
protected objects, what current transformers are configured for the protected object, and at which measure-
ment position on the protected object the voltage (if any) is measured. Therefore, the topological structure
provides a complete modelling simulation of the protected object and all measurement points, based on
which you can determine which protection functions use which measurement values.
The protected main object has 2 or more sides. Power transformers define sides with windings, while a gener-
ator or motor has machine-end side and neutral-point side. For combined protected objects such as generator-
transformer sets, side is defined with peripheral equipment. The term side is used exclusively for the
protected main object.
The current flowing into the protected object is taken from the measurement point. Measurement point is
indicated by a current transformer, the position of which determines the effective range of the protection
function for the protected object. Measurement point may or may not be the same as side. If the winding of
1 side of the transformer (= side 1) has 2 branches and a current transformer (measurement point) is installed
at each side respectively, the definitions of measurement point and side are different at this point.
The measurement point connected to 1 side of the protected main object is called the configured measure-
ment point. If the 3-phase current connected to the device is greater than the configured current of the
protected main object, the rest measurement points are called unconfigured measurement points. For the
device, these unconfigured measurement points do not participate in the logical calculation and the measured
value display of differential protection.
Figure 2-9 shows a topology diagram of the protected object.
Note: This diagram may not appear in the actual circuit, and is used only to explain topological terms.
The protected main object is an Ynyd 3-winding transformer, where the neutral point of the star winding side
is grounded directly. Winding side S1 is the high voltage side (Y winding), winding side S2 is the medium
voltage side (Y winding), and winding side S3 is the low voltage side (delta winding). Such winding-side defi-
nition of the protected main object (only applicable to the protected main object) is the foundation for differ-
ential protection to calculate differential current and restraint current.
There is 1 measurement point at S1 side: Measurement point M1.
There is 1 measurement point at S2 side: measurement point M2.
There are 2 measurement points at S3 side: Measurement point M3 and measurement point M4. Both
currents measured at these two measurement points belong to the S3 side. The currents flow through the S3
side of the protection range of the protected main object.
The totally 4 measurement points from M1 to M4 are configured to 3 sides of the protected main object, and
thus they are configured measurement points. All these currents participate in the differential protection
calculation.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
[dw_polarity of current transformer, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-9 Polarity of Current Transformer
Winding side:
S1 The high voltage winding side of the protected main object (power transformer)
S2 The medium voltage winding side of the protected main object (power trans-
former)
S3 The low voltage winding side of the protected main object (power transformer)
3-phase measurement point configuration:

M1 S1 side measurement point, configured to the protected main object
Topological Structure Determination

You must determine the topological structure of the protected main object and other protected objects (if
any). The following discussion is based on the preceding illustrations and terminology definitions. Additional
examples are provided as needed.
NOTE
i When configuring the topological structure, you must follow the following sequence strictly. Some of the
following parameters and their settings depend on the previous relevant settings. In DIGSI, it is recom-
mended to configure the parameters (setting table) under Power System Data 1 from left to right.
First, define numbers for the individual sides of the protected main object one by one. Then, define numbers
for the measurement points. The numbering begins from the protected main object, and then covers other

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
objects. In the topology diagram Figure 2-9, S1, S2, and S3 are defined as the 3 sides of the transformer
respectively, while M1 to M4 are the 4 measurement points.
Determination of each side is very important for all of the following settings.
When defining numbers for the measurement points, start from individual measurement points configured to
the protected main object, and follow the sequence of numbering of individual sides mentioned before. See
Figure 2-9.
NOTE
i Determining individual sides and individual measurement points is a necessary step to execute subsequent
settings. It is also important that the measurement point current (current transformer) must be connected
to the relevant analog input terminal of the device. For example, the current at measurement point M1
must be connected to device terminals IL1-1, IL2-1 and IL3-1.
Topology data can only be modified via your PC using DIGSI.
General Parameters of 3-Phase Measurement Points

Define the total number of 3-phase current measurement points (that is, current transformers connected)
connected to the device, and enter this value in the parameter 252No Conn.MeasLoc. The maximum
number of measurement points allowed by the device is 4. When restricted earth fault protection is enabled,
the maximum number is 3.
Definitions of individual sides related to the protected main object are set in the parameter 254NUMBER OF
SIDES.
The number of sides defined can be equal to (but must not be greater than) the number of measurement
points. Figure 2-10 shows an example of a 3-winding power transformer, with a current transformer at each
side. In this example, the number of measurement points connected is 3, and the number of sides is 3.
[dw_3-winding transformer, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-10 3-Winding Transformer Topology Example
Winding side:
S1 The high voltage winding side of the protected main object (power transformer)
S2 The low voltage winding side of the protected main object (power transformer)
S3 The third winding side of the protected main object (power transformer)
3-phase measurement point configuration:


C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
Configuration of 3-Phase Measurement Points

After the general parameters are defined, configure 3-phase measurement points to individual sides of the
protected main object. Since the number of sides is ≤ the number of measurement points connected and the
protected object contains at least two sides, the configuration of 3-phase measurement points only has a few
possible combinations. To exclude all impossible combinations, the setting list only includes the parameters
related to the general parameters such as addresses 252 and 254. In addition, setting options only show the
corresponding option list.
Only one of the configurations can be available, that is, he parameter corresponding to the defined number of
sides and theconfigured number of measurement points. Measurement point and winding sides are separated
by commas. For example, 3M,2S indicates 2 winding sides and 3 configured measurement points.
Only those possible combinations in which the number of measurement points and the number of winding
sides match each other appear in setting options. Measurement points at the same side are connected with a
+ sign. Winding side serial numbers are separated by commas. All possible combinations are described ad
below:
When 2 measurement points (address 252) are connected and 2 winding sides (address 254) are defined, the
parameter 255 ASSIGNM. 2M,2S is available and there is only one setting option as below because there is
no other possibilities:
• M1,M2, that is, 2 measurement points are configured: M1 is configured to S1 side, and measurement
point M2 is configured to S2 side.
parameter 256 ASSIGNM. 3M,2S is available. The setting options are as below:
• M1+M2,M3, that is, 3 measurement points are configured: M1 and M2 are configured to S1 side, and M3
is configured to S2 side.
• M1,M2+M3, that is, 3 measurement points are configured: M1 is configured to S1 side; M2 and M3 are
configured to S2 side.
parameter 257 ASSIGNM. 3M,3S is available and there is only one setting option as below:
• M1,M2,M3, that is, 3 measurement points are configured: M1 is configured to S1 side, M2 is configured
to S2 side, and M3 is configured to S3 side. This corresponds to the example in Figure 2-10.
• M1+M2,M3+M4, that is, 4 measurement points are configured: M1 and M2 are configured to S1 side; M3
and M4 are configured to S2 side.
• M1+M2+M3,M4, that is, 4 measurement points are configured: M1, M2 and M3 are configured to S1 side,
and M4 is configured to S2 side.
• M1,M2+M3+M4, that is, 4 measurement points are configured: M1 is configured to S1 side; M2, M3 and
M4 are configured to S2 side.
• M1+M2,M3,M4, that is, 4 measurement points are configured: M1 and M2 are configured to S1 side, M3
is configured to S2 side, and M4 is configured to S3 side.
• M1,M2+M3,M4, that is, 4 measurement points are configured: M1 is configured to S1 side, M2 and M3
are configured to S2 side, and M4 is configured to S3 side.
• M1,M2,M3+M4, that is, 4 measurement points are configured: M1 is configured to S1 side, M2 is config-
ured to S2 side, M3 and M4 are configured to S3 side.
parameter 269 ASSIGNM. 4M,4S is available and there is only one setting option as below:
• M1,M2,M3,M4, that is, 4 measurement points are configured: M1 is configured to S1 side, M2 is config-
ured to S2 side, M3 is configured to S3 side, and M4 is configured to S4 side.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
Phase Sequence
The default setting of parameter 209 PHASE SEQ. is clockwise phase sequence L1 L2 L3. You can change
it to L1 L3 L2 based on the actual counter-clockwise phase sequence of the power plant. As long as the
phase sequence of each side of the protected object is the same, such phase sequence setting has nothing to
do with the change of the vector group of differential protection. For the 1-phase protected object, this
parameter is not visible.
[dw_phase sequence, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-11 Phase Sequence
Rated Values of the Transformer

If the device is used for transformer differential protection, it is necessary to set transformer data.
When defining the topology of the protected main object, follow the winding side definition (see Topological
Structure Determination, Page 51). Generally, the S1 side is defined as the reference side. The current phase
angle at this side is 0° and there is no phase angle. It is typically selected as the high voltage winding of the
transformer.
All data of each side of the protected object defined in the topology structure must be entered into the protec-
tion device. Unconfigured data of each side does not have to be entered. These data are entered later.
At the S1 side, enter the following information:
• Primary phase-to-phase rated voltage UEN (kV), parameter 315 UN-PRI SIDE 1;
• The primary rated apparent power, parameter 316 SN SIDE 1. For power transformer with more than 2
windings, the rated power of windings at each side may be different. Enter the rated power at the S1 side
here. You must enter the primary value of power. The device calculates the rated current of the protected
winding based on this power.
• The grounding method of neutral point of winding, parameter 313 STARPNT SIDE 1: Solid
Earthed or Isolated. If the neutral point is grounded through a current limiting device (low resis-
tance) or ARC suppression coil (high resistance), set the parameter to Solid Earthed. If there is any
neutral point grounding reactor within the protection range, set the parameter to Solid Earthed.
• The winding connection type of the transformer, parameter 314 CONNECTION S1. If S1 is the high
voltage side of the transformer, it is generally indicated by a capital letter (Y or D) according to IEC rules.
Rated data of S2 side is set the same as that of S1 side: 321 UN-PRI SIDE 2 and 323 STARPNT SIDE 2.
Strictly follow configurations of individual sides defined based on the preceding topology.
Enter primary rated apparent power in parameter 322 SN SIDE 2. For the power transformer with more
than two windings, the rated power of windings at each side may be different. Enter the rated power at the S2
side here. You must enter the primary value of power. The device calculates the rated current of the protected
winding based on this power.
Additionally, the vector group numeral is set under address 324 CONNECTION S2 and 325 VECTOR GRP S2
which states the phase displacement of side 2 against the reference winding, side 1
It is defined as a multiple of 30° according to IEC. If the high voltage side is the reference winding side (S1
side), you may set the numeral directly. e.g. 5 for vector group Yd5 or Dy5. Every vector group from 0 to 11
can be set provided it is possible (for instance, Yy, Dd and Dz allow only even, Yd, Yz and Dy allow only odd
numerals).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
If not the higher voltage side is used as reference winding (side 1) it must be considered that the vector group
changes: e.g. a Yd5 transformer is regarded from the lower voltage side as Dy7.
[dw_change_of_transformer_wring_mode_and_hours, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-12 Change of the Transformer Vector Group if the Lower Voltage Side is the Reference Side
Example
If the transformer has more than 2 windings or winding sides, set the parameters of the other windings
accordingly.
Set the following parameters for the winding side S3:
• 331 UN-PRI SIDE 3
• 332 SN SIDE 3
• 333 STARPNT SIDE 3
• 334 CONNECTION S3
• 335 VECTOR GRP S3

Set the following parameters for the winding side S4:
• 341 UN-PRI SIDE 4
• 342 SN SIDE 4
• 343 STARPNT SIDE 4
• 344 CONNECTION S4
• 345 VECTOR GRP S4

The device automatically computes from the rated data of the protected transformer the current-matching
formulae which are required to match the vector group and the different rated winding currents. The currents
are converted such that the sensitivity of the protection always refers to the power rating of the transformer.
Therefore, no circuity is required for matching of the vector group and no manual calculations for converting
of rated current are normally necessary.
Rated Values of the Current Transformer

The rated primary operational currents for the protected object derive from the object data before-described.
The data of the current transformer sets at the sides of the protected object generally differ slightly from the
object data before-described. They can also be completely different. Currents have to have a clear polarity to
ensure that the differential protection applies the correct function.
Therefore, the current transformer parameters must be set in the device. For a 3-phase protected object, enter
the rated current of the current transformer and the direction of the neutral point of its secondary winding.
The primary rated current and secondary rated current of the current transformer at measurement point M1
are set in parameters 512 IN-PRI CT M1 and 513 IN-SEC CT M1 respectively. You must correctly define
the protected individual sides and ensure the consistency between CT secondary rated current and the rated

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
current of the protection device. Otherwise, the protection device calculates the wrong primary current, which
may lead to misoperation of the differential protection.
Indication of the starpoint position of the current transformers determines the polarity of the current trans-
formers. To inform the device on the location of the starpoint in relation to the protected object use param-
eter 511 STRPNT->OBJ M1。 Figure 2-13 shows an example of the CT polarity definition.
[dw_example of CT polarity definition for three-phase measuring points, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-13 Example of CT Polarity Definition for 3-Phase Measurement Points
Measurement point M2
• 521 STRPNT->OBJ M2
• 522 IN-PRI CT M2
• 523 IN-SEC CT M2

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
2.1.5.2 Protection Function Is Configured to Measurement Point/Winding Side
Main Protection = Differential Protection

The protected main object is generally defined by its winding side. Each winding side may be connected to
one or more measurement points. According to the global data of the power system described previously, by
combining data of the individual sides of the protected object and the current transformer, you can defined
individual connected currents of the differential protection.
3-phase measurement points M1 and M2 have been configured to the S1 side (high voltage side of the trans-
former). Therefore, the sum of currents flowing through the measurement points M1 and M2 is the connected
current at the S1 side of differential protection of the protected object. The sum of currents flowing through
the measurement points M3 and M4 is the connected current at the S2 side of differential protection of the
protected object. If the external current flows in through M4 and flows out through M3, IM3 + IM4 = 0, that is,
there is no current flowing into the protected object. However, these two currents provide the restraint
current of the differential protection. For more information, refer to the differential protection instructions.
The topological structure defines the complete information about individual winding sides and individual
measurement points of the protected object involved in differential protection. Therefore, no other informa-
tion is required for differential protection.
2.1.5.3 Settings

252 No Conn.MeasLoc 2 4 Number of the 3-phase measuring
3 points connected to the device
4
254 NUMBER OF SIDES 2 4 Winding-side number of the
3 protected object
4
255 ASSIGNM. 2M,2S M1,M2 M1,M2 Defining the DIFF protection of
the protected object: 2 measuring
points/2 sides
256 ASSIGNM. 3M,2S M1+M2,M3 M1+M2,M3 Defining the DIFF protection of
M1,M2+M3 the protected object: 3 measuring
points/2 sides
257 ASSIGNM. 3M,3S M1,M2,M3 M1,M2,M3 Defining the DIFF protection of
points/3 sides
258 ASSIGNM. 4M,2S M1+M2,M3+M4 M1+M2,M3+M4 Defining the DIFF protection of
M1+M2+M3,M4 the protected object: 4 measuring
M1,M2+M3+M4 points/2 sides
259 ASSIGNM. 4M,3S M1+M2,M3,M4 M1+M2,M3,M4 Defining the DIFF protection of
M1,M2+M3,M4 the protected object: 4 measuring
M1,M2,M3+M4 points/3 sides
269 ASSIGNM. 4M,4S M1,M2,M3,M4 M1,M2,M3,M4 Defining the DIFF protection of
the protected object: 4measuring
points/4 sides
315 UN-PRI SIDE 1 0.4 .. 800.0 kV 110.0 kV Rated voltage at Side 1 of the
voltage transformer
316 SN SIDE 1 0.20 .. 5000.00 MVA 38.10 MVA Apparent power at Side 1 of the
voltage transformer
313 STARPNT SIDE 1 Solid Earthed Solid Earthed Nuetral point at Side 1 of the
Isolated voltage transformer
314 CONNECTION S1 Y Y Connection type at Side 1 of the
D voltage transformer

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

voltage transformer
voltage transformer
325 VECTOR GRP S2 0 0 Vector Number of the connection
1 type at Side 2 of the voltage trans-
2 former
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
voltage transformer
voltage transformer
2 former
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
voltage transformer
voltage transformer

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

2 former
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
511 STRPNT->OBJ M1 YES YES Neural point direction of CT at
NO current measuring point M1 of the
protected object
512 IN-PRI CT M1 1 .. 100000 A 200 A Rated current of CT at current
measuring point M1 of the
protected object
513 IN-SEC CT M1 1A 1A Rated secondary current of CT at
5A current measuring point M1 of the
protected object
protected object
protected object
protected object
protected object
protected object
protected object
protected object
protected object
protected object
Power System Data-> SW Link Pieces
5701 DIFF. PROT. OFF ON
ON

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

5800 REF PROT. OFF OFF
ON
5900 REF PROT.#2 OFF OFF
ON
298 Chg. Setting. R OFF ON
ON
Power System Data （ENABLE restricted earth fault prot.）
252 No Conn.MeasLoc 2 4 Number of the 3-phase measuring
3 points connected to the device
4
254 NUMBER OF SIDES 2 4 Winding-side number of the
3 protected object
4
255 ASSIGNM. 2M,2S M1,M2 M1,M2 Defining the DIFF protection of
points/2 sides
256 ASSIGNM. 3M,2S M1+M2,M3 M1+M2,M3 Defining the DIFF protection of
M1,M2+M3 the protected object: 3 measuring
points/2 sides
257 ASSIGNM. 3M,3S M1,M2,M3 M1,M2,M3 Defining the DIFF protection of
points/3 sides
351 AUX. CT IX1 Not connected Not connected
Side 1 earth
Side 2 earth
Side 3 earth
Power System Data （ENABLE restricted earth fault prot.）
356 EARTH IX1 AT Terminal Q19 Terminal Q19
Terminal Q20
357 IN-PRI CT IX1 1 .. 100000 A 200 A
358 IN-SEC CT IX1 1A 1A
5A
Terminal Q22
360 IN-PRI CT IX2 1 .. 100000 A 200 A
5A
Terminal Q24
363 IN-PRI CT IX3 1 .. 100000 A 200 A
5A
Power System Data (Restricted Earth Fault Protection Enabled)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

354 REF PROT. AT Side 1 Side 1
Side 2
Side 3
355 REF PROT. #2 AT Side 1 Side 2
Side 2
Side 3
2.1.6 Power System Data (ATS)
2.1.6.1 Settings

Power System Parameters > SW Link Pieces
1590 DMT/IDMT Ph OFF ON
ON
1690 DMT/IDMT E OFF ON
ON
222 ATS ON ON
OFF
298 Chg. Setting. R OFF ON
ON
Power System Parameters > Power System Parameters
274 Connection Single Busbar Segmented Bus
Segmented Bus
267 Bus PT Connect YES YES
NO
Power System Parameters > Protection Parameter Options
613 (I)DMT E with IE (measured) IE (measured)
3I0 (calcul.)
Power System Parameters > PT/CT Parameters
268 PT Connect Bus UL1E,UL2E,UL3E UL1E,UL2E,UL3E
U12, U23
235 UN-PRI PT Bus 0.10 .. 1200.00 kV 110.00 kV
236 UN-SEC PT Bus 80 .. 381 V 100 V
387 IN-PRI CT Bus 1 .. 100000 A 3000 A
388 IN-SEC CT Bus 1A 5A
5A
389 IN-PRI Ear. Bus 1 .. 100000 A 3000 A
390 IN-SEC Ear. Bus 1A 5A
5A
265 PT Conn. Line1 UL1E transform. UL12 transform. Set 267 Bus PT Connect
UL2E transform. to YES
UL3E transform.
UL12 transform.
UL23 transform.
UL31 transform.
Not connected

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

265 PT Conn. Line1 UL1E,UL2E,UL3E UL1E,UL2E,UL3E Set 267 Bus PT Connect
U12, U23 to NO
266 PT Conn. Line2 UL1E transform. UL12 transform. Set 267 Bus PT Connect
UL2E transform. to YES
UL3E transform.
UL12 transform.
UL23 transform.
UL31 transform.
Not connected
266 PT Conn. Line2 UL1E,UL2E,UL3E UL1E,UL2E,UL3E Set 267 Bus PT Connect
U12, U23 to NO
231 UN-PRI PT Line1 0.10 .. 1200.00 kV 110.00 kV
232 UN-SEC PT Line1 80 .. 381 V 100 V
233 UN-PRI PT Line2 0.10 .. 1200.00 kV 110.00 kV
234 UN-SEC PT Line2 80 .. 381 V 100 V
383 IN-PRI CT Line1 1 .. 100000 A 3000 A
384 IN-SEC CT Line1 1A 5A
5A
385 IN-PRI CT Line2 1 .. 100000 A 3000 A
386 IN-SEC CT Line2 1A 5A
5A
Power System Parameters > Operation Parameters
394 BusbarLiveVolt 0.10 .. 1.50 Un 0.70 Un
395 Bus Dead Volt. 0.10 .. 1.20 Un 0.30 Un
396 LineLiveVolt 0.10 .. 1.50 Un 0.70 Un
397 Line Dead Volt. 0.10 .. 1.20 Un 0.30 Un
398 Line Dead Cur. 0.02 .. 2.00 I/In 0.10 I/In
399 Live Vol. 3 ULL 3 ULL
1 ULL
Power System Parameters > Circuit Breaker
261 Tmin TRIP 0.01 .. 10.00 sec 0.20 sec
262 Tmin CLOSE 0.01 .. 10.00 sec 0.20 sec
212 BkrClosed I MIN 1A 0.03 .. 1.00 A 0.03 A
5A 0.15 .. 5.00 A 0.15 A
Note: When the automatic transfer system is used for a system with phase-to-ground voltage of 220 V, you
cannot select AB phase-to-phase voltage, BC phase-to-phase voltage and CA phase-to-phase voltage wiring
methods for settings 0213 and 0214. You can only select other wiring methods or Not Connected.

Informa-
tion
17621 >CB1 AUX NO SP
17622 >CB1 AUX NC SP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

Informa-
tion
17723 B1 DeadVoltage OUT
17724 Line1DeadVotl. OUT
17725 Line1DeadCurr. OUT
17726 B2 DeadVoltage OUT
17727 Line2DeadVotl. OUT
17728 Line2DeadCurr. OUT
17736 BusbarDeadVolt. OUT
17760 CommandOpenCB1 OUT
17767 CommandCloseCB1 OUT
17774 Fail: Open CB1 OUT
17781 Fail: Close CB1 OUT
17817 BusbarLiveVolt. OUT
17818 B1 Live Volt. OUT
17819 B2 Live Volt. OUT
17820 Line1LiveVolt. OUT
17821 Line2LiveVolt. OUT
17864 >CB1 HHJ SP
17865 >CB2 HHJ SP
17866 >L1 MCB Closed SP
17867 >L2 MCB Closed SP
17868 >B1 MCB Closed SP
17869 >B2 MCB Closed SP
17877 >BusbarMCBClose SP
17982 RT.Par.SW.On IntSP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

Informa-
tion
18719 Warn:CB1Unavai. OUT
2.1.7 Power System Data 2
2.1.7.1 Overview
The general protection data (P.System Data 2) include settings associated with all functions rather than a
specific protection or monitoring function. In contrast to the P. System Data as discussed before, they can be
changed with the setting group.
General
When it is necessary to reverse the sign of the measured power, you can set parameter 1108 P,Q opera-
tional measured values sign to Reversed. Note that by changing the setting of 1108, you can only
reverse the sign of the measured power, but cannot change the sign of protection power.
2.1.7.3 Setting
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Explanation

1108 P,Q sign not reversed not reversed
reversed

Informa-
tion
126 ProtON/OFF IntSP Protection ON/OFF (via system port)
311 FaultConfig/Set OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-C/H/L
312 GenErrGroupConn OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-L
314 GenErrSidesMeas OUT
356 >Manual Close SP Not applicable to 7SJ686-L
501 Relay PICKUP OUT
511 Relay TRIP OUT
533 IL1: VI Primary fault current IL1
Not applicable to 7SJ686-L
2720 >Enable ANSI#-2 SP
4601 >Brk Aux NO SP
4602 >Brk Aux NC SP
16019 >CB Wear start SP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General

Informa-
tion
16020 CBW T sett.fail OUT
16027 CBW blk I PaErr OUT CB wear logic blocked Ir-CB >= Isc-CB
16028 CBW blk n PaErr OUT CB wear logic blocked Nsc>=Nr
18300 >TWJ SP
18301 >HWJ SP
18302 >HHJ SP
18306 General Fault OUT
18788 IN: VI Primary fault current IN
20109 UL1: VI Primary voltage UL1
20112 UE/Ux: VI Primary voltage Ue/Ux
20123 3U0: VI Primary voltage 3U0
20539 >BLK CB Wear SP
30060 Gen CT-M1: VI Only applicable to 7SJ686-C/H/L
30061 Gen CT-M2: VI
30062 Gen CT-M3: VI Only applicable to 7SJ686-L
30063 Gen CT-M4: VI
30067 par too low: VI
30068 par too high: VI
30069 settingFault: VI Only applicable to 7SJ686-C/H/L
30251 IL1M1: VI Primary fault current IL1 meas. loc. 1
Only applicable to 7SJ686-L/H
Only applicable to 7SJ686-C/H/L
Only applicable to 7SJ686-L

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
2.1.8 Oscillographic Fault Records
The multi-functional protection device is equipped with a fault record memory. The instantaneous values of
the measured quantities.
The total duration of the fault recording amounts to up to 20 sec. A maximum of 20 fault records can be
stored in the buffer. Fault recording can be enabled via protection trip or binary input.
2.1.8.1 Overview
If the device is connected to PC via USB, the fault records can be read through the protection data processing
software DIGSI, and analysed using the graphics analysis software SIGRA 4. The latter can graphically plot the
waveform of data recorded at the time of fault, and calculate additional information via measured values.
Current and voltage values can be displayed as primary or secondary values. Signals can be recorded via binary
symbols, such as "pickup" and "trip".
The device with a system interface can transmit recorded fault data to the control centre via this interface.
Applications on the centre equipment can process these data. Binary signal markers for special events such as
Fault Detection and Trip can also be displayed graphically.
NOTE
i The signals used for binary tracks can be configured in DIGSI.
2.1.8.2 Configuration
Normally, the trigger is the pickup of a protection element, and the criterion for saving is set as the device trip.
When any protection element pickup, a fault recording event also starts at the same time. The fault recording
event ends when the last protection element drop out. Generally, this period of time is the range of fault
recording. The device is preset to record faults of the entire power system, that is, if the automatic reclosing
function is available, you can record the entire process all the time, until the faults are removed ultimately. In
this way, the device can record data of all system faults. However, storage space also is consumed during time
slot of reclosing.
An actual storage time includes pre-fault data time (0.25 sec), fault time and post-fault time (0.10 sec). The
record of any one fault may not exceed 5 sec. A maximum of 20 fault waveforms can be recorded. The total
duration of all oscillographic fault records is no greater than 20 sec.
You can trigger oscillographic fault recording by changing the binary input or via the PC interface to record
dynamic waveforms for 0.50 sec, which contain data of 0.25 sec before triggering and data of 0.10 sec after
triggering.

Informa-
tion
– FltRecSta IntSP
4 >Trig.Wave.Cap. SP
203 Wave. deleted OUT_Ev
20435 iMate rec. run. OUT
30053 Fault rec. run. OUT
2.1.9 Setting Groups
Up to four different setting groups can be created for establishing the device's function settings.
Setting groups enable the user to save the corresponding settings for each application so that they can be
quickly called up when required. All setting groups are stored in the device. Only one setting group may be
active at a time.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.1 General
2.1.9.1 Overview
Changing Setting Groups

During operation the user can switch back and forth setting groups locally, via the operator panel, binary
inputs (if so configured), the service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface. For
reasons of safety it is not possible to change between setting groups during a power system fault.
A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as Enabled during
configuration (see Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes). In 7SJ66 relays, four independent setting groups (A to D)
are available. While setting values may vary, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same.

If setting group change option is not required, Group A is the default selection. Then, the rest of this section is
not applicable.
If the changeover option is desired, group changeover must be set to Grp Chge OPTION = Enabled
(address 103) when the function extent is configured. For the setting of the function parameters, each of the
required setting groups A to D (a maximum of 4) must be configured in sequence. The SIPROTEC System
Description gives further information on how to copy setting groups or reset them to their status at delivery
and also how to change from one setting group to another.
Section Installation and Connection of this manual tells you how to change between several setting groups
externally via binary inputs.
2.1.9.3 Settings

302 CHANGE Group A Group A
Group B
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
No. Information Type of Information Comments

– P-GrpA act IntSP
– P-GrpB act IntSP
– P-GrpC act IntSP
– P-GrpD act IntSP
7 >Set Group Bit0 SP
8 >Set Group Bit1 SP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
i This function is not applicable to 7SJ686-L!
2.2.1 Function Overview
• Overcurrent protection provides 3 stages of definite-time overcurrent protection and 1 stage of inverse-
time overcurrent protection. Each stage can be enabled separately for cooperation.
• Overcurrent protection provides the function of determining the directional element. The directional
element can be enabled separately for each stage so that you can easily realize cooperation between
protections by determining the amplitude of the fault current and the direction of the fault.
• Overcurrent protection provides the compound voltage control function. The compound voltage control
element can be enabled separately for each stage so that you can easily realize cooperation between
protections and improve protection sensitivity by determining the fault current amplitude and the fault
voltage.
• Overcurrent protection also varies depending on different specific protection objects. For example, capac-
itor overcurrent protection has no directional element and compound voltage element; overcurrent
protection in 2-winding transformers has the compound voltage element but no directional element;
overcurrent protection #2 has no compound voltage element and directional element; substation trans-
former overcurrent protection has no directional element, and so on.
• Delay of overcurrent protection also varies depending on different specific protection objects. For
example, the transformer backup protection device has no inverse-time overcurrent protection, and each
definite-time stage has 3 delays. The 2-winding transformer backup protection device has no inverse-
time overcurrent protection. See the following table for details.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Table 2-1 Overcurrent Protection
Device Type Protection Element Remarks

Overcurrent Directional Voltage Element
Element Element
7SJ686-A feeder ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse, ✓(Compound 3 definite-time
protection non-directional) voltage element on stages, 1 inverse-
this side) time stage
7SJ686-A-C MINI ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse, ✓(Compound
feeder protection non-directional) voltage element on
this side)
7SJ686-A-D MINI ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse, ✓(Compound
this side)
7SJ686-A-E MINI ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse, ✓(Compound
this side)
7SJ686-B motor ✓
protection (overcur-
rent)
7SJ686-B-C MINI ✓
motor protection
7SJ686-B-D MINI ✓
motor protection
7SJ686-B-E MINI ✓
motor protection
7SJ686-C motor ✓
protection (differen-
tial)
7SJ686-D capacitor ✓
protection (current
unbalance)
7SJ686-E capacitor ✓
protection (voltage
unbalance)
7SJ686-F capacitor ✓
protection (voltage
differential)
7SJ686-G capacitor ✓
protection ( current
differential)
7SJ686-H reactor ✓
differential protec-
tion
7SJ686-H 2-winding ✓ ✓(Overcurrent Overcurrent protec-
transformer differ- protection tion offers 3 defi-
ential protection compound voltage nite-time stages,
element) and overcurrent
protection #2 offers
two definite-time
stages
7SJ686-J trans- ✓ ✓ ✓(Compound 3 definite-time
former backup voltage element on stages, each stage
protection this side or another has 3 delays
side)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Overcurrent Directional Voltage Element
Element Element
7SJ686-K substation ✓ ✓(Compound 3 definite-time
transformer protec- voltage element on stages, 1 inverse-
tion this side) time stage
7SJ686-K-C MINI ✓ ✓(Compound
substation trans- voltage element on
former protection this side)
7SJ686-K-D MINI ✓ ✓(Compound
7SJ686-K-E MINI ✓ ✓(Compound
7SJ686-M line differ- ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse, ✓(Compound
ential protection non-directional) voltage element on
this side)
7SJ686-N automatic ✓ ✓(Compound 3 definite-time
transfer system voltage element on stages
this side)
2.2.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Element
An individual threshold can be set for each stage separately. The fundamental component is used for its
current measurement. The phase current is compared with the pickup value. The pickup indication is issued
when the current of any phase exceeds the setting. If no blocking is detected, a trip signal is issued when the
configured delay time expires. When the current value is > 0.2 In, the dropout value is approximately equal to
95 % of the pickup value.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_OCP_7SJ686, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-14 Logic Diagram of Phase Overcurrent I>>> (7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/M)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_Overcurrent section I of motor / capacitor / reactor protection, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-15 Logic Diagram of Phase Overcurrent I>>> of Motor/Capacitor/Reactor Protection (7SJ686-B/B-
C/B-D/B-E/C/D/E/F/G/H)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_two coil transformer_5, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-16 Logic Diagram of Phase Overcurrent I>>> of 2-Winding Transformer Backup Protection
(7SJ686-H)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_Two coil transformer backup protection overcurrent #2 section I, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-17 Logic Diagram of Phase Overcurrent I>>> #2 of 2-Winding Transformer Backup Protection
(7SJ686-H)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_overcurrent section I, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-18 Logic Diagram of Phase Overcurrent I>>> of Transformer Backup Protection (7SJ686-J)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_Overcurrent section I(7SJ686-K/K-C/K-D/K-E), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-19 Logic Diagram of Phase Overcurrent I>>> (7SJ686-K/K-C/K-D/K-E)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_2 coil transformer backup protection overcurrent section I, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-20 Logic Diagram of Phase Overcurrent I>>> of Automatic Transfer System Device (7SJ686-N)
NOTE
i For overcurrent protection in the automatic transfer system device:
• When 274 Connection in Power System Data is set to Single Busbar, this protection function is
not available.
• Overcurrent protection is not blocked in case of PT wire broken.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.2.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Element
An individual threshold can be set for the inverse-time stage separately to compare the phase current with the
inverse-time overcurrent protection pickup value. If the current of a short-circuit fault exceeds 1.1 times the
set value, the overcurrent inverse-time stage picks up and the trip delay starts. The actual trip time delay
depends on the actual fault current and the selected tripping characteristic curve. Once the delay expires, a
trip signal is issued if no blocking is detected.
The inverse-time characteristic curve as well as the pickup value and time coefficient of the inverse-time char-
acteristic curve are independent of each other, and must be set separately.
The element drops out instantaneously after a threshold has been undershot. Instantaneous indicates
dropout when the current decreases to approximately 95 % of the pickup threshold. Where, the pickup
threshold is 1.1 times the set value.
The logic diagram of inverse-time overcurrent protection is shown in the following figure.
[lo_ transformer backup protection overcurrent section I, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-21 Logic Diagram of Inverse Time Overcurrent of Feeder Protection (7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/M)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_inverse_ocp, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-22 Logic Diagram of Inverse-Time Overcurrent (7SJ686-B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/D/E/F/G/H - Reactor/K/K-

C/K-D/K-E)
2.2.4 Direction Determination
Direction determination is realised based on the phase angle between the fault current and the reference
voltage.
Direction Determination with Directional Element

For the phase directional element, the fault current of the corresponding phase and the healthy phase-to-
phase voltage are used as reference voltage. The healthy voltage also allows for a correct direction determina-
tion even if the fault voltage has collapsed entirely (close-up fault). In phase-to-ground voltage connections,
the phase-to-phase voltages are calculated. In a connection of 2 phase-to-phase voltages and Un, the third
phase-to-phase voltage is also calculated.
With 3-phase close-up faults, memory voltage values are used to clearly determine the direction if the meas-
uring voltages are not sufficient. Upon the expiration of the storage time range (2 s), the detected direction is
saved, as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available. When closing onto a fault, if no memory voltage
values exist in the buffer, the relay element trips. In all other cases, the voltage magnitude is sufficient for
determining the direction.
If there is PT wire broken, you can select to block direction determination or release the direction determina-
tion via parameter settings, that is, the direction determination is disabled if there is PT wire broken. The direc-
tion determination can be disabled/enabled.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
As mentioned previously, determination of direction depends on the phase angle between the fault current
and the reference voltage. The following figure clearly shows the relationship between directional phase
elements based on a 1-phase earth fault at Phase L1.
[dw_direction element_refer to_voltage rotation, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-23 Rotation of the Reference Voltage, Directional Phase Element
As shown in the following figure, the rotating reference voltage defines the forward and reverse areas. The
forward area is the ±86° range around to the rotating voltage Uref,rot. If the vector of the fault current is in
this area, the device detects forward direction. In the mirrored area, the device detects reverse direction. In
the intermediate area, the direction result is undefined.
[dw_directional phase element_posive characteristic, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-24 Directional Phase Element, Forward Characteristics
2.2.5 Compound Voltage Control
Compound voltage control includes low voltage elements and negative-sequence voltage elements. 3-stage
definite-time overcurrent protection and 1-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection use the same set of low
voltage settings and negative-sequence voltage settings. Low voltage criteria: The measured value is less than
the set value of the low voltage element. Negative-sequence voltage criteria: The measured value is greater
than the set value of the negative sequence element.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
If there is PT wire broken, you can select to block compound voltage control or release compound voltage
control via parameter settings, that is, the compound voltage control element is disabled/enabled if there is PT
wire broken.
2.2.6 Settings
In device configuration, overcurrent protection defaults to the Enabled setting. Of course, you can also
disable the entire overcurrent protection by selecting the Disabled setting.
3-stage definite-time and 1-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection each has its own independent enabling/
disabling parameters, direction determination setting parameters, compound voltage control parameters,
pickup values, delay or trip characteristic curves and time constants to facilitate setting and cooperation.
The following parameters are for phase overcurrent protection #1.

115 DMT/IDMT Ph Disabled Enabled
Enabled
1590 DMT/IDMT Ph OFF ON
ON
1519 ROTATION ANGLE -180 .. 180° 45° Only applicable to 7SJ686-
A/A-C/A-D/A-E/J/M
1550 I>>> ON/OFF OFF ON
ON
1551 I>> ON/OFF OFF ON
ON
1552 I> ON/OFF OFF OFF
ON
1553 Ip ON/OFF OFF OFF Not applicable to 7SJ686-
ON J/N/H (2-winding trans-
former)
1554 PT BRK DIR. Release Block Only applicable to 7SJ686-
Block A/J/M
1555 PT BRK VOLT. Release Block Only applicable to 7SJ686-
Block A/A-C/A-D/A-E/J/K/K-C/K-
D/K-E/M/H (2-winding
transformer)
1556 Ph-Ph U< 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 50.0 V Only applicable to 7SJ686-
1557 U2> 1.0 .. 57.0 V; ∞ 8.0 V A/A-C/A-D/ A-E/J/K/K-C/K-
D/K-E/M/N/H (2-winding
1558 I>>> Volt.Ctrl. OFF OFF
transformer)
ON
1559 I>>> Direction Forward Non-Directional Only applicable to 7SJ686-
Non-Directional A/A-C/A-D/ A-E/J/M
Reverse
1560 I>>> PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 4.00 A
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 20.00 A
1561 I>>> DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Not applicable to 7SJ686-J
and 7SJ686-H (2-winding
transformer)
1562 I>>> DELAY T1 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec
1563 I>>> DELAY T2 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
1564 I>>> DELAY T3 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

1565 I>> Volt.Ctrl. OFF OFF Only applicable to 7SJ686-
ON A/A-C/A-D/ A-E/J/K/K-C/K-
transformer)
1566 I>> Direction Forward Non-Directional Only applicable to 7SJ686-
Non-Directional A/J/M
Reverse
1567 I>> PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
1568 I>> DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Not applicable to 7SJ686-J
transformer)
1569 I>> DELAY T1 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Applicable to 7SJ686-J and
7SJ686-H (2-winding trans-
former)
1570 I>> DELAY T2 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
1571 I>> DELAY T3 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec
1572 I> Volt.Ctrl. OFF OFF Only applicable to 7SJ686-
ON A/A-C/A-D/A-E/J/K/K-C/K-
transformer)
1573 I> Direction Forward Non-Directional Only applicable to 7SJ686-
Non-Directional A/A-C/A-D/ A-E/J/M
Reverse
1574 I> PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
1575 I> DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Not applicable to 7SJ686-J
transformer)
1576 I> DELAY T1 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Applicable to 7SJ686-J and
former)
1577 I> DELAY T2 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
1578 I> DELAY T3 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 4.00 sec
1579 Ip Dir. Forward Non-Directional Only applicable to 7SJ686-
Non-Directional A/A-C/A-D/A-E/M
Reverse
1580 Ip IEC Normal Inverse Normal Inverse Not applicable for7SJ686-
Very Inverse J/N/H (2-winding trans-
Extremely Inv. former)
Long Inverse
1581 Ip PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 25.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
5A 0.15 .. 125.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
1582 Ip TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 10.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The following settings are for phase overcurrent protection #2.

118 DMT Ph #2 Disabled Disabled Applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-
Enabled winding transformer)
1591 DMT Ph #2 OFF OFF Applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-
ON winding transformer)
1758 I>>> ON/OFF OFF ON Overcurrent protection
ON #2，applicable to 7SJ686-
H (2-winding transformer)
1761 I>>> PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 4.00 A Overcurrent protection
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 20.00 A #2，applicable to 7SJ686-
1763 I>>> DELAY T1 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Overcurrent protection
#2，applicable to 7SJ686-
1766 I>> ON/OFF OFF ON Overcurrent protection
ON #2，applicable to 7SJ686-
1769 I>> PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
1771 I>> DELAY T1 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Overcurrent protection
#2，applicable to 7SJ686-
2.2.7 Information List
Number Information Type of Information Remarks

18040 >ENA Ph OC SP
18820 >ENA Ph OC #2 SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
(2-winding transformer)
2604 >BLK DIR.Ph O/C SP
18821 >BLK Ph OC #2 SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18041 >Com.V.Re.(S1) SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18042 >Com.V.Re.(S2) SP
18348 >Comp.V.Release SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-
A/A-C/A-D/A-E/J/K/K-C/K-D/K-
E/M/N/H (2-winding trans-
former)
18066 >BLK I>>> Trip SP
18851 >BLK I>>>#2Trip SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18067 >BLK I>> Trip SP
18847 >BLK I>>#2 Trip SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18068 >BLK I> Trip SP
18069 >BLK Ip Trip SP Not applicable to 7SJ686-
J/N/H (2-winding trans-
former)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

2628 OC Ph L1 FWD OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-
2629 OC Ph L2 FWD OUT A/A-C/A-D/A-E/J/M
2630 OC Ph L3 FWD OUT
2632 OC Ph L1 REV OUT
18043 Ph OC BLK OUT
18824 Ph OC #2 BLK OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18044 Com.Volt.Relea. OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-
A/A-C/A-D/A-E/J/K/K-C/K-D/K-
E/M/N
18045 I>>> OFF OUT
18830 I>>> #2 OFF OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18074 I>>> ACTIVE OUT
18831 I>>> #2 ACTIVE OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18046 I>> OFF OUT
18828 I>> #2 OFF OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18075 I>> ACTIVE OUT
18829 I>> #2 ACTIVE OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18047 I> OFF OUT
18076 I> ACTIVE OUT
18073 Ip OFF OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-
18039 Ip ACTIVE OUT J/N/H (2-winding trans-
former)
18048 I>>> picked up OUT
18852 I>>> #2 PU OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18049 I>>> Time Out OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/H
18050 I>>> TRIP OUT (2-winding transformer)
18051 I>> picked up OUT
18848 I>> #2 PU OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18052 I>> Time Out OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/H
18053 I>> TRIP OUT (2-winding transformer)
18054 I> picked up OUT
18055 I> Time Out OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/H
18056 I> TRIP OUT (2-winding transformer)
18070 Ip PU OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-
18071 Ip Time Out OUT J/N/H (2-winding trans-
former)
18072 Ip TRIP OUT
18057 I>>> TRIP T1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J and
former)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

18859 I>>> #2 TRIP T1 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18862 I>> #2 TRIP T1 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
18058 I>>> TRIP T2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18059 I>>> TRIP T3 OUT
18060 I>> TRIP T1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J and
former)
18061 I>> TRIP T2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18062 I>> TRIP T3 OUT
18063 I> TRIP T1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J and
former)
18064 I> TRIP T2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18065 I> TRIP T3 OUT
18480 I>>> TimeOut1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J and
former)
18481 I>>> TimeOut2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18482 I>>> TimeOut3 OUT
18483 I>> TimeOut1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J and
former)
18484 I>> TimeOut2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18485 I>> TimeOut3 OUT
18486 I> TimeOut1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J and
former)
18487 I> TimeOut2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18488 I> TimeOut3 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18345 OC Ph L1 PU OUT
18840 OC#2 Ph L1 PU OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
17971 Ph OC SW. ON IntSP
18877 Ph OC #2 SW. ON IntSP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
• Earth overcurrent protection provides 3 stages of definite-time overcurrent protection and 1 stage of
inverse-time overcurrent protection. Each stage can be enabled separately for cooperation.
• Earth overcurrent protection provides the function of determining the directional element. The direc-
tional element can be enabled separately for each stage so that you can easily realise cooperation
between protections and improve sensitivity by determining the amplitude of the fault current and the
direction of the fault.
• Earth overcurrent protection also varies depending on different specific protection objects. For example,
capacitors, 2-winding transformer, and substation transformer earth overcurrent protection have no
directional element or voltage control element; feeder earth overcurrent protection has directional
element, and so on.
• Delay of earth overcurrent protection also varies depending on different specific protection objects. For
example, the transformer backup protection device has no inverse-time overcurrent protection, and each
definite-time stage has 3 delays. See the following table for details.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Table 2-2 Earth overcurrent Protection

Overcurrent Directional Zero-Sequence
Element Element Voltage Control
Element
7SJ686-A feeder ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse, 3 definite-time
protection non-directional) stages
7SJ686-A-C MINI ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse, 1 inverse-time stage
feeder protection non-directional)
7SJ686-A-D MINI ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse,
7SJ686-A-E MINI ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse,
7SJ686-B motor ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse,
protection (overcur- non-directional)
rent)
7SJ686-B-C MINI ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse,
motor protection non-directional)
7SJ686-B-D MINI ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse,
7SJ686-B-E MINI ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse,
7SJ686-C motor ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse,
protection (differen- non-directional)
tial)
7SJ686-D capacitor ✓
protection (current
unbalance)
7SJ686-E capacitor ✓
protection (voltage
unbalance)
7SJ686-F capacitor ✓
protection (voltage
differential)
7SJ686-G capacitor ✓
protection (current
differential)
7SJ686-H reactor ✓
differential protec-
tion
7SJ686-H 2-winding ✓ Earth overcurrent 3-
transformer differ- stage definite time,
ential protection earth overcurrent #2
2-stage definite
time, 2-stage defi-
nite time for earth
overcurrent of trans-
former neutral point
7SJ686-J trans- ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse, ✓ 3 definite-time
former backup non-directional) stages
protection Each stage has 3
delays

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Overcurrent Directional Zero-Sequence
Element Element Voltage Control
Element
7SJ686-K substation ✓ 3 definite-time
transformer protec- stages
tion 1 inverse-time stage
7SJ686-K-C MINI ✓
substation trans-
former protection
7SJ686-K-D MINI ✓
substation trans-
former protection
7SJ686-K-E MINI
substation trans-
former protection
7SJ686-M line differ- ✓ ✓(Forward, reverse, 3 definite-time
ential protection non-directional) stages
1 inverse-time stage
7SJ686-N automatic ✓ 3 definite-time
transfer system stages
When the earth current is taken from the 3I0 calculated value, earth overcurrent protection may pick up in
case of CT wire broken of one or two phases. Therefore, a zero-sequence voltage element is required in the
device to block earth overcurrent protection. When parameter 613 (I)DMT E with is set to IE (meas-
ured), no zero-sequence voltage element is required and relevant parameters are hidden automatically.
2.3.2 Definite-Time Earth Overcurrent Element
For operation parameters of zero-sequence overcurrent protection, you can select to use the measured zero-
sequence current In or the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0. For protection with sensitive earth current IE,
however, the calculated earth current 3I0 is used generally.
2-winding transformer earth overcurrent protection and earth overcurrent protection #2 only use the calcu-
lated zero-sequence current 3I0. In addition, 2-winding transformer backup also provides an earth overcurrent
of transformer neutral point, which uses the measured earth current IE.
The earth current is compared with the pickup value. The pickup indication is issued when earth current
exceeds the setting. If no blocking is detected, a trip signal is issued when the configured delay time expires.
When the current value is > 0.2 In, the dropout value is approximately equal to 95 % of the pickup value.
The logic diagram of definite-time earth overcurrent protection is shown in the following figure (using IE>>>
as an example).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_feeder_zero_fre, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-25 Logic Diagram of Earth Overcurrent IE>>> (7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/M)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_zero_fre, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-26 Logic Diagram of Earth Overcurrent IE>>> of Automatic Transfer System Device (7SJ686-N)
NOTE
i For overcurrent protection in the automatic transfer system device:
• When 274 Connection in Power System Data is set to Single Busbar, this protection function is
not available.
• Earth overcurrent protection is not blocked if there is PT wire broken.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_2 coil transformer_3, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-27 Logic Diagram of Earth Overcurrent IE>>> of 2-Winding transformer Backup Protection
(7SJ686-H)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Figure 2-28 Logic Diagram of Earth Overcurrent IE>>> #2 of 2-Winding transformer Backup Protection
(7SJ686-H)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Figure 2-29 Logic Diagram of Earth Overcurrent of Transformer Neutral Point of 2-Winding transformer
Backup Protection (7SJ686-H)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_backup_zero_fre, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-30 Logic Diagram of Earth Overcurrent IE>>> of Transformer Backup Protection (7SJ686-J)
2.3.3 Inverse-Time Earth Overcurrent Element
An individual threshold can be set for the inverse-time stage separately to compare the earth current with the
inverse-time earth overcurrent protection startup value. If the earth current of the short-circuit fault exceeds
1.1 times the set value, the earth overcurrent inverse-time stage picks up and the trip delay starts. The actual
trip time delay depends on the actual fault earth current and the selected tripping characteristic curve. Once
the delay expires, a trip signal is issued if no blocking is detected.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The inverse-time characteristic curve as well as the pickup value and time coefficient of the inverse-time char-
acteristic curve are independent of each other, and are set separately.
The element drops out instantaneously after a threshold has been undershot. Instantaneous indicates
dropout when the current decreases to approximately 95 % of the pickup threshold. Where, the pickup
threshold is 1.1 times the set value.
The logic diagram of inverse-time earth overcurrent protection is shown in the following figure.
[lo_feeder, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-31 Logic Diagram of Inverse-Time Earth Overcurrent (7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/M)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_inverse, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-32 Logic Diagram of Inverse Time Earth Overcurrent (7SJ686-D/E/F/G/H/K/K-C/K-D/K-E)
For directional earth fault elements, determination of direction can be realised by comparing zero-sequence
components. Based on parameter settings, the measured value IE or the calculated value 3I0 can be used as
the zero-sequence current. Whether the measured value UE or the calculated value 3U0 is used as the zero-
sequence voltage is set according to the PT connection and relevant parameters of U4.
Using Zero-Sequence Components to Determine Direction

The following figure shows an analysis conducted with the reference voltage of earthed directional element,
which is also based on single-phase earth fault of phase L1. Contrary to the situation where the phase direc-
tional element uses the fault-free phase-to-ground voltage as the reference voltage, the fault voltage itself is
the reference voltage of the earthed directional element. According to the PT connection method, here is
voltage 3U0 or UE. Fault current -3I0 is opposite to fault current IE in direction, and the included angle between
-3I0 and the fault voltage 3U0 is fault angle jsc. The default rotation angle of the reference voltage is -45°.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_zero_seq_current_direction_determination, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-33 Zero-Sequence Directional Element, Forward Characteristics
The positive sequence area is the ±86° range around the rotating voltage Uref,rot. If the fault current vector -3I0
(or IE) is in this area, the device detects forward direction.
2.3.5 Setting Notes
In device configuration, earth overcurrent protection defaults to the Enabled setting. Of course, you can also
disable the entire earth overcurrent protection by selecting the Disabled setting.
3-stage definite-time and 1-stage inverse-time earth overcurrent protection each has its own independent
enabling/disabling parameters, direction determination setting parameters, pickup values, delay or trip charac-
teristic curves and time constants to facilitate setting and cooperation.
Among protection parameters in Power System Data, the parameter 613 (I)DMT E with can be set to IE
(measured) or 3I0 (calcul.). For protection device with sensitive earth current input, however, only
3I0 (calcul.) can be selected here.
The earth voltage used to determine the direction is automatically switched based on the PT connection
method. When UE is not connected, that is, option 216 U4 transformer in Power System Data is not set to
Udelta transf., the calculated value 3U0 is used for direction determination; when option 216 U4
transformer is set to Udelta transf., the measured value UE is used for direction determination.
2.3.6 Settings

116 DMT/IDMT E Disabled Enabled
Enabled
119 DMT E #2 Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
Enabled (2-winding transformer)
120 DMT Tran. E Disabled Disabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
Enabled (2-winding transformer)
613 (I)DMT E with IE (measured) IE (measured) For 7SJ686- H (2-winding
3I0 (calcul.) transformer) earth overcur-
rent and earth overcurrent
#2, only 3I0 is taken; In is
taken for earth overcurrent
of transformer neutral point.
1690 DMT/IDMT E OFF ON
ON

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

1691 DMT E #2 OFF OFF Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
ON (2-winding transformer)
8454 DMT Tran. E OFF ON Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
1650 IE>>> ON/OFF OFF ON
ON
1850 IE>>> ON/OFF OFF ON Zero-sequence overcurrent
ON protection #2, applicable to
former)
8455 Tran. IE>> Prot OFF ON Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
1651 IE>> ON/OFF OFF ON
ON
1851 IE>> ON/OFF OFF ON Zero-sequence overcurrent
ON protection #2, applicable to
former)
8456 Tran. IE> Prot OFF ON Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
1652 IE> ON/OFF OFF OFF
ON
1653 IEp ON/OFF OFF OFF
ON
1654 PT BRK DIR. Release Block Only applicable to 7SJ686-
Block A/-B/- C/A-C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-
D/B-E/J/M
1668 PT Brk Volt Release Block Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
Block
1669 U0> 1.00 .. 57.00 V; ∞ 8.00 V
1655 IE>>> Direction Forward Non-Directional Only applicable to 7SJ686-
Non-Directional A/-B/- C/A-C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-
Reverse D/B-E/J/M
1670 IE>>> U0 ON OFF Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
OFF
1656 IE>>> PICKUP 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 4.00 A
1856 IE>>> Pickup 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 4.00 A Zero-sequence overcurrent
protection #2, applicable to
former)
8457 Tran. IE>> PU 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A Applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A winding transformer)
1657 IE>>> DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/H
8458 Tran. IE>> T 0.01 .. 100.00 sec 0.30 sec Applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-
winding transformer)
1673 IE>>> Delay T1 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

1873 IE>>> Delay T1 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Zero-sequence overcurrent
former)
1674 IE>>> Delay T2 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
1675 IE>>> Delay T3 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec
1658 IE>> Direction Forward Non-Directional Only applicable to 7SJ686-
Reverse D/B-E/J/M
1671 IE>> U0 ON OFF Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
OFF
1659 IE>> PICKUP 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A
1859 IE>> PICKUP 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A Zero-sequence overcurrent
former)
8459 Tran. IE> PU 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A Applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A winding transformer)
1660 IE>> DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/H
8460 Tran. IE> T 0.01 .. 100.00 sec 0.50 sec Applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-
1676 IE>> Delay T1 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Applicable to 7SJ686- J/H (2-
1876 IE>> Delay T1 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Only applicable to 7SJ686-H
1677 IE>> Delay T2 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
1678 IE>> Delay T3 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec
1661 IE> Direction Forward Non-Directional Only applicable to 7SJ686-
Reverse D/B-E/J/M
1672 IE> U0 ON OFF Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
OFF
1662 IE> PICKUP 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
1663 IE> DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/H
1679 IE> Delay T1 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-
1680 IE> Delay T2 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
1681 IE> Delay T3 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 4.00 sec
1664 IEp Dir. Forward Non-Directional Only applicable to 7SJ5686-
Non-Directional A/-B/-C/A-C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-
Reverse D/B-E/M
1665 IEp IEC Normal Inverse Normal Inverse Not applicable to 7SJ686-
Very Inverse J/N/H (2-winding trans-
Extremely Inv. former)
Long Inverse
1666 IEp PICKUP 0.03 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A
1667 IEp TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 10.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

1682 IEp MinDelay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 0.01 sec Not applicable to 7SJ686-
J/N/H (2-winding trans-
former)
1619 ROTATION ANGLE -180 .. 180 ° -45 ° Only applicable to 7SJ686-
A/-B/-C/-J/-M

Informa-
tion
18077 >ENA Earth OC SP
18221 >ENA Earth OC#2 SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18690 >Ena Tran. E OC SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
2614 >BLK Earth OC SP
18222 >BLK Earth OC#2 SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18689 >Blk Tran. E OC SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18091 >BLK IE>>> Trip SP
18248 >BLK IE>>>#2 Tr SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18092 >BLK IE>> Trip SP
18243 >BLK IE>>#2Trip SP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18093 >BLK IE> Trip SP
18094 >BLK IEp Trip SP Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/N/H (2-side transformer)
2635 OC Earth FWD OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/J/M
2636 OC Earth REV OUT
18693 Tran. E OC OFF OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18692 Tran. E OC ACT OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18078 Earth OC BLK OUT
18223 Earth OC#2 BLK OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18691 Tran. E OC BLK OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18079 IE>>> is OFF OUT
18229 IE>>> #2 OFF OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18099 IE>>> ACTIVE OUT
18230 IE>>> #2 ACTIVE OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18694 Tran. IE>> OFF OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18080 IE>> is OFF OUT
18227 IE>> #2 OFF OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18697 Tran. IE> OFF OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18100 IE>> ACTIVE OUT
18228 IE>> #2 ACTIVE OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18081 IE> is OFF OUT
18037 IE> ACTIVE OUT
18098 IEp OFF OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/N/H (2-side transformer)
18038 IEp ACTIVE OUT
18082 IE>>> picked up OUT
18249 IE>>> #2 PU OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18695 Tran. IE>> PU OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18083 IE>>> Time Out OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-side transformer)
18084 IE>>> TRIP OUT
18696 Tran. IE>> Trip OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18085 IE>> picked up OUT
18244 IE>> #2 PU OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18698 Tran. IE> PU OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18086 IE>> Time Out OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-side transformer)
18087 IE>> TRIP OUT
18699 Tran. IE> Trip OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18088 IE> picked up OUT
18089 IE> Time Out OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-side transformer)
18090 IE> TRIP OUT
18095 IEp PU OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/N/H (2-side transformer)
18096 IEp Timeout OUT
18097 IEp TRIP OUT
18360 IE>>> TRIP T1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-side transformer)
18250 IE>>>#2 TRIP T1 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18361 IE>>> TRIP T2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18362 IE>>> TRIP T3 OUT
18363 IE>> TRIP T1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-side transformer)
18260 IE>> #2 TRIP T1 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18364 IE>> TRIP T2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18365 IE>> TRIP T3 OUT
18366 IE> TRIP T1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-side transformer)
18367 IE> TRIP T2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18368 IE> TRIP T3 OUT
18489 IE>>> TimeOut1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-side transformer)
18896 IE>>> #2 T1 Out OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18490 IE>>> TimeOut2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18491 IE>>> TimeOut3 OUT
18492 IE>> TimeOut1 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-side transformer)
18899 IE>> #2 T1 Out OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18493 IE>> TimeOut2 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18494 IE>> TimeOut3 OUT Applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-side transformer)
18495 IE> TimeOut1 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-J
18496 IE> TimeOut2 OUT
18497 IE> TimeOut3 OUT
17975 E OC SW. ON IntSP
18674 E OC #2 SW. ON IntSP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)
18878 Trans. E OC ON IntSP Only applicable to 7SJ686-H (2-side transformer)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.4 Displacement Voltage Protection
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/J/K/K-C/K-D/K-E.
The displacement voltage protection function can reflect earth faults or winding faults of 3-phase protected
objects, such as detecting earth faults of transformer triangle winding or inter-turn short circuit faults of
generator stator winding in the power system.
The displacement voltage protection function can use binary input to block the entire function or one stage of
the function.
With the displacement voltage protection function, you can evaluate the fundamental component of self-
generated zero-sequence voltage or external zero-sequence voltage, which is selected via parameter 4016
Displ. U Meas., and is related to the wiring method with 216 U4 transformer. See the following table:
216 U4 transformer 4016 Displ. U Meas.
Not connected 3U0
Udelta transf. 3U0
UE
Ux transformer 3U0
Zero-sequence overvoltage protection includes 2 stages of settings. Set a short trip delay when displacement
voltage multiple is large. Set a long trip delay when it is small.
You can also select whether you want to block displacement voltage protection upon PT wire broken. When
4016 Displ. U Meas. is 3U0, 3808 Blocked By FFM must be set to YES.
In addition, you can use binary input to block the entire displacement voltage protection function.
The logic diagram of displacement voltage protection is as follows:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_zero_seq_ovp, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-34 Logic Block Diagram of Displacement Voltage Protection
2.4.2 Settings

3801 Displ. Voltage OFF OFF Displacement Voltage Protection
ON
3802 UE>> PickUp 1.0 .. 200.0 V 30.0 V UE>> PickUp
3802 UE>> 1.0 .. 200.0 V 30.0 V UE>> PickUp
3803 UE>> Delay 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec UE>> Time Delay
3804 UE> PickUp 1.0 .. 200.0 V 10.0 V UE> PickUp

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

3804 UE> 1.0 .. 200.0 V 10.0 V UE> PickUp
3805 UE> Delay 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec UE> Time Delay
3807 Displ. Voltage TRIP Alarm Only Displacement Voltage Protection
Alarm Only
3808 Blocked By FFM YES YES Block in case of Meas.-Voltage
NO Loss

Informa-
tion
17310 UE ACTIVE OUT
17311 UE OFF OUT
17312 UE BLOCKED OUT
17313 UE>> Picked Up OUT
17314 UE> picked up OUT
17315 UE>> Trip OUT
17316 UE> Trip OUT
17317 UE>> BLOCKED OUT
17318 UE> BLOCKED OUT
17319 >BLOCK UE SP
17320 >BLOCK UE>> SP
17321 >BLOCK UE> SP
17322 UE error Obj. OUT
17323 UE error VT OUT
17326 UE Blk By FFM OUT
18443 >Enable UE SP
18784 UE>> Alarm OUT
18785 UE> Alarm OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.5 Overload Protection
NOTE
i This function is applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/J/K/K-C/K-D/K-E/H (2-side

transformer)/M.
Overload protection criterion is the current. Measurement value of the overload protection provides analog
channel options. You can select protection CT or measurement CT. Overload pickup when current of any
phase exceeds the set point, and alarm or trip occurs after delay.
The overload protection function is composed of 2 stages of definite time overcurrent. Overload stage 1 and
overload stage 2 act on alarm or trip.
Moreover, for transformer backup protection, overload start fan and overload block tap functions are specially
provided.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_Overload protection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-35 Logic Diagram of Overload Protection
(1) The FC circuit overcurrent block function is activated only when it is used for feeder and motor
protection.
(2) Only transformer backup protection has the parameters 2044 OL Start Fan and 2045 OL
Block Tap.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.5.1 Setting Notes
Overload is comprised of 2 definite time stages. Each stage has its independent pickup threshold and time
delay threshold, which can be configured separately. OL I>> and OL I> can be set to TRIP or Alarm Only.
2.5.2 Settings

124 Over Load Disabled Enabled
Enabled
4020 OL Meas.Value Prot. CT Prot. CT By default, this parameter is
Meas. CT hidden and set to Protection CT
when the device has no Measure-
ment CT
2042 OL I>> Func. OFF OFF Only applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-
ON side transformer)
2043 OL I> Func. OFF OFF
ON
2044 OL Start Fan OFF OFF
ON
2045 OL Block Tap OFF OFF
ON
2046 OL Start Fan PU 0.03 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.60 A Only applicable to 7SJ686-J/H (2-
2047 OL Start Fan T 0.00 .. 9000.00 sec; ∞ 5.00 sec side transformer)
2048 OL Block Tap PU 0.03 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.60 A
2049 OL Block Tap T 0.00 .. 9000.00 sec; ∞ 5.00 sec
2051 OL I>> TRIP Alarm Only
Alarm Only
2052 OL I>> PU 0.03 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.80 A
2053 OL I>> Delay 0.00 .. 9000.00 sec; ∞ 5.00 sec
2055 OL I> TRIP Alarm Only
Alarm Only
2056 OL I> PU 0.03 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.70 A
2057 OL I> Delay 0.00 .. 9000.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec
6250 OverLoad OFF OFF
ON

Informa-
tion
17986 OverLoad ON IntSP
18101 >BLK Overload SP
18102 >ENA Overload SP
18103 Overload BLK OUT
18104 Overload OFF OUT
18105 OL I>> Alarm OUT
18106 OL I>> Trip OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18107 OL I> Alarm OUT
18108 OL I> Trip OUT
18109 Overload Active OUT
18110 OL I>> pickup OUT
18111 OL I> pickup OUT
18372 OL Start Fan Tr OUT
18374 OL Block Tap Tr OUT
18524 OL I>> OFF OUT
18525 OL I> OFF OUT
18526 OL-StartFan OFF OUT
18527 OL-BlockTap OFF OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.6 Under/Overvoltage Protection
NOTE
i This function is not applicable to 7SJ686-H/L/N!
Voltage protection has the task to protect electrical equipment against undervoltage and overvoltage. Both
operational states are abnormal as overvoltage may cause for example insulation problems or undervoltage
may cause stability problems. There are two elements each available for overvoltage protection and under-
voltage protection.
Abnormally high voltages often occur e.g. in low loaded, long distance transmission lines, in islanded systems
when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full load rejection of a generator from the system.
The undervoltage protection function detects voltage collapses on transmission lines and electrical machines
and prevents inadmissible operating states and a possible loss of stability.
2.6.1 Measurement Principle
Connection/Measurement Value
The voltages supplied to the device can be the three phase-to-ground voltages UL1E, UL2E, UL3E or two
phase-to-phase voltages (UL12, UL23) and the displacement voltage (ground voltage UEN) or, in case of a
single-phase connection, any phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage. The device provides the
option to detect three phase-to-ground voltages and additionally the ground voltage. With a multiple-phase
connection, the connection type was specified during configuration of parameter 213 VT Connection.
The following table indicates which voltages can be evaluated by the function. The settings for this are carried
out in the Power System Data (see 2.1.4.2 Setting Notes). Furthermore, the following table also shows the
thresholds that must be set. All voltages are fundamental voltage values.
Table 2-3 Voltage Protection, Selectable Voltages
Number VT Connection Optional Voltage The threshold Must Be

(Address 213) (Address 614/615) Set to
Overvoltage UL1E,UL2E,UL3E ULL(Maximum Phase-to- Phase-to-Phase Voltage
Phase Voltage)
Uph-e (Maximum Phase- Phase-to-Ground Voltage
to-Ground Voltage)
U1(Positive Sequence Positive Sequence Voltage
Voltage)
U2(Negative Sequence Negative Sequence
Voltage) Voltage
U12, U23U12, U23 ULL (Maximum Phase-to- Phase-to-Phase Voltage
Phase Voltage)
U1 (Positive Sequence Positive Sequence Voltage
Voltage)
U2 (Negative Sequence Negative Sequence
Voltage) Voltage

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Number VT Connection Optional Voltage The threshold Must Be

(Address 213) (Address 614/615) Set to
Undervoltage UL1E,UL2E,UL3E ULL (Minimum or Phase-to-Phase Voltage
Maximum Phase-to-Phase
Voltage)
Uph-e (Minimum or Phase-to-Ground Voltage
Maximum Phase-to-
Ground Voltage)
Voltage)
U12, U23 ULL (Minimum or Phase-to-Phase Voltage
Maximum Phase-to-Phase
Voltage)
Voltage)
2.6.2 Overvoltage Protection
The overvoltage protection has two elements. In case of a high overvoltage, tripping switch off is performed
with a short-time delay, whereas in case of less severe overvoltages, the tripping is performed with a longer
time delay. When one of the adjustable settings is exceeded, the overvoltage protection element picks up and
trips after an adjustable time delay has elapsed. The time delay is not dependent on the magnitude of the
overvoltage.
The dropout ratio for the 2 overvoltage elements is 0.95 times the set value.
The working range of overvoltage protection is 45 Hz to 55 Hz. The protection function is blocked when
frequency exceeds this range.
The logic diagram of overvoltage protection is shown in the following figure.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_Overvoltage protection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-36 Logic Diagram of Overvoltage Protection
2.6.3 Undervoltage Protection
Undervoltage protection includes 2 stages of definite time elements (Undervoltage Stage 1 and Undervoltage
Stage 2). Therefore, the length of tripping time can be determined based on the severity of voltage break-
down. The voltage set point and delay for any of these 2 definite time elements can be set separately.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Undervoltage protection consists of two definite time elements (U<< and U<).Therefore, tripping can be time-
coordinated depending on how severe voltage collapses are. Voltage thresholds and time delays can be set
individually for both elements.
The dropout ratio for the 2 undervoltage elements is 1.05 times the set value. Figure 2-37 shows a typical
voltage profile during a fault for source side connection of the voltage transformers.
Because full voltage is present after the circuit breaker has been opened, current supervision CS described
above is not necessary in this case. After the voltage has dropped below the pickup setting, tripping is initiated
after time delay T U<.As long as the voltage remains below the dropout setting, reclosing is blocked. Only
after the fault has been cleared, i.e. when the voltage increases above the dropout level, the element drops
out and allows reclosing of the circuit breaker.
[dw_voltage transformer fault curve, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-37 Typical Fault Curves of The Voltage Transformer at The Power Supply Side

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic diagram of undervoltage protection is shown in the figure below.
[lo_Undervoltage protection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-38 Logic Diagram of Undervoltage Protection
2.6.4 Setting Notes
Voltage protection is only effective and accessible if address 150 O/U VOLTAGE is set to Enabled during
configuration of protection functions. If this function is not required, then Disabled is set.Voltage type
values are set in Power System Data.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Overvoltage protection can be turned ON or OFF at address 5001 OVER VOLTAGE.

Overvoltage protection can be set to TRIP or Alarm Only at address 5009 OVER VOLTAGE.
Undervoltage protection can be turned ON or OFF at address 5101 UNDER VOLTAGE.
Undervoltage protection can be set to TRIP or Alarm Only in 5104 UNDER VOLTAGE.
When the protection function starts (is turned on), both fault removal and fault recording start up if the set
value is exceeded and the set delay has elapsed.
If the protection function is set to ON, when the overvoltage/undervoltage element starts, the fault is removed
after the set delay, and the fault record is saved.
Overvoltage Protection of Phase-to-Phase Voltage or Phase-to-Ground Voltage

In phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground overvoltage protection, the maximum voltage value in 3 phases is used
as the criteria.
Settings are set in values that are processed and judged (see Figure 2-36 in 2.6.2 Overvoltage Protection).
Overvoltage protection includes 2 elements. Set a low startup value (depending on if it is phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase connection) in address 5002 or 5003 U>>, and set a delay time (a long delay) in address 5004
T U>>. Set a high startup value in address 5005 or 5006 U>, and set a delay time (a short delay) in 5007 T
U>. No explicit steps are provided here for setting startup values of overvoltage elements. However, since the
overvoltage function is mainly intended to prevent insulation damage, the set value in addresses 5002 or
5003 U>> should fall between 110 % and 115 % of the rated voltage, and the set value in 5005 or 5006 U>
should be approximately 130 % of the rated voltage.
Set delay of the overvoltage element in addresses 5004 T U>> and 5007 T U>. The set value of delay should
be able to avoid the peak voltage during switching operation and the static overvoltage should be cleared
promptly.
When selecting phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages, you can select phase-to-ground voltage by
considering voltage asynchronisation (caused by earth fault, for example), or select phase-to-phase voltage
during judgement and processing without considering voltage asynchronisation.
Overvoltage Protection - Positive Sequence System U1

When you connect a 3-phase voltage transformer, parameter 0614 Operational Parameters for
Overvoltage Protection can be used to set the negative sequence system U1 as the measurement value
for overvoltage protection. In this case, the threshold of overvoltage protection must be set in address 5019
U1>> or 5020 U1>.
Overvoltage Protection - Negative Sequence System U2

When you connect a 3-phase voltage transformer, parameter 614 OP.QUANT. U>(>) can be used to set the
negative sequence system U2 as the measurement value for overvoltage protection.
Overvoltage protection includes 2 elements. In configuration of a negative sequence system, set a long delay
in address 5004 T U>> to cooperate with a low startup value that is set in address 5015 U2>>. Set a short
delay in address 5007 T U> to cooperate with a high startup value that is set in address 5016 U2>. Since they
have their own configurations, no explicit steps are provided here for setting startup values of U1> or U2>.
You can set the delay time of the overvoltage protection element in addresses 5004 T U>> and 5007 T U>.
Also, you must ensure that the set value of delay can avoid the peak voltage during switching operation and
the static overvoltage can be cleared promptly.
Return Value of Overvoltage Protection

The return value of overvoltage stage 1 and overvoltage stage 2 elements can be set to 0.95 times the set
value through the return ratio.
The minimum return value is 0.6 V.
Undervoltage Protection of Positive Sequence Voltage U1

In undervoltage protection, positive sequence voltage (U1) must be processed and judged. Since positive
sequence system is associated with the limit of steady-state power transmission, obtaining positive sequence
voltage offers great benefit to stability study. No explicit steps are provided here for setting the startup value

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
of undervoltage protection. However, because undervoltage protection is mainly used to prevent voltage drop
and system stability issues of induction motors, the startup value is typically 60 % to 85 % of the rated voltage.
Note that when frequency deviation exceeds 5 Hz, the calculated RMS value of voltage would be so small that
the element behaves incorrectly.
Undervoltage protection includes 2 definite time elements. Set a small startup value in address 5110 or 5111
U< (depending on whether the connection of the voltage transformer is phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground),
and set a short delay in address 5112 T U<. Set a high startup value in address 5102 or 5103 U<<, and set a
relatively long delay in address 5106
T U<<. Thus, the undervoltage protection set through these elements can basically satisfy the stability
requirement of the system.
The delay setting should prevent system instability caused by voltage drop. However, the delay should be long
enough to avoid tripping caused by instantaneous voltage drop.
Undervoltage Protection for Phase-to-Phase or Phase-to-Ground Voltage

When PT is connected using the 3-phase four-wire system, you can select phase-to-phase voltage Uph-ph or
phase-to-ground voltage Uph as the measurement quantity for undervoltage protection by setting operational
parameters of parameter 615 OP.QUANT. U<(<). With address 5116, for the startup criteria of undervoltage
protection, you can choose whether any one of the phase-to-ground voltages must be low or all 3 phase-to-
ground voltages must be low. With address 5115, for the startup criteria of undervoltage protection, you can
choose whether any one of the phase-to-phase voltages must be low or all 3 phase-to-phase voltages must be
low. The corresponding set value should be based on phase-to-phase voltage or phase-to-ground voltage.
Undervoltage protection includes 2 definite time elements. Set a small startup value in address 5110 or 5111
U< (depending on whether the connection of the voltage transformer is phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground),
and set a short delay in address 5112 T U<. Set a high startup value in address 5102 or 5103 U<<, and set a
relatively long delay in address 5106 T U<<. Thus, the undervoltage protection set through these elements
can basically satisfy the stability requirement of the system.
The delay setting should prevent system instability caused by voltage drop. However, the delay should be long
enough to avoid tripping caused by instantaneous voltage drop.
Return Value of Undervoltage Protection

The return value of undervoltage stage 1 and undervoltage stage 2 elements can be set to 1.05 times the set
value through the return ratio.
The minimum hysteresis is 0.6 V.
2.6.5 Settings

0150 Voltage Protection Disabled Enabled
Enabled
5001 OVER VOLTAGE OFF OFF
ON
5002 U>> 20 to 460 V 120 V
5003 U>> 20 to 270 V 120 V
5004 T U>> 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec
5005 U> 20 to 460 V 110 V
5006 U> 20 to 270 V 110 V
5007 T U> 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec
5009 OVER VOLTAGE TRIP Alarm Only
Alarm Only

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

5015 U2>> 2 to 150 V 50 V Not applicable to 7SJ686-D/E/F/G
5016 U2> 2 to 150 V 30 V
5019 U1>> 40 to 150 V 120 V
5020 U1> 40 to 150 V 110 V
5101 UNDER VOLTAGE OFF OFF
ON
5102 U<< 10 to 210 V 70 V
5103 U<< 10 to 270 V 70 V
5104 UNDER VOLTAGE TRIP Alarm Only
Alarm Only
5106 T U<< 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec
5110 U< 10 to 210 V 75 V
5111 U< 10 to 270 V 75 V
5112 T U< 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec
5115 ULE SEL. one of ULE < one of ULE < Not applicable to 7SJ686-D/E/F/G,
all 3 ULE <
5116 ULL SEL. one of ULL < one of ULL < For 7SJ686-D/E/F/G, this param-
all 3 ULL < eter is always set to low phase-to-
phase voltages of the 3 phases
5123 U< check CB OFF ON
ON
5124 U< Blk by FFM YES YES
NO

Informa-
tion
234.2100 U<, U> blk IntSP
6503 >BLK Under Volt SP
6506 >BLOCK U<< SP
6508 >BLOCK U< SP
6513 >BLOCK U>/U>> SP
6530 Under Volt. OFF OUT
6531 Under Volt. BLK OUT
6532 Under Volt. ACT OUT
6533 U<< picked up OUT
6537 U< picked up OUT
6539 U<< TRIP OUT
6540 U< TRIP OUT
6565 U> OFF OUT
6566 U> BLOCKED OUT
6567 U> ACTIVE OUT
6568 U>> picked up OUT
6570 U>> TRIP OUT
6571 U> picked up OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
6573 U> TRIP OUT
17915 >ENA Over Volt SP
17916 >BLOCK U>> SP
17917 >BLOCK U> SP
17918 >ENA Under Volt SP
18251 CB open BLK UV OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.7 Differential Protection

Differential protection is based on Kirchhoff's Current Law, which has considered the difference of current
transformer ratio at each side of the transformer. 7SJ686-L is suitable for unit transformer/winding combina-
tion or transformer/star connection protection，which can connect a maximum of 4 groups of 3-phase
currents. 7SJ686-H can connect only 2 groups of 3-phase currents.
The protected zone is limited selectively by the current transformer sets.
Table 2-4 Differential Protection
Device Type Protection Element

Differential Cold Load Pickup Harmonic DC Monitoring
Element Element Restraint Element Element
Transformer differential ✓ ✓ ✓
Motor differential protection ✓ ✓ ✓
Reactor differential ✓ ✓ ✓
The formation of the measured quantities depends on the application of the differential protection. This
subsection describes the general operating mode of the differential protection, independent of the type of
protected object. The illustrations are based on single-line diagrams. The special features necessary for the
various types of protected object are covered in the following subsections.
Basic Principle of 2-Side Differential

Differential protection is based on current comparison. It makes use of the fact that a protected object
(Figure 2-39) carries always the same current i (dashed line) at its 2 sides in healthy operation. This current
flows into one side of the considered zone and leaves it again on the other side. A difference in current marks
is a clear indication of a fault within this section. If the actual current transformation ratio is the same, the
secondary windings of the current transformers CT1 and CT2 at the line ends can be connected to form a
closed electric circuit with a secondary current I; a measuring element M which is connected to the electrical
balance point remains at zero current in healthy operation.
[dw_2-sided differential protection principle, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-39 Basic Principle of Differential Protection for 2 Ends (Single-Line Illustration)
When a fault occurs in the zone limited by the transformers, a current I1 + I2 which is proportional to the fault
currents I1 + I2 flowing in from both sides is fed to the measuring element M. As a result, the simple circuit
shown in Figure 2-39 ensures a reliable tripping of the protection if the fault current flowing into the protec-
tion zone during a fault is high enough for the measuring element M to respond.
Unless otherwise stated and by usual practice, the direction of flow into the protection zone is defined as the
positive direction in all of the following descriptions.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Basic Principle of Multi-Side Differential

For protected objects or busbars with 3 or more sides, the principle of differential protection is extended in
that the total of all currents flowing into the protected object is zero in healthy operation, whereas in case of a
fault the total is equal to the fault current.
Figure 2-40 shows an example of busbar circuit wiring with 4 branches. In Figure 2-41, the 3-winding trans-
former has 4 current measuring points. Therefore, differential protection can treat it as a 4-winding trans-
former.
[dw_connection example_4 branches, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-40 Basic Principle of Differential Protection for 4 Ends (Single-Line Illustration)
[dw_3-winding transformers-4mp, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-41 Basic Principle of Differential Protection for 3-Winding Power Transformer with 4 Current
Measuring Points (Single-Line Illustration)
Current Restraint
When an external fault causes a heavy current to flow through the protection zone, differences in the
magnetic characteristics of the current transformers CT1 and CT2 under conditions of saturation may cause a
significant current to flow through the measuring element M. If the magnitude of this current lies above the
response threshold, the protection would issue a trip signal. Current restraint prevents such erroneous opera-
tion.
For protected object with 2-side differential, a restraint quantity is normally derived from the current differ-
ence |I1 – I2| or from the arithmetic sum |I1| + |I2|. Both methods are equal in the relevant ranges of the stabili-
sation characteristics. For protected objects with more than 2 sides, such as multi-winding transformers and
busbars, the restraint quantity can only be calculated using arithmetic sum. In the device, the restraint quan-
tity is calculated using the latter method, that is, via arithmetic sum. This is explained using following 2 meas-
uring points:
Tripping current or differential current
Idiff = |I1 + I2|
Restraint current
Istab = |I1| + |I2|
The preceding definitions can be extended to more than 2 measuring points, such as used for 4 measuring
points (Figure 2-40 or Figure 2-41), therefore:
Idiff = |I1 + I2 + I3 + I4|

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Istab = |I1| + |I2| + |I3| + |I4|

Idiff is calculated from the fundamental component of the measured currents and produces the tripping effect
quantity, and Istab counteracts this effect.
To clarify the situation, 3 important operating conditions should be examined, based on the assumption of an
ideal transformer and its matching measurement quantities.
[dw_current direction definition, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-42 Current Direction Definition
1. Through-fault current under healthy conditions or on an external fault:

I2 reverses its direction. In other words, the sign changes, that is, I2 = –I1; while |I2| = |I1|
Idiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 – I1| = 0
Istab = |I1| + |I2| = |I1| + |I1| = 2 |I1|
No tripping effect (Idiff = 0); restraint quantity (Istab) corresponds to twice the through flowing current.
2. Internal fault, fed from each end, for example, with equal currents:
In this case, I2 = I1; while |I2| = |I1|
Idiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 + I1| = 2 |I1|
Istab = |I1| + |I2| = |I1| + |I1| = 2 |I1|
Tripping quantity (Idiff) and restraint quantity (Istab) are equal and correspond to the total fault current.
3. Internal fault, fed from one end only:
In this case, I2 = 0
Idiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 + 0| = |I1|
Istab = |I1| + |I2| = |I1| + 0 = |I1|
Tripping quantity (Idiff) and restraint quantity (Istab) are equal and correspond to the fault current fed from one
side.
This result indicates that for internal fault Idiff = Istab under ideal conditions. Thus, the characteristic of internal
faults is a straight line with the slope 1 (45°) in the operation diagram (dash-dotted line in Figure 2-43).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_diff_protection_tripping char. when fault, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-43 Operation Characteristic of Differential Protection and Fault Characteristic
Add-on Stabilisation during External Fault

Saturation of the current transformers caused by high fault currents and/or long system time constants are
uncritical for internal faults (fault in the protection zone), since the measured value deformation is found in
the differential current as well in the restraint current, to the same extent. The fault characteristic as illustrated
in Figure 2-43 is principally valid in this case, too. Of course, the fundamental component of the current must
exceed at least the pickup threshold (branch a in Figure 2-43).
During an external fault which produces a high through-flowing fault current causing current transformer
saturation, a considerable differential current can be simulated, especially when the degree of saturation is
different at the 2 sides. If the quantities Idiff/Istab result in an operating point which lies in the trip area of the
operating characteristic (Figure 2-43), trip signal would be the consequence if there were no special meas-
ures.
7SJ686-L provides a saturation indicator which detects such phenomena and initiates add-on stabilisation
measures. The saturation indicator considers the dynamic behaviour of the differential and restraint quantity.
The dashed line in Figure 2-43 shows an example of the shape of the instantaneous quantities during a
through-fault current with current transformer saturation at one side.
Immediately after fault inception (A) the fault currents increase severely thus producing a high restraint quan-
tity (twice the through-flowing current). At the instant of CT saturation (B) a differential quantity is produced
and the restraint quantity is reduced. In consequence, the operating point Idiff/Istab moves into the tripping area
(C).
On the contrary, the operating point (Idiff/Istab) moves immediately along the fault characteristic (D) when an
internal fault occurs since the restraint current will barely be higher then the differential current. Thus, once
the Idiff/Istab ratio exceeds the internal threshold value within a certain fixed minimum time, you can assume
that an internal fault has occurred.
CT saturation caused by external high current pass-through fault has an important feature, that is, a very high
restraint current is generated at the beginning. In other words, the operating point enters a characteristic
zone, all typical characteristics of which show up in case of external high current faults (that is, the so-called
“add-on stabilisation”). The add-on stabilisation is restricted by parameter I-ADD ON STAB. and Stage 1 trip-
ping characteristics (parameters BASE POINT 1 and SLOPE 1) (see Figure 2-44). The saturation indicator
makes its decision within the first quarter cycle after fault inception. When an external fault is detected, the
differential protection is blocked for an adjustable time. The block signal for differential protection is deacti-
vated as long as the operating point Idiff/Istab stays stably in the action zone (80 % of fault characteristic slope)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
for a period of time (at least 1 cycle). This allows to detect evolving faults in the protection zone reliably even
after an external fault with current transformer saturation.
Additional restraint features split-phase startup, and can determine, by setting relevant parameters, whether
to implement split-phase restraint alone or implement 3-phase cross restraint.
Identification of DC Component
Different transient characteristics between different current transformers may simulate differential currents at
the secondary side of CT. In this case, differential protection of the device automatically takes further stabilisa-
tion (restraint) measures. Since CT secondary circuits have different DC attenuation time constants, differen-
tial current are generated when pass-through current flows via the current transformer. This means that the
inherent DC attenuation time constants between CT secondary circuits are different, so that a different secon-
dary-side DC component is obtained when the same primary-side DC component flows through and is
converted by the current transformer. Thus, a DC component is generated in the differential current. This DC
component raises the differential-stage characteristics to 1 to 2 times the startup value within a short time.
Harmonic Restraint
When switching unloaded transformers or shunt reactors on a live busbar, high magnetizing (inrush) currents
may occur. These inrush currents produce differential quantities as they seem like single-end fed fault
currents. Also during paralleling of transformers, or an overexcitation of a power transformer, differential
quantities may occur due to magnetizing currents cause by increased voltage and/or decreased frequency.
The inrush current can amount to a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a considerable 2nd
harmonic content (double rated frequency) which is practically absent in the case of a short-circuit. If the 2nd
harmonic content exceeds a selectable threshold, trip is blocked.
For 7SJ686-L, besides the 2nd harmonic, another harmonic can be selected to cause blocking. A choice can be
made between the third and fifth harmonic.
Overexcitation of the transformer iron is characterized by the presence of odd harmonics in the current. Thus,
the third or fifth harmonic are suitable to detect such phenomena. But, as the third harmonic is often elimi-
nated in power transformers (for example, by the delta winding), the use of the fifth is more common.
Converter transformer also generates odd harmonic. However, such odd harmonic current is almost not
present during internal transformer faults.
The differential quantities are examined as to their harmonic content. Numerical filters are used to perform a
Fourier analysis of the differential currents. As soon as the harmonic contents exceed the set values, a
restraint of the respective phase evaluation is introduced. The filter algorithms are optimized with regard to
their transient behaviour such that additional measures for stabilisation during dynamic conditions are not
necessary.
Since the harmonic restraint operates individually per phase, the protection is fully operative even when, for
example, the transformer is switched onto a single-phase fault, whereby inrush currents may possibly be
present in one of the healthy phases. However, it is also possible to set the protection such that not only the
phase with inrush current exhibiting harmonic content in excess of the permissible value is restrained but also
the other phases of the differential stage are blocked (so called “crossblock function”). This crossblock can be
limited to a selectable duration.
Fast Unstabilized Trip with High-Current Faults

High-current faults in the protection zone may be cleared instantaneously without regard of the magnitude of
the restraint current, when the magnitude of the differential currents can exclude that it is an external fault. In
case of protected objects with high direct impedance (transformers, generators, series reactors), a threshold
can be found above which a through-fault current never can increase. This threshold (primary) is, for example,
for a power transformer.
The differential protection 7SJ686 provides such unstabilized high-current trip stage. This can operate even
when, for example, a considerable 2nd harmonic is present in the differential current caused by current trans-
former saturation by a DC component in the fault current which could be interpreted by the inrush restraint
function as an inrush current.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
This high-current stage evaluates the fundamental component of the currents as well as the instantaneous
values. Instantaneous value processing ensures fast tripping even in case the fundamental component of the
current is strongly reduced by current transformer saturation. Because of the possible DC offset after fault
inception, the instantaneous value stage operates only above twice the set threshold.
Increase of Pickup Value on Startup

The increase of pickup value is especially suited for motors. In contrast to the inrush current of transformers
the inrush current of motors is a traversing current. Differential currents, however, can emerge if current
transformers still contain different remanent magnetization before energization. Therefore, the transformers
are energized from different operation points of their hysteresis. Although differential currents are usually
small, they can be harmful if differential protection is set very sensitive.
An increase of the pickup value on startup provides additional security against overfunctioning when a non-
energized protected object is switched in. As soon as the restraint current of one phase has dropped below a
settable value I-REST. STARTUP, the pickup value increase is activated. The restraint current is twice the
traversing current in normal operation. Undershooting of the restraint current is therefore a criterion for the
non-energized protected object. The pickup value is now increased by a settable factor. The other branches of
differential quantities are shifted proportionally.
The return of the restraint current indicates the startup. After a settable time T START MAX the increase of
the characteristic is undone. If the current operating point Idiff/Istab is located near the fault characteristics (80
% of fault characteristic slope), protection still trips even before the maximum permissible starting time is
exceeded.
Tripping Characteristics
Figure 2-44 illustrates the complete tripping characteristic of the differential protection.
The branch a represents the sensitivity threshold of the differential protection and considers constant error
current, for example, magnetizing current.
Branch b represents the proportional restraint stage, and takes into consideration of current-proportional
errors which may result from transformation errors of the main CTs, the input CTs of the relay, or from erro-
neous current caused by the position of the tap changer of the voltage controller.
Branch c has a greater slope, which is mainly intended to avoid the influence brought about by current trans-
former saturation.
Branch d is the area of "Fast Unstabilized Trip with High-Current Faults". This differential high set trip does not
have proportional restraint or harmonic restraint. This is the operating range of differential protection without
restraint trip in case of serious fault.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_diff_protection_tripping characteristics, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-44 Tripping Characteristics of Differential Protection
The area of "Add-on stabilisation" is the operation area of the saturation indicator as described above under
margin "Add-on Stabilisation during External Fault".
Differential protection maps the calculated differential current Idiff and restraint current Istab to a certain oper-
ating point on the tripping characteristic plane. If this operating point is located in the tripping area, the
protection device issues a trip command. If the operating point Idiff/Istab is located near the fault characteristics
(80 % of fault characteristic slope), the protection device still issues a trip command even when the pickup
threshold is raised because of situations like additional restraint, motor startup or detected DC component,
etc.
Fault Detection Dropout

Normally, a differential protection does not need a "pickup" or "fault detection" function since the condition for
a fault detection is identical to the trip condition. But, 7SJ686-L provides like all SIPROTEC 4 devices a fault
detection function which has the task to define the fault inception instant for a number of further features:
Fault detection indicates the beginning of a fault event in the system. This is necessary to open the trip log
buffer and the memory for oscillographic fault record data. At the same time, this starting element also
controls the sequence of internal functions of the protection device. These internal functions are used for both
internal faults and external faults (for example, taking necessary measures for CT saturation, etc.).
Differential protection starts as long as the fundamental component of differential current reaches 85% of the
differential quantity set value or the restraint current reaches 85 % of the set parameter I-ADD ON STAB.
(see Figure 2-45). If the fast high-current stage used for high current faults is activated, the protection device
also issues a startup signal.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_diff_protection_start_up, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-45 Startup of Differential Protection
If the harmonic restraint is effective, the harmonic analysis is carried out (approx. one AC cycle) in order to
examine the stabilizing conditions. Otherwise, tripping occurs as soon as the tripping conditions are fulfilled
(shaded area in Figure 2-52 ).
In some special cases, the trip command can be delayed.
Figure 2-46 shows a simplified tripping logic.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_diff_protection_tripping logic, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-46 Tripping Logic of Differential Protection (Simplified Diagram)
Differential protection can return if no differential current is detected within 2 cycles. This means that differ-
ential protection can return when differential current drops below 70 % of the differential quantity set value or
other startup conditions are no longer satisfied.
If the trip command has not been issued, it is deemed that the fault has disappeared when differential protec-
tion returns.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
It is especially necessary to note that the differential trip command, once issued, is no longer affected by any
block signal (such as additional restraint, harmonic restraint, etc.). Its fallback condition only depends on
whether the fault has been removed.
The trip command, if issued, is maintained for a shortest duration. Parameter TMin TRIP CMD (address 210)
is set in the protection device general equipment data and is used for all protection functions in 7SJ686. The
trip command cannot be reset unless all preceding fallback conditions are satisfied.
2.7.2 Differential Protection of Transformer
Matching of Measured Values

In power transformers, generally, the secondary currents of the current transformers are not equal when a
current flows through the power transformer, but depend on the transformation ratio and the connection
group of the protected power transformer, and the rated currents of the current transformers at both sides of
the power transformer. The currents must, therefore, be matched in order to become comparable. Matching
to the various power transformer and current transformer ratios and of the phase displacement according to
the vector group of the protected transformer is performed purely mathematically. As a rule, external
matching transformers are not required.
All matching work performed for the transformer ratios and vector group forms of the protected transformer
as well as the rated currents at individual sides of the current transformer is carried out digitally, without the
need for an intermediate converter added externally.
The secondary current input into the protection device is correspondingly converted to the actual current at
each side of the power transformer. This is achieved by entering the rated transformer data, such as rated
power, rated voltage and rated primary current of the current transformers, into the protection device (see
"General Power System Data" and "3-Phase Current Transformer Data" under "Transformer Data"). Figure 2-47
shows an example of current amplitude matching. The primary rated current at winding side S1 (378 A) and
winding side S2 (1663 A) can be calculated based on the transformer rated apparent power (72 MVA) and
rated voltage at each side of the winding (110 kV and 25 kV). Since the primary rated current of the current
transformer is different from the rated current at each side of the power transformer, the secondary current
must be multiplied by wiring factors k1 and k2. Once matched, the current values at individual sides of the
power transformer are equal under normal circumstances.
[dw_current amplitude of 2-sided transformer, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-47 Example of Matching Current Values for Double Winding Power Transformer (Without Consid-
ering Phase Relationship)
For power transformers with more than 2 windings, the windings may have different capacity ratings. To
compare the currents of differential protection, all currents must be converted according to the winding (side)
with the maximum capacity rating. This apparent capacity is called the Rated Capacity of Protected Object.
Figure 2-48 is an example of a 3-winding power transformer. The rating of windings 1 (S1) and 2 (S2) is 72
MVA. The recommended setting is shown in Figure 2-47. However, the capacity rating of the third winding
(S3) is 16 MVA (such as auxiliary power supply), and the rated current of this winding (= side of the protected
object) is 924 A. On the other hand, the current at its own side must be connected to differential protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
for processing. Therefore, the rated current of this winding must refer to the maximum capacity rating of the
protected object, that is, 72 MVA. At this point, the calculated reference current rating (that is, the current at
rated capacity of the protected object, 72 MVA) is 4157 A. This is the reference value for the third winding.
These currents must be multiplied by the wiring factor k3.
[dw_current amplitude of 3-sided transformer, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-48 Matching of Current Values - Example of A 3-Winding Power Transformer (Without Consid-
ering Phase Relationship)
The protection device carries out automatic matching internally. During this matching process, use power
transformer nameplate data input into the protection device, such as rated apparent power, rated voltage,
and rated current at the primary side of the current transformer, etc. (See "General Power System Data" and
"3-Phase Current Transformer Data" under "Transformer Data"). Once the vector group numeral for current is
entered, the protection device can compare currents based on an internal corresponding fixed formula.
Different coefficient matrices have been defined inside the device. These matrices can reflect the differential
currents of windings at individual sides of the transformer. Different types of vector group numerals for
current can be entered into the protection device. It is worth noting that the neutral point grounding method
of the transformer winding is also very important.
Transformer with Isolated Starpoint

Figure 2-49 illustrates an example for a power transformer Yd5 (wye-delta with 150° phase displacement)
without any earthed starpoint. The figure shows the windings and the phasor diagrams of symmetrical
currents and, at the bottom, the matrix equations. The general form of these equations is as follows:
(Im)=k·(k)·(In)
(Im) Matrix of the matched currents IA, IB, IC

k Current amplitude matching constant factor
(K) Coefficient matrix, dependent on the vector group
(In) Measured current IL1, IL2, IL3 matrix
For the left (triangle) winding, the matched calculated currents IA, IB and IC are calculated from phase currents
IL1, IL2 and IL3. For the right side (star side), the matched calculated currents are equal to phase currents
(without considering current amplitude matching).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_Yd5, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-49 Example of Yd5 Transformer Vector Matching (Without Considering Current Amplitude)
Since there is no grounding point within the differential protection range, no zero-sequence currents are
generated inside the zone when an earth fault occurs outside the protection zone, regardless of system
grounding conditions. If there is a grounding point in the system or an earth fault occurs (2-point earth fault in
an ungrounded system), zero-sequence current flows through the measuring point when an earth fault occurs
in the protection zone. Therefore, zero-sequence current has nothing to do with the stability of differential
protection, because extra-zone earth fault does not generate intra-zone zero-sequence current.
However, if an intra-zone earth fault occurs, the zero-sequence currents flowing through the measuring point
from outside are all included in the differential quantity actually.
Transformer with Earthed Starpoint, No Zero-Current Connected (Zero-Sequence Elimination)

In many cases, however, there is no neutral point zero-sequence current transformer. The sum of currents
flowing in cannot be calculated, because there is no zero-sequence current ISP. To prevent the device from
calculating differential current, you must use the zero-sequence elimination method to remove the zero-
sequence component in the current at the output side (-IL3 = -3 · I0).
Figure 2-50 is a vector diagram of YNd5 transformer with star side grounded.
At the left side of Figure 2-50, the zero-sequence currents cancel out each other because of the calculation of
the current differences. This complies with the fact that zero sequence current is not possible outside of the
delta winding. At the right side, if no neutral point zero-sequence current is inserted, this zero-sequence
current must be eliminated. In this way, the matrix equation can be found, such as calculating IA:
1/3 · (2 IL1 – 1 IL2 – 1 IL3) = 1/3 · (3 IL1 – IL1 – IL2 – IL3) = 1/3· (3 IL1 – 3I0) = (IL1 – I0).
Zero sequence current elimination achieves that fault currents which flow via the transformer during earth
faults in the network in case of an earth point in the protection zone (transformer starpoint or starpoint
former by neutral earth reactor) are rendered harmless without any special external measures. For example,
refer to Figure 2-50: Because of the earthed starpoint, a zero sequence current occurs on the right side during
a network fault but not on the left side. Comparison of the phase currents, without zero sequence current
elimination, would cause a wrong result (current difference in spite of an external fault).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_Ynd5, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-50 Example of YNd5 Transformer Vector Matching (Without Considering Current Amplitude)
Figure 2-51 shows an example of an earth fault on the delta side outside the protection zone if an earthed
starpoint former (zigzag winding) is installed within the protection zone. In this arrangement, a zero sequence
current occurs on the right side but not on the left, as above. If the starpoint former were outside the protec-
tion zone (i.e. CTs between power transformer and starpoint former) the zero sequence current would not
pass through the measuring point (CTs) and would not have any harmful effect.
[dw_ext_fault_earth, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-51 Diagram of Extra-Zone Earth Fault When A Grounding Interstar Transformer Is Installed within
The Differential Protection Zone of The Transformer
The disadvantage of the zero-sequence elimination method is that the sensitivity of differential protection is
reduced significantly (only 2/3) in case of intra-zone earth fault, because the zero-sequence current has
reached 1/3 of the earth fault current. Therefore, zero-sequence elimination is not used for ungrounded trans-
formers (see Figure 2-49). If the neutral point of the transformer is grounded through the discharge gap, the
corresponding winding should be set to Solid Earthed (parameters 313 STARPNT SIDE 1, 323
STARPNT SIDE 2, 333 STARPNT SIDE 3 and 343 STARPNT SIDE 4).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.7.3 Setting Notes
Differential protection is available only when parameter 112 DIFF. PROT. is set to Enabled in device
configuration. Otherwise, you can set it to Disabled.
Parameters in address 5701 DIFF. PROT. is used to switch the ON/OFF conditions of differential protection
function, including ON, OFF or Block Relay for Trip Commands alone.
The permissible range of CT adaptation coefficient is 0.01 to 20.00, beyond which "Fault in Configuration /
Setting" is deemed and differential protection is blocked.
Neutral Point Grounding Type

If the transformer with grounded neutral point has no zero-sequence current transformer, the zero-sequence
current is eliminated automatically to prevent false action of protection in case of extra-zone earth fault.
Tripping Characteristic Differential Current

All parameters of tripping characteristics are set in addresses 5721 to 5763. The meanings of different
settings are explained in Figure 2-52 . The numbers on different line segments on trip characteristics represent
setting addresses.
Parameter 5721 I-DIFF> refers to the pickup threshold of differential protection. This is the total fault
current flowing into the protected object, regardless of how the fault current is distributed between individual
sides. The rated current of the protected object is used as the reference for the startup value. For transformer
protection, the setting can be set quite sensitive (the default setting is 0.20 I/InO). For reactor or motor
protection, the sensitivity can be set even higher if the characteristics of current transformers at individual
sides are similar or identical. If the rated current of the current transformer is significantly different from the
rated current of the protected object, or if there are multiple current measuring points, very large measure-
ment errors may be generated.
Parameter 5731 I-DIFF>> refers to the high set trip setting of differential protection. Differential high set
trip is not restricted by restraint current and harmonic restraint.
[dw_diff_protection_tripping characteristics_2, 1, en_GB]

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Proportional restraint tripping characteristics consist of 2 broken lines. The first segment of broken lines is
determined by parameter 5742 BASE POINT 1 and parameter 5741 SLOPE 1. This branch covers current-
proportional errors. These are mainly errors of the main current transformers and, in case of power trans-
formers with tap changers, differential currents which occur due to the transformer regulating range.
The ratio of differential current generated in the latter case is proportional to the range of voltage control. See
Transformer Rated Data 49 for relevant data.
The second branch produces a higher stabilization in the range of high currents which may lead to current
transformer saturation. The second segment of broken lines is determined by parameter 5744 BASE POINT
2 and parameter 5743 SLOPE 2. The stability of the protection can be influenced by these settings. A higher
slope results in a higher stability.
Trip Delay
In special cases it may be advantageous to delay the trip signal of the protection. For this, an additional delay
can be set. When differential protection has detected an internal fault, the delay timer 5726 T I-DIFF> is
activated. Parameter 5736 T I-DIFF>> is used to set differential high set trip delay without restraint. A sepa-
rate trip delay is set for each differential stage of each phase. The dropout delay is equal to the minimum dura-
tion of the trip command, which is used for all protection functions of the protection device. All time settings
refer to additional trip command delay values, without including the inherent action time (measurement time,
fallback time, etc.) of protection functions.
All time settings refer to additional trip command delay values, without including the inherent action time
(measurement time, fallback time, etc.) of protection functions.
Add-on Stabilisation
If a very high pass-through current is generated in case of extra-zone fault, the additional restraint function is
activated automatically. Parameter 5761 I-ADD ON STAB. is used to activate the additional restraint func-
tion. The rated current of the protected object is used as the reference for this setting. Its slope is the same as
that of tripping characteristic broken line b. Note that the restraint current is the arithmetic sum of individual
currents flowing into the protected object, that is, 2 times the pass-through current. This additional restraint
function does not affect differential high set trip.
When an extra-zone fault is detected, the maximum duration of additional restraint is set based on the
number of cycles of the AC signal, that is, parameter 5762 T ADD ON-STAB.. Once the operating point Idiff/
Istab has stayed stably in the action zone (80 % of fault characteristic slope) for a period of time (at least 1
cycle), differential protection immediately deactivates differential protection block even though parameter
5762 T ADD ON-STAB. has not timed out at this moment.
The additional restraint function features split-phase operation. However, it can block differential protection of
3 phases at the same time (the so-called cross block). Parameter 5763 CROSSB. ADD ON is used to define
the action time of cross block function, and is set based on number of cycles of the AC signal. Setting it to 0
cycle indicates that cross block is not enabled. At this point, only this phase is blocked. Otherwise, all 3 phases
are blocked. In this case, it is recommended to use the same setting as parameter 5762. If it is set to ∞, the
cross block function is always valid as long as any one phase has additional restraint.
Harmonic Restraint
The 2nd harmonic inrush restraint function can be switched to OFFor ON via parameter 5706 INRUSH
2.HARM.. It is based on 2nd harmonic of excitation inrush. Parameter 5771 2. HARMONIC is used to set the
ratio of 2nd harmonic to fundamental component in differential current. Its default setting I2fN/IfN generally
does not have to be changed. In some special cases, if the inrush is very low when the transformer is acti-
vated, the above-mentioned parameters can be set to be smaller. Harmonic restraint does not affect differen-
tial high set trip.
The so-called Cross Block can also be set for 2nd harmonic restraint. In other words, all 3 phases of differ-
ential protection IDIFF> are blocked as long as the harmonic content of one phase exceeds the setting. Param-
eter 5772 CROSSB. 2. HARM is used to define the action time of cross block function, and is set based on
number of cycles of the AC signal. Setting it to 0 cycle (the default setting is 3 cycles) indicates that cross block
is not enabled. At this point, only this phase is blocked. Otherwise, all 3 phases are blocked. In this case, it is

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
recommended to use the same setting as parameter 5762. If it is set to ∞, the cross block function is always
valid as long as harmonic is detected in any one phase.
In addition to 2nd harmonic, 7SJ686-L also offers other higher-order harmonic restraint options. Parameter
5707 RESTR. n.HARM. is used to deactivate higher-order harmonic restraint or activate 3. Harmonic
or 5. Harmonic.
The steady-state overexcitation of the transformer mainly characterised of higher-order odd harmonics. Both
3rd harmonic and 5th harmonic are suitable for detecting overexcitation. Since 3rd harmonic is eliminated
from the transformer (such as the triangle-side winding), 5th harmonic is used generally.
Converter transformer also generates higher-order odd harmonic, which, however, does not exist generally in
case of internal short circuit.
Parameter 5776 n. HARMONIC is used to set the ratio of higher-order harmonic to fundamental component
in differential current. For example, 5th harmonic, if used to prevent differential tripping in case of trans-
former overexcitation, is generally set to 30 % (default setting).
The n-th harmonic restraint features split-phase operation. The so-called Cross Block can also be set for it.
In other words, all 3 phases of differential protection IDIFF> are blocked as long as the harmonic content of 1
phase exceeds the setting. Parameter 5777 CROSSB. n.HARM is used to define the action time of cross block
function, and is set based on number of cycles of the AC signal. Setting it to 0 cycle (the default setting is 3
cycles) indicates that cross block is not enabled. At this point, only this phase is blocked. Otherwise, all 3
phases are blocked. If it is set to ∞, the cross block function is always valid as long as harmonic is detected in
any one phase.
Parameter 5778 IDIFFmax n.HM is used to define the differential current value of higher-order harmonic
restraint. The n-th harmonic restraint becomes invalid if the differential current is greater than setting 5778.
NOTE
i Current values I/InO in the following setting list always refer to the reference rated current of the protected
object. The current value I/INS refers to the rated current at a certain side of the protected object.
2.7.4 Settings

112 DIFF. PROT. Disabled Enabled Only applicable to 7SJ686-H/L
Enabled
112 DIFF. PROT. Diff. Prot Diff. Prot Only applicable to 7SJ686-C
Mag. Bal. Prot
Disabled
5701 DIFF. PROT. OFF ON
ON
5705 INC.CHAR.START OFF OFF Only applicable to 7SJ686-C/H
ON (reactor)
5706 INRUSH 2.HARM. OFF ON Only applicable to 7SJ686-L/H (2-
ON side transformer)
5707 RESTR. n.HARM. OFF OFF
3. Harmonic
5. Harmonic
5708 I-DIFF> MON. OFF ON
ON
5721 I-DIFF> 0.05 .. 2.00 I/InO 0.20 I/InO
5726 T I-DIFF> 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec
5731 I-DIFF>> 0.5 .. 35.0 I/InO; ∞ 7.5 I/InO
5736 T I-DIFF>> 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

5741 SLOPE 1 0.10 .. 0.50 0.25
5742 BASE POINT 1 0.00 .. 2.00 I/InO 0.00 I/InO
5743 SLOPE 2 0.25 .. 0.95 0.50
5744 BASE POINT 2 0.00 .. 10.00 I/InO 2.50 I/InO
5751 I-REST. STARTUP 0.00 .. 2.00 I/InO 0.10 I/InO Only applicable to 7SJ686-C/H
5752 START-FACTOR 1.0 .. 2.0 1.0 (reactor)
5753 T START MAX 0.0 .. 180.0 sec 5.0 sec
5761 I-ADD ON STAB. 2.00 .. 15.00 I/InO 4.00 I/InO
5762 T ADD ON-STAB. 2 .. 250 Cycle; ∞ 15 Cycle
5763 CROSSB. ADD ON 2 .. 1000 Cycle; 0; ∞ 15 Cycle
5771 2. HARMONIC 10 .. 80 % 15 % Only applicable to 7SJ686-L/H (2-
5772 CROSSB. 2. HARM 2 .. 1000 Cycle; 0; ∞ 3 Cycle side transformer)
5776 n. HARMONIC 10 .. 80 % 30 %
5777 CROSSB. n.HARM 2 .. 1000 Cycle; 0; ∞ 0 Cycle
5778 IDIFFmax n.HM 0.5 .. 20.0 I/InO 1.5 I/InO

Informa-
tion
5603 >Diff BLOCK SP
5615 Diff OFF OUT
5616 Diff BLOCKED OUT
5617 Diff ACTIVE OUT
5620 Diff Adap.fact. OUT
5631 Diff picked up OUT
5644 Diff 2.Harm L1 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-L/H (2-side transformer)
5645 Diff 2.Harm L2 OUT
5646 Diff 2.Harm L3 OUT
5647 Diff n.Harm L1 OUT
5651 Diff Bl. exF.L1 OUT
5657 DiffCrosBlk 2HM OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-L/H (2-side transformer)
5658 DiffCrosBlk nHM OUT
5660 DiffCrosBlk exF OUT
5666 DiffStrtInChaL1 OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-C/H (reactor)
5667 DiffStrtInChaL2 OUT
5668 DiffStrtInChaL3 OUT
5671 Diff TRIP OUT
5672 Diff TRIP L1 OUT
5681 Diff> L1 OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
5682 Diff> L2 OUT
5683 Diff> L3 OUT
5684 Diff>> L1 OUT
5685 Diff>> L2 OUT
5686 Diff>> L3 OUT
5691 Diff> TRIP OUT
5692 Diff>> TRIP OUT
5701 Diff L1: VI
5702 Diff L2: VI
5703 Diff L3: VI
5704 Res. L1: VI
5705 Res. L2: VI
5706 Res. L3: VI
5733 Diff CT-M1: VI
5734 Diff CT-M2: VI
5735 Diff CT-M3: VI Only applicable to 7SJ686-L
5736 Diff CT-M4: VI
5742 Diff DC L1 OUT
5743 Diff DC L2 OUT
5744 Diff DC L3 OUT
5745 Diff DC InCha OUT
17983 DIFF. ON IntSP
18539 >Enable diff SP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.8 Current Comparison Protection
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-M!

For the setting of 620, select CCP. Prot.
This function is applicable to 110 kV and lower power transmission lines. The the maximum line length
supported is 24 km.
The phase comparison line differential protection function identifies whether the fault is inside or outside the
protection zone by comparing the current signs at both ends.
When the line is operating properly or a fault occurs outside the protection zone, the currents flowing through
the devices at both ends differ by 180°, as shown in the following figure:
[dw_current sign_normal or fault out of area, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-53 Current Sign under Normal Operation or when a Fault occurs outside the Protection Zone
When a fault occurs inside the protection zone, the currents flowing through the devices at both ends have
the same phase, as shown in the following figure:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_current sign_fault in area, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-54 Current Sign when a Fault Occurs inside the Protection Zone
According to the analysis, an internal fault can be strictly distinguished from an external fault or normal opera-
tion by comparing the current signs collected by the devices at both ends. When the current signs from the
devices at both ends are consistent, the differential protection trips.
NOTE
i The phase displacement between currents at both ends can be checked in the device menu. In case of
normal operation, the phase displacement between the two ends is 180°. When a fault occurs in the
protection zone, the phase displacement between the two ends is 0°.
2.8.2 Setting Notes
Dynamic Trip Threshold

The parameter 2303 DIFF Idyn> is used to set the pickup threshold of the jump quantity. When the differ-
ence between the current sampling value and the sampling value before two cycles is greater than this
threshold, the differential protection is activated for phase comparison.
Setting principles: Lines with a length less than 10 km can be set as 0.2 IN, where IN is the rated CT current.
Lines with a length greater than 10 km must be set as 3 to 4 times the line charge capacitance, but must not
be less than 0.2 IN.
The parameter 2302 DIFF I min is set as 0.2 IN and may be set onsite according to the actual situation.
Generally, it must be considered in conjunction with 2303 DIFF Idyn>, but must not exceed the maximum
rated current of transformers in the system connected to the protected line.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Dynamic Trip Threshold at Line Closure

Parameter 2304 DIFF Idyn cls> is used to set the pickup threshold of the jump quantity when the line is
switch-on. When the line is charged, the setting 2304 is enabled in two cycles instead of 2303.
Setting principles: This setting must not be less than 2303 DIFF Idyn>.
Steady Pickup Threshold

When the current amplitude exceeds the 2305 DIFF Isteady>, the differential protection is activated for
phase comparison.
Setting principles: This setting must be no less than 1.4 times the line load current.
[lo_steady_sudden_start up, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-55 Pickup Logic of Steady Quantity and Jump Quantity

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_sign comparison, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-56 Symbol Comparison Logic
[lo_Optical fiber diff. protection start up and tripping, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-57 Pickup and Trip Logic of Line Differential Protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The power system parameters 204 and 205 are used to set the rated primary value and secondary value of the
line CT.
The difference between the rated CT primary values at both sides must not exceed 8 times. When 8 times are
exceeded, 18574 Diff CT Rat.Err is prompted.
Note:
When the rated CT primary values at both ends of the line are inconsistent, ensure that the devices at both
ends have the same primary pickup thresholds. The secondary pickup thresholds after conversion can be
different.
For example: When the CT transformer ratio at the A end of the line is 400: 1, the CT transformer ratio at the B
end of the line is 600: 1, the capacitive current of the line is 40 A, and the rated load current of the line is 300
A, then:
Table 2-5 For the Device at the A End:
204 CT PRIMARY set to 400 A

205 CT SECONDARY set to 1 A
2303 DIFF Idyn> set to 3 ⋅ 40/400=0.3 A
2304 DIFF Idyn> set to 3 ⋅ 40/400=0.3 A
2305 DIFF Isteady> set to 1.4 ⋅ 300/400=1.05 A
Table 2-6 For the Device at the B End:
204 CT PRIMARY set to 600 A

205 CT SECONDARY set to 1 A
2303 DIFF Idyn> set to 3 ⋅ 40/600=0.2 A
2304 DIFF Idyn> set to 3 ⋅ 40/600=0.2 A
2305 DIFF Isteady> set to 1.4 ⋅ 300/600=0.7 A
2.8.3 Inter-Trip
For one side with weak infeed or without infeed, in case of an internal fault, activation of differential protec-
tion for devices on the weak infeed side may fail since the current at this side cannot reach the pickup
threshold. In order to avoid this phenomenon, you can use the inter-trip function to receive the differential
protection trip signal from the remote side to achieve full-line quick-trip.
[lo_intertrip transmission, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-58 Sending Logic of Inter-Trip
[lo_intertrip acceptance, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-59 Receiving Logic of Inter-Trip

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.8.4 Differential Protection Test Mode
When the test mode of differential protection is enabled, the device at this end assumes that the current at
the remote side is 0 and only calculates the current at this side. The differential protection is tripped when the
current exceeds the pickup threshold of the differential protection. The accuracy of dynamic and steady
thresholds can be verified under the test mode.
The test mode can be enabled in the following ways:
• Device panel: Menu > Control > Tagging > Set > Test Digg.
• Binary input: 18555 Diff: >Set Teststate of Diff. protection and 18556 Diff: >Reset Test-
state of Diff. protec.
• DIGSI: Control > Tagging > Diff: Set Teststate of Diff. protection
[lo_Optical fiber diff. prot. test mode, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-60 Line Differential Protection Test Mode
2.8.5 Self-Looping Mode
A self-looping mode is supported for differential protection. In the self-looping mode, differential protection
and inter-trip are blocked.
When the self-looping mode is enabled, messages 18590 PDI own data received and 18603 Equal
IDs in constellation are sent.
2.8.6 CT Broken Wire Blocking
CT broken wire can block the differential protection function by phase. When CT broken wire blocking differ-
ential protection is selected, if the device at one side detects CT broken wire, it blocks the differential elements
of the phase with broken wire and send a blocking message to the device at the remote side. But the differen-
tial elements of the phases without broken wire can still work properly.
The parameter 4701 CT BROKEN WIRE is used to set the operation logic of CT broken wire. The option BWD
Al and Blk means that the differential protection function is blocked by a CT broken wire signal; the option
BWD Al and ABlk means that the broken wire blocking is automatically unlocked when the phase current is
greater than 4716 I< BWD. The option BWD Al only means that only a signal is sent without blocking
differential protection in case of CT broken wire.
2.8.7 Remote Trip and Remote Transmission
The remote trip and remote transmission functions of the device are not controlled by the line differential
protection function, and can work properly even when line differential protection is disabled.
Remote Trip
When the parameter 2450 Teleprot. DTT is set to ON and 2451 TRIP SEND is set to YES, if the binary
input 18584>Teleprot: Intertrip signal input is valid, the remote trip signal sending is activated.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
After the device at the remote end receives the remote trip signal, 18585 Teleprot: General TRIP is
triggered when its parameter 2452 TRIP RECEIVE is set to TRIP.
[lo_distance trip_sending, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-61 Sending Logic of Remote Trip
[lo_Distance trip_acceptance, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-62 Receiving Logic of Remote Trip
Remote Transmission
The device provides up to 32 remote signals.
2.8.8 Fibre Optic Data Interface and Differential Topology
You can set the identification codes for the two end devices with the parameters 2640 ID OF MASTER and
2641 ID OF SLAVE respectively, and select whether the local device is used as a master or slave with the
parameter 2642.
The master device can send time synchronisation commands to the slave device.
The values of the parameters 2640 ID OF MASTER and 2641 ID OF SLAVE must be the same at both ends.
Otherwise, 18594 Device tables are unequal is prompted.
When devices at both ends are set as master or slave simultaneously, 18603 Equal IDs in constella-
tion is prompted.
NOTE
i When the fibre optic communication is interrupted, the parameter 2536 Rst.Remote Sign can be used
to determine whether the remote signal remains the original state or is reset.
If the parameter 2536 Rst.Remote Sign is set to NO, the remote signal remains the original state when
the fibre optic communication is interrupted.
If the parameter 2536 Rst.Remote Sign is set to YES, the remote signal resets when the fibre optic
communication is interrupted.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.8.9 Line Differential Protection Measurement Value

Informa-
tion
18749 IL1_Local= MV IL1_Local (% of nominal current)
18750 IL1_Remote= MV IL1_Remote (% of nominal current)
18751 Phi IL1= MV Angle IL1_remote <-> IL1_local
2.8.10 Fibre Optic Communication Interface Measurement Values

Informa-
tion
18766 Send Tel.min= MV Send telegrams in the last minute=
18777 Recei.Tel.min= MV Receive telegrams in the last minute=
18767 Good Rec.min= MV Good received telegrams in the last min=
18768 Bad Rec. min= MV Bad received telegrams in the last min=
18778 Lost Rec.min= MV Lost telegrams in the last minute=
18769 SendTel.hour= MV Send telegrams in the last hour=
18779 Recei.Tel.hour= MV Receive telegrams in the last hour=
18770 GoodRec.hour= MV Good received telegrams inthe last hour=
18771 Bad Rec.hour= MV Bad received telegrams in the last hour=
18780 Lost Rec.hour= MV Lost telegrams in the last hour=
18763 OutputPower FO= MV Output power of the FO-Interface=
18764 Input Power FO= MV Input power of the FO-Interface=
18765 Budget FO = MV Budget of the FO-Interface=
18775 PDI FO: TEMP = MV PDI FO: temperatur =
18776 PDI FO: BIAS = MV PDI FO: BIAS current =
18744 PI FO TD MV Prot. Interf. FO: Transmission delay
18745 FO A/m MV Prot. Interf. FO: Availability per min.
18746 FO A/h MV Prot. Interf. FO: Availability per hour
2.8.11 Settings

Line Differential Protection
292 Remote CT Pri. 10 .. 50000 A 600 A Power System
2301 CCP-Prot. OFF ON
ON
2302 DIFF I min 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.20 A
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 1.00 A

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

2303 DIFF Idyn> 1A 0.20 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 0.33 A
5A 1.00 .. 100.00 A; ∞ 1.65 A
2304 DIFF Idyn cls> 1A 0.20 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 0.33 A
5A 1.00 .. 100.00 A; ∞ 1.65 A
2305 DIFF Isteady> 1A 0.20 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A
5A 1.00 .. 100.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
2320 Send Inter-Trip YES YES
NO
2321 Rec. Inter-Trip TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
CT Broken Wire Supervision
4701 CT BROKEN WIRE OFF OFF
BWD Al and Blk
BWD Al and ABlk
BWD Al only
4714 T BWD delay 0.2 .. 180.0 sec 5.0 sec
4716 I< BWD 0.500 .. 20.000 I/In 2.500 I/In
Remote Trip
2450 Teleprot. DTT ON ON Teleprot. direct transfer trip
OFF
2451 TRIP SEND NO YES State of transmit. the tele-
YES trip command
2452 TRIP RECEIVE TRIP TRIP Reaction if tele-trip
Alarm Only command is receiv.
2453 TD-TRIP BI 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec Delay for tele-trip via
binary input
2454 TD-TRIP PROL BI 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec Prolongation for tele-trip
via bin.input
Fibre Optic Differential Topology
2640 ID OF MASTER 1 .. 63 1
2641 ID OF SLAVE 1 .. 63 2
2642 LOCAL RELAY Master Master
Slave
Fibre Optic Data Interface
2530 TD-DATA DISTURB 0.05 .. 2.00 sec 0.10 sec
2531 TD-DATAFAIL 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 6.00 sec
2533 PDI FO TER 0.5 .. 20.0 % 1.0 %
2534 PDI FO level -30 .. -10 dBm -28 dBm
2535 PDI FO T-DELAY 0.1 .. 30.0 ms 10.0 ms
2536 Rst.Remote Sign YES YES
NO

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18554 >Block diff SP
18555 >Test Diff. ON SP
18556 >Test Diff. OFF SP
18557 Diff is blocked OUT
18558 Diff is OFF OUT
18559 Diff active OUT
18560 Diff trip OUT
18561 Diff pickup OUT
18562 Diff pickup L1 OUT
18574 Diff CT Rat.Err OUT
18575 Diff rcv. blk OUT
18576 Diff send blk OUT
18577 Diff trip send OUT
18578 Diff trip rcv. OUT
18579 Diff inter-trip OUT
18580 Test Diff. OUT
18581 TestDiff.remote OUT
18582 TestDiffONoffBI OUT
605.4032 Test Diff. IntSP
30054 Broken wire OFF OUT
251 Broken wire OUT
18736 Broken Iwire L1 OUT
18739 ext.Brk.Wire L1 OUT
Remote Trip
18584 >Tele trip SP
18585 Tele Gen. TRIP OUT
18586 Tele: Received OUT
18587 Tele: Sending OUT
18606 >Rem. Signal 1 SP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18622 Rem.Sig 1 Rx OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18588 >PDI FO stop SP
18589 Wrong Firmware OUT
18590 PDI own data RX OUT
18591 PDI Data fault OUT
18592 PDI FO failure OUT
18593 DT inconsistent OUT
18594 DT unequal OUT
18597 PDI FO TER OUT
18598 PDI synchron OUT
18599 PDI TD alarm OUT
18600 PDI TD jump OUT
18602 Topol complete OUT
18603 Equal IDs OUT
17980 CCP SW. ON IntSP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.9 Vector Line Differential Protection
NOTE

Set the parameter 620 Diff.Type to VLD.Prot.
Line differential protection is based on Kirchhoff’s current law. For this, one device must be installed at each
end of the zone to be protected. The devices exchange their measured quantities via communications links
and compare the received currents with their own. In case of an internal fault the allocated circuit breaker is
tripped.
This protection function supports both line differential between both ends and line differential between trans-
former groups.
This protection is applicable to the power transmission lines with 110 kV and lower. The maximum line length
supported is 24 km.
The current flowing from the bus to the line is positive. In the absence of any line faults and presence of an
external fault, as shown in Figure 2-63, when the CT ratios at both ends are consistent, the currents IM and IN
flowing into and out of the protected zone in the line L have the same amplitude value and opposite phases.
The differential current flowing into the protection device at each side is 0, and the protection function does
not trip.
[dw_exter_fault, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-63 Fault outside the Protected Zone
When an internal fault occurs in the line, as shown in Figure 2-64, the same phase currents IM+IN, which are
proportional to the fault current, flow into the protection devices at both sides. When the differential current
is greater than the restraint current, the protection function trips.
[dw_inter_fault, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-64 Fault inside the Protected Zone

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.9.2 Pickup Element
The differential protection is equipped with pickup elements. Only when the pickup elements at both sides are
enabled, the differential protection function sends trip. Meanwhile, in order to enable the normal pickup at
the weak-infeed side, an auxiliary pickup element is added.
When any of the following conditions is satisfied, the differential pickup element picks up.
• The current pickup elements at both sides pick up.
• The current pickup element at one side picks up, and the auxiliary pickup element at the other side picks
up.
The main pickup criteria include the phase current jump pickup element and the zero-sequence overcurrent
pickup element. The pickup element picks up when any of the current pickup conditions are met. The pickup
conditions are as follows:
• The phase current jump pickup element picks up.

2940 I Jmp.Thresh. is set to circumvent the maximum current fluctuation under normal load. Gener-
ally, it is set as 0.2 In. When the current pickup element picks up, it will be expanded by 7 sec to release
differential protection. It is recommended to set both sides of the line according to the same primary
current.
• The zero-sequence overcurrent element picks up.

2943 IE starter is set to circumvent the maximum zero-sequence unbalance current. The zero-
sequence pickup element picks up. It is recommended to set both sides of the line according to the same
primary current.
For the auxiliary pickup element, the voltage and breaker position are added as auxiliary criteria. The Auxiliary
pickup element picks up when any of auxiliary conditions are met. The pickup conditions are as follows:
• The low voltage pickup element picks up.

When the phase-to-ground voltage is below 85 % of the rated phase-to-ground voltage, the low voltage
pickup element picks up.
• The circuit breaker is open.
NOTE
i To ensure proper operation of the weak infeed function of the line, connect the device to a voltage. When
no voltage is connected, the device determines that the weak infeed condition at this side is always met,
and the differential protection can trip when a current pickup element picks up at the remote side.
When the pickup elements at both sides pick up, the differential protection is enabled to comply with the
relevant standards and common practices of line differential protection in China. If this function is not
used, set 2940 I Jmp.Thresh. to 0 at both sides to put the device into the pure differential trip mode.
2.9.3 Current Differential Protection
Current differential protection includes phase current differential protection (Differential protection stage 1
and Differential protection stage 2) and restricted earth fault protection.
Phase Current Differential Protection

Consider the following factors for phase current differential protection:
• Selection of restraint quantity

In practice, the differential current flowing into the protected zone is not zero under normal circum-
stances due to the influence of transformer excitation current, measurement errors of current trans-
formers at both sides and charging capacitor current. In order to ensure the reliable operation of differen-
tial protection function, the effects of these factors must be taken into account.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• Charging current
Under normal circumstances, the capacitor current and the excitation current can be treated as
constants. The effects of these factors must be taken into account for settings.
• Current transformer errors

CT errors can be calculated with the approximated current transformer error curve (Figure 2-65). The CT
error parameter is set on the Power System Data 1 > CT Data page. The device at each side calculates
the error at the local end and sends it to the remote end. The sum of the current transformer errors of the
devices at both sides is included in the restraint current as one of the restraint quantities.
[dw_CT_error_curve, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-65 Approximated Current Transformer Error Curve
• Other effects
The errors resulting from fibre optic transmission delays and sampling asynchrony are compensated by
the time difference method.
The restraint quantity is adaptively adjusted with the maximum possible error, resulting in a high sensi-
tivity of differential protection. For high-resistance earth faults, the differential protection can trip reliably
even with large load currents.
• Inrush current limitation

When there is a power transformer in the protection area, a large inrush current occurs when the trans-
former is switch-on. This current generates a differential current, causing a false action of the protection
device. The protection uses the waveform asymmetry principle to identify the inrush current and prevent
any false differential output.
Waveform asymmetry inrush current limitations use the logic of 2-phase blocking 3-phase. When the 2-phase
asymmetry exceeds the permissible asymmetry, the differential protection is blocked. To prevent the differen-
tial protection from being mistakenly blocked by the logic of 2-phase blocking 3-phase in case of an internal
earth fault, the differential protection is automatically unlocked in such cases using the maximum phase prin-
ciple.
When the parameter 114 TRANSFORMER is set to YES, the waveform asymmetry inrush current limitation
function is enabled; when the parameter is set to NO, the waveform asymmetry inrush current limitation
feature is disabled.
The action equation of the Differential protection stage 2 is as follows:
[fo_diff. two-stage_Idiff, 1, --_--]
[fo_diff. two-stage_Irest, 1, --_--]

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Where,
Idiff> Pickup value
δIct-err-lo The CT current error at the local side, with its value equal to the CT error ⋅ phase current
δIct-err-re The CT current error at the remote side, with its value equal to the CT error ⋅ phase current
The value of CT error is taken according to the following principle:

For Differential protection stage 1, the setting 303 E% K_ALF_N is used.
For Differential protection stage 2, when the phase current is lower than the setting of the parameter 300
K_ALF/K_ALF_N, the setting of the parameter 306 E% ALF/ALF_N is used; when the phase current is
greater than the setting of the parameter 300 K_ALF/K_ALF_N, the setting of the parameter 303 E%
K_ALF_N is used.
δIsignal-err The current error corresponding to the asymmetry of the signal waveform
Its value is calculated in real time based on the asymmetry of the current waveform, and is 0 under normal
circumstances.
δIsync-err Synchronous current error, automatically adjusted by the device based on sampling asyn-
chrony
Example of calculation in case of symmetric waveform (δIsignal-err = δIsync-err = 0):
• Calculation of restraint current for lines without transformers:

When the current flowing through the line is 1 A:
[fo_diff. two-stage_Irest, 1, --_--]
[fo_braking current_Irest2, 1, --_--]

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• Calculation of differential current and restraint current for lines with transformers:
[dw_example of calculation model for line transformer, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-66 Example of calculation model for lines with transformers:
YN side:
[fo_line with transformer_YN, 1, --_--]
d11 side:
[fo_line with transformer_d11, 1, --_--]
Taking phase L1 as an example, the differential current and restraint current are calculated as follows:
Differential current:
[fo_diff. current_IDiff(A), 1, --_--]
Restraint current:
[fo_Braking current_Ict-err(L1), 1, --_--]
[fo_Braking current_Ict-err(I1), 1, --_--]

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[fo_Braking current_Ict-err(A), 1, --_--]
Restraint current at the high-voltage side S1:
[fo_Braking current_S1_IRest(A), 1, --_--]
Restraint current at the low-voltage side S2:
[fo_Braking current_S2_IRest(a), 1, --_--]
NOTE
i CT polarity of devices at both sides is selected as towards the line.
I(A, B, C) Calculated currents at the high-voltage side S1 after matching IA, IB and IC
I(a, b, c) Calculated currents at the low-voltage side S2 after matching Ia, Ib and Ic
I(L1, L2, L3) Measured currents at the high-voltage side S1 IL1, IL2 and IL3, with the currents applied
in the test being 1 A ∠0°, 1 A∠ 240°, and 1 A ∠120°
I(l1, l2, l3) Measured currents at the low-voltage side S2 Il1, Il2 and Il3, with the currents applied in
the test being 1 A ∠0°, 1 A∠ 240°, and 1 A ∠120°
δIct-err(L1, L2, L3) CT current error of phase L1, L2, and L3 at the high-voltage side S1
δIct-err(I1, I2, I3) CT current error of phase L1, L2, and L3 at the low voltage side S2:
δIct-err(A, B, C) CT error of phase L1, L2, and L3
Idiff> is the differential setting threshold, and must be set to circumvent the maximum unbalanced current
during normal operation.
The pickup characteristic of differential protection (Figure 2-67) is a 45° line that satisfies Idiff = Irest. When the
calculated differential current is greater than the pickup threshold and the maximum measurement error, the
differential protection picks up.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_diff_pro_char_curve, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-67 Differential Protection Pickup Characteristic Curve
The principle of charge comparison phase-segregated differential is applied for Differential protection stage 1.
The advantage is that it allows quick pickup when the fault current is relatively large.
The current integration equation is as follows:
[fo_current integration_Q, 1, --_--]
The integration interval is from t1 to t2, taking 1/4 cycle which is 5 ms.
The calculated charge Q is a scalar. The calculated charges of devices at both sides are synchronously
corrected and summed up as the respective differential quantities of both sides. When an internal fault occurs,
there is a charge differential quantity. When the charge differential quantity is greater than the restraint quan-
tity, the differential protection trips.
Theoretically, when an external fault occurs, the charge differential quantity is 0, the action equation cannot
be satisfied, and the differential protection does not pick up. When the current transformer in the protected
zone is saturated, the charge differential quantity can also cause the differential protection to pick up. The
unique CT saturation algorithm of the device identifies an external fault in the linear transmission zone of the
current transformer, thereby blocking the differential protection function.
The calculation of the charge differential quantity is performed in segregated phases, so that internal faults in
different phases can be identified immediately after an external fault occurs.
The charge comparison differential is influenced by line charging currents and transformer branch currents
(steady and transient), which also produce differential charges. The charge comparison differential is suitable
for fast tripping at large fault currents.
Phase-segregated current differential protection is adopted for Differential protection stage 2. The vector sum
of the currents at both ends is taken as the differential quantity, and the setting of stage 2 plus the maximum
measurement error is taken as the restraint quantity. When the differential quantity is greater than the

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
restraint quantity, the protection picks up. The algorithm identifies waveform distortion in real time and adap-
tively raises the restraint quantity to reliably block the protection in case of CT saturation due to inrush current
or external faults.
[lo_Phase current differential start logic, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-68 Pickup Logic of Phase Current Differential
The combination of phase-segregated pickup signals results in the overall pickup of differential protection, and
the staged pickup signal indicates which differential protection stage picks up.
Restricted Earth Fault Protection
NOTE
i The restricted earth fault protection is implemented using the 4th non-sensitive CT of the device. When the
device is equipped with a sensitive CT or line transformer group differential is selected, the restricted earth
fault protection is automatically disabled.
The restricted earth fault protection has high sensitivity for high transition resistance earth faults. The pickup
has a delay of 100 ms to circumvent the zero-sequence differential current generated during the transient
process.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
It is the difference between the external zero-sequence currents at both sides that the restricted earth fault
protection discriminates. The self-generated zero-sequence current is only used as a zero-sequence overcur-
rent pickup element.
Action equation:
[fo_Action equation_Idiff0_1, 1, --_--]
[fo_Action equation_Idiff0_2, 1, --_--]
Where,
Idiff0 Zero-sequence differential current, which is the amplitude of the vector sum of the external
zero-sequence currents at both sides
Irest0 Zero-sequence restraint current, which is the amplitude of the vector difference between
the external zero-sequence currents at both sides
I0> Restricted earth fault protection setting
The pickup logic of restricted earth fault protection is as follows:
[lo_Zero sequence differential start logic, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-69 Pickup Logic of Restricted Earth Fault Protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.9.4 Trip Logic
[lo_differential protection trip logic, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-70 Trip Logic of Differential Protection
The return condition for trip signals is that the pickup signal has returned and there is no current on the line.
2.9.5 Inter-Trip
In order to ensure that both sides of the protection line can trip at the same time in case of edge faults, the
inter-trip function is introduced. When the inter-trip function is enabled, the trip signal at the local side is sent
to the remote side through PDI messages. After receiving the inter-trip signal, the remote side sends an alarm
or trip according to the setting of the parameter 2942 Rec. Inte. Trip.
The sending and receiving logic diagrams of the inter-trip command are as follows:
[lo_shunt_tripping_1, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-71 Sending Logic Diagram of Inter-Trip Command
[lo_shunt_tripping_2, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-72 Receiving Logic Diagram of Inter-Trip Command
2.9.6 Remote Trip and Remote Transmission
By setting the parameter 2460 Loc.ST.BLK.DTT, the remote trip command is blocked by the current pickup
element at the local side. The sending and receiving logic diagrams of remote trip are as follows:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_distance tripping, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-73 Logic of Remote Trip
2.9.7 Self-Looping Mode
A self-looping mode is supported for differential protection. In the self-looping mode, differential protection
and inter-trip are blocked.
When the self-looping mode is enabled, messages 18590 PDI own data received and 18603 Equal
IDs in constellation are sent.
2.9.8 Test Mode
In the test mode of differential protection, the local side assumes the current at the remote side as 0, and the
calculation of differential and restraint quantities is the same as that in the non-test mode. The inter-trip signal
cannot be sent in the test mode. The test mode cannot be blocked by the blocking signal.
The test mode can be triggered by HMI, DIGSI, or BI.
The logic diagram of the test mode is as follows:
[lo_test_mode, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-74 Test Mode

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.9.9 Fibre Optic Data Interface and Differential Topology
You can set the identification codes for the master device and slave device in the parameters 2643 ID OF
MASTER and 2644 ID OF SLAVE respectively, and select whether the local device is Master or Slave in the
parameter 2642 LOCAL RELAY.
The settings of 2643 ID OF MASTER and 2644 ID OF SLAVE for the local device must be consistent with
those of the remote device. The local device and the remote device cannot be master or slave at the same
time. Otherwise, 18594 Device tables are unequal is prompted.
The master device sends time synchronisation commands to the slave device at regular intervals.
When a message 18592 PDI FO failure or 18591 PDI Recept. of faulty data is found in the
event list, check the fibre optic connection. Make sure the fibre optic is working properly before enabling
differential protection.
NOTE
i When the fibre optic communication is interrupted, the parameter 2536 Rst.Remote Sign can be used
to determine whether the remote signal remains the original state or is reset.
If the parameter 2536 Rst.Remote Sign is set to NO, the remote signal remains the original state when
the fibre optic communication is interrupted.
If the parameter 2536 Rst.Remote Sign is set to YES, the remote signal resets when the fibre optic
communication is interrupted.
2.9.10 Setting Notes for Power System Data
CT Data
The rated primary and secondary currents of CT are set in 204 CT PRIMARY and 205 CT SECONDARY. In
order to ensure the primary pickup thresholds of the devices at both ends of the line, set the differential
protection pickup threshold correctly according to the CT ratio.
Transformer Topology Data (Optional)

When there is a transformer on the line, 114 TRANSFORMER can be set to support the line transformer group
differential protection.
The rated capacity of the transformer can be set with 1107 OPERATION POWER, and the rated voltage of the
winding can be set in 202 Unom PRIMARY.
In general, the setting 202 Unom PRIMARY is the rated voltage of the transformer winding on the side to
which the device is connected. When the winding is provided with voltage regulation, instead of the rated
voltage of the winding, use the voltage value corresponding to the average value of the current in the adjust-
able range of the taps. In this way, the fault current caused by voltage regulation is minimised.
For example:
Transformer YNd11
35 MVA
110 kV/35 kV
The Y-side is provided with tap adjustment with a range of ±10 %
For 110 kV on the adjustable side, the results are as follows:

Maximum voltage: Umax = 121 kV
Minimum voltage: Umin = 99 kV
Address 0202 shall be set to:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[fo_parameteraddress0202, 1, --_--]
The rated capacity must be the primary side and the device calculates the rated current of the primary side
based on capacity and voltage.
Address 1162 VECTOR GROUP I is used to set the vector group of the transformer. Typically, with the device
connected to the high voltage side as reference, it must be set to 0. The numeral of the other device is
adjusted according to the reference side. The device performs a star-delta conversion on the secondary side
current to ensure that the differential and restraint quantities are calculated correctly.
Address 1163 TRANS STP IS defines whether the neutral point of the transformer winding connected to the
device is earthed or not. When an earth fault occurs outside the protected zone, zero-sequence currents are
generated on the winding with the neutral point earthed, leading to a false action of the protection. There-
fore, the device performs zero suppression on the winding with the neutral point earthed.
Stage I Pickup Threshold

The Stage I pickup threshold is set in 2915 I-DIFF>>.
For simple lines, the setting is 1 to 2 times the rated current.
For line transformer groups, the setting must be not less than 8 times the rated current, taking into account
the inrush current.
Stage II Pickup Threshold

Taking into account voltage and frequency fluctuations, the Stage II pickup threshold must circumvent the
capacitive current during normal operation and can be set to 2 to 3 times the capacitive current and must be
greater than 15 % of the rated current.
The capacitive current can be calculated with the following formula:
[fo_capacity current_Ic, 1, --_--]
Where,
Ic Capacitive current converted to the primary side
UN Rated grid voltage converted to the primary side (kV)
fN Rate grid frequency (Hz)
C'B Line capacitance per unit length (nF/km or nF/Mile)
S Line length (Km or Mile)
Example of calculation:
UN=100 kV
fN=50 Hz
C'B=50 nF/km
S=100 km
Capacitive current Ic = 3.63 ⋅ 10-6 ⋅ 110 ⋅ 50 ⋅ 50 ⋅ 100 = 100 A
For example: Ic = 100 A
Take 2 times the capacitive current, which is 200 A.
The Stage II setting must be set to:
[fo_Second stage setting, 1, --_--]

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Stage II Switch-on Setting

When closing the switch to a long line and a lightly loaded or arc compensated line, 2908 I-DIF>SWITCH
ON can be set to avoid false pickup of the protection due to inrush current. Typically it can be set to 3 to 4
times the steady capacitive current.
[lo_diff._two stage, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-75 Logic of Differential Stage II Switch-on Setting
When the current of any phase meets the condition of changing from absence to presence, Differential Protec-
tion Stage II picks up according to 2908 I-DIF>SWITCH ON and expands by 100 ms. Otherwise, Differential
Protection Stage II picks up according to 2906 I-DIFF>.
Inrush Current Limitation

When the transformer is enabled, the waveform asymmetry method can be used to identify the inrush current
and block Differential Protection Stage II.
Example of Settings
When the rated CT primary values on both sides of the line are inconsistent, ensure that the devices on both
ends have the same primary pickup thresholds. secondary pickup thresholds after conversion can be different.
When there is a transformer inside the protection zone, the transformer ratio must be considered. The primary
current on the high voltage side can be used as a reference for settings.
For example:
The CT transformer ratio at the A end of the line is 400: 1, the CT transformer ratio at the B end of the line is
600: 1. Take 100 A as the capacitive current, and 1.2 times the rated current (480 A) as the Differential Stage I
setting.
The settings are set to:
For the device on the A end
2915 I-DIFF>> Should be set to: 480/400 = 1.2 A
2906 I-DIFF> Should be set to: 100⋅2/400 = 0.5 A
2908 I-DIF>SWITCH ON Should be set to: 100⋅2/400 = 0.5 A
For the device on the B end

2908I-DIF>SWITCH ON Should be set to: 100⋅2/600 = 0.33 A
If there is a transformer on the line and the transformer ratios on the A end and the B end are as above. The
capacitive current is as above. Differential Stage II setting is set to twice of the capacitive current.
The A side is connected to the high voltage side of the transformer with a rated voltage of 110 kV. The B side
is connected to the low voltage side of the transformer with a rated voltage of 10 kV. The transformer ratio is
11.
For the device on the A end
2908 I-DIF>SWITCH ON Should be set to: 100⋅2/400 = 0.5 A
For the device on the B end

2915 I-DIFF>> Should be set to: 480⋅11/600 = 8.8 A

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2906 I-DIFF> Should be set to: 100⋅2⋅11/600 = 3.66 A

2908 I-DIF>SWITCH ON Should be set to: 100⋅2⋅11/600 = 3.66 A
2.9.11 Line Differential Protection Measurement Value
The line differential protection measurement values are displayed on the device panel in Main Menu > Meas-
urement > Differential/Restraint Current and Local/Remote Side Measurement Values.
On DIGSI, connect the device online. The measurement values are displayed in Measurement Values > Local/
Remote Side Measurement Values and Measurement Values > Percentages > Differential Current and
Restraint Current.
Informa-
tion
7762 IL1_opN= MV IL1_Loc(% Operational nominal current)
18254 IE_Loc= MV IE loc(% of Operational nominal current)
7782 IL1_opN= MV IL1_Rem(% Operational nominal current)
18256 IE_Rem= MV IE rem(% of Operational nominal current)
7763 ΦI L1 = MV Angle IL1_rem <-> IL1_loc
18255 ΦI E= MV Angle IE_rem <-> IE_loc
7742 IDiff L1 MV IDiff L1 (% Operational nominal current)
7745 IRest L1 MV IRest L1 (% Operational nominal current)
18252 IRestIe= MV IRestIe(% Operational norminal current)
18253 IDiffIe= MV IDiffIe(% Operational norminal current)
2.9.12 Oscillographic Fault Records
The current sampling point data on the remote side is transmitted to the local side in real time via optical fibre,
and the differential and restraint quantities are also recorded for different phases. The information of oscillo-
graphic channels is listed as follows:
Channel Name Unit Description Comments
iL1 A Phase A current on local
side
iL2 A Phase B current on local
side
iL3 A Phase C current on local
side

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Channel Name Unit Description Comments

iE A Zero-sequence current on For non-zero-sensitive CT
local side Record when the 7th bit
of MLFB is selected as 1 or
5
iA-Rem A Phase A current on
remote side
iB-Rem A Phase B current on remote
side
iC-Rem A Phase C current on
remote side
iN-Rem A Zero-sequence current on For non-zero-sensitive CT
remote side Record when the 7th bit
of MLFB is selected as 1 or
5
iD1 None Differential current of Converted to the
phase A protected object
phase B protected object
phase C protected object
iDn None Zero-sequence differential Converted to the
current protected object
iS1 None Restraint current of phase Converted to the
A protected object
B protected object
C protected object
iSn None Zero-sequence restraint Converted to the
current protected object
2.9.13 Settings

Power System
204 CT PRIMARY 1 .. 50000 A 600 A CT parameters
205 CT SECONDARY 1A 1A
5A
202 Unom PRIMARY 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 10.00 kV For line transformer groups
203 Unom SECONDARY 100 .. 381 V 100 V
217 IE-CT PRIM 1 .. 50000 A 60 A CT parameters
218 IE-CT SEC 1A 1A
5A
1107 OPERATION POWER 0.2 .. 5000.0 MVA 7.6 MVA For line transformer groups
1162 VECTOR GROUP I 0 .. 11 0 For line transformer group
protection
1163 TRANS STP IS Solid Earthed Solid Earthed
Isolated

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

300 K_ALF/K_ALF_N 1.00 .. 10.00 1.00 CT error (ratio of operating
accurate limit factor to
rated accurate limit factor)
306 E% ALF/ALF_N 0.5 .. 50.0 % 5.0 % CT error (CT composite
error at rated current)
303 E% K_ALF_N 0.5 .. 50.0 % 15.0 % CT error (CT composite
error at rated accurate limit
factor)
2961 STATE OF DIFF. OFF ON Differential protection
ON enable/disable
2915 I-DIFF>> 1A 0.8 .. 40.0 A; ∞ 2.0 A I-DIFF>>: Pickup value
5A 4.0 .. 200.0 A; ∞ 10.0 A
2906 I-DIFF> 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.30 A I-DIFF>: Value under switch
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 1.50 A on condition
2908 I-DIF>SWITCH ON 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.30 A I-DIFF>: Value under switch
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 1.50 A on condition
2911 T-DELAY I-DIFF> 0.00 .. 0.10 sec 0.00 sec I-DIFF>: Trip time delay
2940 I Jmp.Thresh. 1A 0.05 .. 0.50 A; 0; ∞ 0.20 A Pickup threshold of current
5A 0.25 .. 2.50 A; 0; ∞ 1.00 A jump pickup element
2943 IE starter 1A 0.05 .. 0.50 A; ∞ 0.10 A Pickup threshold of
5A 0.25 .. 2.50 A; ∞ 0.50 A restricted earth fault
protection
2944 IE Diff. TD 10 .. 500 ms 100 ms
2953 IE diff Pickup 1A 0.10 .. 5.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A Pickup threshold of
5A 0.50 .. 25.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A restricted earth fault
protection
2941 Send Inte. Trip YES YES Whether to send inter-trip
NO selection after tripping
2942 Rec. Inte. Trip TRIP TRIP Inter-Trip
Alarm Only
4701 CT BROKEN WIRE OFF OFF
BWD Al and Blk
BWD Al and ABlk
BWD Al only
4714 T BWD delay 0.2 .. 180.0 sec 5.0 sec
4716 I< BWD 0.500 .. 20.000 I/In 2.500 I/In Differential current unlock
setting
Remote Trip
2450 Teleprot. DTT ON ON
OFF
2451 TRIP SEND NO YES
YES
2452 TRIP RECEIVE TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
2453 TD-TRIP BI 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec
2454 TD-TRIP PROL BI 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

2460 Loc.ST.BLK.DTT YES YES
NO
2940 I Jmp.Thresh. 1A 0.05 .. 0.50 A; 0; ∞ 0.20 A Pickup threshold of current
5A 0.25 .. 2.50 A; 0; ∞ 1.00 A jump pickup element
2642 LOCAL RELAY Master Master
Slave
2643 ID OF MASTER 1 .. 65535 1
2644 ID OF SLAVE 1 .. 65535 2
2530 TD-DATA DISTURB 0.05 .. 2.00 sec 0.10 sec
2531 TD-DATAFAIL 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 6.00 sec
2533 PDI FO TER 0.5 .. 20.0 % 1.0 %
2534 PDI FO level -30 .. -10 dBm -28 dBm
2535 PDI FO T-DELAY 0.1 .. 30.0 ms 10.0 ms
2536 Rst.Remote Sign YES YES
NO

Informa-
tion
3525 >Block Diff SP
3120 Diff active OUT
3149 Diff OFF OUT
18800 Para. Different OUT
3148 Diff block OUT
18330 Diff. sen. blk OUT
18329 Diff. rev. blk OUT
3132 Diff. Gen. Flt. OUT
3133 Diff. Flt. L1 OUT
3137 I-Diff>> Flt. OUT
3139 I-Diff> Flt. OUT
18796 Diff E Flt Det. OUT
3141 Diff. Gen. TRIP OUT
18333 Int. trip OUT
18331 Diff. trip send OUT
18332 Diff. trip rev. OUT
3199 Test Diff.ONoff OUT
3200 TestDiffONoffBI IntSP
3197 >Test Diff. ON SP
3198 >Test Diff. OFF SP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
3190 Test Diff. OUT
3192 TestDiff.remote OUT
17981 VLD SW. ON IntSP
607.4034 Test Diff. IntSP
3523 Diff TRIP 3pole OUT
18797 Diff Blk CWA OUT
30054 Broken wire OFF OUT
251 Broken wire OUT
Remote Trip
18584 >Tele trip SP
18585 Tele Gen. TRIP OUT
18586 Tele: Received OUT
18587 Tele: Sending OUT
Remote Transmission

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18588 >PDI FO stop SP
18589 Wrong Firmware OUT
18590 PDI own data RX OUT Device loopback
18591 PDI Data fault OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18592 PDI FO failure OUT Fibre optic communication interrupted
18593 DT inconsistent OUT Identification numbers of master and slave devices are
consistent
18594 DT unequal OUT Identification numbers of master and slave devices are
inconsistent
18597 PDI FO TER OUT
18598 PDI synchron OUT
18599 PDI TD alarm OUT
18600 PDI TD jump OUT
18602 Topol complete OUT
18603 Equal IDs OUT Device loopback
Both devices are master or slave

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.10 Magnetic Balance Overcurrent Protection
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-C!
• Magnetic-balance differential protection is commonly known as "light differential protection". It is

mainly used for motors with rated capacity of 2000 kW and above or motors with rated capacity below
2000 kW but with insufficient current high set trip protection sensitivity.
• Magnetic balance differential protection is the major protection of inter-phase short circuit and inter-turn
short circuit of motors.
When a special magnetic balance current transformer is installed in the motor, magnetic balance differ-
ential protection is activated, and the longitudinal differential protection of the motor is deactivated. If
no magnetic balance current transformer is installed, but the current introduced by the device is differen-
tial current, its wiring and setting principles are the same as magnetic balance differential protection.
• If 3-phase protection CT is installed at both the motor end and the neutral point side, the longitudinal
differential protection of the motor is activated, which includes the following functions: Differential high
set trip protection, ratio differential protection, and magnetic balance differential protection is deacti-
vated.
Logic
When the current of any one phase collected by this CT exceeds the threshold value, magnetic balance protec-
tion is activated. When delay time reaches trip delay, the protection issues the trip command. The detailed
logic diagram is as follows:
[lo_magnetic balance, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-76 Magnetic Balance Logic Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.10.2 Setting Notes
The magnetic balance function is valid only when the parameter 112 DIFF. PROT. is set to Mag. Bal.
Prot in the device. When it is set to Diff. Prot or Disabled, the entire magnetic balance protection is
deactivated.
Magnetic balance protection is a Stage 1 definite time overcurrent protection, for which pickup threshold and
delay threshold are set.
2.10.3 Settings

112 DIFF. PROT. Diff. Diff. Prot
Prot
Mag.
Bal.
Prot
Disa-
bled
4802 Mag. Bal. OC OFF ON Magnetic Balance Overcur-
ON rent Protection
4870 Mag. Bal. I> PU 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 0.10 A Mag. Balance I> Pickup
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A threshold
4871 Mag. Bal. I> T 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 1.00 sec Mag. Balance I> Delay Time

Informa-
tion
17999 MagBal OC ON IntSP Magnetic balance OC Protection ON
18543 >Blk MagBal OC SP >Block magnetic balance OC protection
18544 >Ena MagBal OC SP >Enable magnetic balance OC protection
18545 MagBal OC Blk OUT Magnetic balance OC is blocked
18546 MagBal OC Act OUT Magnetic balance OC is active
18547 MagBal OC OFF OUT Magnetic balance OC switched OFF
18548 MagBal I> PU OUT Magnetic balance I> pickup
18549 MagBal I> TRIP OUT Magnetic balance I> trip

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.11 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
NOTE
i This protection function is only applicable to 7SJ686-L!
Power transformers with neutral point earthed can detect earth faults with the Restricted earth fault protec-
tion function.
7SJ686-L is equipped with 2 Restricted earth fault protection functions. The following description is based
on the first Restricted earth fault protection function (address 58xx). The address of the second Restricted
earth fault protection function is 59xx.
2.11.1 Application Example
The following figure shows an application example of the Restricted earth fault protection function.
[lo_Zero seq., 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-77 Restricted Earth Fault Protection Wiring for a 2-Side Transformer

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Measuring Principle
During healthy operation, no zero-sequence current Isp flows through the earth wire on the starpoint side, and
the sum of the phase currents on the outlet side (3I0 =IL1 + IL2 + IL3) is also almost zero.
When an earth fault occurs inside the protected zone, a zero-sequence current Isp flows through the earth wire
on the starpoint side. Depending on the earthing conditions of the power system, a further zero-sequence
current may be recognized in the residual current path of the phase current transformers(indicated by the
dashed arrow in Figure 2-78). Since all currents which flow into the protected zone are defined positive, the
residual current from the system will be more or less in phase with the starpoint current.
[dw_inter_1-ph_current, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-78 Schematic Diagram of the Current Distribution When a Single Phase Is Earthed in the Trans-
former Zone
When an earth fault occurs outside the protected zone (Figure 2-79), a zero-sequence current Isp will flow
equally; but the residual current of the phase current transformers 3I0 is now of equal magnitude and in
phase opposition with the starpoint zero-sequence current Isp.
[dw_ext_1-ph_current, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-79 Schematic Diagram of the Current Distribution When a Single Phase Is Earthed outside the
Transformer Zone
When a fault without earth connection occurs outside the protected zone, a residual current may occur in the
residual current path of the phase current transformers which is caused by different saturation of the phase
current transformers under strong through-current conditions. This current could simulate a fault in the
protected zone. Wrong tripping must be avoided under such condition. For this, the Restricted earth fault
protection function provides stabilization methods which differ strongly from the usual stabilization methods
of differential protection schemes since it uses, besides the magnitude of the measured currents, the phase
relationship, too.
Calculation of Differential Current

The Restricted earth fault protection function collects the fundamental component of the zero-sequence
current flowing in the starpoint circuit, which is designated as 3I0' in the following, and the fundamental
component of the sum of the phase currents on the outlet side, which is designated as 3I0" in the following.
The following definitions apply:
3I0' = Isp
3I0" = IL1+ IL2 + IL3

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Where 3I0' is the tripping current. During a fault within the protected zone, this current is always present.
The following figure shows the wiring principle of the Restricted earth fault protection function.
[dw_Zero-seq.diff. connection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-80 Principle of Restricted Earth Fault Protection
When an earth fault occurs outside the protected zone, another zero-sequence current flows through the
phase current transformer. This zero-sequence current is, on the primary side, in the opposite phase with the
starpoint current, but of equal magnitude. The following is defined:
a tripping current IREF = ∣3I0∣
and the stabilisation or restraint current Istab = K ⋅ (|3I0' – 3I0"| – |3I0' + 3I0"|).
Where K is a stabilisation factor and K = 4.
To clarify the situation, three important operating conditions should be examined:
• Through-fault zero-sequence current in case of an external earth fault:

3Ι0" is in the opposite phase with 3Ι0', and of equal magnitude, that is, 3Ι0" = –3Ι0'
IREF = |3I0'|
Istab = K · (|3I0' + 3I0'| – |3I0' – 3I0'|) = 8 · |3I0'|
The tripping current IREF equals the starpoint zero-sequence current, and the restraint current Istab is 8
times IREF.
• Zero-sequence current fed only from the starpoint in case of an internal earth fault:
3I0" = 0
IREF = |3I0'|
Istab= K · (|3I0' – 0| – |3I0' + 0|) = 0
The tripping current IREF equals the starpoint zero-sequence current, and the restraint current Istab is 0,
that is, the maximum sensitivity is reached during an internal earth fault.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• Zero-sequence currents fed from both the starpoint and the outlet side in case of an internal earth fault:
Assuming that the 2 zero-sequence currents are equal in magnitude, that is, 3I0" = 3I0'
IREF = |3I0'|
Istab = K · (|3I0' – 3I0'| – |3I0' + 3I0'|) = –8 · |3I0'|
The tripping current IREF equals the starpoint zero-sequence current, and the restraint current Istab is nega-
tive and therefore set to 0, that is, the maximum sensitivity is reached during an internal earth fault.
This result shows that for internal fault no stabilization is effective since the restraint quantity is either zero or
negative. Thus, small earth current can cause tripping. In contrast, strong restraint becomes effective for
external earth faults. In the example shown in Figure 2-81, the restraint is the strongest when the self-gener-
ated zero-sequence current in the phase current transformers is very high (the zone with negative 3Ι0"/3Ι0').
For an ideal current transformer, 3Ι0" and 3Ι0' is opposite in phase and equal in amplitude, that is, 3Ι0"/3Ι0' = –
1.
If the starpoint zero-sequence current transformer is weaker than the phase current transformers (for
example, with a smaller accuracy limit factor or a higher secondary burden), no false trip occurs even in case
of severe saturation of the starpoint zero-sequence current transformer caused by external through-fault
current. At this time, the magnitude of the zero-sequence current 3Ι0" (negative) is higher than that of the
starpoint zero-sequence current 3Ι0', but in opposite phase, that is, the ratio is outside the tripping zone.
[dw_current amplitude, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-81 Tripping Characteristic of the Restricted Earth Fault Protection Depending on the Current
Amplitude Ratio 3Ι0"/3Ι0'
Pickup
Normally, the Restricted earth fault protection function does not need a pickup, since the fault detection
condition is identical to the trip condition. The same as all protection functions, the Restricted earth fault
protection function has a pickup that starts the tripping command and defines the fault inception instant. As
soon as the fundamental component of the differential current exceeds 85 % of the pickup value, fault detec-
tion is indicated. It must be noted that the differential current is represented by the sum of all the infeed
currents. The pickup threshold increases proportionally to the arithmetic sum of all currents.
The arithmetic sum of currents Σ| I | = | IL1 | + | IL2 | + | IL3 | + | IX. As shown in Figure 2-82, the fluctuation
characteristic slope of this pickup current can be set.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_start-up current, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-82 Fluctuation Characteristic of Pickup Current Setting
[lo_Zero-seq. diff. protection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-83 Logic Diagram of Restricted Earth Fault Protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
i In Figure 2-83, k is the slope setting of the Restricted earth fault protection function within a range of 0
to 0.95, and the default value is 0.
VI Displayed in the Calculation Event and MV in the Measurement Value
• VI in the Event
613.2633.01: Zero-sequence restraint current = |3I0' – 3I0"| – |3I0' + 3I0"|
613.2632.01: When the zero-sequence restraint current is ≤ 0, the zero-sequence differential current = |
3I0'|
When the zero-sequence restraint current is > 0, the zero-sequence differential current = |3I0'| – 4 times
of the zero-sequence restraint current
• MV in the Measurement Value

613.2641.01: Zero-sequence restraint current = |IL1| + |IL2| + |IL3| + |IX|
613.2640.01: Zero-sequence differential current = |IL1 + IL2 + IL3 + IX|
NOTE
i The first Restricted earth fault protection function is described here. The parameter addresses and infor-
mation numbers of the second Restricted earth fault protection function are described at the end of this
setting notes.
To use the Restricted earth fault protection function, set the parameter 132 REF PROT. to Enabled when
configuring functions. To use the second Restricted earth fault protection function, set the parameter 133
REF PROT. #2 to Enabled. Meanwhile, the zero-sequence current channel must be assigned to an earthed
winding side or measuring point, and the Restricted earth fault protection function itself must also be
assigned to this side or this measuring point.
The first Restricted earth fault protection function can be set via 5800 REF PROT. to ON or OFF.
The second Restricted earth fault protection function can be set via 5900 REF PROT.#2 to ON or OFF.
NOTE
i When delivered from factory, REF PROT. is set to OFF. This is because that the protection must not be
enabled before the assigned side and CT have been properly set. Without proper settings, the device may
show unexpected reactions (including false trip)!
The sensitivity of the protection is determined by the parameter 5803 I-REF>. This value corresponds to the
zero-sequence current which flows through the earth wire on the starpoint of the protected object, and is not
affected by any zero-sequence current from the system. The setting value refers to the rated current of the
protected winding side of the main protected object or, in case of other protected objects, to the rated opera-
tion current of the corresponding measuring point.
NOTE
i When the difference between the rated current in the protected object and the primary rated current of the
current transformer is very large, the information 30067 parameter too low: or 30068 parameter
too high: is displayed. In this case, correct the setting.
The parameter 5805 SLOPE is used to automatically raise the pickup threshold of the tripping zone. Its fluctu-
ation characteristic slope is proportional to the sum of all the infeed current amplitudes, usually set to 1/3
times the pickup threshold. The default value of this parameter is 0.00.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
In some special cases, it may be necessary to set the trip delay parameter of Restricted earth fault protection
function 5804 T I-REF>. The default value of this parameter is 0.00. This trip delay does not include the
inherent operating time of the protection.
Additional Restricted Earth Fault Protection Functions

The above description corresponds to the first Restricted earth fault protection function. With reference to
the first Restricted earth fault protection function, the corresponding parameter addresses and information
numbers are as follows.
Address Parameter Address Message No.
REF 58xx 613.xxxx(.01)
REF 2 59xx 614.xxxx(.01)
NOTE
i In the following setting table, the unit Ι/Ιns corresponds to the rated current of the protected winding. If the
Restricted earth fault protection function is not used as the main protected object, it should refer to the
rated current of the 3-phase measuring point.
2.11.4 Settings

5800 REF PROT. OFF OFF Restricted Earth Fault Protection
ON Sets the ON/OFF status of
restricted earth fault protection
5803 I-REF> 0.05 .. 2.00 I/InS 0.15 I/InS Pick up value I REF>
Sets the pickup current setting of
restricted earth fault protection
5804 T I-REF> 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T I-REF> Time Delay
Sets the trip delay of restricted
earth fault protection
5805 SLOPE 0.00 .. 0.95 0.00 Slope of Charac. I-REF> = f(I-SUM)
Sets the fluctuation characteristic
slope setting of restricted earth
fault protection pickup current
5900 REF PROT.#2 OFF OFF Restricted Earth Fault Protection
ON #2
Sets the ON/OFF status of
restricted earth fault protection #2
5903 I-REF> 0.05 .. 2.00 I/InS 0.15 I/InS Pick up value I REF>
Sets the pickup current setting of
restricted earth fault protection #2
5904 T I-REF> 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T I-REF> Time Delay
Sets the trip delay of restricted
earth fault protection #2
5905 SLOPE 0.00 .. 0.95 0.00 Slope of Charac. I-REF> = f(I-SUM)
Sets the fluctuation characteristic
slope setting of restricted earth
fault protection pickup current #2

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
613.2404 >BLOCK REF SP >BLOCK restricted earth fault prot.
613.4037 >ENABLE REF SP >ENABLE restricted earth fault prot.
613.2411 REF OFF OUT Restricted earth fault is switched OFF
613.2412 REF BLOCKED OUT Restricted earth fault is BLOCKED
613.2413 REF ACTIVE OUT Restricted earth fault is ACTIVE
613.2631 REF T start OUT Restr. earth flt.: Time delay started
613.2451 REF TRIP OUT Restr. earth flt.: TRIP
613.2632 REF D: VI REF: Value D at trip (without Tdelay)
613.2633 REF S: VI REF: Value S at trip (without Tdelay)
613.2639 REF CTstar: VI REF: Adaption factor CT starpnt. wind.
613.2494 REF Adap.fact. OUT REF err.: adverse Adaption factor CT
613.2492 REF Err CTstar OUT REF err.: No starpoint CT
613.2493 REF err. Set. OUT REF: error Config./Setting
613.4038 REF SW. ON IntSP Restricted earth fault Softlink ON
614.2404 >BLOCK REF2 SP >BLOCK restricted earth fault prot. 2
614.4037 >ENABLE REF2 SP >ENABLE restricted earth fault prot.2
614.2411 REF2 OFF OUT Restricted earth fault 2 is switched OFF
614.2412 REF2 BLOCKED OUT Restricted earth fault 2 is BLOCKED
614.2413 REF2 ACTIVE OUT Restricted earth fault 2 is ACTIVE
614.2631 REF2 T start OUT Restr. earth flt. 2: Time delay started
614.2451 REF2 TRIP OUT Restr. earth flt. 2: TRIP
614.2632 REF2 D: VI REF2: Value D at trip (without Tdelay)
614.2633 REF2 S: VI REF2: Value S at trip (without Tdelay)
614.2639 REF2 CTstar: VI REF2: Adaption factor CT starpnt. wind.
614.2494 REF2 Adap.fact. OUT REF2 err.: adverse Adaption factor CT
614.2492 REF2 Err CTstar OUT REF2 err.: No starpoint CT
614.2493 REF2 err. Set. OUT REF2: error Config./Setting
614.4038 REF2 SW. ON IntSP Restricted earth fault 2 Softlink ON
30728 IX1= MV Operat. meas. auxiliary current IX1
613.2640 IdiffREF= MV Idiff REF (I/Inominal object [%])
613.2641 IrestREF= MV Irest REF (I/Inominal object [%])
614.2640 IdiffRE2= MV Idiff REF2 (I/Inominal object [%])
614.2641 IrestRE2= MV Irest REF2 (I/Inominal object [%])

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.12 Low Voltage Load Shedding
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/K/K-C/K-D/K-E/M!
In case of voltage drop of the power system due to significant reactive derating, the device automatically cuts
off some minor load based on the set low voltage load shedding to ensure reactive balance of the system and
allows the electric network voltage to restore normal. In order to prevent false action caused by situations like
power system fault, voltage circuit abnormality, etc., the device is equipped with block conditions, for
example, including voltage jump (-dU/dt), voltage rise, voltage low, voltage imbalance, and PT wire broken,
etc.
Function Enable
Low voltage load shedding is valid only when address 138 Low Voltage Load Shedding is set to
Enabled. If this function is not needed, set it to Disabled. SW link pieces (address 5601 Low Voltage
Load Shedding Protection) have been configured for the low voltage load shedding function in Power
System Data. In addition, you can also configure HW link pieces (address 17896 >Enable low voltage
load shedding) in the matrix. HW link pieces are not detected if external binary inputs are not configured
for HW link pieces.
Low Voltage Elements

The low voltage load shedding function is comprised of 4 low voltage elements (4 rounds). Each element can
be enabled separately. Each element has its own independent startup value and delay.
Startup Value And Return Value

The low voltage load shedding function employs 1.732 times the positive sequence voltage. The startup value
is represented by 1.732 times the positive sequence voltage as well.
When Van, Vbn, Vcn is selected for 265 VT Connection of Line1, settings 5609, 5615, 5621, and
5627 are valid. When Vab, Vbc is selected for 265 VT Connection of Line1, settings 5610, 5616,
5622, and 5628 are valid.
When 1.732 times the positive sequence voltage of the system is below the startup value of low voltage load
shedding, low voltage load shedding starts. When the voltage rises above 1.05 times the pickup threshold,
low voltage load shedding returns.
Delay
Each low voltage load shedding element has a settable delay (addresses 5611, 5617, 5623 and 5629),
beyond which a trip command is issued. When the low voltage load shedding element returns and after the
minimum trip command duration has elapsed, the trip command terminates immediately.
Slip Blocking (-dU/dt)

In order to prevent false action of low voltage load shedding caused by system fault, each low voltage element
is equipped with slip blocking (-dU/dt), where dU/dt uses the drop rate of phase-to-phase voltage.
When the device detects that the voltage is below the low voltage load shedding setting and the drop rate of
voltage (-dU/dt) is above the low voltage load shedding slip settings (addresses 5613, 5619, 5625 and 5631),
low voltage load shedding of this stage is blocked, until 1.732 times the positive sequence voltage returns
above 0.7UN.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Voltage Rise Blocking

For each stage of low voltage load shedding, you can select whether to perform voltage rise blocking or not
(addresses 5614, 5620, 5626 and 5632). If voltage rise is detected when the delay of low voltage load shed-
ding expires, low voltage load shedding is not output and this round of load shedding ends.
Current Supervision
The low voltage load shedding function can be supervised by the current monitoring setting as the current
criteria for the low voltage load shedding function. If current supervision (address 5606) is set to ON, the low
voltage load shedding function starts only when the current of any one phase exceeds Closed Breaker
Min. Current Threshold (address 212). Therefore, startup of low voltage load shedding can be
prevented if the line is disconnected from the power supply.
Other Blocks
Each low-voltage element can be blocked separately via binary input signals. When circuit breaker open is
detected, low voltage load shedding is blocked as well.
Upon startup of the low voltage load shedding element, if any phase-to-phase voltage is detected to be
smaller than 20 V or the negative sequence voltage to be greater than 5 V, the low voltage load shedding
element returns immediately.
When PT wire broken is detected, the low voltage load shedding function is deactivated immediately.
In case of overcurrent tripping of the FC circuit, low voltage load shedding is blocked.
Below is the logic diagram of low voltage load shedding function.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_LVLSH, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-84 Logic of Low Voltage Load Shedding Function

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.12.2 Settings

138 LVLSH Function Enabled Disabled Low Voltage Load Shedding
Disabled
5601 LVLSH OFF OFF Low Voltage Load Shedding
ON Protection
5602 LVLSH-4 OFF OFF LVLSH-4 Load shedding Protection
ON
ON
ON
ON
5606 CURRENT SUPERV. OFF OFF Current Supervision
ON
5609 LVLSH-4 VOL. 20 .. 120 V 45 V LVLSH-4 load shedding voltage
5611 LVLSH-4 DELAY 0.10 .. 100.00 sec 10.00 sec LVLSH-4 Time Delay
5613 LVLSH-4 DU/DT 4 .. 100 V/s 40 V/s LVLSH-4 blocked by -du/dt
5614 LVLSH-4 RISE OFF OFF Voltage rising block LVLSH-4
ON
ON
ON
ON

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
17213 >Block LVLSH-4 SP >Block low voltage load shedding-4
17217 LVLSH-3 PU OUT LVLSH-3 picked up
17220 LVLSH-4 TRIP OUT LVLSH-4 TRIP
17281 >Block LVLSH SP >Block low voltage load shedding
17283 LVLSH OFF OUT Low voltage load shedding OFF
17284 LVLSH BLOCKED OUT Low voltage load shedding BLOCKED
17285 LVLSH ACTIVE OUT Low voltage load shedding ACTIVE
17286 U Rising Blk -4 OUT Voltage Rising Block LVLSH-4
17896 >Enable LVLSH SP >Enable low voltage load shedding
17988 LVLSH ON IntSP Low Volt. Load Shedding Prot. ON
18237 LVLSH-4 OFF OUT LVLSH-4 OFF

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.13 Low Frequency Load Shedding
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/K/K-C/K-D/K-E/M!
In case of frequency decrease of the power system due to active power derating, the device automatically cuts
off some load based on the frequency decrease value to rebalance the power supply and load of the system.
In order to prevent false action that might be caused by situations like short circuit fault, load feedback and
frequency abnormality, the device is equipped with block functions, including frequency jump (-df/dt),
frequency increase, and voltage too low, etc.
Function Enable
Low frequency load shedding is valid only when address 139 LFLSH Function is set to Enabled in protec-
tion function settings. If this function is not needed, set it to Disabled. SW link pieces (address 5501 LFLSH)
have been configured for the low frequency load shedding function in Power System Data. In addition, you
can also configure HW link pieces (address 17897 >Enable LFLSH) in the matrix. HW link pieces are not
detected if no external binary inputs are configured for HW link pieces.
Frequency Detection
The device calculates frequency based on voltage or current. With filtering and measurement repetition,
highly accurate frequency values can be obtained by eliminating the influence of harmonics.
Low Frequency Elements

The low frequency load shedding function is comprised of 4 low frequency elements (4 rounds). Each element
can be enabled separately. Each element has its own independent startup value and delay.
Startup Frequency
Low frequency load shedding is activated only when the system frequency is below the startup frequency
(49.50 Hz). Only at this time does the df/dt element (slip and frequency increase) participate in judgement of
low frequency blocking. Moreover, the protection compares the startup frequency and load shedding
frequency of each stage parameters. If the startup frequency is below the load shedding frequency, the setting
error block message for the corresponding section is generated, for example: "LFLSH-4 SET ERR", and the low
frequency load shedding function of this stage is blocked at the same time.
Load Shedding Frequency and Dropout Value

Low frequency load shedding picks up when the system frequency is below the load shedding frequency and
startup frequency. Low frequency load shedding drops out when the frequency restores to 0.02 Hz above the
load shedding frequency.
Delay
Each low frequency load shedding element has a settable delay (addresses 5505, 5509, 5513 and 5517). Trip
command is initiated after the delay. When the low frequency load shedding element drops out and after the
minimum trip command duration has elapsed, the trip command terminates immediately.
Slip Logic
In order to distinguish whether system frequency decrease is caused by increase of active power demand or
faults of the system, each low frequency element is equipped with slip blocking (-df/dt).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
When the device detects that the frequency is below the low frequency load shedding setting and the
frequency decrease rate (-df/dt) is above the low frequency load shedding slip setting (addresses 5506, 5510,
5514 and 5518), low frequency load shedding of this stage is blocked. Slip blocking is deactivated only when
the decrease rate of the frequency is below the slip setting and the frequency restores to above the startup
frequency.
Frequency Increase Blocking

For each stage of low frequency load shedding, you can always select whether to use frequency increase
blocking (addresses 5525, 5526, 5527 and 5528). If frequency increase is detected when the delay of low
frequency load shedding expires, low frequency load shedding will not initiate trip command and this round of
load shedding ends.
Current Supervision
The low frequency load shedding function can be supervised by the current monitoring setting. If Current
SuperV (address 5529) is set to ON, the low frequency load shedding function picks up only when the current
of any phase exceeds BkrClosed I MIN (address 212). Therefore, pickup of low frequency load shedding
can be prevented if the line is disconnected from the power supply.
Other Blocks
Each low frequency element can be blocked separately via binary input signals.
The low frequency load shedding function is blocked when 1.732 times of the positive sequence voltage is
below 5502 Umin.
In case of overcurrent tripping of the FC circuit, low frequency load shedding is blocked.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
See the following logic diagram of low frequency load shedding function.
[lo_ufls, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-85 Logic of Low Frequency Load Shedding Function
2.13.2 Settings

139 LFLSH Function Disabled Disabled Low Frequency Load Shedding
Enabled
5501 LFLSH OFF OFF Low Frequency Load shedding
ON Protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

5502 Umin 10 .. 120 V 65 V Minimum required voltage for
operation
5503 LFLSH-4 SHED 45.00 .. 49.90 Hz 46.00 Hz LFLSH-4 load shedding frequency
5505 LFLSH-4 DELAY 0.20 .. 100.00 sec 10.00 sec LFLSH-4 Time Delay
5506 LFLSH-4 DF/DT 0.10 .. 20.00 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s LFLSH-4 blocked by -df/dt
5521 LFLSH-4 OFF OFF LFLSH-4 Load shedding Protection
ON
ON
ON
ON
5525 LFLSH-4 RISING OFF OFF Frequency rising block LFLSH-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
5529 Current SuperV OFF OFF Current Supervision for LFLSH
ON

Informa-
tion
17205 LFLSH OFF OUT Low frequency load shedding OFF
17206 LFLSH BLOCKED OUT Low frequency load shedding BLOCKED
17207 LFLSH ACTIVE OUT Low frequency load shedding ACTIVE
17208 LFLSH U< Blk OUT LFLSH Under Voltage Block
17209 F Rising Blk-4 OUT F Rising Block LFLSH-4
17256 >BLOCK LFLSH SP >Block low frequency load shedding

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
17257 >BLOCK LFLSH-4 SP >Block low frequency load shedding-4
17261 LFLSH-4 ACTIVE OUT LFLSH-4 ACTIVE
17265 LFLSH-4 PU OUT LFLSH-4 picked up
17269 LFLSH-4 TRIP OUT LFLSH-4 TRIP
17273 LFLSH-4 SET ERR OUT LFLSH-4 setting error block
17897 >Enable LFLSH SP >Enable low frequency load shedding
17987 LFLSH ON IntSP Low Fre. Load shedding Prot. ON
18233 LFLSH-4 OFF OUT LFLSH-4 OFF

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.14 Inrush Restraint
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-A!
Cross-Blocking Function
The inrush restraint function operates individually for each phase. If CROSS BLOCK (address 2203) is set to
YES, when the transformer is energized, assuming that inrush current is detected only on one phase, the
inrush restraint function cross-blocks the phases without inrush current.
Please note that zero-sequence overcurrent elements cannot cross-block overcurrent elements.
When there is no more inrush current in any phase, the cross-blocking function resets. Also, the cross-blocking
function is limited to a special duration. (address 2204 CROSS BLK TIMER). When this duration is exceeded,
the cross-blocking function does not work even if the inrush current is still present.
The inrush restraint has an upper current limit: Exceeding this current (address 2205 I Max) means that a
high current fault has occurred, and the inrush restraint function does not work in this case.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The following diagram shows the effect of inrush restraint on overcurrent elements, including cross-blocking.
[lo_inrush_braking, 1, en_GB]
The inrush restraint function only works on the I>, IE>, IDMT Ph and IDMT Earth.
2.14.2 Settings

2201 INRUSH REST. OFF OFF Inrush Restraint
ON
2202 2nd HARMONIC 10 .. 45 % 15 % 2nd. harmonic in % of
fundamental

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

2203 CROSS BLOCK NO NO Cross Block
YES
2204 CROSS BLK TIMER 0.00 .. 180.00 sec 0.00 sec Cross Block Time
2205 I Max 1A 0.30 .. 25.00 A 7.50 A Maximum Current for
5A 1.50 .. 125.00 A 37.50 A Inrush Restraint

Informa-
tion
1840 Ph L1 InrushDet OUT Phase L1 inrush detection
1843 INRUSH X-BLK OUT Cross blk: PhX blocked PhY
7556 InRushRest OFF OUT InRush Restraint OFF
7557 InRush BLK OUT InRush BLOCKED
7558 InRushEarth Det OUT InRush Earth detected
7559 I> DIR. RushPU OUT I> Directional InRush picked up
7560 IE> DIR. RushPU OUT IE> Directional InRush picked up
7561 Ip DIR. RushPU OUT Ip Directional InRush picked up
7562 IEp DIR. RushPU OUT IEp Directional InRush picked up
7563 >BLOCK InRushPh SP >BLOCK InRush
7564 Earth InRush PU OUT Earth InRush picked up
7565 L1 InRush PU OUT Phase L1 InRush picked up

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
In order to accelerate fault removal by utilizing as much as possible, the conditions provided by the reclosing
function, relay protection generally uses acceleration before AR or acceleration after AR method when
working with it.
The device is equipped with independent acceleration protection functions to offer both manual close acceler-
ation and protection acceleration, including overcurrent acceleration protection and zero-sequence overcur-
rent acceleration protection. Protection acceleration is comprised of acceleration before AR and post-reclose
acceleration methods. For overcurrent acceleration, you can select whether to use compound voltage control.
For acceleration before AR, you can select whether to use direction. Current pickup value, time limit, low
voltage settings and U2 overvoltage threshold can all be set. I> phase accelerating direction is the same as
directional overcurrent, with the same acting area. Likewise, the zero-sequence accelerating directional
element is also the same as directional zero-sequence overcurrent.
Before Reclosing
In case of any fault on the line, the protection near the power supply side instantaneously acts on tripping
unselectively first, and then use recloser to correct such unselective action. acceleration before AR is typically
used in radiation lines with several stages in series. The reclosing device is only installed on a section of line
near the power supply.
Whether acceleration before AR is available or not is associated with the Auto Reclose function: Acceleration
before AR is enabled, the Auto Reclose function is enabled, and charging is completed. Reclosing device starts
after the action of acceleration before AR.
When AR function is set to 2 reclosing cycles, acceleration before AR will pick up if conditions for acceleration
are satisfied upon first fault. Acceleration no longer picks up after the reclosing action if the fault occurs again
within blocking time of the second reclose. Acceleration before AR picks up again to activate the second
reclose if the fault occurs again within the charging time after the second reclose blocking time expires.
After Reclosing
In case of any fault on the line, protection selectively acts to remove the fault, and the recloser performs 1
cycle reclosing to restore the power supply. In case of reclosing with permanent fault, the protection device
acts to trip the circuit breaker without time limit and unselectively. Acceleration after AR is enabled for 3 s
after the reclosing action.
Manual Close Acceleration

The manual close acceleration circuit of the device can be started without having to use the contact of the
external manual closing handle. This is mainly because, SCADA systems are installed in many substations,
there is no control panel, and the manual operating handle is no longer installed onsite or only simple oper-
ating handle is installed. The time for releasing manual close acceleration protection is 3 s.
The pickup condition of manual close acceleration protection is as follows:
The circuit breaker is in the open position, the currentless time of the line exceeds the time set in setting 6772
CB Open Time, the circuit breaker changes from open to closed, and is closed upon fault.
The action condition of overcurrent acceleration is as follows: The setting of acceleration overcurrent is
greater than 6781 I> Acc. Pickup. Acceleration acts upon expiration of delay time if direction or
compound voltage control is selected and the corresponding conditions are satisfied. The compound voltage
control and direction can be set to ON/OFF by parameters, and both compound voltage and direction are
affected by PT wire broken. Acceleration trip is blocked if the fault current exceeds the FC overcurrent setting.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic of overcurrent acceleration is shown in the following figure:
[lo_overcurrent_acceleration, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-86 Logic Diagram of Overcurrent Acceleration
The action condition of zero-sequence overcurrent acceleration is as follows: The setting of zero-sequence
acceleration overcurrent is greater than 6789 IE> Acc. PU. Acceleration acts upon expiration of delay time
if direction is selected for acceleration before AR and the direction conditions are satisfied. You can select to
enable direction by parameters, and this is affected by PT wire broken.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic of zero-sequence overcurrent acceleration is shown in the following figure:
[lo_zero_seq_OC, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-87 Logic Diagram of Zero-Sequence Overcurrent Acceleration
The acceleration protection function is valid only when address 145 DMT Acceler. is set to Enabled in
device configuration. If this function is not needed, set it to Disabled. You can activate or deactivate the

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
acceleration protection function by setting SW link pieces 6776 DMT Ph Acceler. and 6786 DMT E
Acceler..
If HW link piece 18182 >ENA Ph OC acc. is configured as Valid for High Level, both SW link pieces
and HW link pieces take effect on activation of the overcurrent acceleration protection function:
• HW link pieces, if not configured, have no impact on the overcurrent acceleration protection function. If
SW link piece 6776 DMT Ph Acceler. is enabled, the acceleration function is activated.
• HW link pieces are configured as valid for high level. If HW link pieces are valid, the acceleration protec-
tion function is activated when SW link pieces are enabled; the function will be deactivated when SW link
pieces are disabled.
• HW link pieces are configured as valid for high level. If HW link pieces are invalid, the acceleration protec-
tion function is deactivated whether SW link pieces are enabled or not.
For the zero-sequence acceleration protection function, if HW link piece 18183 >ENA E OC acc. is config-
ured as Valid for High Level, both SW link pieces and HW link pieces take effect on activation of the
zero-sequence overcurrent acceleration protection function, and their configuration is the same as overcur-
rent acceleration.
Compound voltage control elements:
With no PT wire broken condition exists, if any ph-ph voltage is below setting 6783 Uph-ph< or the negative
sequence voltage is above setting 6784 U2> when the compound voltage conditions are satisfied and the
acceleration function is activated.
If parameter 6778 PT Brk for Vol is set to Release when there is wire broken with PT, the compound
voltage element always satisfies conditions. If it is set to Block, the compound voltage element does always
not satisfy conditions when there is PT wire broken and acceleration is not activated.
Directional elements:
When the acceleration protection function is set to Before AR, you can select whether to use Forward or
Non-Directional via parameter 6779 I> Ph Acc. Dir.
If Forward is selected, acceleration before AR is affected by PT wire broken. If parameter 6780 PT Brk for
Dir is set to Block, the acceleration function is blocked in case of PT wire broken.
If the parameter 6779 I> Ph Acc. Dir is set to Non-Directional, acceleration overcurrent acts without
direction in case of PT wire broken.
NOTE
i If the reclosing cycle is set to twice, the tripping time of manual close acceleration circuit breaker is longer
than its reclosing time!
2.15.3 Settings
Default settings are shown in the following table.

6771 AR Acc. MODE Before AR After AR Only applicable to 7SJ686-
After AR A/A-C/A-D/A-E/M
6772 CB Open Time 1.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 30.00 sec
6776 DMT Ph Acceler. OFF OFF
ON
6777 Vol. Block OFF OFF Only applicable to 7SJ686-
ON A/A-C/A-D/A-E/M
6778 PT Brk for Vol Release Release
Block

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

6779 I> Ph Acc. Dir Forward Non-Directional Only applicable to 7SJ686-
6780 PT Brk for Dir Release Release
Block
6781 I> Acc. Pickup 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
6782 I> Acc. Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec
6783 Uph-ph< 1.00 .. 100.00 V; ∞ 10.00 V Only applicable to 7SJ686-
A/A-C/A-D/A-E/M
6784 U2> 1.00 .. 57.00 V; ∞ 10.00 V
6786 DMT E Acceler. OFF OFF
ON
6787 IE> Acc. Dir. Forward Non-Directional Only applicable to 7SJ686-
6788 PT Brk for Dir. Release Release
Block
6789 IE> Acc. PU 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
6790 IE> Acc. Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec

Informa-
tion
17984 Ph OC Acce.ON IntSP Phase OC accelerating protection ON
17985 E OC Acce.ON IntSP Earth OC accelerating protection ON
18182 >ENA Ph OC acc. SP >Enable Phase OC accelerate protection
18183 >ENA E OC acc. SP >Enable Earth OC accelerate protection
18184 >Block OC acc. SP >Block OC accelerate protection
18185 OC acc. BLK OUT OC accelerate protection BLK
18186 OC acc. OFF OUT OC accelerate protection OFF
18187 Ph OC acc. ACT OUT Phase OC accelerate protection ACTIVE
18188 E OC acc. ACT OUT Earth OC accelerate protection ACTIVE
18189 Ph OC acc. OFF OUT Phase OC accelerate protection OFF
18190 E OC acc. OFF OUT Earth OC accelerate protection OFF
18191 OC Acc. L1 PU OUT Accelerate protection Phase L1 Pickup
18199 OC Acc. L1 fwd OUT Accelerate protection Phase L1 forward
18202 OC Acc. L1 rev. OUT Accelerate protection Phase L1 reverse Only applicable to
7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-
18203 OC Acc. L2 rev. OUT Accelerate protection Phase L2 reverse E/M
18204 OC Acc. L3 rev. OUT Accelerate protection Phase L3 reverse
18205 Ph OC Acc. fwd OUT Phase OC accelerate protection forward
18206 E OC Acc. fwd OUT Earth OC accelerate protection reverse

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18207 I> Acc. PU OUT I> accelerate protection Pickup
18208 I> Acc. Trip OUT I> accelerate protection Trip
18209 ULL< Pickup OUT Accelerate protection ULL< Pickup
18210 U2> Pickup OUT Accelerate protection U2> Pickup
18211 IE> Acc. PU OUT IE> accelerate protection Pickup
18212 IE> Acc. Trip OUT IE> accelerate protection Trip

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.16 Breaker Failure Protection
NOTE
i This function is not applicable to 7SJ686-L/A-C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E!
The Breaker failure protection function is used to monitor the operation of the circuit breaker after receiving
a trip signal.
If after a programmable time delay, the circuit breaker has not opened, the Breaker failure protection func-
tion issues a trip signal to the upstream circuit breaker.
[lo_CB_failure_protection_prin, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-88 Principle of the Breaker Failure Protection Function
Initiation
The Breaker failure protection function can be initiated by 2 different sources:
• Trip signals of the internal protection function of the protection device
• External trip signal via binary input (>Breaker failure initiated externally)
For each of the 2 sources, a unique pickup message is generated, a unique time delay is initiated, and a
unique trip signal is generated. The setting values of current threshold and delay time apply to both sources.
Criteria
The following 2 criteria are used to determine whether a circuit breaker fails:
• Check whether the current really disappears after the trip command is issued
• Check the CB auxiliary contact

The criteria used to determine if the circuit breaker has operated are selectable and also depend on the protec-
tion function that initiated the breaker failure function. On tripping without fault current, e.g. via voltage
protection, the current below the threshold 50BF PICKUP is not a reliable indication of the proper func-
tioning of the circuit breaker. In such cases, pickup exclusively depends on the auxiliary contact criterion. In
protection functions based on the measurement of currents (including all short-circuit protection functions),
the current flow is a preferential criterion, i.e. it is given priority, as opposed to the auxiliary contacts. When
the current criterion activates the breaker failure protection, the breaker failure protection can only reset if the
current criterion is not satisfied. When the CB auxiliary contact criterion activates the Breaker failure protec-
tion function, the trip delay starts. The current criterion is satisfied as long as the trip delay does not expire,
and the current criterion works. At this condition, the Breaker failure protection function can only reset
when the current criterion is not satisfied.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Current Criterion
When the parameter 170 BREAKER FAILURE is set to Enabled, the current criterion is only determined by
any single phase current; when the parameter is set to enabled w/ 3I0>, the current criterion is deter-
mined by phase current/negative-sequence current/zero-sequence current.
The currents are filtered through a digital filter to evaluate the fundamental harmonic. They are monitored
and compared to the set threshold values. Besides the three phase currents, two additional currents are
provided to enable a plausibility check. Separate threshold values can be used for this plausibility check if this
is configured accordingly.
The earth current IE (3I0) is used as a priority for the plausibility current. If the earth current is taken from the
starpoint side of an external current transformer, IE is used. Otherwise, the current calculated with the
following formula is used:
3 ⋅ I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
However, when no starpoint current is introduced into the system and the calculated current is relatively
small, 3 times the negative-sequence current I2 or any two phase currents are used as plausibility current
criteria. 3I2 is calculated with the following formula:
3 ⋅ I2 = IL1 + a2 ⋅ IL2 + a ⋅ IL3
Where a=e j120°. The corresponding logic diagram is as follows:
[lo_curr_standard_monitoring, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-89 Diagram of Current Criteria Monitoring
CB Auxiliary Contact Criteria

The CB auxiliary contact criteria depend on the type of contact and the way the contact is connected to the
binary input:
• The auxiliary contacts for circuit breaker "open" (4602 >Brk Aux NC) and "closed" (4601 >Brk Aux
NO) are configured.
• Only the auxiliary contact for circuit breaker "open" is configured (4602 >Brk Aux NC).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• Only the auxiliary contact for circuit breaker "closed" is configured (4601 >Brk Aux NO).
• None of the two auxiliary contacts is configured.

Feedback information of the auxiliary status of the circuit breaker is evaluated, depending on the allocation of
binary inputs and auxiliary contacts. After a trip command has been issued it is the aim to detect – if possible –
by means of the feedback of the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts whether the breaker is open or in inter-
mediate position. If valid, this information can be used for a proper initiation of the breaker failure protection
function.
The corresponding logic diagram is as follows:
[lo_CB_aux_contact, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-90 Diagram of CB Auxiliary Contact Criteria
Logic
The entire Breaker failure protection function may be turned on or off, or it can be blocked dynamically via
binary inputs. If the Breaker failure protection function is initiated, an alarm message is generated. With the
initiation, 2 settable time delays are started. One time delay can be used to repeat the trip command to the
local circuit breaker. The other is used to trip the higher-level circuit breaker. If criteria for a pickup are still met
once the time delays have elapsed, the trip signals are issued successively. If the criteria that led to the pickup
are no longer met, after the time delays have elapsed, then the pickup will drop out and no trip signal is issued
by the Breaker failure protection function.
To protect against nuisance tripping due to excessive contact bounce, a stabilisation of the binary inputs for
external trip signals takes place. This external signal must be present during the entire period of the delay
times, otherwise the timer is reset and no tripping signal is issued.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the Breaker failure protection function.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_CB_failure_protection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-91 Logic Diagram of Breaker Failure Protection
When configuring the protection function, set the address 170 BREAKER FAILURE to Enabled or enabled
w/ 3I0> to activate the Breaker failure protection function. When set to Enabled, the 3-phase current is
used as the current criteria. When set to enabled w/ 3I0>, the zero-sequence current or negative-sequence
current is used as the current criteria when only one phase current satisfies the conditions.
If the protection is not needed, set this function to Disabled. This function can be implemented by switching
the address 7001 BREAKER FAILURE to ON or OFF.
Criteria
The address 7004 Chk BRK CONTACT determines whether the CB auxiliary contacts are connected or not via
a binary input as a pickup criterion. If the address is set to ON, the current criterion and/or the auxiliary contact
criterion is applied. This criterion must be selected if the Breaker failure protection function is started by the
protection function, which do not have a current criterion, for example, voltage protection.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Single-Element Breaker Failure Protection

In single-element breaker failure protection, the adjacent circuit breakers, i.e. the breakers of the busbar or the
busbar section affected, and where applicable also the breaker at the remote end, are tripped after the time
delay TRIP-Timer (address 7005) has elapsed. The time T2 (address 7008) is in this case set to infinite
because it is not needed.
The time delay to be set should be based on the maximum circuit breaker operating time plus the dropout
time of the current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin which takes into consideration the tolerance
of the time delay. Figure 2-92 illustrates the operate timing sequence.
[dw_CB_failure_protection_T1, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-92 Time Sequence Example for Normal Clearance of a Fault, and for Circuit Breaker Failure with
Single-Element Breaker Failure Protection
Two-Element Breaker Failure Protection

In two-element breaker failure protection, the trip command is output again to the local feeder circuit breaker,
normally to a separate set of trip coils of the feeder breaker, after the time delay TRIP-Timer (address 7005)
has elapsed.
If the circuit breaker does not respond to the repeated trip, the adjacent circuit breakers, i.e. the breakers of
the busbar or the busbar section affected, and where applicable also the breaker at the remote end, are
tripped after the time delay T2 (address 7008) has elapsed and the fault still exists.
The time delays to be set should be based on the maximum circuit breaker operating time plus the dropout
time of the current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin which takes into consideration the tolerance
of the time delay.
Figure 2-93 illustrates the operate timing sequence.
[dw_CB_failure_protection_T2, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-93 Operate Timing Sequence of Breaker Failure Protection Stage II

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Pickup Value
The pickup value of the current flow monitoring is set under address 7006 I> BF,, and the pickup value of
the ground current monitoring under address 7007 IE> BF. The threshold values must be set at a level
below the minimum fault current for which the total current monitoring must operate. A setting of 10 %
below the minimum fault current for which breaker failure protection must operate is recommended.
The pickup value should not be set too low since otherwise there is a risk that transients in the current trans-
former secondary circuit may lead to extended dropout times if extremely high currents are switched off.
2.16.3 Settings

7001 BREAKER FAILURE OFF OFF Breaker Failure Protection
ON
7004 Chk BRK CONTACT OFF OFF Check Breaker contacts
ON
7005 TRIP-Timer 0.06 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer
7006 I> BF 1A 0.03 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold I>
5A 0.15 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A
7007 IE> BF 1A 0.03 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold IE>
5A 0.15 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A
7008 T2 0.06 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T2, Delay of 2nd stage
(busbar trip)

Informa-
tion
1403 >BLOCK BkrFail SP >BLOCK Breaker failure
1431 >BrkFail extSRC SP >Breaker failure initiated externally
1451 BkrFail OFF OUT Breaker failure is switched OFF
1452 BkrFail BLOCK OUT Breaker failure is BLOCKED
1453 BkrFail ACTIVE OUT Breaker failure is ACTIVE
1456 BkrFail int PU OUT Breaker failure (internal) PICKUP
1457 BkrFail ext PU OUT Breaker failure (external) PICKUP
1471 BrkFailure TRIP OUT Breaker failure TRIP
1480 BkrFail intTRIP OUT Breaker failure (internal) TRIP
1481 BkrFail extTRIP OUT Breaker failure (external) TRIP
1494 BF T2-TRIP(bus) OUT BF TRIP T2 (busbar trip)
18226 >Enable BrkFail SP >Enable Breaker Failure Protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.17 Earth Overcurrent Surge Arrester
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-J!
Earth current is measured from the transformer neutral point surge arrester. The protection function provides
2 stages of definite time overcurrent elements, that is, earth overcurrent surge arrester stage 1 and earth over-
current surge arrester stage 2. When the earth current is detected to be greater than the set pickup threshold
value, the protection picks up. When delay reaches the set tripping time delay, the protection issues a trip
signal.
[lo_gap_zero_seq_OC, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-94 Logic Diagram of Earth Overcurrent Surge Arrester

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.17.1 Settings

3554 DMT E Surge OFF ON DMT Earth Surge Arrester
ON
3555 Surge IE>> Prot OFF ON Surge IE>> Protection
ON
3556 Surge IE> Prot OFF ON Surge IE> Protection
ON
3557 Surge IE>> PU 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A Surge IE>> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A Threshold
3558 Surge IE>> T 0.01 .. 100.00 sec 0.30 sec Surge IE>> Delay Time
3559 Surge IE> PU 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A Surge IE> Pickup Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
3560 Surge IE> T 0.01 .. 100.00 sec 0.50 sec Surge IE> Delay Time

Informa-
tion
17994 E OC Surge ON IntSP Earth OC Surge Arrester ON
18400 >Blk E OC Surge SP >Block Earth OC Surge Arrester
18401 >Ena E OC Surge SP >Enable Earth OC Surge Arrester
18402 E OC Surge Blk OUT Earth OC Surge Arrester Blocked
18403 E OC Surge ACT OUT Earth OC Surge Arrester is Active
18404 E OC Surge OFF OUT Earth OC Surge Arrester is OFF
18405 Surge IE>> PU OUT Surge IE>> protection Pickup
18406 Surge IE>> Trip OUT Surge IE>> protection Trip
18407 Surge IE> PU OUT Surge IE> protection Pickup
18408 Surge IE> Trip OUT Surge IE> protection Trip
18518 Surge IE>> OFF OUT Surge IE>> OFF
18519 Surge IE> OFF OUT Surge IE> OFF
20121 Ix: VI Primary current Ix

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.18 Sensitive Earth fault
NOTE
i Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/L!
If the fourth current input of the protection device is configured as a sensitive current transformer, the sensi-
tive earth fault protection function can be enabled. If the fourth current input is configured as a 1/5 A standard
transformer, the sensitive earth fault protection function is deactivated.
When configured as a sensitive input transformer, given its high sensitivity, you can provide sensitive protec-
tion function for ungrounded neutral points or for earth fault detection in compensation systems. The linear
range of sensitive current transformer does not exceed 2 A.
Sensitive earth fault detection can be used to perform earth fault detection for ungrounded neutral points or
neutral point compensation grounding systems, identify the phases affected by earth fault and determine the
direction of earth fault.
Determination of Earth Fault Phases

Determination of earth fault phases is shown in the following figure. If the voltage of any phase is below the
UPH MIN default value 40 V and the rest phase-to-ground voltages are above the UPH MAX default value 75 V,
the phase detected is deemed as the grounding phase.
[lo_grounding_fault_phase, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-95 Determination Diagram of Earth Fault Phases
The device determines single-phase grounding in sensitive ground systems by using different criteria based on
whether SystemStarpoint is set either to Isolated or Coil Earthed in system parameters. The prereq-
uisite for determining grounding direction fault is that both Zero-Sequence Voltage Detection and
Zero-Sequence Current (Amplitude) Detection are activated. The directional characteristic curve
used for grounding direction determination is changed and adjusted depending on networking systems. What

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
directional determination handles is not the amplitude of grounding current, but a component that is 90°
orthogonal to the settable directional characteristics. This current component is called the active component.
For measurements of ungrounded neutral point system, the following conditions apply:
• Earth fault (forward), if Q0 < 0 and 3I0reactive > set value (activate directional element)
• Earth fault (reverse), if Q0 > 0 and 3I0reactive > set value (activate directional element)
For measurements of a compensation grounding system, the following conditions apply:
• Earth fault (forward), if P0 > 0 and 3I0reactive > set value (activate directional element)
• Earth fault (reverse), if P0 < 0 and 3I0reactive > set value (activate directional element)
The directional characteristics diagram for grounding direction determination is as follows:
[dw_grounding_direction, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-96 Coil Earthed - for Measuring Directional Characteristics and Ungrounded Neutral Point - for
Measuring Directional Characteristics
2.18.3 Logic
The logic of sensitive earth fault is shown in the following figure. At address 3160 SENS. E FAULT, the func-
tion can be set to Alarm Only or TRIP.
If set to Alarm Only, tripping is not possible and only a ground fault log is generated. The pickup of the
displacement voltage element Un starts this ground fault record. As the pickup of the Un element drops out,
fault recording is terminated.
All ground faults are recorded in a separate earth fault log file, which can record up to 8 entries.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_activating_low_curr_grounding_connection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-97 Activation of Sensitive Earth Fault Function
Generation of a pickup message, for both current elements, is dependent on the direction selection for each
element and the setting of parameter 3130 PU CRITERIA. If the element is set to Non-Directional and
parameter PU CRITERIA = Uen/3U0 OR IEE, a pickup message is generated as soon as the current
threshold is exceeded, irrespective of the status of the Un element. However, if a direction is programmed, a
condition for valid direction determination is that the voltage element Un picked up.
If the setting of parameter PU CRITERIA is Uen/3U0 AND IEE, the Un element must have picked up also
for non-directional mode.
The setting of the parameter PU CRITERIA indicates that fault detection is generated by AND or OR combina-
tion of startup of offset voltage and zero-sequence current. If the pickup value of voltage Un is set very low, it
is better to use AND.
If the current value exceeds the FC overcurrent setting, the sensitive earth trip is blocked.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_zero_seq_vol_element_&_dir, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-98 Logic Diagram of Zero-Sequence Voltage Element and Direction Determination

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_Ins_element, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-99 Logic Diagram of Ins Element
2.18.4 Earth Fault Trip Test
NOTE
i Earth fault trip test uses the reclose function. The circuit breaker is reclosed upon completion of trip test.
Therefore, only 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E can use the complete earth fault trip test function. Devices of all
other models can only be operated manually!
If >Test Trip in Sensitive Current is set to High Level, test trip in small current is activated.
If the busbar zero-sequence voltage exceeds 3108 Uen> or 3110 3U0>, and the device receives a remote start
earth trip test command or the binary input >Test Trip in Sensitive Current changes to a high level
command, the system starts to determine the line that is grounded:
• After the trip test command is issued and the circuit breaker opens, if zero-sequence voltage still exists at
this point, then this line is not grounded. The power supply of this line could restore via binary input
2711 >External start of internal Auto reclose.
• After the trip test command is issued and the circuit breaker opens, if zero-sequence voltage disappears,
then this line is grounded. A Feeder Earth Fault signal is issued, and the reclose function starts to
close this line at the same time.
• If the circuit breaker fails to open after the trip test command is issued, then earth fault trip test of this
time fails, and an Earth Trip Test Failure signal is issued.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic of small current trip test is implemented by the CFC function and can be modified by the user based
on requirements.
General Settings
Set the connection method of the voltage transformer via addresses 265 VT Connection and 216 U4
transformer. The primary and secondary rated current settings for zero-sequence CT are given in addresses
217 and 218, respectively.
The sensitive earth fault detection element can be set to ON and OFF in address 3101 SENS. E FAULT and to
Alarm Only in address 3160 SENS. E FAULT. If the sensitive earth fault detection element is selected as
ON, the system can trip and generate a fault information report simultaneously.
If HW link piece 18263 >Enable Sensitive Earth fault detection is configured as Valid for
High Level, both SW link pieces and HW link pieces take effect on activation of the overcurrent acceleration
protection function:
• HW link pieces have no impact on the sensitive earth fault protection function if it is not configured. If the
SW link piece 3101 SENS. E FAULT function is activated, the sensitive earth fault protection function is
activated.
• HW link pieces are configured as Valid for High Level. If HW link pieces are valid, the sensitive
earth fault protection function is activated when SW link pieces are enabled, and the sensitive earth fault
protection function is deactivated when SW link pieces are disabled.
• HW link pieces are configured as Valid for High Level. If HW link pieces are invalid, the sensitive
protection function is deactivated whether SW link pieces are enabled or not.
IEE>> Stage (Definite Time)

Similar to overcurrent protection, high value element IEE>> (address 3113) can be set to issue warning
messages or a trip command. If it is set to trip, the trip is triggered after T IEE>> (address 3114).
IEE> Stage (Definite Time)

Tripping characteristics of the IEE> stage is set via parameters 3117 Sens. E Fault and 3118 T IEE>.
Offset Voltage Un
The voltage element starts depending on the displacement voltage Un or 3U0. When 3U0 is used, the input
voltages for the 3 phases must be connected to a voltage converter of star connection. If only phase-to-phase
voltage is supplied to the device, the system cannot calculate the neutral point displacement voltage based on
phase-to-phase voltage. In this case, direction cannot be determined. For pickup of voltage element, in order
to ensure the accuracy of displacement voltage, the voltage element does not pick up until the time delay
pickup expires (the default time delay pickup is 0.04 sec). The total trip time includes the measured time of
zero-sequence voltage (approximately 50 ms), pickup time delay and trip delay.
Uen> (address 3108) or 3U0> (address 3110) are used to start earth fault detection. At the same time, pickup
of voltage element is the prerequisite for direction determination. Based on settings of addresses 265 PT
Conn. Line1 and 216 U4 transformer, if it is set to Udelta transformer, setting 3108 Uen> is used. If it is
set to calculate zero-sequence voltage, setting 3110 3U0> is used.
If voltages of all 3 phases are connected to the device, the displacement voltage 3U0 can be calculated from
the instantaneous voltage values for 3 phases. The pickup value is set in address 3110. To find the value at the
primary side of address 3110, use the following formula:
Direction Determination
Addresses 3115 to 3126 are all used for direction determination.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The direction of the IEE>> stage is set in address 3115 Direction IEE>>. It can be set to Forward,
Reverse or Non-Directional. The direction of the IEE> stage can be set in addresses 3122 DIR. IEE> =
Forward, Reverse or Non-Directional.
During direction determination, the device sends a corresponding direction message (reverse, forward or
direction cannot be identified). In order to avoid message fluctuation caused by rapid change of zero-
sequence current, you can set the dropout time delay of direction message via address 3126 RESET DELAY.
Current value RELEASE DIRECT. (address 3123) is the release threshold for directional determination. It is
based on the current components which are perpendicular to the directional limit lines.
The effective criterion of directional element in an ungrounded system is the reactive component of zero-
sequence current. The sum of capacitive earth currents of non-fault lines of the entire system flow over the
fault line. Generally, 3123 RELEASE DIRECT. uses one half of this fault current as the set value.
The effective criterion of directional element in a system where central point is coil earthed is the active
component of zero-sequence current consumed in arc-suppression coil resistor. The set value 3123 RELEASE
DIRECT. should be smaller than one half of the active current. For example: If the capacitive earth current of
the entire system is 20 A, the arc suppression coil is overcompensated by 10 %, the rated operating voltage of
the coil is 6.3 kV, the rated power consumption is 4.83 kW and the inductive component of zero-sequence
current flowing through the fault line in case of single-phase grounding is 2 A, the resistance value of the
reactor is: (6.3 kV) 2 / 4.83 kW = 8 217 Ω. At this point, the active current component generated is
. When zero-sequence CT transformer ratio is 150/5, the resistive compo-
nent of secondary current detected by protection is 23 mA, and 3123 RELEASE DIRECT. is set to 10 mA.
Grounding Method
When parameter 245 is selected as Solid Earthed, the sensitive earth protection function cannot be used.
If you select this method, enable the sensitive earth fault protection function and download parameters to the
device at the same time, DIGSI reports an error.
2.18.6 Settings
This table shows predefined settings for specific regions.

131 Sens. E Fault Disabled Enabled sensitive Earth fault
Enabled
3101 SENS. E FAULT OFF OFF Sensitive Earth Fault
ON
3108 Uen> 1.8 .. 200.0 V; ∞ 40.0 V Uen> Earth Displacement
Voltage
3110 3U0> 10.0 .. 225.0 V; ∞ 70.0 V 3U0> Earth Displacement
Voltage
3112 T-DELAY TRIP 0.10 .. 40000.00 sec; ∞ ∞ sec T-DELAY TRIP Uen/3U0
3113 IEE>> 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 10.00 A IEE>> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 50.00 A
3114 T IEE>> 0.00 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec T IEE>> Time Delay
3115 Direction IEE>> Forward Non-Directional Direction IEE>>
Reverse
Non-Directional
3117 IEE> 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 2.00 A IEE> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 10.00 A
3118 T IEE> 0.00 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec T IEE> Time delay
3119 IEEp 0.003 .. 0.500 A 0.004 A IEEp Pickup

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

3122 DIR. IEE> Forward Non-Directional Direction IEE>
Reverse
Non-Directional
3123 RELEASE DIRECT. 1A 0.05 .. 30.00 A 0.50 A Release directional element
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A
3126 RESET DELAY 0 .. 60 sec 0 sec Reset Delay
3130 PU CRITERIA Uen/3U0 OR IEE Uen/3U0 OR IEE Sensitive Earth Fault
Uen/3U0 AND IEE PICKUP criteria
3160 SENS. E FAULT TRIP Alarm Only Sensitive Earth Fault
Alarm Only

Informa-
tion
1201 >BLOCK Ue> SP >BLOCK Ue>
1202 >BLOCK IEE>> SP >BLOCK IEE>>
1203 >BLOCK IEE> SP >BLOCK IEE>
1207 >BLK Sens.Earth SP >BLOCK Sensitive Earth fault protection
1211 Sens. Earth OFF OUT Sensitive Earth fault protection is OFF
1212 Sens. Earth ACT OUT Sensitive Earth fault prot. is ACTIVE
1215 Ue>/3U0 Pickup OUT Ue>/3U0 Earth displacement voltage PU
1217 Ue>/3U0 TRIP OUT Ue>/3U0 Earth displacement voltage TRIP
1221 IEE>> Pickup OUT IEE>> Pickup
1223 IEE>> TRIP OUT IEE>> TRIP
1224 IEE> Pickup OUT IEE> Pickup
1226 IEE> TRIP OUT IEE> TRIP
1230 Sens. E BLOCKED OUT Sensitive Earth fault detection BLOCKED
1264 IEEa = VI Corr. Resistive Earth current
1265 IEEr = VI Corr. Reactive Earth current
1266 IEE = VI Earth current, absolute Value
1267 Uen, 3U0 VI Displacement Voltage Uen/3U0
1271 Sens. E Pickup OUT Sensitive Earth fault pick up
1272 Sens. E Ph L1 OUT Sensitive Earth fault picked up in Ph L1
1276 Sens E Forward OUT Sensitive E fault in forward direction
1277 Sens E Reverse OUT Sensitive E fault in reverse direction
1278 Sens E undef. OUT Sensitive E fault direction undefined
16029 IEEp BLK PaErr OUT Sens.earth flt. IEEp BLOCK Setting Error
16030 φ(3U0,IEE) = VI Angle between 3U0 and INsens.
16034 IEE> n.TR range OUT IEE> not in tripping range
16035 IEE>>n.TR range OUT IEE>> not in tripping range
18263 >Enable S.GND SP >Enable Sensitive Earth fault detection
18264 P245 Block S.G OUT Parameter 0245 setting blocked sensitive

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.19 Overexcitation Protection (U/f)
NOTE
i Only applicable to 7SJ686-J!
The overexcitation protection function is used to detect magnetic induction phenomena that exceed the
permissible range during operation of the generator or transformer. In particular, the overexcitation phenom-
enon is more likely to appear for the transformer in the wiring of the generator-transformer unit. When the
overexcitation multiple exceeds the overexcitation limit setting of the protected object (such as the trans-
former in the wiring of the generator-transformer unit), overexcitation protection must trip to remove this
hazard. When the generator-transformer unit group is disconnected from the system after dumping load
under full load conditions, and the generator voltage regulating device fails to act or acts not fast enough to
control voltage rise, the transformer connected in this unit is subject to hazard of overexcitation. Similarly,
decrease of frequency (generator speed), for example, for isolate power system, can also lead to unallowable
increase in magnetic flux density.
Measured Values
Overexcitation protection uses phase-to-phase voltage and frequency as the measurement input, and uses the
maximum value of 3 phase-to-phase voltages as the voltage calculation value.
The overexcitation protection function detects overexcitation by measuring the ratio of voltage and frequency
(U / f). This ratio obtained through measurement is proportional to the magnetic flux density B of the
protected object, and is associated with the rated magnetic flux density BN. Here, both the measured voltage
and frequency are related to the rating of the protected object (generator, transformer).
Where,
BNobj: The rated magnetic flux density of the protected object
UNobj: The rated voltage of the protected object
Any deviation between the primary rated voltage of the voltage transformer and the rated voltage of the
object can be corrected by the protection device internally. For this reason, it is not required to convert the
pickup threshold and characteristic value into secondary value during setting of overexcitation protection.
Characteristics
Overexcitation protection is equipped with 2 stages of definite-time characteristics and one stage of thermal
inverse‑time characteristics. These characteristic curves can roughly simulate the thermal characteristics of
overexcitation of the protected object.
A pickup signal is issued and the delay timer of this stage starts simultaneously as long as the overexcitation
stage 2 alarm set value is exceeded. A warning message is issued immediately upon expiration of this timer.
Another pickup signal is issued and the delay timer of this stage starts simultaneously as long as the overexci-
tation stage 1 trip set value is exceeded. A trip command is issued immediately upon expiration of this timer.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_PVPH_simplified, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-100 Simplified Logic Diagram of Overexcitation Protection
When the U/f value exceeds the overexcitation stage 2 alarm setting, the device adds counts accordingly based
on the current U/f ratio to accumulate the tripping time required for overexcitation protection. Once the accu-
mulated data in the counter have reached the tripping time required for overexcitation protection, the protec-
tion device issues a trip command.
The protection device ends the trip command as long as the overexcitation multiple decreases below the set
threshold value. According to the set cooling time, the protection device gradually reduces the time count of
thermal characteristics of overexcitation.
The thermal characteristics stage of overexcitation protection is defined by 8 pairs of overexcitation multiples
U/f (relative to rated value) and tripping time. In most cases, the thermal characteristics of overexcitation
preset based on a standard transformer can provide adequate protection. If such thermal characteristics of
overexcitation protection do not comply with the actual thermal behavior of the protected object, you can
customize these 8 pairs of overexcitation multiples U/f and tripping time to adapt to the time characteristics of
overexcitation actually required. The overexcitation tripping time between these set overexcitation parameters
can be determined via the linear interpolation method inside the device.
The counter can be reset via the blocking signal or reset signal. The internal upper limit of the thermal model
is 150 % of the tripping temperature rise.
The premise of using overexcitation protection is that the measurement voltage has been connected to the
device. In addition, set parameter 158 OVEREXC. PROT. = Enabled.
This function can be ON or OFF with the parameter 3901 OVEREXC. PROT..

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Stages of Definite Time Characteristics

The permissible continuous magnetic flux value corresponding to the rated magnetic flux (B/BN) set in param-
eter 3902 U/f > is provided by the manufacturer of the protected object. This setting determines the startup
value of the warning stage and the minimum value of the thermal inverse time section.
A warning signal is issued when time 3903 T U/f > (approximately 10 s) expires.
Very high overexcitation harms the protected object within a short time. Therefore, parameter 3904 U/f >>
can only be set to a very short tripping delay parameter 3905 T U/f >> (approximately 1 sec).
All set action delays are additional times, without the inherent action time (measurement time, dropout time,
etc.) of protection functions. If the tripping delay is set to ∞, the relevant stage does not trip, but send a
pickup signal.
Stages of Thermal Inverse Time Characteristics
[dw_heat_inverse_time_trip, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-101 Thermal Inverse Time Tripping Characteristics (Default Value)
The thermal model can simulate the core temperature rise caused by excessively dense magnetic flux. The
heating characteristics are approximately defined as 8 sets of predefined magnetic flux ratios B/BNobj and time.
Intermediate data are obtained via the linear interpolation method.
If no data on thermal time characteristics of overexcitation is provided by the manufacturer, then you can use
the preceding Siemens standard data (Figure 2-101).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_PVPH_trip_time_characteristic, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-102 Tripping Time Characteristics of Overexcitation Protection
Otherwise, you can specify all tripping characteristics by entering the delay of 8 predefined U/f values:
Address 3906 t(U/f=1.05)
As mentioned earlier, thermal characteristics are enabled automatically only when U/f is greater than the
warning section setting. In Figure 2-102, It is assumed that the setting selected is greater than or smaller than
the first setting of thermal characteristics. This is used to indicate the behavior of protection action.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Cooling Time
When the pickup signal of overexcitation protection drops off, the trip command for thermal characteristics
also drops off. However, the count in the counter returns to zero only when the cooling time of the protected
object expires. This parameter can be set in address 3914 T COOL DOWN. Such time refers to the time
required for the thermal characteristics temperature model to decrease from 100 % to 0 %.
2.19.3 Settings

158 OVEREXC. PROT. Disabled Disabled Overexcitation Protection (U/f)
Enabled
3901 OVEREXC. PROT. OFF OFF Overexcitation Protection (U/f)
ON
3902 U/f > 1.00 .. 1.20 1.10 U/f > Pickup
3903 T U/f > 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec T U/f > Time Delay
3904 U/f >> 1.00 .. 1.40 1.40 U/f >> Pickup
3905 T U/f >> 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec T U/f >> Time Delay
3906 t(U/f=1.05) 0 .. 20000 sec 20000 sec U/f = 1.05 Time Delay
3914 T COOL DOWN 0 .. 20000 sec 3600 sec Time for cool down

Informa-
tion
5353 >U/f BLOCK SP >BLOCK overexcitation protection
5357 >RM th.rep. U/f SP >Reset memory of thermal replica U/f
5361 U/f> OFF OUT Overexcitation protection is swiched OFF
5362 U/f> BLOCKED OUT Overexcitation protection is BLOCKED
5363 U/f> ACTIVE OUT Overexcitation protection is ACTIVE
5367 U/f> warn OUT Overexc. prot.: U/f warning stage
5369 RM th.rep. U/f OUT Reset memory of thermal replica U/f
5370 U/f> picked up OUT Overexc. prot.: U/f> picked up
5371 U/f>> TRIP OUT Overexc. prot.: TRIP of U/f>> stage
5372 U/f> th.TRIP OUT Overexc. prot.: TRIP of th. stage
5373 U/f>> pick.up OUT Overexc. prot.: U/f>> picked up
5376 U/f Err No VT OUT Overexc. err: No VT assigned
5377 U/f Not avail. OUT Overexc. err: Not avail. for this object
18444 >Enable U/f SP >Enable overexcitation protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.20 Pole Discrepancy Detection
NOTE
i Only applicable to 7SJ686-J!
Due to the high probability of single-phase faults in power systems, split-phase circuit breakers are often used
in distribution network in order to ensure the reliable and stable operation of the system. However, this brings
about new problems, that is, open-phase operation adds certain risks to the power system. Therefore, pole
discrepancy detection that can reflect open-phase operation conditions of circuit breakers must be installed to
open those circuit breakers in abnormal status.
The pole discrepancy detection function of 7SJ686 provides a stage of definite time pole discrepancy detection
based on current as the fundamental criterion. When the system detects that there are pole discrepancy
contacts in the circuit breaker and that the zero-sequence current or negative-sequence current exceeds the
pickup threshold, the protection issues a startup signal. The protection trips when the set delay time expires.
[lo_3ph_inconsistency, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-103 Logic Diagram of the Pole Discrepancy Detection Function
2.20.2 Pole Discrepancy Contacts
Pole discrepancy contacts are obtained via serial connection of the 3-phase normally open auxiliary contact
and the 3-phase normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_3ph_inconsistency_connection_mode, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-104 Wiring for Pole Discrepancy Contacts
[dw_3ph_disconnected, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-105 3-Phase Circuit Breaker Open
[dw_3ph_connected, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-106 3-Phase Circuit Breaker Closed
If all 3-phase circuit breakers are open or closed, 18437 >Pole Discrepancy contact is Low Level. If the
positions of 3-phase circuit breakers are inconsistent, for example, phase A is open while phases B and C are
closed, the >Pole Discrepancy contact is High Level (Active).
[dw_phA_disconnected, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-107 Only Phase A Circuit Breaker Is Open
2.20.3 Settings

3710 PoleDiscrepancy OFF OFF Pole Discrepancy Detection
ON
3711 PoleDiscrep. I0 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A Pole Discrepancy I0
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A Threshold
3712 PoleDiscrep. I2 1A 0.10 .. 0.80 A; ∞ 0.30 A Pole Discrepancy I2
5A 0.50 .. 4.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A Threshold
3713 PoleDiscrep. T 0.10 .. 10.00 sec 0.50 sec Pole Discrepancy Delay
Time

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
17995 PoleDiscrep. ON IntSP Pole Discrepancy Detection ON
18435 >Blk PoleDiscr. SP >Block Pole Discrepancy Detection
18436 >Ena PoleDiscr. SP >Enable Pole Discrepancy Detection
18437 >Pole Discrep. SP >Pole Discrepancy
18438 PoleDiscr. Blk OUT Pole Discrepancy Detection Blocked
18439 PoleDiscr. ACT OUT Pole Discrepancy Detection is Active
18440 PoleDiscr. OFF OUT Pole Discrepancy Detection is OFF
18441 PoleDiscr. PU OUT Pole Discrepancy Detection Pickup
18442 PoleDiscr. Trip OUT Pole Discrepancy Detection Trip

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.21 Earth Overcurrent Low V Side
NOTE
i Only applicable to 7SJ686-K/K-C/K-D/K-E!
This function is used to protect substation transformers. It uses the zero-sequence current at the low-voltage
side of the transformer as input to cut off ground faults at the low-voltage side of the transformer.
This function includes 3 stages of definite time and 1 stage of inverse time. It can set pickup value and trip
delay respectively.
Definite time stages: The zero-sequence current is compared with the pickup value of the set zero-sequence
overcurrent-protection stage. A pickup signal is issued when zero-sequence current exceeds the setting. If no
blocking is detected, a trip signal is issued when the user-defined time delay expires.
For inverse time curves, there are 4 kinds of IEC characteristic curves: Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely
Inv., and Long Inverse. The zero-sequence current is compared with the pickup value of the inverse time zero-
sequence overcurrent protection. If the zero-sequence current of short circuit exceeds 1.1 times the set value,
the zero-sequence overcurrent inverse time stage starts and the tripping delay starts timing. The actual trip-
ping time delay depends on the actual fault zero-sequence current and the selected tripping characteristic
curve. Once the delay expires, a trip signal is issued if no blocking is detected.
The inverse time characteristic curve of the inverse time stage as well as the pickup current and time constant
of the inverse time characteristic curve are independent of each other, and must be set separately.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic diagram of protection is as follows:
[lo_zero_seq_OCP_on_LVPT, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-108 Logic Diagram of Low-Voltage Side Zero-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
2.21.2 Settings

3601 LV IE>>> Prot OFF ON LV IE>>> Protection
ON
3602 LV IE>> Prot OFF ON LV IE>> Protection
ON
3603 LV IE> Prot OFF OFF LV IE> Protection
ON

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

3604 LV IEp Prot OFF OFF LV IEp Protection
ON
3605 LV IE>>> PU 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 4.00 A LV IE>>> Pickup Threshold
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 20.00 A
3606 LV IE>>> Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec LV IE>>> Delay Time
3607 LV IE>> PU 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A LV IE>> Pickup Threshold
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
3608 LV IE>> Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec LV IE>> Delay Time
3609 LV IE> PU 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A LV IE> Pickup Threshold
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
3610 LV IE> Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec LV IE> Delay Time
3611 LV IEp PU 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A LV IEp Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
3612 LV IEp Time 0.05 .. 10.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec LV IEp Time Dial
3613 LV IEp IEC Normal Inverse Normal Inverse LV IEp IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
3614 DMT E LV OFF OFF DMT Earth Low V Side
ON

Informa-
tion
17996 E OC LV ON IntSP Earth OC LV ON
18415 >Blk E OC LV SP >Block Earth OC LV side
18416 >Ena E OC LV SP >Enable Earth OC LV side
18417 E OC LV BLK OUT Earth OC LV side Blocked
18418 E OC LV ACT OUT Earth OC LV side is Active
18419 E OC LV OFF OUT Earth OC LV side is OFF
18420 LV IE>>> PU OUT LV IE>>> protection Pickup
18421 LV IE>>> Trip OUT LV IE>>> protection Trip
18422 LV IE>> PU OUT LV IE>> protection Pickup
18423 LV IE>> Trip OUT LV IE>> protection Trip
18424 LV IE> PU OUT LV IE> protection Pickup
18425 LV IE> Trip OUT LV IE> protection Trip
18426 LV IEp PU OUT LV IEp protection Pickup
18427 LV IEp Trip OUT LV IEp protection Trip
18520 LV IE>>> OFF OUT LV IE>>> OFF
18521 LV IE>> OFF OUT LV IE>> OFF
18522 LV IE> OFF OUT LV IE> OFF
18523 LV IEp OFF OUT LV IEp OFF

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.22 Auto Reclose Function
NOTE
i Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/M!
NOTE
i Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/M!
Experience shows that about 85 % of insulation faults on overhead lines are transient faults. The line forms a
circuit with the ground via arc. The arc circuit disappears when the protection device trips, which means that
power supply to the fault line can be restored. The role of the auto-reclose function is to restore power supply
to the line by issuing a close command when the reclosing time has elapsed.
If the fault still exists (the arc does not disappear or a permanent fault has occurred) after automatic reclosing,
the circuit breaker of the line opens again based on the protection element being set. In some systems,
reclosing may be performed for multiple times.
Charging Conditions
Reclosing is enabled upon completion of charging. Under non-discharging conditions, the line operates in
closed mode. Charging is completed after 7109 AR Ready T.
Discharging Conditions
• When reclosing is set to once, if 2730 >CB Not Ready is configured and the CB is not ready,
discharging is performed after delay of 400 ms. If it is not configured, this discharging condition is
ignored. If reclosing is set to twice, the CB ready does not block or discharge for the second reclosing,
that is, even if the CB is not ready after the first reclosing, the reclosing function still issues a second
reclosing command after the second reclosing time;
• Manual trip or remote trip (HHJ=0);
• Discharging is performed after delay of 2 s during the wire broken of the control circuit when the device
has an operation box or during the wire broken of the trip circuit when the device does not have an oper-
ation box;
• PT wire broken occurs when non-voltage check or synchronisation check is enabled;
• Discharging is performed after delay of 200 ms following protection trip of non-startup reclosing (such as
low frequency load shedding action, low voltage load shedding action, and overload action, etc.);
• Discharging is performed after delay of 200 ms when there is no operation box, there is no protection
action, and the circuit breaker is open;
• When reclosing is set to once, after the protection startup reclosing or the unreasonable CB open start,
discharging is always performed when the reclosing procedure stops whether reclosing is ultimately
successful or not. If reclosing is set to twice, discharging is not performed for reclosing upon successful
first reclosing.
• Non-voltage check or synchronisation check is unsuccessful during the extended reclosing time;
• The circuit breaker is not open within 200 ms after the protection trip command for starting reclosing is
issued;
• Circuit breaker position unknown (position node not configured or circuit breaker position in inter-
mediate state);

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• 2703 >BLOCK AR HW link pieces are enabled;
• 18350 >Stop AR link pieces are enabled.

All conditions mentioned earlier can cause reclosing function to discharge and stop of the reclosing process.
The reclosing procedure can be enabled again only when the reclosing function is fully charged again.
The reclosing charging and discharging logic is shown in the following figure:
[lo_reclose_charge_&_discharge, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-109 Logic of Reclosing Charging And Discharging
Startup Method
Auto recloser function can be triggered by a protection pickup, the circuit breaker position does not corre-
spond to external inputs. You can select what to use to start reclosing as required, as shown in the following
figure. Each type can be set to Starts AutoRecl or No influence:
Table 2-7 Auto Reclosing Startup
Overcurrent (Direction) Startup Zero-Sequence (Direction) Over- Other Startup Methods

current Startup
I>>> DIR. IE>>> DIR. Circuit Breaker Position Does Not
Correspond
I>> DIR. IE>> DIR. Binary Input
|> Dir IE> Dir Line Differential protection
Ip DIR. IEp DIR. Remote trip

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Reclosing Method
The device offers 4 reclosing methods: No Check, No vol. Check, Sync Check and Voltage to
Synchronisation Check. They can be set via parameters 7170 No vol. Check and 7172 Sync Check.
The No vol. Check method is used when only parameter 7170 No vol. Check is enabled. The Sync
Check method is used when only parameter 7172 Sync Check is enabled. The No vol. Check and Sync
Check adaptive methods are used when both parameters 7170 No vol. Check and 7172 Sync Check are
enabled. The No Check method is used when none of the 2 is enabled.
When the No vol. Check method is selected for reclosing, you can select different no-voltage discrimina-
tion conditions via the parameter 7177 No vol. Option.
Select Live B, Dead L, when the line side voltage is less than 0.3 times the rated voltage and any 1
voltage of the busbar is greater than 0.7 times the rated voltage, the live busbar dead line conditions are satis-
fied.
Select Dead B, Live L, when the voltages of all 3 phases of the busbar are less than 0.3 times the rated
voltage and the line side voltage is greater than 0.7 times the rated voltage, the live line dead busbar condi-
tions are satisfied.
Select Dead B, Dead L, when voltages of all 3 phases of the busbar are less than 0.3 times the rated
voltage and the line side voltage is less than 0.3 times the rated voltage, the dead line dead busbar conditions
are satisfied.
Select Dead Line, when the line side voltage is less than 0.3 times the rated voltage, the dead line condi-
tions are satisfied.
Select Dead Bus, when the voltages of all 3 phases of the busbar are less than 0.3 times the rated voltage,
the dead busbar conditions are satisfied.
Select Dead B or L, when the voltages of all 3 phases of the busbar are less than 0.3 times the rated
voltage or the line side voltage is less than 0.3 times the rated voltage, the dead busbar or line conditions are
satisfied.
When the synchronisation check reclosing method is selected for the device, the Usy2 transf. must be
selected for 216 U4 transformer in power system parameters and the line side voltage must exceed 70 %
of the rated voltage. When used for synchronisation check, the source voltage can be connected to the
voltage of any phase-to-ground or the phase-to-phase voltage. Based on actual wiring conditions, the source
voltage can be set via parameter 7174 Sync Source V. Closing is performed when the voltage angle differ-
ence between the busbar and the line is less than the synchronisation angle. When the dead reclosing method
is selected for the device, the dead line setting is 30 % of the rated voltage of the line. When used for no
voltage, the dead setting is determined based on whether the connected voltage is phase-to-ground or phase-
to-phase voltage.
Circuit Breaker Status

The position of the circuit breaker is determined by the auxiliary contact of the line circuit breaker, and is
transferred to the device via binary input signals 4601 >Brk Aux NO and 4602 >Brk Aux NC.
• If both binary input signals 4601 >Brk Aux NO and 4602 >Brk Aux NC are not configured, the auto-
matic reclosing program cannot detect the position of the line circuit breaker.
• If only binary input 4601 >Brk Aux NO is configured and the binary input is invalid, the circuit breaker
is deemed as open. In this case, the intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot be detected.
• If only binary input 4602 >Brk Aux NC is configured and the binary input is valid, the circuit breaker is
deemed as open. In this case, the intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot be detected.
• If both binary input signals 4601 >Brk Aux NO and 4602 >Brk Aux NC are configured, then auto-
matic reclosing can detect whether the line circuit breaker is open, closed or between these 2 positions. If
the circuit breaker is in the intermediate position, the auto-reclose function discharges.
The position of the auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker checks cooperate with the minimum closing current
of the line, and the current preference. If it is detected that the status of the auxiliary contact of the circuit
breaker indicates open, but the line still has current, that is, the line current is greater than 212 BkrClosed
I MIN, then the circuit breaker is deemed as still being closed.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
3-Phase Reclosing Once

Reclosing must be started only after charging is completed. The reclosing charging time can be set via param-
eter 7109 AR Ready T. When any protection set to start the reclosing function pickup, the device starts the
first reclosing and begins reclosing timing after detecting that the circuit breaker is open and has no current
(set via parameter 7127 Dead Time 1). A close command is issued when the reclosing time has elapsed. The
maximum closing time is set via system parameter 211 TMax CLOSE CMD. Reclosing is successful if the
switch is closed within 3 sec of issuance of the close command and no further faults are detected again. At
this point, the reclosing process ends and recharging is performed to get ready for a new round of reclosing. If
the device detects fault trip again within 3 sec of issuance of the first reclose command, reclosing of this time
fails and the reclosing function discharges. If circuit breaker open or no line currents are not detected within
200 ms of issuance of the protection trip command, the reclosing function discharges.
If parameter 7170 No vol. Check or parameter 7172 Sync Check is enabled, the device detects whether
the line meets no voltage or synchronisation conditions within 7172 Sync Check and 7116 T-DEAD EXT..
If these conditions are satisfied, a close command is issued. If not, reclosing of this time fails and the reclosing
function discharges.
The logic of protection startup reclosing is shown in the following figure:
[lo_protection_starting_reclose, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-110 Logic of Protection Startup Reclosing
Reclosing Started by External Binary Input Signals

When parameter 7164 BINARY INPUT is set to Starts AutoRecl, startup of the automatic reclosing
module can be implemented via the binary input 2711 >External start of internal Auto reclose
introduced into the device externally. When reclosing is fully charged, the external binary input is triggered

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
and the circuit breaker opens, reclosing timing starts. A close command is issued when the reclosing time has
elapsed. Reclose function charges again if reclosing is successful ultimately after 3 sec of closing of the circuit
breaker. If the device parameter 7136 # OF Reclosing is set to 2, the external binary input can only start
the reclosing process once. The external binary input can take effect again until this round of reclosing process
is reset as a whole.
Starting Reclosing at Non-Corresponding Position

When the reclose is fully charged, if the device detects that the circuit breaker has non-corresponding position
signal (HHJ=1 & TWJ=1) and there is no protection trip command, the circuit breaker performs unreasonable
CB open start and begins unreasonable CB open start timing (set via parameter 7182 CB O.AR DEAD T). A
close command is issued when the reclosing time has elapsed. Reclosing is successful if no faults are detected
within 3 sec of issuance of the close command. At this point, the reclosing process ends and recharging is
performed to get ready for a new round of reclosing. If the device detects fault trip within 3 sec of issuance of
the first reclose command, reclosing of this time fails and the reclosing function discharges.
If parameter 7170 No vol. Check or parameter 7172 Sync Check is enabled, the device detects whether
the line meets no voltage or synchronisation conditions within 7127 Dead Time 1 and 7116 T-DEAD
EXT.. If these conditions are satisfied, a close command is issued. If not, reclosing of this time fails and the
reclosing function discharges.
If both the protection and non-corresponding position start reclose methods are enabled, the reclosing
process is performed based on the reclosing method that appears first. At the time of protection trip start
reclosing, the AR in progress signal starts when there is no current or circuit breaker open. At the time of
non-corresponding start reclosing, the AR in progress signal starts when non-corresponding signal is
detected.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic of unreasonable CB open start is shown in the following figure:
[lo_escape_trip_starting_reclose, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-111 Logic of Unreasonable CB Open Start
3-Phase Reclosing Twice

Set parameters 7127 Dead Time 1, 7129 2nd AR Block T, 7128 Dead Time 2 and 7109 AR Ready
T.
When each round of charging of the device is completed, the first reclosing is performed upon first fault trip. If
a fault occurs again after reclosing, and the time interval between this fault and the previous reclosing
exceeds the 2nd AR Block T setting and is less than the reclosing charging time, then the second reclosing
is performed. Otherwise, the second reclosing is not performed.
When the first reclosing is successful, the reclosing function discharges if the protection trips again within this
time limit.
When the first reclosing is successful, the reclosing is reset as a whole, the reclosing function does not
discharge and the second round of action can be performed if no fault occurs again beyond the reclosing
charging time. If a fault occurs again after the reclosing charging time, the protection action circuit breaker
trips. The protection recloses after the first reclosing time. If a fault occurs again after the charging time
beyond the 2nd block time when reclosing is successful, the protection action circuit breaker trips again. The
second reclose command is issued after the second reclosing time. Reclosing is successful if no fault occurs
again within 3 sec of issuance of the reclose command. At this point, reclosing resets and recharges as a
whole and gets ready for the next round of actions. If a fault occurs again within 3 sec of issuance of the
second reclose command, the circuit breaker trips, and reclosing fails and does not perform again.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic of second reclosing is shown in the following figure:
[lo_second_reclose, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-112 Logic of Second Reclosing
The automatic reclosing system is valid only when address 171 Auto Reclose function is set to Enabled in
device configuration. If this function is not needed, set it to Disabled. By setting SW link piece 7101 AUTO
RECLOSE, this function can be ON or OFF.
If HW link piece 2703 >BLOCK AR is configured as Valid for High Level, both SW link pieces and HW
link pieces take effect on activation of the reclosing function:
• HW link pieces, if not configured, have no impact on the reclosing function. At this point, if SW link pieces
are enabled, the reclosing function is activated.
• HW link pieces are configured as Valid for High Level. If HW link pieces are valid, the reclosing
function is deactivated whether SW link pieces are enabled or not.
• HW link pieces are configured as Valid for High Level. If HW link pieces are invalid, the reclosing
function is activated when SW link pieces are enabled and deactivated when SW link pieces are disabled.
If 2730 >CB Not Ready is configured, the reclosing program monitors the status of the circuit breaker. If
not, the reclosing program is not affected. For first reclosing, the reclosing process continues if the CB Not
Ready signal is reset within 400 ms of its appearance. Reclosing function discharges if the CB Not Ready signal
still exists after 400 ms. However, the CB Not Ready signal that occurs during the second reclosing process
does not affect the conduct of the second reclosing.
18302 >HHJ is used to distinguish manual trip, remote trip or protection trip. If the device has an operation
box, HHJ is still 1 and reclosing does not discharge upon protection tripping. HHJ=0 and the reclosing function
discharges upon manual tripping or remote tripping. If the device has no operation box, the reclosing function
discharges within 200 ms after the circuit breaker opens via detection of manual open or remote open. The
significance of configuration options:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• Starts AutoRecl: this protection element starts automatic reclosing through its own trip command;
• No influence: this protection element does not start automatic reclosing.

Reclosing time: Parameters 7127 and 7128 are used to set the first reclosing time and the second reclosing
time, respectively. 7116 T-DEAD EXT.: This parameter must be set if reclosing synchronisation check or no
voltage check is operating. If the synchronisation check or no voltage check conditions are satisfied during the
dead time extension, reclosing issues a close command. If the synchronisation check or no voltage check
conditions are still not satisfied at the end of dead time extension, reclosing terminates.
NOTE
i At least one of the auxiliary contacts 4601 >Brk Aux NO and 4602 >Brk Aux NC used to determine the
position of the circuit breaker must be configured.
The setting 7129 2nd AR Block T must be set to be less than 7109 AR Ready T.
2.22.3 Settings

171 Auto Reclose Disabled Enabled Auto-Reclose Function
Enabled
7101 AUTO RECLOSE OFF OFF Auto-Reclose Function
ON
7109 AR Ready T 0.50 .. 320.00 sec 15.00 sec Auto Recloseing ready time
7116 T-DEAD EXT. 0.50 .. 1800.00 sec; ∞ 100.00 sec Maximum dead time extension
7127 Dead Time 1 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1
7128 Dead Time 2 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 2
7129 2nd AR Block T 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 5.00 sec 2nd AR Block Time
7136 # OF Reclosing 1 .. 2 1 Number of Reclosing Cycles
7156 I>>> DIR. No influence Starts AutoRecl I>>> directional
Starts AutoRecl
7157 IE>>> DIR. No influence Starts AutoRecl IE>>> directional
Starts AutoRecl
7158 I>> DIR. No influence No influence I>> directional
Starts AutoRecl
7159 IE>> DIR. No influence No influence IE>> directional
Starts AutoRecl
7160 Ip DIR. No influence No influence Ip directional
Starts AutoRecl
7161 IEp DIR. No influence No influence IEp directional
Starts AutoRecl
7164 BINARY INPUT No influence Starts AutoRecl Binary Input
Starts AutoRecl
7170 No vol. Check YES NO No voltage check
NO
7172 Sync Check YES NO Synchronization check
NO
7173 Sync Angle 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Synchronization angle

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

7174 Sync Source V UL1E UL1E Synchronization voltage source
UL2E
UL3E
UL12
UL23
UL31
7175 |> Dir No influence No influence I> Dir
Starts AutoRecl
7176 IE> Dir No influence No influence IE> Dir
Starts AutoRecl
7177 No vol. Option Live B, Dead L Dead B or L No vol. Option
Dead B, Live L
Dead B, Dead L
Dead Line
Dead Bus
Dead B or L
7180 U.CB O start AR No influence No influence Unreasonable CB open start AR
Starts AutoRecl
7182 CB O.AR DEAD T 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Unreasonable CB open start AR
dead time
7190 DIFF. PROT. No influence Starts AutoRecl Line Differential protection
Starts AutoRecl
7191 Remote trip No influence Starts AutoRecl Remote trip
Starts AutoRecl

Informa-
tion
2703 >BLOCK AR SP >BLOCK Auto reclose
2711 >AR Start SP >External start of internal Auto reclose
2730 >CB Not Ready SP >Circuit Breaker Not READY For Reclosing
2781 Auto recl. OFF OUT Auto recloser is switched OFF
2801 AR in progress OUT Auto-reclose in progress
2844 AR 1stCyc. run. OUT AR 1st cycle running
2845 AR 2ndCyc. run. OUT AR 2nd cycle running
2851 AR Close OUT Auto-reclose Close command
2862 AR Successful OUT Auto reclose cycle successful
17232 AR ready OUT Auto recloser is ready
17236 CB O.AR in prog OUT Unreasonable CB open start AR in prog
17254 CB O AR success OUT CB open start autoreclose success
17979 AR SW. ON IntSP Auto-Reclose Softlink ON
18155 AR Blocked OUT AR is blocked
18157 AR ACTIVE OUT Auto reclose is active
18158 CB P. BLK AR OUT AR blocked due to no CB position signal
18159 VOL. CHECK OK OUT Voltage check ok
18160 SYN. CHECK OK OUT Synchronization check ok

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18161 CB Not Ready OUT Not Ready: CB Not Ready
18162 M./R. Trip OUT Not Ready: Manual or remote trip
18163 Ctrl. CC BRK OUT Not Ready: Control circuit broken
18164 Nonstarter CB O OUT Not Ready: Nonstarter CB Open
18166 CB N. open A.Tr OUT CB not open after trip
18167 CB N.Ready in T OUT CB not ready in Max dead time
18168 SYNC/Vol not OK OUT SYNC or Vol check not ok in Max dead T
18169 Trip in R. Time OUT Trip in restraint time
18170 AR Fail OUT Auto reclose Fail
18173 AR PT Broken OUT Not Ready: PT Broken Wire
18174 Trip in 2 BLK T OUT Trip in 2nd Block Time
18350 >Stop AR SP >Stop Auto recloser

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.23 FC Circuit Operate Blocking
NOTE
i Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/C/K-C/K-D/K-E!
FC circuit operate blocking is an auxiliary function that cooperates with other protection functions. When the
current of any of the 3 phases exceeds the value of the parameter FC I> Thres., the circuit breaker cannot
cut off the short circuit fault current. At this moment, the trip signals of all protection functions are blocked,
then, the system waits for the fuse to cut off the short circuit fault current.
[lo_FC_blocking, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-113 Logic Diagram of FC Circuit Operate Blocking
FC circuit operate blocking can be set to ON or OFF in Device Configuration, and the function can be ON or
OFF via a parameter.

Informa-
tion
18114 FC Overcurrent OUT FC Overcurrent

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.24 Switch onto Fault Overcurrent Protection
NOTE
i Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/F/N!
Switch onto fault overcurrent protection is comprised of 2 stages of switch onto fault overcurrent protection
and 2 stages of switch onto fault zero-sequence overcurrent protection. Each stage has an independent
parameter and can be ON/OFF respectively.
For switch onto fault overcurrent protection, you can select whether to block it by compound voltage control.
For switch onto fault zero-sequence overcurrent protection, you can select whether to block it by zero-
sequence voltage control.
Active Time for Charging Protection

Switch onto fault overcurrent protection provides the parameter SOTF Active T (address 6018). When
detecting that the circuit breaker has changed from open to closed, the device immediately triggers the timer
SOTF Active T. switch onto fault overcurrent protection operates only within the time SOTF Active T.
The position of the circuit breaker is determined by its auxiliary contacts 4601 >Breaker contact (OPEN,
if bkr is open) and 4602 >Breaker contact(OPEN, if bkr is closed).
• If both binary inputs address 4601 and address 4602 are not configured, switch onto fault overcurrent
protection does not operate because the program cannot detect the position of the circuit breaker and
cannot trigger the timer SOTF Active T.
• If only binary input address 4601 is configured and the binary input is invalid, the circuit breaker is
deemed as open. If the binary input is valid, the circuit breaker is deemed as closed.
• If only binary input address 4602 is configured and the binary input is valid, the circuit breaker is deemed
as open. If the binary input is invalid, the circuit breaker is deemed as closed.
• If both binary inputs address 4601 and address 4602 are configured, the device determines the position
of the circuit breaker based on the status of these 2 binary inputs. If both binary inputs are valid or invalid
at the same time, the circuit breaker is deemed as in the intermediate position.
Whether the break contact of the circuit breaker is closed or not, the circuit breaker is deemed as closed as
long as the current of any phase is greater than 212 BkrClosed I MIN.
Compound Voltage Control

For each stage of switch onto fault zero-sequence overcurrent protection, whether to block by zero-sequence
voltage or not can be set via parameters (addresses 6030 and 6035) respectively. For zero-sequence voltage,
whether to use calculated (3U0) or external (delta voltage) or not is adapted by the software based on PT
connection (addresses 213 and 216).
When U4 transformer (address 216) is set to Udelta transf., the zero-sequence voltage is directly
calculated by the fourth voltage.
When U4 transformer is set to Not connected, Ux transformer or Usy2 transf., and VT
Connection (address 213) is selected as UL1E,UL2E,UL3E, the zero-sequence voltage is the calculated
zero-sequence voltage 3U0 (Ua+Ub+Uc).
When U4 transformer is set to Not connected, Ux transformer or Usy2 transf., and VT
Connection (address 213) is selected as U12, U23, switch onto fault zero-sequence overcurrent protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
does not allow to enable zero-sequence voltage block, because the device cannot calculate the zero-sequence
voltage.
When YES is selected for Bus PT Connect (address 267) of the Automatic Transfer System device, and
U12, U23 is selected for PT Connect Bus (address 268), switch onto fault zero-sequence overcurrent
protection does not allow to enable zero-sequence voltage block, because the device cannot calculate the
zero-sequence voltage.
When NO is selected for Bus PT Connect (address 267) of the Automatic Transfer System device, switch
onto fault zero-sequence overcurrent protection does not allow to enable zero-sequence voltage block.
Influence of PT Broken on the Compound Voltage Control Element and the Zero-Sequence Voltage Control Element
The device provides the PT BRK VOLT. Release/Block (address 6014) to control the behaviour of
compound voltage control element and zero-sequence voltage control element in case of PT broken. If set to
Block, the compound voltage control element and zero-sequence voltage control element do not satisfy
conditions when the device detects PT broken. If set to Release, the compound voltage control element and
zero-sequence voltage control element satisfy conditions when the device detects PT broken. At this point,
switch onto fault overcurrent protection and switch onto fault zero-sequence overcurrent protection become
pure overcurrent protection.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_ph.1_charge, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-114 Logic Diagram of Switch onto Fault Overcurrent Protection Stage 1 (Not Applicable to 7SJ686-
N)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_Ea.1_charge, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-115 Logic Diagram of Switch onto Fault Zero-Sequence Overcurrent Protection Stage 1 (Not Appli-
cable to 7SJ686-N)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_ATS_ph.1_charge, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-116 Logic Diagram of Switch onto Fault Overcurrent Protection Stage 1 of Automatic Transfer
System Device (7SJ686-N)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_ATS_Ea.1_charge, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-117 Logic Diagram of Switch onto Fault Zero-Sequence Overcurrent Protection Stage 1 of Auto-
matic Transfer System Device (7SJ686-N)
NOTE
i For switch onto fault overcurrent protection in the Automatic Transfer System device:
• When 274 Connection in P.System Data is set to Single Busbar, this protection function is not
available.
• Switch onto fault overcurrent protection is not blocked in case of PT broken.
• The position of the busbar switch of the Automatic Transfer System device is configured to CB3 in
P.System Data. The closed position of the busbar switch in the preceding logic diagram always refers
to the position of CB3.
2.24.3 Settings

123 SOTF DMT Disabled Disabled Switch onto fault DMT
Enabled protection
6010 SOTF I>> OFF OFF Switch onto fault I>>
ON ON/OFF

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

6011 SOTF I> OFF OFF Switch onto fault I>
ON ON/OFF
6012 SOTF IE>> OFF OFF Switch onto fault IE>>
ON ON/OFF
6013 SOTF IE> OFF OFF Switch onto fault IE>
ON ON/OFF
6014 PT BRK VOLT. Release Block PT broken wire for Voltage
Block Control
6015 SOTF Ph-Ph U< 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 50.0 V Ph-Ph Under Voltage
Release Threshold
6016 SOTF U2> 1.0 .. 57.0 V; ∞ 8.0 V U2 Over Voltage Release
Threshold
6017 SOTF U0> 1.0 .. 200.0 V 30.0 V U0 Over Voltage Release
Threshold
6018 SOTF Active T 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 5.00 sec Active Time for Switch
onto fault
6020 I>> Vol.Ctrl OFF OFF Switch onto fault I>>
ON Voltage Control
6021 I>> PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 4.00 A Switch onto fault I>>
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 20.00 A Pickup
6022 I>> DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Switch onto fault I>> Time
Delay
6025 I> Vol.Ctrl OFF OFF Switch onto fault I>
ON Voltage Control
6026 I> PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A Switch onto fault I> Pickup
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
6027 I> DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Switch onto fault I> Time
Delay
6030 IE>> Vol.Ctrl OFF OFF Switch onto fault IE>>
ON Voltage Control
6031 IE>> PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A Switch onto fault IE>>
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A Pickup
6032 IE>> DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Switch onto fault IE>>
Time Delay
6035 IE> Vol.Ctrl OFF OFF Switch onto fault IE>
ON Voltage Control
6036 IE> PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A Switch onto fault IE>
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A Pickup
6037 IE> DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Switch onto fault IE> Time
Delay

Informa-
tion
18118 >BLK SOTF OC SP >BLOCK Switch onto fault OC Protection
18119 >ENA SOTF OC SP >Enable Switch onto fault OC Protection
18120 SOTF OC BLK OUT SOTF OC is Blocked

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18121 Com.V.R SOTF OC OUT Compound Voltage Release SOTF Ph OC
18122 SOTF OC Act. OUT SOTF OC Protection is active
18123 SOTF I>> OFF OUT SOTF I>> is OFF
18124 SOTF I> OFF OUT SOTF I> is OFF
18125 SOTF I>> PU OUT SOTF I>> pick up
18127 SOTF I>> Trip OUT SOTF I>> TRIP
18128 SOTF I> PU OUT SOTF I> pick up
18130 SOTF I> Trip OUT SOTF I> TRIP
18131 SOTF IE>> OFF OUT SOTF IE>> is OFF
18132 SOTF IE> OFF OUT SOTF IE> is OFF
18133 SOTF IE>> PU OUT SOTF IE>> pick up
18135 SOTF IE>> Trip OUT SOTF IE>> TRIP
18136 SOTF IE> PU OUT SOTF IE> pick up
18138 SOTF IE> Trip OUT SOTF IE> TRIP
18139 >Blk SOTF I>> SP >BLOCK SOTF I>> Protection
18140 >Blk SOTF I> SP >BLOCK SOTF I> Protection
18141 >Blk SOTF IE>> SP >BLOCK SOTF IE>> Protection
18142 >Blk SOTF IE> SP >BLOCK SOTF IE> Protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/K/K-C/K-D/K-E!
The unbalance load (negative sequence) function in motor protection is used to detect the negative-sequence
current caused by asymmetrical fault or asymmetrical load in the motor system. When negative-sequence
current flows through the stator winding of a 3-phase induction motor, a reversed electromagnetic field is
generated, which is characterised of double frequency current of the rotor. At this point, induced vortex is
generated on the rotor surface, resulting in overheating of the rotor end and slot edge. If the negative-
sequence current exceeds the capability of the motor of withstanding the negative-sequence current, the
rotor overheats to endanger safe operation of the motor.
The unbalance load (negative sequence) provides 2 stages of definite-time overcurrent protection and 1 stage
of inverse-time overcurrent protection. Each stage can be set separately. Unbalance load (negative sequence)
measured value provides analog channel options. You can select Prot. CT or Meas. CT.
Negative-Sequence Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection

2-stage definite-time overcurrent protection compares the negative-sequence current with the set 2-stage
definite-time overcurrent pickup value. A pickup signal is issued when the negative-sequence current exceeds
the setting. If no blocking is detected, a trip signal is issued when the user-defined time delay expires. When
the negative-sequence current value is greater than 0.1 In, the return value is approximately equal to 95 % of
the pickup value.
Negative-Sequence Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection

IEC Normal Inverse, IEC Very Inverse, IEC Extremely Inv. or IEC Long Inverse can be selected
for negative-sequence inverse-time overcurrent protection. The negative-sequence current is compared with
the inverse-time overcurrent protection pickup value. If the negative-sequence current exceeds 1.1 times the
set value, the negative-sequence overcurrent inverse-time stage pickup and trip by time delay. The actual trip
time delay depends on the actual negative-sequence current and the selected operate curve. Once the delay
expires, a trip signal is issued if no blocking is detected. The pickup reset of inverse time is instantaneous, that
is, reset is performed when the negative-sequence current decreases to approximately 95 % of the pickup
threshold. Where, the pickup threshold is 1.1 times the set value.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_negative_seq_OCP, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-118 Logic Diagram of Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)
2.25.2 Settings

4001 UNBALANCE LOAD OFF OFF Unbalance Load (Negative
ON Sequence)
4002 I2> 1A 0.03 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.10 A I2> Pickup
5A 0.15 .. 10.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A
4003 T I2> 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec T I2> Time Delay
4004 I2>> 1A 0.03 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A I2>> Pickup
5A 0.15 .. 10.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

4005 T I2>> 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec T I2>> Time Delay
4006 IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
4007 ANSI CURVE Extremely Inv. Extremely Inv. ANSI Curve
Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Very Inverse
4008 I2p 1A 0.03 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.90 A I2p Pickup
5A 0.15 .. 10.00 A; ∞ 4.50 A
4009 TIME DIAL: TD 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 TIME DIAL: TD
4010 T I2p 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T I2p Time Dial
4011 I2p RESET Instantaneous Instantaneous I2p Drop-Out
Disk Emulation
4013 I2>> OFF ON I2>> Negative Sequence
ON Protection
4014 I2> OFF ON I2> Negative Sequence
ON Protection
4015 I2p OFF ON I2p Negative Sequence
ON Protection
4021 I2 Meas.Value Prot. CT Prot. CT Negative Sequence
Meas. CT Meas.Value

Informa-
tion
5143 >BLOCK I2 SP >BLOCK I2 (Unbalance Load)
5151 I2 OFF OUT I2 switched OFF
5152 I2 BLOCKED OUT I2 is BLOCKED
5153 I2 ACTIVE OUT I2 is ACTIVE
5159 I2>> picked up OUT I2>> picked up
5165 I2> picked up OUT I2> picked up
5166 I2p picked up OUT I2p picked up
5171 I2 Dsk pickedup OUT I2 Disk emulation picked up
5177 I2>> TRIP OUT I2>> TRIP
5178 I2> TRIP OUT I2> TRIP
5179 I2p TRIP OUT I2p TRIP
17989 I2 ON IntSP I2 (Unbalance Load) ON
18528 >Enable I2 SP >Enable I2 (Unbalance Load)
18529 I2>> OFF OUT I2>> OFF
18530 I2> OFF OUT I2> OFF
18531 I2p OFF OUT I2p OFF

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.26 Startup Supervision of Motors
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C!
The motor startup supervision function protects the motor during startup and complements the thermal over-
load protection to prevent excessive startup time. If the durations of these starting attempts are lengthened
e.g. by excessive voltage surges during motor starting, by excessive load moments, or by blocked rotor condi-
tions, a trip signal will be initiated by the protective relay.
Motor Startup Recognition

The motor generates an inrush current when it is powered on. When the motor startup supervision is enabled,
the device determines whether the motor is in the startup state according to the change of motor current and
issues the signal 18000 Motor start, which is configured to CFC by default. The logic for determining the
motor startup state is as follows:
• The start criterion for Motor start: The maximum phase current of the motor changes abruptly from 0
to 0.1 times the rated motor current (4305) within 20 ms.
• The reset criteria for Motor start: The maximum phase current of the motor is less than the rated
motor current (4305) for 40 ms.
[lo_motor_startup_wave, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-119 Startup Characteristics of Asynchronous Motors
Motor Startup Supervision

When the motor current exceeds the current setting value 4107 I MOTOR START, the motor startup supervi-
sion function starts and the startup timer starts. If the motor is still in the startup state after the startup timer
ends, the device issues a trip command. During motor operating, the startup supervision function is automati-
cally disabled. During motor startup, if the startup current exceeds the set value but does not reach 500 ms,
the motor is not considered to be started and the statistics are not accumulated.
The motor startup supervision protection provides 1 definite-time stage and 1 inverse-time stage. Each stage
can be individually set.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Stage

The inverse time overcurrent element is designed to operate only when the rotor is not blocked. With a
decreased startup current resulting from voltage dips when starting the motor, prolonged startup times are
evaluated correctly and tripping with an appropriate time is enabled. The characteristic can be ideally adjusted
to the condition of the motor by using different startup times depending on the cold or warm condition of the
motor.
The trip time is calculated with the following formula
Where,
Where,
ttrip Actual tripping time for flowing current I
tmax.startup Tripping time for nominal startup current Istartup (4103 Cold Startup T
or 4105 STARTUP T WARM)
I Current actually flowing
Istartup Nominal startup current of the motor (4102 STARTUP CURRENT)
Imotor.start Nominal startup current of the motor (4107 Motor Start Current
(BLK OVL,Start Mon.))
[lo_inverse_time_tripping_curves, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-120 Inverse-Time Trip Curve of the Motor Startup Current
The motor startup time is different between the cold state and the warm state. The motor startup supervision
function can automatically switch between the two states. The address 4106 TEMP.COLD MOTOR determines
the specific conditions for switching. If the motor temperature exceeds the setting, the "cold motor" switches
to the "warm motor".
Definite-Time Overcurrent Stage

If the startup time is longer than the permissible blocked rotor time, the rotor stalls, leading to a reduction in
ventilation and consequently to a reduction in the thermal load capacity of the motor. Therefore, the motor
startup supervision must issue a trip command before the rated thermal load capacity limit is reached. Rotor
locked status information is informed via the binary input 6805 >Rotor locked, for example, via an
external speed monitor. The motor startup process is monitored when any phase of the motor current exceeds
the current setting 4107 Motor Start Current (BLK OVL,Start Mon.).
When the motor startup time exceeds 4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME and 6805 >Rotor locked remains 1,
which indicates that the rotor is not rotating at this time, the definite-time overcurrent trip of the supervision
is activated.
When the motor startup time is within the 4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME and 6805 >Rotor locked returns 0
which indicates that the rotor is rotating at this time, the motor starts up properly.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.26.2 Logic Diagram
[lo_motor_startup_monitoring, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-121 Logic Diagram of Motor Startup Supervision
Motor Startup Current

The motor is considered to be starting when the current value exceeds the setting value 4107 I MOTOR
START. Consequently, this value must be chosen such that it is reliably attained by the actual starting current
under any load or voltage conditions during motor startup, but not during a permissible short-time overload.
Example: Motor data
Rated voltage UN = 6600 V
Rated current IN = 126 A
Startup current ISTARTUP = 624 A
Maximum load current Imax = 135 A

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Startup time (cold) TSTARTUPcold = 15 s

Startup time (warm) TSTARTUPwarm = 8.5 s
Current transformer INCTprim/INCTsec = 200 A/1 A
4107 I MOTOR START (ISTARTUPsec) refers to the secondary current value, which is calculated as follows:
[fo_maxanlauf, 1, en_US]
For reduced voltage, the startup current is also reduced almost linearly. At 80 % nominal voltage, the startup
current in this example is reduced to 0.8 ISTARTUP = 2.5.
The setting for detection of a motor startup must lie above the maximum load current and below the
minimum start-up current. Therefore, the setting at address 4107 I MOTOR START can be an average value:
Based on the maximum load current:
Threshold Values "cold" / "warm" Motor

Parameter 4106 TEMP.COLD MOTOR determines the threshold value. It is derived from the number of cold
(ncold) and warm (nwarm) motor startups. Unless specified otherwise, three cold and two warm startups (ncold =
3; nwarm = 2) will be sufficient. These are typical motor data. The limit value is thus derived:
A recommended setting value with consideration of a safety margin for TEMP.COLD MOTOR = 25 %. The
technical data of the motor can be refered to four cold and two warm startups (ncold = 4; nwarm = 2), the
following limit value can be determined:
The setting value should fall below the limit value. A value of 40 % is recommended for that purpose.
2.26.4 Settings

141 STARTUP Mot. Disabled Disabled Startup Supervision of
Enabled Motors
4101 STARTUP MOT. OFF OFF Motor (Startup Monitor /
ON Counter)
4102 STARTUP CURRENT 1A 0.50 .. 16.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A Startup Current
5A 2.50 .. 80.00 A; ∞ 25.00 A
4103 Cold Startup T 1.0 .. 180.0 sec 10.0 sec Cold Startup Time
4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME 0.5 .. 180.0 sec; ∞ 2.0 sec Permissible Locked Rotor
Time

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

4105 STARTUP T WARM 0.5 .. 180.0 sec; ∞ 10.0 sec Startup Time for warm
motor
4106 TEMP.COLD MOTOR 0 .. 80 %; ∞ 25 % Temperature limit for cold
motor

Informa-
tion
6801 >BLK START-SUP SP >BLOCK Startup Supervision
6805 >Rotor locked SP >Rotor locked
6811 START-SUP OFF OUT Startup supervision OFF
6812 START-SUP BLK OUT Startup supervision BLOCKED
6813 START-SUP ACT OUT Startup supervision is ACTIVE
6821 START-SUP TRIP OUT Startup supervision TRIP
6822 Rotor locked OUT Rotor locked
6823 START-SUP PU OUT Startup supervision pick up
17990 STA.MOT.ON IntSP Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) ON
18000 Motor start OUT Motor is starting
18535 >ENA START-SUP SP >Enable Startup Supervision
NOTE
i The motor restart inhibit 4301 STARTUP COUNT. must be set to ON to enable distinguishing between cold
and warm condition of the motor.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.27 Motor Restart Inhibit
NOTE
The rotor temperature of a motor generally remains well below its maximum admissible temperature during
normal operation and also under increased load conditions. However, high startup currents required during
motor startup increase the risk of the rotor being thermally damaged rather the stator, due to the short
thermal constant of the rotor. To avoid that multiple starting attempts provoke tripping, a restart of the motor
must be inhibited if it is apparent that the thermal limit of the rotor will be exceeded during this startup
attempt.
The blocking signal must be configured to a binary output relay of the device whose contact is inserted in the
motor starting circuit.
The motor restart inhibition function provides 2-stage overheating protection. When the motor is restarted, if
the rotor heat exceeds the restart limit, the motor restart inhibition is activated until the standstill motor is
allowed to start again. In addition, if the motor rotor temperature exceeds 100 % of the maximum permissible
temperature, the rotor is at risk of major damage and the motor overload protection is activated. The settings
of 2 protection stages can be set individually.
Motor Startup
The motor restart inhibition function works during the startup of a standstill motor. When the 3-phase current
of the motor decreases to below the setting value 212 BkrClosed I MIN, the motor is considered to be in
standstill state. When the motor current of any phase is greater than BkrClosed I MIN, the motor is consid-
ered to be in the restart stage and the restart inhibition is automatically enabled. Therefore, the setting value
of BkrClosed I MIN must be lower than the no-load current of the motor.
Thermal Capacity of Rotor
[fo_rotor_heat_vol, 1, --_--]
Where,
τL Motor startup time constant
t Motor startup current operating time
ncold Permissible number of motor starts
tstart Maximum permissible startup time
The rotor restart limit QRES* is the thermal capacity before the last cold start. For example, if 3 cold starts are
allowed, then the thermal capacity accumulated after the 2nd cold start is the restart limit, which is calculated
with the following formula:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Both the rotor temperature Q* accumulated by the device in real time and the rotor restart limit QRES* are
displayed as operational measured value in the ”thermal measured values”. The maximum permissible rotor
temperature QMAX* is the temperature after the permissible number of cold starts, t = ncold * tstart. At this time,
the thermal capacity of the rotor is 100 %.
[lo_rotor_temp_curve_&_heat_image, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-122 Rotor Temperature Profile and Thermal Image during Multiple Motor Restarts
Figure 2-122 shows the heated process of the rotor during repeated starts of the motor (three starts under
cold conditions) and the thermal capacity obtained from the protection calculation.
Motor Startup Time Constant tL
Assuming that the thermal capacity of the motor after the permissible number of cold starts is the same as
that after the permissible number of warm starts, the motor startup time constant can be derived as follows:
Where,
ncold Permissible number of cold starts
nwarm Permissible number of warm starts
tstart Maximum permissible startup time

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
INmotor Rated motor current

Istartup Motor startup current
As can be seen, the startup time constant is determined by the permissible number of cold and warm starts,
the maximum permissible startup time, the rated motor current and the startup current parameters. Since
these are motor parameters provided by the motor manufacturer, the startup time constant is determined by
the internal calculation of the device and does not have to be calculated and set by the user.
Motor Standstill and Startup Time Constant

The rotor temperature rises rapidly when the motor starts, and the startup time constant is calculated inter-
nally by the device based on the motor parameters. During normal operation, the rotor temperature rises
steadily and thermal equilibrium takes place inside the motor. The rate of temperature rise is determined by
4309 Kτ at RUNNING, and the motor temperature is eventually stable for a defined motor current. When
the motor stops, the rotor temperature starts to drop slowly. For motors without external cooling, the rotor
temperature drops very slowly and the rate of temperature drop is determined by 4308 Kτ at STOP.
Therefore, for motors without external cooling, the factor 4308 Kτ at STOP > 4309 Kτ at RUNNING > 1.0;
for motors with externally cooling, the factor 4308 Kτ at STOP = 4309 Kτ at RUNNING > 1.0.
Temperature Equilibrium Time tequal
The temperature equilibrium timer is activated each time the motor stops. During the equilibrium time, the
thermal replica of the rotor is not updated. It is maintained constant to replicate the equilization process in the
rotor. Therefore, the motor cannot be restarted during this process. After the equilibrium time, the tempera-
ture starts to decrease. As soon as the temperature sinks below the restarting limit, the next restart attempt
can be made.
Restart Inhibition Time treclose
Regardless of thermal replicas, some motor manufacturers require a minimum inhibit time after the maximum
number of permissible startup attempts has been exceeded.
When the rotor thermal capacity Q* is less than the rotor restart limit QRES*, the restart inhibition time treclose is
tequal (parameter 4304 T Equal).
When the rotor thermal capacity Q* is greater than the rotor restart limit QRES*, the restart inhibition time treclose
is the greater of tinhibit and tequal plus the wait time treset that is required for the thermal capacity Q* to fall below
the restart limit QRES*.
Θ* < ΘRES* treclose = tequal

Θ* > ΘRES* tinhibit > tequal + treset treclose = tinhibit
tinhibit < tequal + treset treclose = tequal+ treset
The restart inhibition time treclose is displayed in the menu Measurement > Thermal Metre. When the rotor
thermal capacity is greater than the restart limit, the displayed value of the restart inhibition time remains
unchanged until the rotor thermal capacity falls below the restart limit, allowing the next restart of the motor.
Then the displayed restart inhibition time is reset to zero.
The wait time treset is calculated with the following formula:
Where,
τL Motor startup time constant, which is calculated internally
kstop Stall time constant/startup time constant
Θ0* Thermal capacity before motor stalls
ΘRES* Motor restart limit

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Emergency Start
If, for emergency reasons, motor starting that will exceed the maximum allowable rotor temperature must
take place, the motor restart inhibit signal can be removed via a binary input 4823 >EmergencyStart, thus
allowing a new starting attempt. The thermal rotor profile, however, continues to function and the maximum
allowable rotor temperature will be exceeded. No motor shutdown will be initiated by the motor restart
inhibit, but the calculated excessive temperature of the rotor can be observed for risk assessment.
Temperature Behavior during Changing Operating States

To better understand the preceding information, several possible operating ranges within two different oper-
ating zones are discussed below.
A) Below the thermal restarting limit:
• A normal startup brings the machine into a temperature range below the thermal restarting limit and the
machine is stopped. The stop launches the equilibrium time 4304 T Equal and generates the message
Mot.Start. TRIP. The equilibrium time expires and the message Mot.Start. TRIP is cleared.
During the time T Equal the thermal replica remains frozen.
• A normal startup brings the machine into a temperature range below the thermal restarting limit, the
machine is stopped and is started by an emergency startup without waiting for the equilibrium time to
expire. The equilibrium time is reset, the thermal replica is released and Mot.Start. TRIP is reported
as going.
[lo_start_process_a, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-123 Startup Process in A.1 and A.2
B) Above the thermal restarting limit:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• A startup brings the machine from load operation into a temperature range far above the thermal
restarting limit and the machine is stopped. The minimum inhibit time and the equilibrium time are
started and Mot.Start. TRIP is reported. The temperature cool-down below the restarting limit takes
longer than 4310 T MIN. INHIBIT and 4304 T Equal, so that the time passing until the temperature
falls below the temperature limit is the decisive factor for clearing the message Mot.Start. TRIP. The
thermal replica remains frozen while the equilibrium time expires.
• A startup brings the machine from load operation into a temperature range just above the thermal
restarting limit and the machine is stopped. The minimum inhibit time and the equilibrium time are
started and Mot.Start. TRIP is reported. Although the temperature soon falls below the restarting
limit, the blocking Mot.Start. TRIP is preserved until the equilibrium time and the minimum inhibit
time have expired.
[lo_start_process_b, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-124 Startup Process in B.1 and B.2
Behavior in Case of Power Supply Failure

Depending on the setting in address 264 ATEX100 of Power System Data 1. the value of the thermal replica is
either reset to zero (ATEX100 = NO) if the power supply voltage fails, or cyclically buffered in a non-volatile
memory (ATEX100 = YES) so that it is maintained in the event of auxiliary supply voltage failure. In the latter
case, when power supply is restored, the thermal replica uses the stored value for calculation and matches it
to the operating conditions. The first option is the default setting.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_motor_restart_suppression, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-125 Logic Diagram of Motor Restart Inhibition
Example: The motor data is as follows:

Rated voltage UN = 6600 V
Rated current IN = 126 A

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Startup current ISTARTUP = 624 A

Startup duration TSTARTmax = 8.5 s
Permissible number of cold starts ncold = 3
Permissible number of warm starts nwarm = 2
Current transformer 200 A/1 A
From the preceding data, the following can be deduced:
Therefore, the following settings are obtained:

IStart/IMOTnom = 4.9
I MOTOR NOMINAL = 0.6 A
T START MAX = 8.5 s
MAX.WARM STARTS =2
#COLD-#WARM =1
It has been proven that it is appropriate to set 4304 T Equal = 1.0 min. The value of 4310 T MIN.
INHIBIT depends on the needs of the motor parameters, or on the needs of the system state settings. In any
case, however, 4310 T MIN. INHIBIT must be set higher than 4304 T Equal. In this example, a value
that reflects the thermal capacity is selected, and T MIN. INHIBIT = 6.0 min.
The motor manufacturer must determine the time constant for the cooling process according to some prac-
tical needs, especially when the motor stalls. If nothing else is specified, the following settings are recom-
mended: Kτ at STOP = 5 and Kτ at RUNNING = 2.
For proper operation, it is also important to set the CT value correctly and to distinguish the current values
(212 BkrClosed I MIN) in the stall and operating state of the motor.
2.27.4 Settings

143 Startup C.Mot. Disabled Disabled Startup Counter for Motors
Enabled
4301 STARTUP COUNT. OFF OFF Startup Counter for Motors
ON
4302 IStart/IMOTnom 1.10 .. 10.00 ; ∞ 4.90 I Start / I Motor nominal
4303 T START MAX 1 .. 320 sec 10 sec Maximum Permissible
Starting Time
4304 T Equal 0.0 .. 320.0 min 1.0 min Temperature Equalizaton
Time
4305 I MOTOR NOMINAL 1A 0.20 .. 1.20 A 1.00 A Rated Motor Current
5A 1.00 .. 6.00 A 5.00 A
4306 MAX.WARM STARTS 1 .. 4 2 Maximum Number of
Warm Starts
4307 #COLD-#WARM 1 .. 2 1 Number of Cold Starts -
Warm Starts
4308 Kτ at STOP 0.2 .. 100.0 5.0 Extension of Time Constant
at Stop
4309 Kτ at RUNNING 0.2 .. 100.0 2.0 Extension of Time Constant
at Running

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

4310 T MIN. INHIBIT 0.2 .. 120.0 min 6.0 min Minimum Restart Inhibit
Time
4311 ROTOR OVERLOAD ON ON Rotor Overload Protection
OFF
Alarm Only

Informa-
tion
4822 >BLK Mot.Start. SP >BLOCK Motor Startup counter
4823 >EmergencyStart SP >Emergency start
4824 Mot.Start. OFF OUT Motor start protection OFF
4825 Mot.Start. BLK OUT Motor start protection BLOCKED
4826 Mot.Start. ACT OUT Motor start protection ACTIVE
4827 Mot.Start. TRIP OUT Motor start protection TRIP
4828 >RM th.rep. ΘR SP >Reset thermal memory rotor
4829 RM th.rep. ΘR OUT Reset thermal memory rotor
4834 ROT.OVERL.TRIP OUT Rotor Overload TRIP
4835 ROT.OVERL.ALARM OUT Rotor Overload Alarm
17992 ST.COUNT ON IntSP Startup Counter for Motors ON
18533 >ENA Mot.Start. SP >Enable Motor Startup counter

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.28 Load Jam Protection
NOTE
The load jam protection function protects the motor during operation. When the rotor is accidentally blocked
due to motor overload, the protection trips quickly to shut down the motor to avoid or reduce damage to the
drive, bearings, and other mechanical motor components. This function is automatically enabled after the
motor is started.
The load jam protection function has 2 stages of DMT elements, and each stage can be individually set. The 2
stages of DMT elements compare the positive-sequence current after startup with the set overcurrent pickup
value. If the positive-sequence current exceeds the set pickup value, the function stages issue a pickup signal.
When the set delay-time expires and there is no blocking detected, a trip signal is issued . If the positive-
sequence current value is > 0.2 In, the return value is approximately 95% of the pickup value.
Positive-sequence Current
The positive-sequence current is calculated in 3 phases with the following formula:
Motor Startup
When the current of any phase is less than the value of the parameter 212 BkrClosed I MIN, the motor is
determined to be in the standstill state. When the current of any phase is greater than the value of the param-
eter BkrClosed I MIN, the motor is determined to be in the startup stage. If the binary input 4601
>Breaker contact (OPEN, if bkr is open) is configured, the binary state is also taken into consid-
eration.
Table 2-8 Determination of Motor Startup State
BkrClosed I MIN >Breaker contact (OPEN, if bkr is Motor Startup State

open)
Close Close Close
Close Trip Close
Trip Close Close
Trip Trip Trip

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_motor_locked_rotor_protection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-126 Logic Diagram of Load Jam Protection
Table 2-9 Motor Parameters:
Rated voltage UNmotor = 6600 V

Rated current INmotor = 126 A
Long-term current IMAX = 135 A
Startup duration Tstartmax = 8.5 sec
Current transformer INCTprim/INCTsec = 200 A/1 A
The setting of 9102 Load Jam I> is obtained with the following formula:
Keep the value of the parameter TRIP DELAY unchanged, 1 sec by default. Set the the alarm to 75 % of the
tripping element, that is, set the paramater 9104 I Alarm to 0.95 A. Keep the value of the parameter
ALARM DELAY unchanged, 2 sec by default.
To block the function during motor startup, set the parameter 9106 T Start Blk. to twice the startup
time, so that T Start Blk. = 2 ⋅ 8.5 sec = 17 sec.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.28.4 Settings

144 Load Jam Prot. Disabled Disabled Load Jam Protection
Enabled
9101 Load Jam Prot. OFF OFF Load Jam Protection
ON
9102 Load Jam I> 1A 0.10 .. 12.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A Load Jam Tripping
5A 0.50 .. 60.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A Threshold
9103 TRIP DELAY 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 1.00 sec Load Jam Trip Delay
9104 I Alarm 1A 0.10 .. 12.00 A; ∞ 1.80 A Load Jam Alarm Threshold
5A 0.50 .. 60.00 A; ∞ 9.00 A
9105 ALARM DELAY 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 1.00 sec Load Jam Alarm Delay
9106 T Start Blk. 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 10.00 sec Load Jam Blocking after
motor start

Informa-
tion
10020 >BLOCK Jam Prot SP >BLOCK Load Jam Protection
10021 JAM PROT.BLOCK. OUT Load Jam Protection is BLOCKED
10022 JAM PROT.OFF OUT Load Jam Protection is OFF
10023 JAM PROT.ACTIVE OUT Load Jam Protection is ACTIVE
10024 Load Jam alarm OUT Load Jam Protection alarm
10025 Load Jam pickup OUT Load Jam Protection picked up
10026 Load Jam TRIP OUT Load Jam Protection TRIP
17993 Load Ja ON IntSP Load Jam Protection ON
18534 >Enable LoadJam SP >Enable LoadJam Protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.29 Thermal Overload Protection
NOTE
The thermal overload protection is designed to prevent thermal overloads from damaging the protected
equipment.
If an additional thermal input is available, the thermal replica may take the actual ambient or coolant tempera-
ture into account.
The thermal overload protection function has 2 stages of temperature elements, and each stage can be indi-
vidually set. The device monitors the thermal capacity of the motor in real time. When the calculated thermal
capacity reaches the set value of the pramater 4204 Θ ALARM, the thermal overload temperature alarm stage
trips. When the thermal capacity exceeds 100 %, if no blocking condition is detected, the thermal overload
immediately trips and the motor is disconnected from the system. The maximum overheat temperature calcu-
lated from the 3 phase currents is used as the criterion for the thermal capacity.
The thermal overload protection function also has a current alarm element independent of the temperature
element. This current alarm element allows early notification of the overload current, although the calculated
operating temperature may not necessarily reach the alarm or trip level at this time.
Thermal Capacity
According to the heat generation model of the motor, the characteristic curve between the thermal overload
trip time and operating current of the motor is given by the following formula: the motor is considered to be
off when the motor currents drop below a programmable minimum current setting BkrClosed I MIN.
Where,
t Thermal overload trip time
τ Motor time constant
I Motor operating current
I0 Motor operating current before overload
I∞ Continuous current allowed by the maximum thermal capacity of the motor
Time Constant
The thermal overload is modelled based on the thermal capacity of the motor and both the overload heat
build-up and the dissipation process are considered. Therefore, the change in the thermal performance of the
motor during the standstill state or the operatibng state has to be properly evaluated. When running down or
at standstill, a motor without external cooling looses heat more slowly, and a longer thermal time constant
must be used for calculation. The parameter 4207 Kτ-FACTOR is used to increase the time constant when the
motor stops. In this case, this parameter must be set to greater than 1. For a motor with an external cooling,
however, the heat dissipation process is considered to be the same during operation and shutdown. There-
fore, 4207 Kτ-FACTOR can be set to 1.
The motor is considered to be off when the motor currents drop below a programmable minimum current
setting BkrClosed I MIN.
Current Limit
At high fault currents, the trip time of the thermal overload protection is significantly shortened, which may
affect the time difference coordination of the line protection. Therefore, when the motor current exceeds the

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
value set in the parameter 4107 I MOTOR START, the calculated thermal capacity remains constant and is
not accumulated any more, and then continues to be accumulated after 4213 Freezen Time expires.
Coolant Temperature/Ambient Temperature

The function considers the external temperature. Depending on the application type, the external temperature
can be either the coolant temperature or the ambient temperature, measured via the 0-20 mA input module
on the extension I/O board of the device. When the outside temperature is detected, the difference between
the outside temperature and the standard value of 40 °C directly affects the maximum permissible motor
current. If the ambient or coolant temperature is low, the protected object can support a higher current than it
does when the temperature is high.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_Thermal overload protection, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-127 Logic Diagram of Thermal Overload Protection
Where,

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Θ Current overtemperature related to the final overtemperature at the

maximum permissible phase current
τth Thermal time constant for heating the protected object
I Root mean square value of the phase current
k Maximum permissible phase current constant related to the rated current
of the protected object
INom Obj. Rated current of the protected object
Maximum Permissible Continuous Current

The continuous current value allowed by the motor thermal load is obtained from the manufacturer’s tech-
nical data. Therefore, the value of the parameter 4202 K-FACTOR is calculated with the following formula:
Where,
Imax Continuous current allowed by the thermal overload of the motor (primary value)
INCTprim CT rated primary current
Ambient or Coolant Temperature

When the 15th position of MLFB Extension I/O Module is selected as B: 4-point 0 mA to 20 mA input
module, and the parameter 142 Therm.Overload in device configuration is set to With amb. temp., the
influence of ambient or coolant temperature is considered for the thermal overload protection function. Select
one 4-20 mA as the ambient temperature input via the parameter 4211.
If outside temperature detection is used, it must be noted that 4202 K-FACTOR is set with reference to the
standard temperature of 40 °C, that is, this setting value corresponds to the maximum permissible motor
current at 40 °C.
When there is a difference between the rated motor current and the CT rated current, the temperature 4209
TEMP. RISE I is determined with the following formula.
Where,
ΘNCT Temperature rise of motor at CT rated current
ΘNmotor Temperature rise of motor at rated motor current
INCTprim CT rated primary current
Example:
Generator parameters:
Rated motor current INmotor = 483 A
Continuous current Imax = 1.15 INmotor when external temperature Q = 40 °C
allowed by the thermal
overload

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Temperature rise of QNmotor = 93 °C when INmotor

motor at rated motor
current
Current transformer 500 A/1 A
(4202 K-FACTOR)
(4209 TEMP. RISE I)
Warning Elements
By setting the thermal warning element 4204 Θ ALARM, a warning message can be issued before reaching
the tripping temperature. Tripping can thus be avoided by initiating early load reduction measures. This
warning element simultaneously represents the dropout level for the trip signal. Only when this threshold is
undershot, the tripping command will be reset and the protected equipment can be switched on again.
The thermal element level is given in % of the tripping overtemperature.
A current warning level is also available (parameter Θ ALARM). The setting is set as the secondary current in A
(mperes) and should be equal to or slightly less than the permissible current k · IN sec. It can be used instead of
the thermal warning element by setting the thermal warning element to 100 % thus virtually disabling it.
2.29.4 Settings

142 Therm.Overload Disabled Disabled Thermal Overload Protec-
No ambient temp tion
With amb. temp.
4201 THERM. OVERLOAD OFF OFF Thermal Overload Protec-
ON tion
4202 K-FACTOR 0.10 .. 4.00 ; ∞ 1.10 K-Factor
4203 TIME CONSTANT 1.0 .. 999.9 min 100.0 min Time Constant
4204 Θ ALARM 50 .. 100 % 90 % Thermal Alarm Stage
4205 I ALARM 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A Setpoint
4207 Kτ-FACTOR 1.0 .. 10.0 1.0 Kt-FACTOR when motor
stops
4208 T EMERGENCY 10 .. 15000 sec 100 sec Emergency time
4209 TEMP. RISE I 40 .. 200 °C 100 °C Temperature rise at rated
sec. curr.
4210 TEMP. RISE I 104 .. 392 °F 212 °F Temperature rise at rated
sec. curr.
4211 TEMPSENSOR AI 1 .. 4 1 Temperature sensor
connected to AI
4213 Freezen Time 1 .. 10000 sec; ∞ 600 sec Thermal Freezen Time

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
1503 >BLK ThOverload SP >BLOCK Thermal Overload Protection
1507 >EmergencyStart SP >Emergency start of motors
1511 Th.Overload OFF OUT Thermal Overload Protection OFF
1512 Th.Overload BLK OUT Thermal Overload Protection BLOCKED
1513 Th.Overload ACT OUT Thermal Overload Protection ACTIVE
1515 O/L I Alarm OUT Overload Current Alarm (I alarm)
1516 O/L Θ Alarm OUT Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip
1517 Winding O/L OUT Winding Overload
1521 ThOverload TRIP OUT Thermal Overload TRIP
1580 >RES ThOv Image SP >Reset of Thermal Overload Image
1581 ThOv Image res. OUT Thermal Overload Image reset
17991 THEM.OL.ON IntSP Thermal Overload Protection ON
18532 >ENA ThOverload SP >Enable Thermal Overload Protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.30 Undercurrent Protection of Motor
NOTE
When the currents of all 3 phases of an air-cooled motor are below the current setting, undercurrent protec-
tion starts and an alarm signal is issued after the set delay. Undercurrent alarm is triggered when the air-
cooled motor stops.
[lo_motor_undercurrent_protection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-128 Logic Diagram of Motor Undercurrent Protection
2.30.1 Settings

157 Undercurrent Disabled Disabled Undercurrent Protection
Enabled
4640 I< ON/OFF OFF OFF I< ON/OFF
ON
4641 I< PU 1A 0.03 .. 1.00 A 0.05 A I< Pickup Threshold
5A 0.15 .. 5.00 A 0.25 A
4642 I< Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 1.00 sec I< Time Delay

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18470 >Block I< SP >Block Undercurrent Protection
18471 >Enable I< SP >Enable Undercurrent Protection
18472 I< Blocked OUT Undercurrent Protection Blocked
18473 I< Active OUT Undercurrent Protection Active
18474 I< OFF OUT Undercurrent Protection OFF
18475 I< PU OUT Undercurrent Protection I< Pickup
18476 I< alarm OUT Undercurrent Protection I< alarm

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.31 Capacitor Current Diff Protection
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-G!
Capacitor current differential protection is used to prevent internal fault of capacitor.
[dw_capacitor_bridge_diff_cur_pro_wiring, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-129 Circuit Diagram of Capacitor Current Differential Protection
During normal operation, the current difference between individual phases of the capacitor bank is very small.
In case of an internal short circuit, the current difference increases accordingly depending on the number of
fault capacitors. Once the current difference of any phase of the capacitor bank exceeds the setting, the
protection starts. When time delay reaches trip delay, the protection issues the trip command. The current
access to each phase is already differential current.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_capacitor_bridge_diff_protection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-130 Logic Diagram of Capacitor Current Differential Protection
2.31.1 Settings

3450 Capa. I-diff OFF ON Capacitor Current Diff
ON ON/OFF
3451 Capa. I-diff PU 1A 0.03 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.15 A Capacitor Current Diff
5A 0.15 .. 10.00 A; ∞ 0.75 A Threshold
3452 Capa. I-diff T 0.01 .. 100.00 sec 0.50 sec Capacitor Current Diff
Delay time

Informa-
tion
18390 >Blk Cap I-diff SP >Block Capacitor Current Diff Prot.
18391 >Ena Cap I-diff SP >Enable Capacitor Current Diff Prot.
18392 Cap I-diff Blk OUT Capacitor Current Diff Prot. Blocked
18393 Cap I-diff ACT OUT Capacitor Current Diff Prot. is Active
18394 Cap I-diff OFF OUT Capacitor Current Diff Prot. is OFF
18395 Cap I-diff PU OUT Capacitor Current Diff Prot. Pickup
18396 Cap I-diff Tr OUT Capacitor Current Diff Prot. Trip
20113 IL1_diff: VI Primary current IL1_diff

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.32 Capacitor Voltage Diff Protection
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-F!
Capacitor voltage differential protection is used to prevent internal fault of capacitor.
[dw_capacitor_diff_vol_pro_wiring, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-131 Circuit Diagram of Capacitor Voltage Differential Protection
During normal operation, the voltage difference between individual phases of the capacitor bank is very small.
In case of an internal short circuit, the voltage difference increases accordingly depending on the number of
fault capacitors. Once the voltage difference of the capacitor bank exceeds the setting, the protection starts.
When time delay reaches trip delay, the protection issues the trip command. The voltage access to each phase
with R7-R8, R9-R10 and R11-R12 is already differential voltage.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_capacitor_diff_vol_pro, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-132 Logic Diagram of Capacitor Voltage Diff Protection
2.32.1 Settings

4530 Capa. U-diff OFF OFF Capacitor Voltage Diff Protection
ON
4531 Capa. U-diff PU 1 .. 200 V 1V Capacitor Voltage Diff Threshold
4532 Capa. U-diff T 0.01 .. 100.00 sec 0.50 sec Capacitor Voltage Diff Delay Time

Informa-
tion
18456 >Ena Cap U-diff SP >Enable Capacitor Voltage Diff Prot.
18457 >Blk Cap U-diff SP >Block Capacitor Voltage Diff Prot.
18458 Cap U-diff Off OUT Capacitor Voltage Diff Prot. Off
18459 Cap U-diff Blk OUT Capacitor Voltage Diff Prot. Blocked
18460 Cap U-diff Act OUT Capacitor Voltage Diff Prot. Active
18461 Cap U-diff PU OUT Capacitor Voltage Diff Prot. Pickup
18462 Cap U-diff Trip OUT Capacitor Voltage Diff Prot. Trip
20116 UL1_diff: VI Primary voltage UL1_diff

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.33 Capacitor Current Unbalance Protection
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-D!
Capacitor current unbalance protection is used for the capacitor to prevent internal faults in it. It is applicable
to capacitors that use start (Y), double star or triangle connection.
[dw_capacitor_unbal_cur_pro_wiring, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-133 Logic Diagram of Capacitor Current Unbalance Protection
During normal operation, the unbalanced current flowing between 3 phases of the capacitor or between
capacitor banks is very small. In case of internal short circuit, the unbalanced current increases accordingly
depending on the number of fault capacitors. Once the unbalanced current exceeds the setting, the protection
starts. When time delay reaches trip delay, the protection issues the trip command.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_capacitor_unbal_cur_pro, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-134 Logic Diagram of Capacitor Current Unbalance Protection
2.33.1 Settings

3345 Capa. I-unb. OFF ON Capacitor Current Unbal-
ON ance ON/OFF
3346 Capa. I-unb. PU 1A 0.03 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.10 A Capacitor Current Unbal-
5A 0.15 .. 10.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A ance Threshold
3347 Capa. I-unb. T 0.01 .. 100.00 sec 0.50 sec Capacitor Current Unbal-
ance Delay Time

Informa-
tion
18380 >Blk Capa I-unb SP >Block Capacitor Current Unb. Prot.
18381 >Ena Capa I-unb SP >Enable Capacitor Current Unb. Prot.
18382 Capa. I-unb Blk OUT Capacitor Current Unb. Prot. Blocked
18383 Capa. I-unb ACT OUT Capacitor Current Unb. Prot. is Active
18384 Capa. I-unb OFF OUT Capacitor Current Unb. Prot. is OFF
18385 Capa. I-unb PU OUT Capacitor Current Unb. Prot. Pickup
18386 Capa. I-unb Tr OUT Capacitor Current Unb. Prot. Trip

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.34 Capacitor Voltage Unbalance Protection
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-E!
Capacitor voltage unbalance protection is used to prevent internal fault of capacitor.
[dw_capacitor_unbal_vol_pro_wiring, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-135 Circuit Diagram of Capacitor Voltage Unbalance Protection
During normal operation, the unbalanced voltage between 3 phases of the capacitor or between capacitor
banks is very small. In case of internal short circuit, the unbalanced voltage increases accordingly depending
on the number of fault capacitors. Once the unbalanced voltage of the capacitor bank exceeds the setting, the
protection starts. When time delay reaches trip delay, the protection issues the trip command. Where, the
capacitor-unbalanced voltage is input from external wiring terminals R7-R8.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_capacitor_unbal_vol_pro, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-136 Logic Diagram of Capacitor Voltage Unbalance Protection
2.34.1 Settings

4420 Capa. U-unb. OFF OFF Capacitor Voltage Unbalance
ON Protection
4421 Capa. U-unb. PU 1 .. 200 V 1V Capacitor Voltage Unbalance
Threshold
4422 Capa. U-unb. T 0.01 .. 100.00 sec 0.50 sec Capacitor Voltage Unbalance
Delay Time

Informa-
tion
18445 >Ena Capa U-unb SP >Enable Capacitor Voltage Unb. Prot.
18446 >Blk Capa U-unb SP >Block Capacitor Voltage Unb. Prot.
18447 Capa U-unb Off OUT Capacitor Voltage Unb. Prot. Off
18448 Capa U-unb Blk OUT Capacitor Voltage Unb. Prot. Blocked
18449 Capa U-unb Act OUT Capacitor Voltage Unb. Prot. Active
18450 Capa U-unb PU OUT Capacitor Voltage Unb. Prot. Pickup
18451 Capa U-unb Trip OUT Capacitor Voltage Unb. Prot. Trip
20119 U_unb: VI Primary voltage U_unb

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.35 Synchronisation Function
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-A/N!
Device 7SJ686-A provides 2 groups of synchronisation functions. The functions of SYNC function 1 and SYNC
function 2 are completely the same.
Device 7SJ686-N provides one group of synchronisation functions.
When closing the circuit breaker, check if the electrical systems on both sides are synchronised. In a same-
frequency system, there is almost no frequency difference between 2 synchronisation points. In this case, it is
not necessary to consider the action time of the circuit breaker. Under different-frequency conditions, the
larger the frequency difference, the shorter the operating time window of the switch. Under such conditions,
it is recommended to consider the action time of the circuit breaker. The time when a command is issued is
automatically counted into the action time of the circuit breaker in advance to ensure that the circuit breaker
closes accurately at the correct moment.
All synchronisation functions are applicable to systems using phase-to-ground voltage of 220 V.
NOTE
i When the synchronisation function of device 7SJ686-N is applied in systems using system phase-to-ground
voltage of 220 V, only the 3-phase four-wire connection is supported, and parameter 268 PT Connect
Bus should be set to UL1E,UL2E,UL3E. When the synchronisation function of device 7SJ686-N is applied
in power systems using system phase-to-phase voltage of 100 V, phase-to-phase voltage or phase-to-
ground voltage connection is supported.
The synchronising feature usually coordinates with the integrated automatic reclosing system and the control
functions of the control function. It is also possible to employ an external automatic reclosing system. In such
a case, signal exchange between the devices is accomplished via binary inputs and outputs.
Connection Types and Applications

For different device models, the synchronisation functions have different applications. During synchronisa-
tion, the reference voltage U1 is different from the additional voltage U2.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The typical applications of the synchronisation functions of device 7SJ686-A are shown in the following figure:
[dw_7SJ686A_feeder_switch_syn_wiring, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-137 Typical Connection Types of Synchronisation for 7SJ686-A
When configuring power system settings of 7SJ686-A, note that Usy2 transf. must be selected for the
setting of parameter 216 U4 transformer when using the synchronisation function.
When 265 PT Conn. Line1 is set to UL1E,UL2E,UL3E, the to-be-synchronised voltage U2 can be the
phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage of any phase. When 265 PT Conn. Line1 is set to U12,
U23, the to-be-synchronised voltage U2 is the phase-to-phase voltage. The U2 connection method is set in
parameter 6123 CONNECTIONof U2. The reference voltage U1 is the same as the voltage obtained from the
to-be-synchronised voltage U2.
The typical applications of the synchronisation functions of device 7SJ686-N are shown in the following figure:
[dw_7SJ686N_feeder_switch_syn_wiring, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-138 Typical Connection Types of Synchronisation for 7SJ686-N
When configuring power system settings of 7SJ686-N, all of the following conditions must be satisfied:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• Only when parameter 274 Connection is set to Segmented Bus
• 267 Bus PT Connect is set to YES

When 268 PT Connect Bus is set to UL1E,UL2E,UL3E, the PT connection for the 2 busbar sections is type
Y. The reference voltage U1 is the phase A voltage of busbar section 1. The to-be-synchronised voltage U2 is
the phase A voltage of busbar section 2.
When 268 PT Connect Bus is set to U12, U23, the PT connection for the 2 busbar sections is type V. The
reference voltage U1 is the phase-A-to-phase-B voltage of busbar section 1. The to-be-synchronised voltage U2
is the phase-A-to-phase-B voltage of busbar section 2.
Operating Modes
Synchronisation check can be performed in either of the following modes:
• Synchrocheck
• Asynchronous or Synchronous
Synchronous power systems exhibit small differences regarding phase angle and voltage magnitude. Before
connection it is checked whether conditions are synchronous or not. If synchronism prevails the system is
energized, with asynchronous conditions it is not. The circuit breaker operating time is not taken into consid-
eration. The SYNCHROCHECK mode is used. It corresponds to the classic synchrocheck function. On the other
hand, asynchronous systems include bigger differences and the time window for switching passes relatively
quick. It is useful to consider the operating time of the circuit breaker. The ASYN/SYNCHRON mode is used.
Device 7SJ686-A supports the SYNCHROCHECK and the ASYN/SYNCHRON.
Device 7SJ686-N only supports the SYNCHROCHECK.
Validity Check / SYNC Error

During startup of the device a parameter validation check is performed. When there is a fault, the message
Sync. setting error is produced. If after a measurement request there is a condition which is not plau-
sible, the message Sync. Error is output. The measurement is then not initiated.
• Checking Configuration
For device 7SJ686-A, parameter 216 U4 transformer should be set to Usy2 transf., and the
setting of parameter 6106 U> should be smaller than the setting of parameter 6103 Umin. In addition,
special threshold values and the set values of selected function groups must be checked. In case of
setting error, the device issues the error message Sync. setting error. Moreover, the setting of
parameter 6133 df ASYN must be greater than the setting of parameter 6141 F SYNCHRON. Being
either smaller or equal results in a synchronisation setting error.
For device 7SJ686-N, the setting of parameter 6106 U> should be smaller than the setting of parameter
6103 Umin. In addition, special threshold values and the set values of selected function groups must be
checked. In case of setting error, the device issues the error message Sync. setting error.
• Supervision Function Check

For device 7SJ686-A, you can connect PT auxiliary microswitch signal into the device via binary inputs. If
6509 >Failure: Feeder VT or 6510 >Failure: Busbar VT is issued when the microswitch trips,
the synchronisation check function is blocked. When VT BROKEN WIRE is enabled, if PT wire broken
occurs and the 170 VT Fuse Failure (alarm instantaneous) signal appears, message Sync.
Error is issued.
For device 7SJ686-N, when both 17868 >Busbar1 MCB Closed and 17869 >Busbar2 MCB Closed
signals are configured, synchronisation check is blocked if the air switch of any busbar trips.
Synchronous Close Descriptions

The synchronisation function runs only when the device receives a synchronous requirement. These require-
ments are issued by a control or external input, such as an external automatic reclosing system.
If the status conditions are not satisfied, the device output the message Sync. Error, and this synchronous
requirement are no longer executed. If the status conditions are satisfied, the check function starts (message
Sy1 measu.).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Before the switch is closed, the following synchronisation check conditions must be satisfied:
• The reference voltage U1 is greater than the setting of 6103 Umin and smaller than the setting of 6104
Umax
• The to-be-synchronised voltage U2 is greater than the setting of 6103 Umin and smaller than the setting
of 6104 Umax
• The voltage difference |U1 – U2| is smaller than the setting of 6151 dV SYNCHK
• Both frequencies f1 and f2 of the 2 line segments are within the specified range of fN ± 3 Hz
• The frequency difference |f1 – f2| is smaller than the setting of 6153 df SYNCHK
• The phase difference |a1 – a2| is smaller than the setting of 6155 d(alpha) SYNCHK
When individual check conditions are satisfied, clear message indications are provided (messages Sync.
Voltage difference (Udiff) okay, Sync. Frequency difference (fdiff) okay and Sync.
Angle difference (adiff) okay). When individual check conditions are not satisfied, clear message
indications are also provided. If the voltage difference exceeds the threshold value, for example, message
Sync. Udiff too large (U2>U1) or Sync. Udiff too large (U2<U1) appears. If the frequency
difference exceeds the threshold value, message Sync. fdiff too large (f2>f1) or Sync. fdiff
too large (f2<f1) appears. If the angle difference exceeds the threshold value, message Sync.
alphadiff too large (a2>a1) or Sync. alphadiff too large (a2<a1) appears. These
messages appear only when both voltages are within the operating range of the synchronisation check func-
tion (6103 Umin and 6104 Umax).
If the synchronisation conditions are satisfied, the synchronisation check function issues a signal that allows
the circuit breaker to close (Sync. Release of CLOSE Command). This signal works only during the
action period of the trip command, and is always processed by the controller of the circuit breaker that issues
the trip command. When the synchronisation conditions are satisfied, the Synchronisation Status OK
signal is issued constantly.
The synchronisation check conditions can be blocked by the maximum monitoring time Maximum duration
of synchronism-check. If the conditions are still not satisfied at the end of Maximum duration of
synchronism-check, the close command is allowed by the blocking function (message Sync. Moni-
toring time exceeded). A new synchronisation is started only when a new synchronous requirement is
received.
Operating Range
The operating range of the synchronization function is defined by the configured voltage thresholds 6103
Umin and 6104 Umax, and the fixed frequency band fNom ± 3 Hz.
If measurement is started and one or both voltages are outside the operating range, or one voltage leaves the
permissible range, corresponding messages indicate this behavior (Sync. f1>>, Sync. f1<<, Sync.
U1>> and Sync. U1<<, etc.).
Measured Values
The measured values of the synchronization function are displayed in separate windows for primary and
secondary measured values and percentages. The measured values are displayed and updated under the
following conditions:
• Value of reference voltage U1
• Value of the voltage to be synchronized U2
• Frequency values f1 and f2
• Differences of Voltage, Frequency and Angle

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.35.2 Synchrocheck
Having selected operating mode SYNCHROCHECK the mode verifies the synchronism before connecting the
two system components and cancels the connecting process if parameters for synchronism lie outside the
configured thresholds.
Before a release is granted, the following conditions are checked:
• The reference voltage U1 is above the setting value of 6103 Umin and bellow the setting value of 6104
Umax
• The to-be-synchronised voltage U2 is above the setting value of 6103 Umin and bellow the setting value
of 6104 Umax
• The voltage difference |U1 – U2| within the permitted threshold 6151 dV SYNCHK
• Both frequencies f1 and f2 of the 2 systems are within the range of fN ± 3 Hz
• The frequency difference |f1 – f2| is within the permitted threshold of 6153 df SYNCHK
• The phase difference |a1 – a2| is within the permitted threshold of 6155 d(alpha) SYNCHK
2.35.3 Asynchronous / Synchronous Mode
In the asynchronous / synchronous mode, you can compare the frequency difference between 2 different
systems with parameter 6141 F SYNCHRON to determine whether these 2 systems are in the quasi-synchroni-
sation state ("dV ASYN") or synchronisation state ("dV SYNC").
If the systems are asynchronous, the time window for switching is passed relatively quickly. Therefore, it is
sensible to take the operating time of the circuit breaker into account. Thus the device can issue the ON
command at a time where asynchronous conditions are still prevailing. As soon as the poles make contact the
conditions will be synchronous. It is also possible to generally take into account the operating time of the
circuit breaker, i.e. also with synchronous conditions prevailing.
Switching under Synchronous System Conditions

Switching under synchronous conditions means that the ON command will be released as soon as the charac-
teristic data (voltage difference, angle difference) are within the thresholds specified by configuration. Before
granting a release for closing under synchronous conditions, the following conditions are checked:
• The reference voltage U1 is above the setting of 6103 Umin and below the setting of 6104 Umax
• The to-be-synchronised voltage U2 is above the setting of 6103 Umin and below the setting of 6104
Umax
• The limit of voltage difference |U1 – U2| is above the setting of 6151 dV SYNCHK
• Both frequencies f1 and f2 of the 2 line segments are within the range of fN ± 3 Hz
• The phase difference |a1 – a2| is below the setting of 6155 d(alpha) SYNCHK
• The frequency difference is below the limit 6141 F SYNCHRON. This limit is used to define a dividing
point where 2 systems change from the synchronous state to the quasi-synchronous state. When all
check conditions are satisfied, the device immediately issues a Sync. Release of CLOSE Command.
Switching under Asynchronous System Conditions

For switching under asynchronous system conditions the device determines the time for issuing the ON
command from the angle difference and the frequency difference such that the voltages (of busbar and
feeder) are identical at the instant the poles make contact. For this purpose the device must be informed of
the operating time of the circuit breaker for closing. Before a release is granted, the following conditions are
checked:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• The reference voltage U1 is greater than the setting of 6103 Umin and smaller than the setting of 6104
Umax
• The to-be-synchronised voltage U2 is greater than the setting of 6103 Umin and smaller than the setting
of 6104 Umax
• The limit of voltage difference |U1 – U2| is smaller than the setting of 6151 dV SYNCHK
• Both frequencies f1 and f2 of the 2 line segments are within the range of fN ± 3 Hz
• The frequency difference |f1 – f2| is smaller than the setting of 6153 df SYNCHK
When the check has been terminated successfully, the device determines the next instant at which the two
systems are in phase from the angle difference and the frequency difference. The ON command is issued at
this instant minus the operating time of the circuit breaker.
2.35.4 De-Energized Switching
Connecting two components of a power system is also possible if at least one of the components is de-ener-
gized and if the measured voltage is greater than the threshold 6106 U>, with a multiple-phase connection at
side V1 all three voltages must have a higher value than threshold 6106 U> so that side V1 is recognized as
energized. With single-phase connection, of course, only one voltage has to exceed the threshold value. Dead
check threshold voltage is set via parameter 6105 U<.
Besides release under synchronous conditions, the following additional release conditions can be selected for
the check:
• Parameter 6107 SYNC U1<U2> is set to YES and the Live Line Dead Busbar condition is satisfied
• Parameter 6108 SYNC U1>U2< is set to YES and the Dead Line Live Busbar condition is satisfied
• Parameter 6109 SYNC U1<U2< is set to YES and the Dead Line Dead Busbar condition is satisfied
The preceding conditions can be configured individually or in combination. The switch closes if U1> and U2<
or U1< and U2> is satisfied.
When the live part U1 performs de-energized to the dead part U2, the following conditions must also be
checked:
• The reference voltage U1 is greater than 6106 U> and 6103 Umin, and is small than Umax
• The to-be-synchronised voltage U2 is small than 6105 U<
• The U1 system frequency f1 is within the specified range of fN ± 3Hz

Likewise, if U1 is dead while U2 is live, or both U1 and U2 are dead, the conditions to be checked are similar to
the preceding ones.
The relevant display message is Sync. U1> U2<, Sync. U1< U2> and Sync. U1< U2<.
You can control synchronisation check by controlling the check conditions of Sync. U1> U2<, Sync. U1<
U2> and Sync. U1< U2< via an external binary input.
2.35.5 Direct Command/Blocking
Parameter Direct CO can be set to grant a release without performing any checks. In this case switching is
released immediately when initiating the synchrocheck. It is obviously not reasonable to combine Direct CO
with other release conditions.
Via binary input >Sync. Direct Command output, this release can also be granted externally.
Blocking the entire synchrocheck is possible via binary input via binary input >BLOCK Sync-group 1. The
message signaling this condition is made via via binary input >BLOCK Sync-group 1. When blocking the
measurement is terminated and the entire function is reset. A new measurement can only be performed with
a new measurement request.
Via binary input >BLOCK Sync. CLOSE command, it is possible to only block the release signal for closing
(Sync. Release of CLOSE Command). When blocking is active, measurement continues. The blocking is

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
indicated by the message Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED. When blocking is reset and release condi-
tions are fulfilled, the release signal for closing is issued.
2.35.6 Synchronisation Setting Groups
If the device has multiple synchronisation check setting groups, and each setting group contains all set param-
eters of Synchronisation Function, then you can cope with situations where multiple types of switches
are used.
Different synchronisation check parameters appear when multiple setting groups are used for a closing point.
The synchronisation function can be implemented by dynamically switching between different switches and
corresponding synchronisation check setting groups via external binary inputs >Sync-group 1 activate
and >Sync-group 2 Activate. If the set synchronisation setting group is cleared, external binary inputs
are no longer needed. If multiple Synchronisation Functions are activated simultaneously, the error
message (Sync. Multiple selection of func-groups) appears.
Device 7SJ686-A supports 2 synchronisation check setting groups (SYNC Function Group 1 and SYNC
Function Group 2).
Device 7SJ686-N supports one synchronisation check function group, and its synchronisation check object is
limited to the busbar circuit breaker.
2.35.7 Cooperation with Control Device and External Control Commands
Cooperation with Control Device Functions

Basically, the synchrocheck interacts with the device control. The switchgear component to be synchronized is
selected via a parameter. If an ON command is issued, the control takes into account that the switchgear
component requires synchronism. The control sends a measurement request Sync. Measuring request
of Control to the synchrocheck which is then started. Having completed the check, the synchrocheck
issues the release message (Sync. Release of CLOSE Command), to which the control responds by
terminating the switching operation positively or negatively.
[dw_coordination_of_ctrl_&_syn_test, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-139 Cooperation between Control And Synchronisation Check
Cooperation with External Control Commands

The synchronisation check function can also be activated via external request commands. Synchronisation
check can be started via the binary input of the external request command (>Synchronzation Request or
the pulse start and stop signals >Sync Start and >Sync Stop). When synchronisation check is completed,
a signal that allows the switch to close (Sync. Release of CLOSE Command) is issued. If the request
signal of the binary input is missing, synchronisation check returns immediately. In this case, you do not have
to define the synchronised device.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• >Synchronzation Request: The high-level trigger method is used to start synchronisation, which
stops automatically when the level becomes low.
• >Sync Start: The rising-edge trigger method is used to start synchronisation, which is stopped
by>Sync Stop.
[dw_coordination_of_sync_test_&_ext_control_command, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-140 Cooperation between Synchronisation Check And External Control Commands
Synchronisation Function Settings

The action modes of the synchronisation function are set in 161 SYNC function 1 or 162 SYNC func-
tion 2:
• The asynchronous / synchronous mode indicates that the switch can close in synchronous and quasi-
synchronous modes
• The synchronous mode corresponds to the traditional synchronisation check method

If the synchronisation function is not used, you should set the preceding parameters to Disabled.
Select a displayed synchronisation setting group in DIGSI, and a dialogue box opens to display the General,
Power System Data, Syn. Condition, Asyn. Condition and Synchron Check tags, where synchronisation
method parameters can be set respectively.
General Settings
The general settings of the synchronisation check function are shown in the following table.
Parameter Comments
6X01 Synchronisation Check Func- Turns on or off the entire setting group. If it is set to OFF, no synchroni-
tion sation checks are performed and no switch-closing commands are
issued.
6X02 Synchronisation Object Selects the switch for synchronisation operation. Option "None" indi-
cates that the external synchronisation function is used. For device
7SJ686-N, the control object of the synchronisation function is only
limited to the bus coupler circuit breaker.
6X03 Minimum Voltage Limit: Umin Defines the action range of the synchronisation function. If the voltage
6X04 Maximum Voltage Limit: exceeds the limit, a corresponding message is output.
Umax
6X05 Threshold U1, U2 without When the feeder or busbar voltage is below this value, it indicates that
Voltage this element is dead (used to check the dead status of a feeder or
busbar).
6X06 Threshold U1, U2 with When the feeder or busbar voltage is above this value, it indicates that
Voltage this element is live (used to check the live status of a feeder or busbar).
This value must be smaller than the minimum voltage 6103 Umin
during normal operation.
6X07 ON-Command at U1< And Allows closing when U1 side is dead and U2 side is live.
U2>

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Parameter Comments
6X08 ON-Command at U1> And Allows closing when U1 side is live and U2 side is dead.
U2<
6X09 ON-Command at U1< And Allows closing when both U1 and U2 sides are dead.
U2<
6X12 Maximum Duration of Synchronisation check conditions can be blocked by the Maximum
Synchronisation Check duration of synchronism-check. If the conditions are still not satisfied at
the end of the Maximum duration of synchronism-check, the close
command is allowed by the blocking function.
All settings related to voltage values mentioned earlier refer to the voltage on the secondary side, and the unit
is V. When configuring the settings in DIGSI, these data can also be input as primary side data. Depending on
the connection type, it can be phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage.
Power System Data (7SJ686-A)

The circuit breaker closing time T-CB close at address 6X20 T-CB close is required if the device is to close
also under asynchronous system conditions, no matter whether for manual closing, for automatic reclosing
after threepole tripping, or for both. The device will then calculate the time for the close command such that
the voltages are phase-synchronous the instant the breaker poles make contact. Please note that this should
include the operating time of the breaker as well as the operating time of an auxiliary relay that may be
connected in the closing circuit.
Asyn. Condition (7SJ686-A)

The synchronisation check function of 7SJ686-A protection device can issue close commands in the quasi-
synchronous mode. When T-CB close (parameter 6120) is considered, the system voltage is in the synchro-
nisation state at the time of closing.
Parameter 6X31 dV ASYN is used to set the voltage difference value to allow closing.
Parameter 6X33 df ASYN is used to set the frequency difference value to allow closing.
Syn. Condition (7SJ686-A)

When parameter 6X40 SYNC PERMIS. is set to YES, same-frequency synchronisation check is performed
only if the frequency is below the limit of parameter 6X41 F SYNCHRON. When it is set to NO, different-
frequency synchronisation check is performed within the full frequency range.
Parameter 6X41 F SYNCHRON is the boundary condition for automatic switching between synchronous and
asynchronous modes. If the frequency difference is below the limit, the system is deemed as synchronous and
the synchronous closing condition is used. If it is above the limit, the asynchronous closing method is used,
and the switch action time is reserved to ensure voltage synchronisation during closing.
Parameter 6X43 dV SYNC is used to set the voltage difference value to allow closing.
Parameter 6X45 d(alpha) SYNC is used to set the angle difference value to allow closing.
Synchronisation Check
Parameter 6X51 dV SYNCHK is used to set the voltage difference value to allow closing.
Parameter 6X53 df SYNCHK is used to set the frequency difference value to allow closing.
Parameter 6X55 d(alpha) SYNCHK is used to set the angle difference value to allow closing.
Settings and Information

The following tables only list the settings and information for synchronisation check setting group 1. Synchro-
nisation check setting group 2 has the same settings and information as group 1.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.35.9 Settings

6101 Synchronizing ON OFF
OFF
6102 SyncSD None Circuit Breaker Only applicable to 7SJ686-A
Circuit Breaker
Isolation Switch
Earth Switch
Q2 Open / Close
Q9 Open / Close
Fan ON/OFF
6102 SyncSD None None Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
Circuit Breaker CB1 Position
6103 Umin 20 .. 300 V 90 V
6104 Umax 20 .. 300 V 110 V
6105 U< 1 .. 140 V 5V
6106 U> 20 .. 300 V 80 V
6107 SYNC U1<U2> YES YES ON-Command at U1< and U2>
NO When this parameter is set to Yes,
checks Live Line Dead Busbar
(7SJ686-A).
When this parameter is set to Yes,
checks Dead Busbar section 1 and
Live Busbar section 2 (7SJ686-N).
6108 SYNC U1>U2< YES YES ON-Command at U1> and U2<
checks Dead Line Live Busbar
(7SJ686-A).
checks Live Busbar section 1 and
Dead Busbar section 2 (7SJ686-N)
6109 SYNC U1<U2< YES YES ON-Command at U1< and U2<
checks Dead Line Dead Busbar
(7SJ686-A).
checks Dead Busbar section 1 and
Dead Busbar section 2 (7SJ686-N)
6112 T-SYN. DURATION 0.01 .. 1200.00 sec; ∞ 30.00 sec
6120 T-CB close 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Only applicable to 7SJ686-A
6123 CONNECTIONof U2 L1-E L1-L2 Only applicable to 7SJ686-A
L2-E
L3-E
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

6131 dV ASYN 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Only applicable to 7SJ686-A
6133 df ASYN 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz
6140 SYNC PERMIS. YES YES
NO
6141 F SYNCHRON 0.01 .. 0.04 Hz 0.01 Hz
6143 dV SYNC 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V
6145 d(alpha) SYNC 2 .. 80 ° 10 °
6151 dV SYNCHK 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V
6153 df SYNCHK 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz
6155 d(alpha) SYNCHK 2 .. 80 ° 10 °

Informa-
tion
170.0001 >Sy1 activ SP >Sync-group 1 activate
170.0043 >Sync. Request SP >Synchronzation Request
The high level trigger method is used to start synchronisa-
tion, which stops automatically when level becomes low
170.0049 Sync. CloseRel OUT Sync. Release of CLOSE Command
170.0050 Sync. Error OUT Synchronization Error
170.0051 Sy1 BLOCK OUT Sync-group 1 is BLOCKED
170.2007 Sync. Meas. req SP Sync. Measuring request of Control
170.2008 >BLOCK Sy1 SP >BLOCK Sync-group 1
170.2009 >Sync.direct CO SP >Sync. Direct Command output
170.2011 >Sync Start SP >Sync. Start of Synchronization
The rising edge trigger method is used to start synchronisa-
tion, which is stopped by >Sync Stop
170.2012 >Sync Stop SP >Sync. Stop of Synchronization
170.2013 >Sync U1>U2< SP >Sync. Switch to U1> and U2<
170.2014 >Sync U1<U2> SP >Sync. Switch to U1< and U2>
170.2015 >Sync U1<U2< SP >Sync. Switch to U1< and U2<
170.2016 >Sync Synchron SP >Sync. Switch to Sync
170.2022 Sy1 measu. OUT Sync-group 1: measurement in progress
170.2025 Sync.MonTimeExc OUT Sync. Monitoring time exceeded
170.2026 Sync. synchron OUT Sync. Synchronization conditions okay
170.2027 Sync. U1> U2< OUT Sync. Condition U1>U2< fulfilled
170.2028 Sync. U1< U2> OUT Sync. Condition U1<U2> fulfilled
170.2029 Sync. U1< U2< OUT Sync. Condition U1<U2< fulfilled
170.2030 Sync. Udiff ok OUT Sync. Voltage difference (Udiff) okay
170.2031 Sync. fdiff ok OUT Sync. Frequency difference (fdiff) okay
170.2032 Sync. α ok OUT Sync. Angle difference (adiff) okay
170.2033 Sync. f1>> OUT Sync. Frequency f1 > fmax permissible
170.2034 Sync. f1<< OUT Sync. Frequency f1 < fmin permissible
170.2035 Sync. f2>> OUT Sync. Frequency f2 > fmax permissible
170.2036 Sync. f2<< OUT Sync. Frequency f2 < fmin permissible

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
170.2037 Sync. U1>> OUT Sync. Voltage U1 > Umax permissible
170.2038 Sync. U1<< OUT Sync. Voltage U1 < Umin permissible
170.2039 Sync. U2>> OUT Sync. Voltage U2 > Umax permissible
170.2040 Sync. U2<< OUT Sync. Voltage U2 < Umin permissible
170.2050 U1 = MV U1 =
170.2051 f1 = MV f1 =
170.2052 U2 = MV U2 =
170.2053 f2 = MV f2 =
170.2054 dU = MV dU =
170.2055 df = MV df =
170.2056 dα = MV dalpha =
170.2090 Sync U2>U1 OUT Sync. Udiff too large (U2>U1)
170.2091 Sync U2<U1 OUT Sync. Udiff too large (U2<U1)
170.2092 Sync f2>f1 OUT Sync. fdiff too large (f2>f1)
170.2093 Sync f2<f1 OUT Sync. fdiff too large (f2<f1)
170.2094 Sync α2>α1 OUT Sync. alphadiff too large (a2>a1)
170.2095 Sync α2<α1 OUT Sync. alphadiff too large (a2<a1)
170.2096 Sync FG-Error OUT Sync. Multiple selection of func-groups
170.2097 Sync Set-Error OUT Sync. setting error
170.2101 Sy1 OFF OUT Sync-group 1 is switched OFF
170.2102 >BLK Sync CLOSE SP >BLOCK Sync. CLOSE command
170.2103 Sync. CLOSE BLK OUT Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED
170.2332 Sync f syn 1 OUT Sync:Synchronization cond. f1 (Test)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.36 Reverse-Power Protection
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-A/B/C!
If the power of the prime mover is lost during normal operation of the steam turbine generator, the synchro-
nous generator runs in the motor state, absorbing energy from the power grid to drive the turbine. In this
case, the turbine blades would overheat. At this point, reverse-power protection for the generator must be
installed to prevent such danger from happening by quickly tripping the circuit breaker between the generator
and the power grid. Another risk exists for the generator, that is, when the connecting circuit breaker is
tripped, if there is remaining steam (problem with the stop valve) that flows through the turbine, the steam
turbine generator speeds up to result in rotor runaway. Because of this, the connecting circuit breaker trips
only when the generator starts with absorb the active power of the system.
Reverse-power protection can only be used for protection objects using the 3-phase system, and must be
connected to the voltage transformer.
Reverse-power protection calculates the positive sequence base wave of the current and voltage of the 3-
phase AC system. When reverse-power protection is enabled, if the reverse active power reaches the setting
6581 P> Reverse PU and the delay time reaches 6582 P> Reverse T, reverse-power protection issues a
trip command. FC circuit overcurrent blocks the output of reverse-power protection. This function can work
normally only when the positive sequence current is greater than 0.06 In.
The logic diagram of reverse-power protection is as follows:
[lo_reverse_power, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-141 Logic Diagram of Reverse Power

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.36.2 Settings

6580 Reverse-power OFF OFF Reverse-power protection
ON
6581 P> Reverse PU 1A 0.8 .. 10000.0 W 200.0 W P> Reverse Pickup
5A 4.0 .. 50000.0 W 1000.0 W
6582 P> Reverse T 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec P> Reverse Time Delay

Informa-
tion
18275 >Ena.Rev.Pow. SP >Enable Reverse-power protection
18276 >BLK Rev.Pow. SP >Block Reverse-power protection
18277 Rev.Pow. BLK OUT Reverse-power protection is Blocked
18278 Rev.Pow. OFF OUT Reverse-power protection is OFF
18279 P> Reverse PU OUT P> Reverse-power protection pickup
18280 P> Reverse Trip OUT P> Reverse-power protection Trip
18281 Rev.Pow. ACTIVE OUT Reverse-power protection is Active

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.37 External Trip Protection
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-A/A-C/A-D/A-E/B/B-C/B-D/B-E/C/H/J/K/K-C/K-D/K-E!
The protection device is equipped with five independent external trip protection groups. Each group has its
independent parameters that can be set to TRIP or Alarm Only. The time delay can also be set separately.
When the device detects input of external trip protection, the timer starts. When the time delay expires, the
protection acts on the configured output method. FC can block the tripping output of external trip protection.
External trip protection does not start the 50BF protection.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic diagram of external trip protection is as follows:
[lo_non-electricity_protection, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-142 Logic Diagram of External Trip Protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.37.2 Settings

126 Ext. Trip Prot. Disabled Disabled
Enabled
2765 Ext. Trip Prot. OFF OFF
ON
2766 HeavyGas On/Off OFF OFF
ON
2767 LightGas On/Off OFF OFF
ON
2768 OverTem. On/Off OFF OFF
ON
2769 HighTem. On/Off OFF OFF
ON
2770 HeavyGas TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
2771 HeavyGas Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 0.00 sec
2772 LightGas TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
2773 LightGas Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 0.00 sec
2774 OverTemperature TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
2775 OverTem. Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 0.00 sec
2776 HighTemperature TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
2777 HighTem. Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 0.00 sec
2778 Pre.Rel. On/Off OFF OFF
ON
2779 PressureRelease TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
2780 Pre.Rel. Delay 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 0.00 sec

Informa-
tion
18283 Ext. Trip ACT OUT
18284 HighTemp. Alarm OUT
18285 >Heavy Gas SP
18286 >Light Gas SP
18287 >Over Temp. SP
18288 >High Temp. SP
18289 Heavy Gas Trip OUT
18290 Light Gas Trip OUT
18291 Over Temp. Trip OUT
18292 High Temp. Trip OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18293 >BLK Ext. Trip SP
18294 Ext. Trip BLK OUT
18295 >Ena Ext. Trip SP
18296 Ext. Trip OFF OUT
18297 Heavy Gas Alarm OUT
18298 Light Gas Alarm OUT
18299 OverTemp. Alarm OUT
18781 >Press. Release SP
18782 Pres. Rel. Trip OUT
18783 Pres.Rel. Alarm OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.38 ARC Protection
2.38 ARC Protection
NOTE
i This function is only applicable to 7SJ686-A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H/J/K!
Overview
ARC protection is used for protecting arc faults in metal-armoured cabinets. This function with extremely fast
tripping can cut off faults to improve personal safety and reduce arc damage to the switchgear in case of fault.
ARC protection has 3 arc detection channels, which are used for electric arc detection for cables and busbars in
the metal- armoured switch cabinet and inside the circuit breaker cubicle. There are 2 high-speed relay
outputs.
Functional Logic
ARC protection is comprised of 2 stages, that is, instantaneous stage and delay stage. After arc is detected, the
instantaneous stage will send the trip command without delay. If the switch still does not trip or the fault is
still not cut off after trip command is sent out, the upstream switch trips with the delay stage. "Light Only
Condition" or "Light and Current Condition" can be configured. With the "Light Only Condition", the trip
command is sent out when only fault arc is detected. With the "Light and Current Condition", the trip
command is sent out when arc and fault current are both detected. This can avoid the influence of ambient
interference light and improve the reliability of the action. For current threshold of ARC protection, there are 2
conditions, that is, steady-state criteria and current jump criteria. Steady-state criteria use the fundamental
value of current. Current jump criteria use the jump quantity of current. Each arc channel can choose different
criteria separately.
The device has 3 arc sensors and 2 external binary inputs. The trip criterion of each channel can be configured
as Light Cond., Light and Curr or Not Config. When a channel is not used, set it to Not Config.
For each channel, you can configure Trip or Not Trip. Trip is used to cut off the arc fault and is generally
used to find arc fault in the cable cubicle. Not Trip is generally used to find arc fault in the busbar cubicle
and circuit breaker cubicle. In this case, protection is required to send the arc signal to the upstream.
NOTE
i • Use dust caps to seal the arc sensor channels not in use.
• Replace the sensor if it is contaminated after arc fault.
• Avoid looking directly at the sensor transceiver port to prevent the self-checking light of the trans-
ceiver from harming your eyes.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.38 ARC Protection
Figure 2-143 shows the logic diagram of the ARC protection function.
[lo_arc_protection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-143 Logic Diagram of the ARC Protection Function
2.38.2 ARC Protection Detection Methods
ARC protection has internal safety detection logic. The device will check all the channels in operating continu-
ously (including arc sensor channels and binary input channels). The detection method is as follows:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.38 ARC Protection
Arc Channel Real-Time Status Detection Result Channel Is Blocked Message

or Not
Arc sensor channel Continuous optical Channel error Blocked ARC channel x
signal input for blocked, ARC
more than 5 sec channel alarm
and LED warning
Open circuit Not blocked ARC channel x
self-checking
fail, ARC
channel alarm
and LED warning
Binary input channel Continuous binary Channel error Blocked Arc external
input for more than input channel x
8 sec blocked, ARC
Without circuit channel alarm
broken check and LED warning
The blocking could not be reset by restart, unless clearing the eventlog in device. Therefore, note that:
• For field commissioning, use a flash lamp with manual trigger mode and the intensity should be over 60.
• Do not use the LED lamp or mobile phone LED to radiate the sensor for long time.
• When commissioning is completed, clear the eventlog from HMI.
175 ARC Protection can be set to Enabled or Disabled in device configuration.
2.38.4 Settings

175 ARC Protection Disabled Enabled
Enabled
8800 ARC Protection OFF ON
ON
8801 Ch1 Sensor type No Sensor Visible Light P
Visible Light P
UV Light Point
Visible Light L
Visible Light P
UV Light Point
Visible Light L
Visible Light P
UV Light Point
Visible Light L
8805 Current Fund. 0.1 .. 20.0 I/In; ∞ 1.5 I/In
8806 Cur.JumpCritera ON ON
OFF
8808 ARC-1 DelayT 0.08 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.38 ARC Protection

8810 Ch. 1 Critera Not Config Not Config
Light Cond.
Light and Curr
Light Cond.
Light and Curr
Light Cond.
Light and Curr
8813 BI 1 Critera Not Config Not Config
Light Cond.
Light and Curr
8814 BI 2 Critera Not Config Not Config
Light Cond.
Light and Curr
8820 Ch. 1 Pickup Trip Not Trip
Not Trip
Not Trip
Not Trip
8823 BI 1 Pickup Trip Not Trip
Not Trip
8824 BI 2 Pickup Trip Not Trip
Not Trip

Informa-
tion
18879 >Blk ARC prot. SP
18880 >Ena ARC prot. SP
18881 ARC prot. BlK OUT
18882 ARC prot. ACT OUT
18883 ARC prot. OFF OUT
18884 ARC PU OUT
18885 ARC-2 Trip OUT
18886 Jump Curr. PU OUT
18887 ARC-1 Trip OUT
18889 Fun. Curr. PU OUT
18890 ARC Ch1 fail OUT
18893 ARC SW. ON IntSP
20101 Channel 1 PU OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.38 ARC Protection

Informa-
tion
20104 >Ext ARC BI 1 SP
20105 >Ext ARC BI 2 SP
20124 ARC CH1 blocked OUT
20127 ARC BI1 blocked OUT
20128 ARC BI2 blocked OUT
20129 ARC chann.alarm OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.39 Automatic Transfer System

In the power system, for important users or substations with high reliability requirements, 2 or more power
supplies must be available. After the operating power supply is lost, the standby power supply is switched on
by the automatic transfer switch function (ATS) to restore the power supply for the user or substation, thereby
ensuring the continuity of power supply.
In scenarios such as intelligent buildings and steel constructions of CCPP (combined-cycle power plant), the
main and standby power supplies usually come from different systems. Considering economy and reliability,
automatic transfer and restore are necessary. The ordinary working mode must be defined, and all the other
ATS transfer modes must be standby. If the operating power supply is restored after ATS transfer to standby
mode, the ATS function automatically transfers the system back to the main power supply (common).
7SJ686-N supports 2 types of the transfer modes: transfer between lines and transfer between busbars, as
well as the automatic restore modes corresponding to each transfer mode. This function supports the connec-
tion type of single busbar and segmented single busbar. Busbars with PT UL1E, UL2E, UL3E, UL12, UL23 and
with no PT connection are all supported. The load shedding and load shifting functions of the device can
ensure the stability of the system after the transfer.
In addition, the ATS function can be blocked by low frequency load shedding or low voltage load shedding.
The blocking is used when the upstream system has removed part of the load due to frequency reduction or
voltage reduction.
Here are the basic functional requirements for ATS:
• When the operating power supply voltage is dead due to whatever reason, the standby power supply is
normal, and there is no other blocking condition, the ATS function is able to start.
• The ATS must not operate when the working power supply is cut off manually.
• The ATS must enable the standby power supply only after confirming that the operating power supply is
cut off.
• After charging is completed, the closing pulse of the ATS is allowed to operate only once, and the next
operation is allowed only after charging is completed again.
• When the automatic restore is enabled and the synchronous automatic restore is disabled, the device
enters the waiting period of automatic restore after the ATS function cuts off the main power supply and
enables the standby power supply. After the main power supply is back, the automatic restore function
automatically cuts off the standby power supply and enable the main power supply.
• When the automatic restore and the synchronous automatic restore are both enabled, the device enters
the waiting period of automatic restore after the ATS function cuts off the main power supply and
enables the standby power supply. After the main power supply is back, the automatic restore function
enables the main power supply synchronously and cuts off the standby power supply.
ATS functions are also applicable to systems with phase voltage equal to 220 V.
The control conditions of the ATS operation logic can be divided into 3 categories: charging conditions,
blocking conditions and pickup conditions. When all charging conditions are met and none of the blocking
conditions are met, the ATS becomes ready after a time delay during which charging is completed. When all
pickup conditions are met, the ATS operates after a time delay. The blocking diagram of the ATS logic is shown
in the following figure:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_backup_power_principle, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-144 Blocking Diagram of ATS Logic
There are different types of primary wiring for standby power supplies. In order to meet different require-
ments, the device offers a variety of typical ATS modes. The detailed information of charging conditions,
discharging conditions, pickup conditions and operation logic is described in the respective ATS mode.
After the device is charged, it is immediately discharged when any blocking condition is met; when any
delayed discharging condition is met, the device is discharged after a time delay (2841 Time Delay to Un-
Ready Status).
After startup of the ATS, other ATS modes is blocked to make sure that only one ATS mode is working.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
After the ATS operates, it can be reset in two ways: manual reset and automatic reset. This is defined by 2822
Manually Restart ATS.
• When it is set to YES, after ATS operates, it waits for the external reset signal 17759 >Reset ATS, or
you can press the reset button on the front panel of the device.
• When it is set to NO, the ATS automatically resets after a successful operation, and the enabled ATS mode
can be charged again.
After ATS fails, the device waits for the external reset signal 17759>Reset ATS, or you can manually press
the reset button on the front panel of the device. After the ATS resets, all the enabled ATS modes start to
charge again. For the logic diagram, please see the "ATS resets after an operation" section of Figure 2-144
Block diagram of ATS logic.
The device supports two primary diagrams, busbar with PT connection and busbar with no PT connection,
defined by 267 Busbar with PT connection.
• If the setting is selected as YES, then 268 PT connection of Busbar can be selected as
UL1E,UL2E,UL3E or UL1E,UL2E,UL3E, and 265 PT Connection of Line1 and 266 PT Connec-
tion of Line2 can be selected as UL1E/UL2E/UL3E/UL12/UL23/UL31 or Not Connected.
• If the setting is selected as NO, then 265 PT Connection of Line1 and 266 PT Connection of
Line2 can be selected as U L1E, U L2E, U L3E or U12, U23.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
For busbar with PT connection, the logic of the voltage criterion and current criterion is shown in the following
figure:
[lo_busbar_PT_con_busbar/incoming_bkp_vol_&_incoming_bkp_w/o_cur, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-145 Logic for Busbar/Line Live/Dead Voltage and Line Dead Current for Busbar with PT Connection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic for line dead current: for busbar without PT connection, depending on the state of the circuit
breaker, the busbar voltage can be taken from the line in accordance with the following rules:
• For single busbar, the busbar voltage is taken as the voltage of the line with the circuit breaker closed.
When the circuit breakers of both lines are closed, the busbar voltage is taken from Line 1 by default;
• For segmented single busbar: When the bus tie breaker is open, the Busbar 1 voltage is taken from the
Line 1 voltage when CB1 is closed, and the Busbar 2 voltage is taken from the Line 2 voltage when CB2 is
closed; when the bus tie breaker is closed, both Busbar 1 and Busbar 2 voltages are taken from the
voltage of the line with the circuit breaker closed, and when the circuit breakers of both lines are closed,
the Busbar 1 voltage is taken from Line 1 and Busbar 2 voltage is taken from Line 2 by default;

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• When the circuit breaker is in the intermediate position, the previous circuit breaker state is recalled and
the busbar voltage is taken according to the previous circuit breaker state until the circuit breaker
becomes open or closed, or the conditions are met for taking the busbar voltage from another line;
• If the busbar voltage cannot be taken from the lines, the default busbar voltage is 0 V for each phase. For
busbar with no PT connection, the logic of the voltage elements and current elements in the control
conditions are shown in the following figure:
[lo_busbar_PT_discon_busbar/incoming_bkp_vol_&_incoming_bkp_w/o_cur, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-146 Logic for Busbar/Line Live/Dead Voltage and Line Dead Current for Busbar without PT
Connection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic of ATS circuit breaker operation and failure check is shown in the following figure:
[lo_CB_operation_&_failure_check, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-147 Logic of ATS Circuit Breaker Operation and Failure Check
Note: When testing the ATS function offline, the closing or breaking operation of simulated circuit breaker
must be completed within 1 sec, otherwise the device reports tripping failure or closing failure.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The ATS block logic is shown in the following figure:
[lo_backup_power_blocked_condition, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-148 ATS Block Logic Diagram
No matter line transfer or busbar transfer, when the protection of Line 1# or Line 2# operates, the corre-
sponding ATS direction must be blocked. You can assign protection trip signal of Line 1# to 17749 >BLOCK
Line1 -> Line2 and 17751 >BLOCK B1->B2 to block the corresponding ATS transfer direction. You can
assign protection trip signal of Line 2# to 17750 >BLOCK L2->L1 and 17752 >BLOCK B2->B1 to block the
corresponding ATS transfer direction.
2.39.2 Line Transfer
There are two types of line transfer directions: Line 1 -> Line 2 and Line 2 -> Line 1. Moreover, because the
primary wiring includes single busbar and segmented single busbar, there are actually 4 transfer directions.
This difference is reflected in Power System Data 274 Connection, which can be Single Busbar or
Segmented Bus.
2.39.2.1 Line 1 -> Line 2 (Line 1 Is Main Power Supply, and Line 2 Is Standby)
When the busbar is a single busbar, Line 1 circuit breaker is closed, and Line 2 circuit breaker is open. When
Line 1 loses power and the busbar loses voltage, Line 1 is tripped and Line 2 circuit breaker is closed after a
time delay.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The following figure shows the primary diagram when the bus PT is connected and the the PT connect bus is
UL1E,UL2E,UL3E:
[dw_busbar_PT_con_L1_to_L2_primary (busbar not sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-149 Busbar with PT Connection, L1->L2, Single Busbar
The following figure shows the primary diagram when the busbar without PT and the line voltage connection
is UL1E,UL2E,UL3E:
[dw_busbar_PT_discon_L1_to_L2_primary (busbar not secionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-150 Busbar without PT Connection, L1->L2, Single Busbar

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_L1_to_L2_charging (busbar not sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-151 L1->L2 Charging Logic, Single Busbar
Also applicable for segmented single busbar:
• When the parameter 266 PT Connection of Line2 is set to one of the 6 options (UL1E trans-
form., UL2E transform., UL3E transform., UL12 transform., UL23 transform., UL31
transform.), Line 2 Live Voltage must be used as a criterion for Line 1 -> Line 2 transfer charging logic;
when the parameter 266 PT Connection of Line2 is set to Not connected, it is not necessary to
take Line2 Live Voltage as a criterion for Line 1 -> Line 2 transfer charging logic. (When the ATS is used
for a 380 V system, the settings 265 and 266 cannot be set to Uph-ph but Uph-n or not connected)
• In the ATS discharging conditions, the dropout value of the live voltage is 0.95 times the live voltage
setting.
• In DIGSI matrix, 17864 >CB1 HHJ only works when it is configured.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Logic diagram of pickup and transfer
[lo_L1_to_L2_starting_action (busbar not sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-152 L1->L2 Transfer Direction Logic, Single Busbar
• In DIGSI matrix, the binary input 17877 >Busbar MCB Closed is only used as a criterion for Line 1 ->
Line 2 pickup logic when it is configured.
• In DIGSI matrix, 20607 >ATS Line1 Fast Trip with BI only works when it is configured.
• 20607 >ATS Line1 Fast Trip with BI has the highest priority. When the binary input is detected,
the device operates quickly even if the CB is open.
• If the device has already picked up, when the binary input 20607 >ATS Line1 Fast Trip with BI
is detected, the timing ends immediately and the device operates directly.
When the busbar is a segmented single busbar, Line 1 is operating with busbar, Line 1 circuit breaker is closed,
Line 2 circuit breaker is open, and the bus tie circuit breaker is closed. When Line 1 loses power and the busbar
loses voltage, Line 1 is tripped and Line 2 circuit breaker is closed after a time delay.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The following figure is the primary diagram when the busbar with PT connection and the busbar voltage
connection is UL1E,UL2E,UL3E:
[dw_busbar_PT_con_L1_to_L2_primary (busbar sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-153 Busbar with PT Connection, L1->L2 Transfer Direction, Segmented Single Busbar
The following figure is the primary diagram when the busbar without PT connection and the line voltage
[dw_busbar_PT_discon_L1_to_L2_primary (busbar sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-154 Busbar without PT Connection, L1->L2 Transfer Direction, Segmented Single Busbar

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_L1_to_L2_charging (busbar sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-155 L1->L2 Transfer Direction Charging Logic, Segmented Single Busbar

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Logic diagram
[lo_L1_to_L2_starting_action (busbar sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-156 L1->L2 Transfer Direction Logic, Segmented Single Busbar
• In DIGSI matrix, if the two binary inputs 17868 >Busbar1 MCB Closed and 17869 >Busbar2 MCB
Closed are configured, they are used as criteria for Line 1 -> Line 2 pickup logic. If these two binary
inputs are not configured, then it is not necessary to use them as criteria for Line 1 -> Line 2 pickup logic.
• 20607 >ATS Line1 Fast Trip with BI has the highest priority. When there is a binary input, the
device operates quickly even if the CB is open.
2.39.2.2 Line 2 -> Line 1 Transfer Direction (Line 2 Is Main Power Supply, and Line 1 Is Standby)
When the busbar is a single busbar, Line 2 is operating with busbar, Line 2 circuit breaker is closed, and Line 1
circuit breaker is open. When Line 2 loses power and the busbar loses voltage, Line 2 is tripped and Line 1
circuit breaker is closed after a time delay.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_busbar_PT_con_L2_to_L1_primary (busbar not sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-157 Busbar with PT Connection, L2 -> L1 Transfer Direction, Single Busbar
[dw_busbar_PT_discon_L2_to_L1_primary (busbar not sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-158 Busbar without PT Connection, L2 -> L1 Transfer Direction, Single Busbar

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_L2_to_L1_charging (busbar not sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-159 L2 -> L1 Transfer Direction Charging Logic, Single Busbar
Also applicable for segmented single busbar:
• When the parameter 265 PT Connection of Line1 is set to one of the 6 options (UL1E trans-
form., UL2E transform., UL3E transform., UL12 transform., UL23 transform., UL31
transform.), Line 1 Live Voltage must be used as a criterion for Line 2 -> Line 1 transfer charging logic.
When the parameter 265 PT Connection of Line1 is set to Not connected, it is not necessary to
take Line 1 Live Voltage as a criterion for Line 2 -> Line 1 transfer charging logic.
• In the ATS discharging conditions, the dropout value of the live voltage is 0.95 times the live voltage
setting.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Logic diagram of pickup and transfer
[lo_L2_to_L1_starting_action (busbar not sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-160 L2 -> L1 Transfer Direction Pickup and Operation Logic, Single Busbar
• In DIGSI matrix, the binary input Serial No. 17877 >Busbar MCB Closed is used as a criterion for Line 2
-> Line 1 pickup logic when it is configured.
When the busbar is a segmented single busbar, Line 2 is operating with busbar, Line 2 circuit breaker is closed,
Line 1 circuit breaker is open, and the bus tie circuit breaker is closed. When Line 2 loses power and the busbar
loses voltage, Line 1 is tripped and Line 1 circuit breaker is closed after a time delay.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_busbar_PT_con_L2_to_L1_primary (busbar sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-161 Busbar with PT Connection, L2 -> L1 Transfer Direction, Segmented Single Busbar
[dw_busbar_PT_discon_L2_to_L1_primary (busbar sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-162 Busbar without PT Connection, L2 -> L1 Transfer Direction, Segmented Single Busbar

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_L2_to_L1_charging (busbar sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-163 L2 -> L1 Transfer Direction Charging Logic, Segmented Single Busbar

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Logic diagram
[lo_L2_to_L1_starting_action (busbar sectionalized), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-164 L2->L1 Transfer Direction Pickup and Operation Logic, Segmented Single Busbar
• In DIGSI matrix, only when the two binary inputs 17868 >Busbar1 MCB Closed and 17869 >Busbar2
MCB Closed are configured, they are used as criteria for Line 2 -> Line 1 transfer pickup logic.
• If the device has already picked up, when the binary input20608 >ATS Line2 Fast Trip with BI is
detected, the timing ends immediately and the device operates directly.
2.39.3 Busbar ATS
2.39.3.1 Primary Diagram


C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_busbar_PT_con_B1_to_B2_primary, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-165 Busbar with PT Connection, B1 -> B2 Transfer Direction
[dw_busbar_PT_discon_B1_to_B2_primary, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-166 Busbar without PT Connection, B1 -> B2 Transfer Direction

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[dw_busbar_PT_con_B2_to_B1_primary, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-167 Busbar with PT Connection, B2 -> B1 Transfer Direction
[dw_busbar_PT_discon_B2_to_B1_primary, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-168 Busbar without PT Connection, B2 -> B1 Transfer Direction
Note: During normal operation, bus tie circuit breaker is open, and Busbar 1 and Busbar 2 are powered via
their respective lines. When one busbar voltage is lost, and the other busbar voltage is normal, CB3 is auto-
matically closed.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.39.3.2 Ready and Unready Logic of Busbar Transfer Direction
[lo_sectionalized_backup_power_charging_&_discharging, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-169 Ready and Unready Logic of Busbar Transfer Direction

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.39.3.3 Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 Transfer Direction (Busbar 2 Is the Standby for Busbar 1)
[lo_B1_to_B2_backup, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-170 Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 Transfer Direction Pickup Condition, Operation Logic and Load Shifting
• In the ATS discharging conditions, the dropout of live voltage value is 0.95 times the live voltage setting.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
When Busbar 1 voltage is lost and Busbar 2 voltage is normal, the ATS trips CB1 and then closes CB3. After CB3
is closed, the transfer is successful.
The operation logic also takes load shifting into account. This function is independent of the busbar transfer
direction and can be set to ON/OFF via the setting 2809 Busbar1 -> Busbar2 Load-Shifting.
[dw_balanced_load_primary_diagram, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-171 Primary Diagram of Load Shifting
If the load shifting function is enabled and only one ATS device is configured, after closing CB3, the ATS trips
CB4. When detecting that CB4 is open, ATS directly issues the command of closing CB5 to shift the loads of
Main Transformers 2 and 3. If the load shifting function is enabled and 2 ATS devices are configured, after
closing CB3, ATS 1# must issue a command of tripping CB4 when detecting that another ATS is enabled. After
Busbar 3 loses voltage, another ATS issues a command of closing CB5 to shift the loads of Main Transformers 2
and 3.
After the busbar transfer is successful:
• If 2809 Busbar1 -> Busbar2 Load-Shifting is set to OFF and 2813 Busbar1 -> Busbar2
Load-Shedding is set to YES, the ATS can activate the load shedding logic after a successful transfer
between busbars.
• If 2809 Busbar1 -> Busbar2 Load-Shifting is set to ON and 2813 Busbar1 -> Busbar2
Load-Shedding is set to YES, the ATS can activate the load shedding logic after a successful load
shifting between busbars.
To activate the load shedding function even after load shifting between busbars fails, use external binary
inputs.
NOTE
i The load shifting function and the automatic restore function cannot be effective at the same time. When
enabling load shifting, be sure to disable automatic restore.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.39.3.4 Busbar 2 -> Busbar 1 Transfer Direction (Busbar 1 Is the Standby for Busbar 2)
[lo_B2_to_B1_backup, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-172 Busbar 2 -> Busbar 1 Transfer Direction Pickup Condition, Operation Logic and Load Shifting
• The operation logic of load shifting is same with that of Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.39.4 Auto Restore Function
2.39.4.1 Overview
Automatic restore functions support asynchronous automatic restore and synchronous automatic restore.
Each transfer direction of the ATS corresponds to its respective automatic restore mode, which can be flexibly
enabled/disabled via the settings. Each automatic restore mode supports its corresponding synchronous auto-
matic restore mode without power loss, and enables/disables ATS restore SYN Check via control words. When
the synchronous automatic restore control word is enabled, the automatic restore function of each transfer
direction is synchronous automatic restore. When a certain line PT is not connected, the corresponding auto-
matic restore function cannot be enabled.
Asynchronous Automatic Restore

Asynchronous automatic restore means that when the setting ATS RE. SYN is set to NO, after the main
power supply is restored, the standby power supply is tripped first, and then the main power supply is closed
after the trip is confirmed.
Asynchronous Automatic Description

Restore Process
ATS transfer succeeds The automatic restore function is closely related to the transfer function and
the automatic restore logic is only enabled when the transfer is successful.
Automatic restore waiting after When one of the ATS transfer directions is successful, the device enters the
transfer automatic restore logic waiting period of this automatic restore mode.
While waiting for automatic restore charging, any of the automatic transfer
direction could not be ready; when there is a blocking input or the device is
restarted, the state of automatic restore waiting is cleared.
Automatic restore charging After meeting the automatic restore charging conditions, the restore logic is
ready after the charging time delay. After restore is ready, the device instan-
taneously sends the automatic restore action message of this automatic
restore mode; if manual trip binary input (HHJ=0) is involved, the automatic
restore cannot charge.
Automatic restore trips standby After the restore logic is ready, the standby power supply trips without any
power supply time delay.
Automatic restore closes main After confirming that the standby power supply has been tripped, the main
power supply power supply switch closes after the closing time delay.
Automatic restore succeeds After confirming that the main power supply is closed, the automatic
restore is successful.
Automatic restore resets A complete round of ATS actions starts from the start of transfer to the
success of automatic restore. Therefore, when ManuallyRestart is
enabled, the automatic restore can continue charging after the transfer;
and after the end of automatic restore, the ATS cannot charge before the
reset; when ManuallyRestart is disabled, after automatic restore
succeeds, the ATS can charge normally as long as the charging conditions of
any transfer directions are met; after the ATS resets, all the enabled ATS
directions start to charge again.
Automatic restore operation In the process of automatic restore, if the CB is not open or the busbar is still
fails with live voltage for 1 sec after the command of tripping the standby power
supply is issued, the tripping operation is determined to fail; if the CB is not
closed in 1 sec after the command of closing the main power supply is
issued, the closing operation is determined to fail; after any failure, instead
of automatically resetting, the device waits for the external reset signal
17759 >Reset ATS, or you can manually press the reset button on the
panel of the device.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Synchronous Automatic Restore

Synchronous automatic restore means that when the setting ATS RE. SYN is set to YES, after the main
power supply is restored, the main power supply switch is closed first, and then the standby power supply
switch is tripped.
Synchronous Automatic Description
Restore Process
ATS transfer succeeds The automatic restore function is closely related to the transfer function and
the automatic restore logic is only enabled when the transfer is successful.
Automatic restore waiting after When one of the ATS transfer directions is successful, the device enters the
transfer automatic restore logic waiting period of this automatic restore mode.
While waiting for automatic restore charging, any of the automatic transfer
direction could not be ready; when there is a blocking input or the device is
restarted, the state of automatic restore waiting is cleared.
Synchronous automatic restore After meeting the automatic restore charging conditions, the restore logic is
charging and synchronisation ready after the charging time delay, and the synchronisation conditions of
check main and standby power supplies are checked at the same time. If the
conditions are not met, the device remains in the state of synchronisation
check scanning. After meeting the synchronisation conditions, the device
instantaneously sends the automatic restore action message of this auto-
matic restore mode; if manual trip binary input (HHJ=0) is involved, the
automatic restore cannot charge. In the process of the synchronisation
check, if the charging conditions are not met, the device re-charges, and
then performs the synchronisation check again after the charging time
delay.
Synchronous automatic restore After restore logic is ready and meeting the synchronisation conditions, the
closes main power supply automatic restore closes the standby power supply CB without any time
delay.
Synchronous automatic restore After confirming that the main power supply is closed, the standby power
trips standby power supply supply trips after the time delay.
Synchronous automatic restore After confirming that the standby power supply is tripped, synchronous
succeeds automatic restore is successful.
Automatic restore resets A complete round of ATS actions starts from the start of transfer to the
success of automatic restore. Therefore when ManuallyRestart is
enabled, the automatic restore can continue charging after the transfer;
and after the end of automatic restore, the ATS cannot charge before the
reset; when ManuallyRestart is disabled, after automatic restore
succeeds, the automatic restore can charge normally as long as the
charging conditions of any transfer direction are met; after the ATS resets,
all the enabled ATS directions start to charge again.
Synchronous automatic restore In the process of automatic restore, if the CB is not closed in 1 sec after the
operation failure and decou- command of closing the main power supply is issued, the closing operation
pling is determined to fail; if the CB is not open or current still exists in 1 sec after
the command of tripping the main power supply is issued, the tripping
operation is determined to fail; when the synchronous resetting operation
fails, decoupling is needed: when the main power supply CB fails to close,
the command of tripping the main power supply CB is reissued, and then
the automatic restore process ends; if the standby power supply CB fails to
close, the command of closing the standby power supply CB is reissued, the
command of tripping the main power supply CB is reissued after a fixed
time delay of 1 sec, and then the automatic restore process ends. After any
failure, instead of automatically resetting, the device waits for the external
reset signal 17759 >Reset ATS, or you can manually press the reset
button on the panel of the device.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The automatic restore function and the load shifting function cannot be effective at the same time. When
enabling automatic restore, be sure to disable load shifting. Please be noted of the following points when
choosing synchronous automatic restore:
• The settings ATS SYN dU, ATS SYN dAlpha and ATS SYN dF can be set to infinity to force synchro-
nous automatic restore without power loss.
• The synchronisation check is only performed on the voltages of two lines and is independent of the
transfer direction.
• When the automatic restore function is enabled and synchronous automatic restore is selected, the selec-
tion of line PT must be consistent. Otherwise, ATS Line Voltage Incorrect is prompted and all the
transfer modes are blocked.
• When the busbar PT is set to Not connected, the line voltage is determined as U12 or UL1E.
2.39.4.2 Automatic Restore of Line Transfer

The automatic restore function relies on whether the transfer is successful and whether the voltage of the line
requiring automatic restore is restored. Therefore:
• When the setting L1 -> L2 Mode is set to OFF, even if L2->L1 Restore is set to ON, this automatic
restore function cannot work.
• When the setting L2 -> L1 Mode is set to OFF, even if L2->L1 Restore is set to ON, this automatic
• When PT Conn. Line1 is set to Not connected, the automatic restore function of Line 1 -> Line 2 is
disabled automatically.
• When PT Conn. Line2 is set to Not connected, the automatic restore function of Line 2 -> Line 1 is
disabled automatically.
Asynchronous Automatic Restore of Line 1 -> Line 2 Transfer Direction (Line 2 is the Standby for Line 1)
After the Line 1 -> Line 2 transfer succeeds, the device sends the message Restore Waiting . The asyn-
chronous automatic restore function relies on this message to work. When this message is returned, the asyn-
chronous automatic restore function is also deactivated. The conditions that can return this message include:
• The message 17748 >BLOCK ATS binary input is closed.
• The message 20165 >BLOCK Restore binary input is closed.
• The setting 2801 L1 -> L2 Mode is changed to OFF.
• The setting 2881 L1->L2 Restore is changed to OFF.
• The device restarts.

Line 1 -> Line 2 asynchronous automatic restore charging conditions include:
• Line 1 -> Line 2 transfer succeeds.
• The busbar is live (274 Connection is set to Segmented Bus, both busbar segments are live).
• Line 1 is live (265 PT Conn. Line1 cannot be Not connected).
• CB1 is open.
• CB2 is closed.
• CB3 is closed (segmented busbar mode).
• CB2-HHJ = 1 (when 17865 >CB2 HHJ is configured).
• No >BLOCK ATS and >BLOCK Restore inputs.
• Charging is completed after 2840 TD to Ready.

Discharging conditions: Since the Line 2 switch is directly tripped after the automatic restore is ready, there is
no discharging condition.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Operation logic: After the ATS transfer succeeds, the device enterss the "automatic restore waiting" state.
When Line 1 voltage is restored, the automatic restore logic starts to charge. When it is ready after the
charging time, the message 20134 Line1 -> Line2 Restore is Pickup is sent, and the Line 2 CB is
tripped at the same time. After confirming that the Line 2 CB has tripped and the bus is dead, the Line 1 CB is
closed after the closing time delay.
Conditions for successful CB2 tripping:
• CB2 is open.
• The busbar is dead.
• There is no current on Line 2.
• When any of these three conditions is not met in 1 sec after the tripping command, the message 17775
Fail: Open CB2 is sent.
Conditions for successful CB1 closing:
• CB1 is closed.
• When CB1 closed is not detected in 1 sec after the closing command, the message 17781 Fail: Close
CB1 is sent.
Synchronous Automatic Restore of Line 1 -> Line 2 Transfer Direction (Line 2 Is the Standby for Line 1)
After the Line 1 -> Line 2 transfer succeeds, the device sends the message Restore Waiting. The synchro-
nous automatic restore function relies on this message to work. When this message is returned, the synchro-
nous automatic restore function is also deactivated. The conditions that can return this message include:

Line 1 -> Line 2 synchronous automatic restore charging conditions include:
• CB1 is open.
• CB2 is closed.

Discharging conditions: If the charging conditions are not met when synchronisation check for charging is
completed, the device is immediately discharged.
Operation logic:
• After the automatic restore charging is completed, the device sends 20652 Line1 -> Line2 Restore
is Ready, and starts synchronisation check at the same time.
• When synchronisation conditions are met, the device sends ATS Recovery SYN Check OK and
20134 Line1 -> Line2 Restore is Pickup, starts the transfer and closes CB1.
• After confirming that CB1 is closed (CB1 closed), the device trips CB2 after the time delay 2842 TD to
Close CB.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• After confirming that CB2 is tripped (CB2 open, no current on Line 2), automatic restore is completed.
• When 2822 ManuallyRestart is set to NO, the ATS re-charges and waits for the next cycle.
• When 2822 ManuallyRestart is set to YES, the ATS does not charge after the transfer and automatic
restore process ends, unless a reset signal is received.
• CB1 is closed.
CB1 is sent.
• CB2 switch is open.
• There is no current on Line 2.
• When either of these two conditions is not met in 1 sec after the tripping command, the message 17775
Transfer failure decoupling operation logic:
• After the automatic restore starts to transfer, when the main power supply CB1 fails to close, the tripping
command Command: Open CB1 is reissued and the automatic restore process ends.
• After the main power supply CB is successfully closed, but Command: Open CB2 failed, the closing
command Command: Close CB2 is reissued, the tripping command Command: Open CB1 is issued
after a fixed time delay of 1 sec, and the automatic restore process ends.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic diagram of Line 1 -> Line 2 automatic restore function is as follows:
[lo_L1_to_L2_self-recovery, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-173 Logic Diagram of Line 1 -> Line 2 Transfer and Restore (Also Applicable to Single Busbar)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
i • When the parameter 265 PT Conn. Line1 is set to Not connected, the automatic restore func-
tion of Line 1 -> Line 2 is disabled automatically.
• For single busbar: Busbar 1 and Busbar 2 live/dead conditions must be busbar live/dead; the position of
CB3 is not involved in the logic.
Line 2 -> Line 1 Transfer Direction (Line 1 Is the Standby for Line 2)
After the Line 2 -> Line 1 transfer succeeds, the device sends the message Restore Waiting. The automatic
restore function relies on this message to work. When this message is returned, the automatic restore function
is also deactivated. The conditions that can return this message include:
• The message20165 >BLOCK Restore binary input is closed.

Line 2 -> Line 1 automatic restore charging conditions include:
• CB1 is closed.
• CB2 is open.

Discharging conditions: Since the Line 1 switch is directly tripped after the automatic restore is ready, there is
no discharging condition.
Operation logic: After the ATS transfer succeeds, the device enters the "automatic restore waiting" state. When
Line 2 voltage is restored, the automatic restore logic starts to charge. When it is ready after the charging
time, the message 20135 Line2 -> Line1 Restore is Pickup is sent, and the Line 1 switch is tripped
at the same time. After confirming that the Line 1 switch has tripped and the bus is dead, the Line 2 switch is
closed after the closing time delay.
• The busbar is dead.
• No current on Line 1.
• When any of these three conditions is not met 1 sec after the tripping command, the message 17774
• CB2 is closed.
• When CB2 closed is not detected 1 sec after the closing command, the message 17782 Fail: Close
CB2 is sent.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Synchronous Automatic Restore of Line 2 -> Line 1 (Line 2 Is the Standby for Line 1)
After the Line 2 -> Line 1 transfer succeeds, the device sends the message Restore Waiting. The synchro-
nous automatic restore function relies on this message to work. When this message is returned, the synchro-
nous automatic restore function is also deactivated. The conditions that can return this message include:

Line 2 -> Line 1 synchronous automatic restore charging conditions include:
• CB1 is closed.
• CB2 is open.

Operation logic:
• After the automatic restore charging is completed, the device sends 20653 Line2 -> Line1 Restore
is Ready, and starts synchronisation check at the same time.
20135 Line2 -> Line1 Restore is Pickup, starts the transfer and closes CB2.
Close CB.
• After confirming that CB1 is tripped (CB1 open, no current on Line 1), automatic restore is completed.
• CB2 is closed.
• When CB2 closed is not detected 1 sec after the closing command, the message 17782 Fail: Close
CB2 is sent.
• No current on Line 1.
• When any of these two conditions is not met 1 sec after the tripping command, the message 17774

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• After the main power supply CB is successfully closed, but Command: Open CB1 fails, the closing
[lo_L2_to_L1_self-recovery, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-174 Logic Diagram of Line 2 -> Line 1 Transfer and Restore (Also Applicable to Single Busbar)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
tion of Line 2 -> Line 1 is disabled automatically.
• For single busbar: Busbar 1 and Busbar 2 live/dead conditions must be busbar live/dead; the position of
CB3 is not involved in the logic.
2.39.4.3 Automatic Restore of Busbar Transfer

The automatic restore function relies on whether the transfer is successful and whether the voltage of the line
requiring automatic restore is restored. Therefore:
• When the setting B1 -> B2 Mode is set to OFF, even if B2->B1 Restore is set to ON, this automatic
• When the setting B2 -> B1 Mode is set to OFF, even if B1->B2 Restore is set to ON, this automatic
• When PT Conn. Line1 is set to Not connected, the automatic restore function of Busbar 1 ->
Busbar 2 is disabled automatically.
• When PT Conn. Line2 is set to Not connected, the automatic restore function of Busbar 2 ->
Busbar 1 is disabled automatically.
Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 Transfer and Restore (Busbar 2 Is the Standby for Busbar 1)
After the Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 transfer succeeds, the device sends the message Restore Waiting. The
automatic restore function relies on this message to work. When this message is returned, the automatic
restore function is also deactivated. The conditions that can return this message include:
• The message 17748 >BLOCK ATS binary input is ON.
• The message 20165 >BLOCK Restore binary input is ON.
• The setting 2803 B1 -> B2 Mode is changed to OFF.
• The setting 2883 B1->B2 Restore is changed to OFF.

Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 automatic restore charging conditions include:
• Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 transfer succeeds.
• Both busbars are live.
• CB1 is open.
• CB2 is closed.
• CB3 is closed.
• CB3-HHJ = 1 (when 18302 >HHJ is configured).

Discharging conditions: Since the segment switch is directly tripped after the automatic restore is ready, there
is no discharging condition.
Line 1 voltage is restored, the automatic restore logic starts to charge. When it is ready after the charging
time, the message 20136 Busbar1 -> Busbar2 Restore is Pickup is sent, and the segment switch

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
is tripped at the same time. After confirming that the segment switch CB3 has tripped and Busbar 1 is dead,
the Line 1 CB is closed after the closing time delay.
• CB3 is open.
• Busbar 1 is dead.
• When any of these two conditions is not met in 1 sec after the tripping command, the message 17776
Conditions for successful CB1 closing
• CB1 is closed.
CB1 is sent.
Synchronous Automatic Restore of Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 Transfer Direction (Busbar 2 Is the Standby for Busbar 1)
synchronous automatic restore function relies on this message to work. When this message is returned, the
synchronous automatic restore function is also deactivated. The conditions that can return this message
include:

Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 synchronous automatic restore charging conditions include:
• CB1 is open.
• CB2 is closed.
• CB3 is closed.
• >BLOCK ATS and >BLOCK Restore are not activated.

Operation logic:
• After the automatic restore is ready, the device sends 20650 Bus1 -> Bus2 Restore is Ready,
and starts synchronisation check at the same time.
20136 Busbar1 -> Busbar2 Restore is Pickup , starts the transfer and closes CB1.
Close CB.
• After confirming that CB3 is tripped (CB3 open), automatic restore is completed.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• When 2822 ManuallyRestart is set to YES, the ATS will not charge after the transfer and restore
process ends, unless a reset signal is received.
• CB1 is closed.
CB1 is sent.
• CB3 is open.
command Command: Close CB3 is reissued, the tripping command Command: Open CB1 is sent

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic diagram of Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 automatic restore function is as follows:
[lo_B1_to_B2_self-recovery, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-175 Logic Diagram of Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 Transfer and Restore

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
tion of Busbar 1 -> Busbar 2 is disabled automatically.
• In DIGSI matrix, 17865 >CB2 HHJ and 18302 >HHJ only work when they are configured.
• Once automatic restore charging is complete, if the discharge condition occurs while waiting for
synchronisation, only general block (signals 20165 and 17748) can reset the ATS. Under other condi-
tions, the device can only discharge and wait for re-charge.
• Once Automatic Recovery Pickup, the charging and discharging logic no longer works. The
synchronisation function is enabled, and the ATS will be blocked by ATS Line Voltage Incor-
rect.
• For both synchronous automatic restore and asynchronous automatic restore, if the messages ATS
Failure, Charging Completion OFF and Automatic Recovery Pickup OFF are detected,
the ATS will be reset.
• Once Automatic Recovery Pickup, Restore Waiting will be OFF.
• Once the synchronous automatic restore fails, the device starts to decouple after all the ATS messages
are sent (only opening or closing of circuit breakers is sent).
Busbar 2 -> Busbar 1 Transfer and Restore (Busbar 1 Is the Standby for Busbar 2)
automatic restore function relies on this message to work. When this message is returned, the automatic
restore function is also deactivated. The conditions that can return this message include:

Busbar 2 -> Busbar 1 automatic restore charging conditions include:
• CB1 is closed.
• CB2 is open.
• CB1-HHJ = 1 (when 17864>CB1 HHJ is configured).

Discharging conditions: Since the segment switch is directly tripped after the automatic restore is ready, there
is no discharging condition.
Line 2 voltage is restored, the automatic restore logic starts to charge. When restore is ready after the
charging time, the message 20137 Busbar2 -> Busbar1 Restore is Pickup is sent, and the segment
switch is tripped at the same time. After confirming that the segment switch CB3 has tripped and Busbar 2 is
dead, the Line 2 CB is closed after the closing time delay.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• CB3 is open.
• CB2 is closed.
CB2 is sent.
Synchronous Automatic Restore of Busbar 2 -> Busbar 1 Transfer Direction (Busbar 2 Is the Standby for Busbar 1)
synchronous automatic restore function relies on this message to work. When this message is returned, the
synchronous automatic restore function is also deactivated. The conditions that can return this message
include:

Busbar 2 -> Busbar 1 synchronous automatic restore charging conditions include:
• CB1 is open.
• CB2 is closed.
• CB3 is closed.
• CB2-HHJ = 1 (when 17865>CB2 HHJ is configured).

Operation logic:
• After the automatic restore is ready, the device sends 20651 Bus2 -> Bus1 Restore is Ready,
and starts synchronisation check at the same time.
20137 Busbar2 -> Busbar1 Restore is Pickup, starts the transfer and closes CB2.
Close CB.
• After confirming that CB3 is tripped (CB3 open), automatic restore is completed.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• CB2 is closed.
CB2 is sent.
• CB3 is open.
• When either of these two conditions is not met in 1 sec after the tripping command, the message 17776

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic diagram of Busbar 2 -> Busbar 1 automatic restore function is as follows:
[lo_B2_to_B1_self-recovery, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-176 Logic Diagram of Busbar 2 -> Busbar 1 Transfer and Restore (Also Applicable to Single Busbar)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
tion of Busbar 2 -> Busbar 1 is disabled automatically.
• In DIGSI matrix, 17864>CB1 HHJ and 18302 >HHJ only work when they are configured.
• Once automatic restore is ready, if the discharge condition occurs while waiting for synchronisation,
only general block (signals 20165 and 17748) can reset the ATS. Under other conditions, the device
can only discharge and wait for re-charge.
• Once Automatic Recovery Pickup, the charging and discharging logic no longer works. The
synchronisation function is enabled, and the ATS can be blocked by ATS Line Voltage Incor-
rect.
• For both synchronous automatic restore and asynchronous automatic restore, if the messages ATS
Failure, Charging Completion OFF and Automatic Recovery Pickup OFF are detected,
and the ATS is reset.
• Once Automatic Recovery Pickup, Automatic Recovery Pickup is OFF.
• Once the synchronous automatic restore fails, the device starts to decouple after all the ATS messages
are sent (only opening or closing of circuit breakers is sent).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic diagram of the synchronisation function is as follows:
[lo_sync_function, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-177 Logic Diagram of Synchronisation Function
2.39.5 User-Defined ATS
There are many different types of primary wiring for user standby power supplies, and their ATS logics vary
widely. When the typical ATS modes provided by the device cannot meet the specific usage requirements, the
user can implement a customised ATS logic using CFC.
CFC is a logic programming tool based on a graphical interface. The programmable elements provided by CFC
include analog inputs, binary inputs, binary outputs, time delays, settings, etc.
Details can be found in the CFC manual: DIGSI CFC.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.39.6 Load Shedding
The device has 2 rounds of load-shedding, which can be enabled or disabled in the settings. Its operation logic
is shown in the following figure.
[lo_overload_cutoff, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-178 Logic Diagram of Load Shedding
When the user activates the load shedding function with an external binary input customised in CFC, the oper-
ation result can be associated to 17769 >Start Load-Shedding Line1 or 17901 >Start Load-Shed-
ding Line2. The logic is shown in the following figure:
[lo_ext_input_starting_overload_cutoff, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-179 Logic of Load Shedding Activated by an External Binary Input

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
i When load shedding is activated by an external binary input, the external binary input is a pulse signal.
When the device receives a pulse signal of activating load shedding with an external binary input, this pulse
signal is valid during the whole active time period of load shedding.
2.39.7 Low-Frequency Load Shedding Blocking ATS
When the upstream system removes part of the load due to frequency reduction, ATS must not close these
lines. In this condition, if the device detects low frequency, ATS should be blocked. For single busbar: The
control word is 2860 Bus LFLSH; when the busbar is a segmented single busbar, the control words 2861
Bus1 LFLSH and 2862 Bus2 LFLSH are used to enable and disable the function, and the low frequency
information is independently determined for busbar 1 and busbar 2.
The specific logic includes the following points:
• Low-frequency load shedding is only enabled when ATS is ready.
• After low-frequency load shedding is detected, if dead voltage is detected after 2866 T-Delay LFLSH
has expired, the ATS is discharged and blocked, and waits to be re-charged when there is voltage.
• After low-frequency load shedding is detected, if live voltage is detected and low-frequency load shed-
ding is still present after 2866 T-Delay LFLSH has expired, the ATS can start to transfer after the dead
voltage conditions are met.
• After low-frequency load shedding is detected, if live voltage is detected and low-frequency load shed-
ding is absent after 2866 T-Delay LFLSH has expired, all flags and timers related to low-frequency
load shedding are cleared. If low-frequency load shedding is detected again, the blocking logic is
restarted.
The logic diagram is as follows:
[lo_underfrequency_blocking, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-180 Logic of Low-Frequency Load Shedding Blocking ATS
2.39.8 Low-Voltage Load Shedding Blocking ATS
When the upstream system removes part of the load due to voltage reduction, ATS must not close these lines.
In this condition, if the device detects low voltage, ATS should be blocked. For single busbar: The control word
is 2870 Bus LVLSH; when the busbar is a segmented single busbar, the control words 2871 Bus1 LVLSH

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
and 2872 Bus2 LVLSH are used to enable and disable the function, and the low voltage information is inde-
pendently determined for busbar 1 and busbar 2.
The specific logic includes the following points:
• Low-voltage load shedding is only enabled when ATS is ready.
• After low-voltage load shedding is detected, if dead voltage is detected after 2875 T-Delay LVLSH has
expired, the ATS is discharged and blocked, and waits to be re-charged.
• After low-voltage load shedding is detected, if live voltage is detected and low-voltage load shedding is
still present after 2875 T-Delay LVLSH has expired, the ATS can start to transfer after the dead voltage
conditions are met;
• After low-voltage load shedding is detected, if live voltage is detected and low-voltage load shedding is
absent after 2875 T-Delay LVLSH has expired, all flags and timers related to low-voltage load shed-
ding are cleared. If low-voltage load shedding is detected again, the blocking logic is restarted.
The logic diagram is as follows:
[lo_undervoltage_blocking, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-181 Logic of Low-Voltage Load Shedding Blocking ATS
2.39.9 Settings

General Settings
2890 ATS CB Chek YES NO
NO
2801 L1 -> L2 Mode ON OFF
OFF
2802 L2 -> L1 Mode ON OFF
OFF

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

2803 B1 -> B2 Mode ON OFF
OFF
2804 B2 -> B1 Mode ON OFF
OFF
2809 B1->B2LoadShift ON OFF
OFF
2810 B2->B1LoadShift ON OFF
OFF
2811 L1 -> L2 LSH YES NO
NO
2812 L2 -> L1 LSH YES NO
NO
2813 B1 -> B2 LSH YES NO
NO
2814 B2 -> B1 LSH YES NO
NO
2881 L1->L2 Restore ON OFF
OFF
2882 L2->L1 Restore ON OFF
OFF
2883 B1->B2 Restore ON OFF
OFF
2884 B2->B1 Restore ON OFF
OFF
2891 ATS RE. SYN YES NO
NO
2892 ATS SYN dU 0.5 .. 50.0 V; ∞ 5.0 V
2893 ATS SYN dF 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz; ∞ 0.05 Hz
2894 ATS SYN dAlpha 2 .. 80 °; ∞ 10 °
ATS Settings
2822 ManuallyRestart YES YES
NO
2840 TD to Ready 0.05 .. 600.00 sec 10.00 sec
2841 T-Unready 0.05 .. 600.00 sec 10.00 sec
2823 L1->L2 T-Delay 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 0.50 sec
2824 L2->L1 T-Delay 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 0.50 sec
2825 B1->B2 T-Delay 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 0.50 sec
2826 B2->B1 T-Delay 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 0.50 sec
2827 T Load-Shifting 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 5.00 sec
2842 TD to Close CB 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 0.04 sec
Load Shedding Settings
2843 T-LSH.Active 0.1 .. 6000.0 sec 100.0 sec
2844 Current LSH 0.02 .. 5.00 I/In; ∞ 1.00 I/In
2845 T1 Load-Shed. 0.01 .. 600.00 sec 10.00 sec
2846 T2 Load-Shed. 0.01 .. 600.00 sec 20.00 sec
Low Frequency Load Shedding Blocking ATS Settings

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

2860 Bus LFLSH ON OFF
OFF
2861 Bus1 LFLSH ON OFF
OFF
2862 Bus2 LFLSH ON OFF
OFF
2863 df/dt > 0.10 .. 20.00 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s
2864 U> 0.10 .. 1.50 Un 0.65 Un
2865 f< 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.50 Hz
2866 T-Delay LFLSH 0.10 .. 1000.00 sec 5.00 sec
Low Voltage Load Shedding Blocking ATS Settings
2870 Bus LVLSH ON OFF
OFF
2871 Bus1 LVLSH ON OFF
OFF
2872 Bus2 LVLSH ON OFF
OFF
2873 du/dt > 4 .. 150 V/s 40 V/s
2874 U< 0.10 .. 2.10 Un 0.75 Un
2875 T-Delay LVLSH 0.10 .. 1000.00 sec 5.00 sec

Informa-
tion
17928 >Enable ATS SP
17748 >BLOCK ATS SP
17759 >Reset ATS SP
17680 ATS ACTIVE OUT
17681 ATS OFF OUT
17682 ATS BLOCK OUT
18726 ATS is Ready OUT
18715 ATS Succeeded OUT
18716 ATS Failed OUT
20607 >Fast ATS Line1 SP
20608 >Fast ATS Line2 SP
20165 >BLOCK Restore SP
20166 Restore BLOCK OUT
20164 Restore Waiting OUT
17749 >BLOCK L1->L2 SP
17788 L1->L2 Blocked OUT
17683 L1->L2 Active OUT
17693 L1->L2 Ready OUT
17703 L1->L2Initiated OUT
17713 L1->L2 Pickup OUT
17798 L1->L2 Succeed. OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18758 L1->L2 Failed OUT
20130 L1->L2 Re.Act. OUT
20134 L1->L2 Re.P.U. OUT
20652 L1->L2 Re.Rdy OUT
17750 >BLOCK L2->L1 SP
17789 L2->L1 Blocked OUT
17684 L2->L1 Active OUT
17694 L2->L1 Ready OUT
17704 L2->L1Initiated OUT
17714 L2->L1 Pickup OUT
17799 L2->L1 Succeed. OUT
18759 L2->L1 Failed OUT
20131 L2->L1 Re.Act. OUT
20135 L2->L1 Re.P.U. OUT
20653 L2->L1 Re.Rdy OUT
17751 >BLOCK B1->B2 SP
17790 B1->B2 Blocked OUT
17685 B1->B2 Active OUT
17695 B1->B2 Ready OUT
17705 B1->B2Initiated OUT
17715 B1->B2 Pickup OUT
17800 B1->B2 Succeed. OUT
18760 B1->B2 Failed OUT
20132 B1->B2 Re.Act. OUT
20136 B1->B2 Re.P.U. OUT
20650 B1->B2 Re.Rdy OUT
17752 >BLOCK B2->B1 SP
17791 B2->B1 Blocked OUT
17686 B2->B1 Active OUT
17696 B2->B1 Ready OUT
17706 B2->B1Initiated OUT
17716 B2->B1 Pickup OUT
17801 B2->B1 Succeed. OUT
18761 B2->B1 Failed OUT
20133 B2->B1 Re.Act. OUT
20137 B2->B1 Re.P.U. OUT
20651 B2->B1 Re.Rdy OUT
18717 Busbar LS.Act. OUT
18718 >NeighborReady SP
17804 LS Pickup OUT
17805 LS Succeeded OUT
17806 LS Failed OUT
17900 >Strt LSH Line1 SP
17901 >Strt LSH Line2 SP
17733 LSH Pickup OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
17734 LSH Trip (T1) OUT
17735 LSH Trip (T2) OUT
18730 Bus LFLSH Detc OUT
18731 Bus1 LFLSH Detc OUT
18732 Bus2 LFLSH Detc OUT
18733 Bus LVLSH Detc OUT
18734 Bus1 LVLSH Detc OUT
18735 Bus2 LVLSH Detc OUT
18742 LFLSH BLK ATS OUT
18743 LVLSH BLK ATS OUT
20610 ATS UL Incorr. OUT
20611 ATS RE. SYN OK OUT
17997 ATS ON IntSP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.40 Analog Input
2.40 Analog Input
2.40.1 Analog Input
NOTE
i This function is not applicable to 7SJ686-A-C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E/M/N!
The device provides 4 channels of 0 mA-22 mA analog input. The analog input function requires an analog
input extension board.
The true value type of each analog input can be independently selected as Temperature, Tap, Pressure or Orig-
inal Value. The analog input values can be displayed in the measurement quantity menu.
If the true value type is selected as Temperature, Pressure or Original Value, the criterion can be selected as
over or under:
• When the criterion is over, if the input value exceeds the threshold value, the device can trip or alarm
(selected via the control word);
• When the criterion is under, if the input value is lower than the threshold value, the device can trip or
alarm (selected via the control word).
If the real value type is selected as Tap, the device can only display the Tap information, and cannot trip or
alarm.
Each analog input channel has four parameters that determine the conversion relationship between the
analog input values and the true values: minimum analog input, minimum true value, maximum analog input,
and maximum true value. The corresponding relationships are as follows:
[dw_analog_input_vs_true_value, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-182 Conversion Relationship between Analog Input Values and True Values
For each analog input channel, if the minimum analog setting is greater than or equal to 4 mA, but the actual
increment is less than 4 mA, the device sends an alarm signal, such as 18270 Analog input-1 abnormal;
if the minimum analog setting is less than 4 mA, no alarm signal is sent.
The trip of the analog input can be blocked by FC. However, if the trip signal is already output, the FC does not
return the trip output signal. The analog input function is called once every 300 ms, so the trip timer accuracy
is: 0 ms -300 ms. The trip/alarm logic of the analog input function is as follows:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.40 Analog Input
[lo_analog_input_trip_and_alarm, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-183 Trip/Alarm Logic of Analog Input Function

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.40 Analog Input
2.40.2 Settings

6600 Analog input OFF OFF
ON
6601 AI-1 TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
6602 AI-1 Min.Real 0.1 .. 200.0 °C 10.0 °C
6603 AI-1 Min.Real 1 .. 19 TAP 1 TAP Tap
6613 AI-1 Min. Real -10000 .. 10000 kPa 0 kPa
6604 AI-1 Min.Real 0 .. 32767 100
6605 AI-1 Min.AI 0 .. 10 mA 0 mA
6606 AI-1 Max.Real 0.1 .. 200.0 °C 100.0 °C
6607 AI-1 Max.Real 1 .. 19 TAP 10 TAP Tap
6614 AI-1 Max.Real -10000 .. 10000 kPa 160 kPa
6608 AI-1 Max.Real 0 .. 32767 20000
6609 AI-1 Max.AI 10 .. 22 mA 20 mA
6610 AI-1 PU 0.1 .. 200.0 °C; ∞ 50.0 °C
6615 AI-1 PU -10000 .. 10000 kPa; ∞ 130 kPa
6611 AI-1 PU 0 .. 32767 ; ∞ 10000
6612 AI-1 Delay 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec
6616 AI-1 Trip Over Over
Under
6621 AI-2 TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
6622 AI-2 Min.Real 0.1 .. 200.0 °C 10.0 °C
6633 AI-2 Min.Real -10000 .. 10000 kPa 0 kPa
6624 AI-2 Min.Real 0 .. 32767 100
6625 AI-2 Min.AI 0 .. 10 mA 0 mA
6626 AI-2 Max.Real 0.1 .. 200.0 °C 100.0 °C
6627 AI-2 Max.Real 1 .. 19 TAP 10 TAP
6628 AI-2 Max.Real 0 .. 32767 20000
6629 AI-2 Max.AI 10 .. 22 mA 20 mA
6635 AI-2 PU -10000 .. 10000 kPa; ∞ 130 kPa
6630 AI-2 PU 0.1 .. 200.0 °C; ∞ 50.0 °C
6631 AI-2 PU 0 .. 32767 ; ∞ 10000
6632 AI-2 Delay 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec
Under
6641 AI-3 TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
6642 AI-3 Min.Real 0.1 .. 200.0 °C 10.0 °C
6644 AI-3 Min.Real 0 .. 32767 100
6645 AI-3 Min.AI 0 .. 10 mA 0 mA

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.40 Analog Input

6646 AI-3 Max.Real 0.1 .. 200.0 °C 100.0 °C
6648 AI-3 Max.Real 0 .. 32767 20000
6649 AI-3 Max.AI 10 .. 22 mA 20 mA
6650 AI-3 PU 0.1 .. 200.0 °C; ∞ 50.0 °C
6655 AI-3 PU -10000 .. 10000 kPa; ∞ 130 kPa
6651 AI-3 PU 0 .. 32767 ; ∞ 10000
6652 AI-3 Delay 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec
Under
6661 AI-4 TRIP TRIP
Alarm Only
6662 AI-4 Min.Real 0.1 .. 200.0 °C 10.0 °C
6664 AI-4 Min.Real 0 .. 32767 100
6665 AI-4 Min.AI 0 .. 10 mA 0 mA
6666 AI-4 Max.Real 0.1 .. 200.0 °C 100.0 °C
6668 AI-4 Max.Real 0 .. 32767 20000
6669 AI-4 Max.AI 10 .. 22 mA 20 mA
6670 AI-4 PU 0.1 .. 200.0 °C; ∞ 50.0 °C
6675 AI-4 PU -10000 .. 10000 kPa; ∞ 130 kPa
6671 AI-4 PU 0 .. 32767 ; ∞ 10000
6672 AI-4 Delay 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec
Under

Informa-
tion
18312 >Enable.AI SP
18311 >Block AI SP
18313 AI BLK OUT
18314 AI OFF OUT
18274 AI ACTIVE OUT
18315 AI-1 Trip OUT
18316 AI-1 Alarm OUT
18317 AI-2 Trip OUT
18319 AI-3 Trip OUT
18321 AI-4 Trip OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.40 Analog Input

Informa-
tion
18270 AI-1 abnormal OUT
18323 AI-1 = MV
18324 AI-2 = MV
18325 AI-3 = MV
18326 AI-4 = MV
428.4000 AI Block IntSP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.41 Analog Output
2.41 Analog Output
2.41.1 Analog Output
NOTE
i This function is not applicable to 7SJ686-A-C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E/M/N!
The device provides 2 channels of 0 mA-24 mA analog output.

The analog output function requires an analog output extension board.
The true value type of each analog output can be independently configured as Ia, Ib, Ic, I1, P, Q, S, or User-
Defined. When the device has measurement CT, Ia, Ib, Ic, P, Q, and S are from the calculation results of the
measurement CT; when the device has only protection CT, Ia, Ib, Ic, P, Q, and S are from the calculation results
of the protection CT; I1 is from the positive-sequence component of the calculation of the protection CT; if the
true value type is selected as User-Defined, the CFC module is required to complete the user-defined channel
configuration.
Each analog output channel has four parameters that determine the conversion relationship between the
analog output values and the true values: minimum analog output, minimum true value, maximum analog
output, and maximum true value. The corresponding relationships are as follows:
[dw_analog_output_vs_true_value, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-184 Conversion Relationship between Analog Output Values and True Values
The analog output function is called once every 600 ms.
2.41.2 Settings

7355 Analog output OFF OFF
ON
7356 AO-1 Min.Real -200.00 .. 100.00 % 0.00 %
7357 AO-1 Min.AO 0 .. 10 mA 0 mA
7358 AO-1 Max.Real 10.00 .. 200.00 %; 0 100.00 %
7359 AO-1 Max.AO 10 .. 24 mA; 0 20 mA

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.41 Analog Output

7360 AO-2 Min.Real -200.00 .. 100.00 % 0.00 %
7361 AO-2 Min.AO 0 .. 10 mA 0 mA
7362 AO-2 Max.Real 10.00 .. 200.00 %; 0 100.00 %
7363 AO-2 Max.AO 10 .. 24 mA; 0 20 mA

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.42 Operation Box
2.42 Operation Box
2.42.1 DC Operation Circuit Overview
This operation circuit is suitable for circuit breakers using spring operating mechanisms. Its schematic diagram
is as follows:
[dw_DC_op_panel_control_circuit, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-185 Schematic Diagram of DC Operation Board
Close Hold Relay (HBJ) and Trip Hold Relay (TBJI)

At present, the most commonly used circuit breaker operating mechanism is the spring operating mechanism.
The opening and closing currents of a spring operating mechanism are typically about 0.3 A-4 A. The tripping/
closing circuit is connected with a tripping/closing coil, which is an inductive load. If the protected tripping/
closing contact is directly disconnected, the operation circuit withstands the high-voltage reverse potential
generated by the coil, resulting in arcing and burning of contacts.
The relay contact activates the latching circuit while connecting the tripping/closing circuit. HBJ and TBJI starts
after current flows, and their contacts latch the tripping/closing circuit. At this time, even if the protection
relay output drops out, the tripping/closing circuit is still connected, and the tripping/closing coil circuit is cut
off by circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts with certain ability to eliminate arcing after the main contacts of the
circuit breaker operate.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.42 Operation Box
The holding current of this operation board is self-adaptive. A voltage-type holding relay is used instead of a
traditional current-type relay, enabling the coordination with circuit breakers with different tripping currents.
Anti-tripping Circuit
The role of an anti-tripping circuit is: when the circuit breaker is closed to a fault, the protection trips, and the
closing circuit must be cut off, that is, a closing pulse, no matter how long, can only close the circuit breaker
once.
When manually closing to a fault or tripping the normal operation protection, the trip hold relay TBJI is acti-
vated and the normally open contacts of TBJI are closed to maintain the tripping circuit. Even if the protective
trip contacts return, the trip behaviour is followed through until the circuit breaker trips. If the closing contacts
are closed at this point, the voltage coil of the anti-trip relay TBJV is activated and the normally open contacts
of the TBJV-1 in series with its coil circuit are closed to form a latching circuit. The normally closed contacts of
the TBJV-2 in series with the closing circuit is opened, which cuts off the closing current, and keeps the closing
circuit open until the closing contacts are open.
The anti-tripping function can be verified on site by the following methods: With the circuit breaker in the
closed position, keep pressing the closing button while applying the fault current. If the circuit breaker is not
closed after the protective action trips the circuit breaker, then the anti-tripping circuit is working.
The user can cancel the anti-tripping function of the operation board by shorting the terminals N2 and N3.
Circuit Breaker Position Signals (HWJ, TWJ)

The HWJ is connected to the circuit-breaker tripping circuit. When the circuit breaker is in the closed position,
its normally open auxiliary contacts are closed, and the HWJ is excited. HWJ = 1 means that the circuit breaker
is in the closed position. The closing position monitoring function can be enabled or disabled through X2. X2
is in the "Y" position when shipped from the factory, and the closing position monitoring function is enabled.
TWJ is connected to the closing circuit of the circuit breaker. When the circuit breaker is in the open position,
its normally closed auxiliary contacts are closed, and the closing coil TWJ is excited. TWJ = 1 means that the
circuit breaker is in the open position. The trip position monitoring function can be enabled through the
terminal N7. For detailed wiring of N7, please refer to the following sections.
Post-Closure Relay (HHJ)

The main function of the post-closure relay HHJ is to determine whether the circuit breaker is manually closed
or opened. Closed HHJ contacts mean that the circuit breaker has been manually closed; opened HHJ contacts
mean that the circuit breaker has been manually opened.
The HHJ relay is a two-position magnetic latching relay with an operation coil and a return coil. When the
operation voltage is applied to the operation coil, the contacts are closed. At this time, if the coil loses voltage,
the contacts remain in the original closed state, and only return when the operation voltage is applied to the
return coil.
Manual or remote closing can activate the operation coil of the HHJ, while the protective closing cannot acti-
vate the action coil; manual or remote tripping can activate the return coil of the HHJ, while the protective trip
cannot activate the return coil.
Application of HHJ:
• When the circuit breaker is not in the corresponding position, activate reclosing (HHJ=1, TWJ=1).
• Manually trip to block reclosing (HHJ = 0).
• Manually trip to block ATS (HHJ=0).
• When the circuit breaker is not in the corresponding position, generate a general fault signal (HHJ=1,
TWJ=1).
General Fault Signal

When both HHJ and TWJ are activated, the device generates a general fault signal at 400 ms later, which auto-
matically resets with a delay of 3 sec.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.42 Operation Box
Control Circuit Error Signal

Generally, no matter what state the circuit breaker is in, one of TWJ and HWJ must be activated. If neither of
them is activated, the control circuit is abnormal. When the device detects that the normally closed contacts of
both TWJ and HWJ are closed, a control circuit error signal is sent after 2 sec later, which returns with a delay
of 0.5 sec.
DC Operating Power Supply

Devices with DC operation boards support DC 110 V and DC 220 V operating power supplies.
Jumpers X1, X4, X5, X6, X7 are placed in the "L" position when the power supply is DC 110 V.
Jumpers X1, X4, X5, X6, X7 are placed in the "H" position when the power supply is DC 220 V.
Application of Internal Anti-tripping Circuit and Protective Anti-tripping Circuit

Both the internal anti-tripping function and the protective anti-tripping function could prevent the circuit
breaker from tripping-closing due to bonded closing contacts.
The internal anti-tripping circuit can prevent failure of the circuit breaker and tripping caused by abnormal
bonding of the closing control contacts; the anti-tripping circuit of the protection can prevent tripping of the
circuit breaker caused by false closing operation in case of feeder failure. The two types of anti-tripping are
complementary.
In some applications, when using the internal anti-tripping function of the circuit breaker, maybe, once
opened, the tripping relay in the circuit breaker is self-latched and prevented from being reset, and can no
longer be closed again. This is because the current flowing through TWJ keeps the anti-tripping relay in the
circuit breaker self-latched. In the following figure, a solution is provided by taking the Siemens 3AE circuit
breaker as an example. In the 3AE circuit breaker, there is an independent terminal 12 for closing circuit super-
vision, and the above problem can be solved by connecting the terminal N7 of TWJ to this terminal.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.42 Operation Box
[lo_3AE, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-186 Schematic Diagram of Anti-Tripping Circuit
The legends in the figure above are explained as follows:

S3: Spring energy storage contact – the normally open contacts are closed after the energy storage is full, and
the normally closed contacts are closed after the energy storage is released (the moment the switch closes)
K1: Anti-tripping relay
S1: Switch position auxiliary contact; when it is in the opened position, normally closed contacts are closed
Y1: Tripping coil
Y9: Closing coil
S8 and S9: Switch auxiliary contacts

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.42 Operation Box
2.42.2 AC Operation Circuit Overview
The schematic diagram of the AC operation circuit is as follows:
[dw_AC_op_panel_control_circuit, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-187 Schematic Diagram of AC Operation Board Control Circuit
The AC operation circuit is mainly used in applications where simple UPS power supplies are used on site. Its
principle is similar to the DC operation board, except that some functions are simplified and the HHJ relay is
cancelled.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.43 Monitoring Functions
2.43.1 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision
2.43.1.1 Function Overview

The device provides trip/close circuit supervision. According to whether the device has an operation board,
there are two methods to implement the trip/close circuit supervision:
• If the device has an operation board, the device collects the TWJ, HWJ, HHJ node information from the
operation board, and make a judgment on the trip/close circuit supervision (that is, control circuit super-
vision).
• If the device does not have an operation board, trip circuit supervision and close circuit supervision can
be implemented with an external single binary input. A message (control circuit lock, trip
circuit lock, or close circuit lock) is sent if the configuration of the required binary input
does not match the selected supervision type.
For devices with an operation board, if you still want to implement the trip circuit supervision and close circuit
supervision functions through an external single binary input, set the power system parameter 246 W.Oper-
ation Box to NO.
The trip/close circuit supervision function of this device is called every 600 ms. Therefore, the time error is
+/-600 ms.
After a power system fault is detected, the trip/close circuit supervision function is disabled, and each flag
remains in the state before the power system fault occurs.
Control circuit supervision with the operation board can determine the disconnection of the control circuit, the
abnormality of the control circuit and the general fault.
The logic of control circuit supervision with the operation board is as follows:
[lo_control_circuit_break, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-188 Logic Diagram of Control Circuit Error with the Operation Board

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic of the general fault signal with the operation board is as follows:
[lo_event_signal, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-189 Logic Diagram of General Fault Signal with the Operation Board
When there is no operation board, the device provides the function to make a judgment on the trip/close
circuit supervision with a single binary input. Since the trip circuit supervision and the close circuit supervision
have similar wiring methods and decision logic, only the trip circuit supervision is taken as an example here.
The wiring of trip circuit supervision with a single binary input is as follows:
[lo_Connection_of_TripCircuitBreak, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-190 Wiring Diagram of Trip Circuit Supervision with a Single Binary Input
RTC Relay Tripping Contact

CB Circuit Breaker
TRIP COIL Circuit Breaker Tripping Contact
AUX NO Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact (Normally Open)
AUX NC Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact (Normally Closed)
V-CTR Control Voltage (Tripping Voltage)
V-BI Binary Input Voltage
R2 Bypass Resistance
R1 Current-Limiting Resistance
As shown in the figure above, when using a BI to implement the trip circuit supervision function, a current-
limiting resistance R1 and a bypass resistance R2 must be used.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
When the circuit breaker is closed, the control power supply form a circuit via the BI, R1, AUX NO and TRIP
COIL, and the trip circuit supervision function is activated when the circuit breaker is in the closed position,.
When the circuit breaker is opened, the control power supply form a circuit via the BI, R1, R2, AUX NC and TRIP
COIL, and the trip circuit supervision function is activated when the circuit breaker is in the opened position.
The role of the current-limiting resistance R1 is to prevent the circuit breaker from false trip caused by the
breakdown of the BI. In case of a BI breakdown, the current flows through R1 and AUX NO into the TRIP COIL.
Due to the current-limiting effect of R1, the voltage applied to TRIP COIL is lower than 30% of the operation
voltage, thereby preventing the circuit breaker from accidentally tripping.
Another role of the bypass resistance R2 is: When the circuit breaker changes from the closed position to the
opened position, the AUX NC is closed, and the tripping contact RTC is closed for a long time, the control
power supply form a circuit via the tripping contact RTC, the bypass resistance R2, AUX NC and TRIP COIL,
where R2 can ensure that the TRIP COIL does not operate when the trip relay is welded.
The logic of trip circuit supervision with a single binary input is as follows:
[lo_BinaryInputTripCircuitBreak, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-191 Wiring Diagram of Trip Circuit Supervision with a Single Binary Input
Calculation Conditions and Values of Recommended Resistances
Calculation Conditions
IBI(HIGH) 1.2 mA (SIPROTEC 4 7SJ686)
UBI min When the rated voltage is DC 110 V, the When the rated voltage is DC 220 V, the
factory setting is factory setting is
Uhigh ≥ 69 V Uhigh ≥ 138 V
UCTR 110 V (control voltage) 220 V (control voltage)
Permissible power supply fluctuation -20 %-15 %
RTC 90 Ω (foreign switch); 60 Ω (domestic 360 Ω (foreign switch); 269 Ω (domestic
switch) switch)
Permissible deviation ±50 %
K 30 % Uctr reliable and unchanged
Recommended Resistances
BI Operating Voltage R1/R2 Resistance Value Resistance Power
110 V 7.5 KΩ 5W
220 V 15 KΩ 10 W

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.43.1.2 Settings

8201 TRIP Cir. SUP. ON ON TRIP Circuit Supervision
OFF
8203 CLOSE Cir. SUP. ON ON CLOSE Circuit Supervision
OFF
8204 Ctr. Cir. SUP. ON ON Control circuit Supervision
OFF

Informa-
tion
6851 >BLOCK TripC SP >BLOCK Trip circuit supervision
6852 >TripC trip rel SP >Trip circuit supervision: trip relay
6861 TripC OFF OUT Trip circuit supervision OFF
6862 TripC BLOCKED OUT Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED
6863 TripC ACTIVE OUT Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE
6864 TripC ProgFail OUT Trip Circuit blk. Bin. input is not set
6865 FAIL: Trip cir. OUT Failure Trip Circuit
17228 ClsC ProgFail OUT Close Circuit Bin. input is not set
17229 FAIL: Cls cir. OUT Faliure Close Circuit
17291 >BLOCK ClsC SP >BLOCK Close circuit supervision
17292 >ClsC close rel SP >Close circuit superv.: close relay
17294 ClsC OFF OUT Close circuit supervision OFF
17295 ClsC BLOCKED OUT Close circuit superv is BLOCKED
17296 ClsC ACTIVE OUT Close circuit supervision is ACTIVE
18300 >TWJ SP >TWJ
18301 >HWJ SP >HWJ
18302 >HHJ SP >HHJ
18303 Ctr cir sup OFF OUT Control circuit supervision OFF
18304 Ctr. Cir. Err OUT Control Circuit error
18305 CB P.Disturbing OUT CB position disturbing
18306 General Fault OUT General Fault
18307 Con.Cir.Sup.Blk OUT Con.Cir.Sup.is blocked for no routing
2.43.2 Fuse Fault Monitoring

This function quickly and accurately distinguishes between power system faults and VT fuse faults and blocks
voltage-related protection functions after a fuse fault occurs (the corresponding protection functions are
provided with control words to select whether they are blocked by FFM).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_FuseFailure, 2, en_GB]
Figure 2-192 Logic Diagram of Fuse Fault
[lo_FuseFailureBlocking, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-193 Logic Diagram of Fuse Fault Blocking Protection
2.43.2.2 Settings

212 BkrClosed I MIN 1A 0.03 .. 1.00 A 0.03 A Closed Breaker Min.
5A 0.15 .. 5.00 A 0.15 A Current Threshold
8141 VT BROKEN WIRE ON OFF VT broken wire supervision
OFF

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
169 VT FuseFail>10s OUT VT Fuse Failure (alarm >10s)
170 VT FuseFail OUT VT Fuse Failure (alarm instantaneous)
2.43.3 VT Broken Wire Supervision

This function accurately distinguishes between one-phase, two-phase and 3-phase PT disconnection and sends
the alarm signal (without blocking the protection function).
This function only works when the parameter 213 VT Connection is set to UL1E,UL2E,UL3E.
[lo_VTFBreaksupervison, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-194 Logic Diagram of VT Broken Wire Supervision (Not Applicable to 7SJ686-N)
For ATS devices (7SJ686-N), VT broken wire supervision includes busbar VT broken wire supervision and line
VT broken wire supervision.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
• When the setting 267 Bus PT Connect is set to NO, busbar VT broken wire supervision is disabled.
• When the setting 267 Bus PT Connect is set to YES, the mode of busbar VT broken wire supervision is
selected according to the setting 274 Connection:
– If the setting 274 Connection is Single Busbar, busbar VT broken wire supervision is enabled.
– If the setting 274 Connection is Segmented Bus, busbar segment I VT broken wire supervision
and busbar segment II VT broken wire supervision are enabled.
[lo_Busbar_PT_BreakSupervision(7SJ686-N), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-195 Logic Diagram of Busbar VT Broken Wire Supervision (Only Applicable to 7SJ686-N)
Note:
1. UN is the rated secondary busbar voltage, that is, 236 UN-SEC PT Bus.
2. If Line 1 supplies power to the busbar, the "operating line current" is the current of Line 1; if Line 2 supplies
power to the busbar, the "operating line current" is the current of Line 2.
3. VT broken wire alarm time delay: 10 sec.
4. VT broken wire alarm return time delay: 10 sec.
When the parameter 267 Bus PT Connect is set to YES; the 1-phase decision logic is adopted for both Line
1 VT broken wire and Line 2 VT broken wire; when the setting 267 Bus PT Connect is set to NO, the 3-
phase decision logic is adopted for both Line 1 VT broken wire and Line 2 VT broken wire.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_InlinePT_BreakSupervisionSinglePhase, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-196 1-Phase Decision Logic Diagram for Line VT Broken Wire Supervision (Only Applicable to
7SJ686-N)
[lo_InlinePT_BreakSupervision3Phase(7SJ686-N), 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-197 3-Phase Decision Logic Diagram for Line VT Broken Wire Supervision (Only Applicable to
7SJ686-N)
1. When the parameter 267 Bus PT Connect is set to YES, if 265 PT Connection of Line1 is set to
Not connected, Line 1 VT broken wire supervision is disabled; if 266 PT Conn. Line2 is set to Not
connected, Line 2 VT broken wire supervision is disabled.
2. If 265 PT Conn. Line1 is set to UL12 transform., UL23 transform. or UL31 transform., then
the dead voltage threshold is 397 Line Dead Volt.; if 265 PT Conn. Line1 is set to UL1E trans-
form., UL2E transform. or UL3E transform., then the dead voltage threshold is 397 Line Dead
Volt./1.732. The dead voltage-free threshold for line 2 is selected in the same way.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
3. UN is the rated secondary voltage of Line 1, that is, 232 UN-SEC PT Line1.
4. VT broken wire alarm time delay: 10 sec.
5. VT broken wire alarm return time delay: 10 sec.
2.43.3.2 Settings

213 VT Connection UL1E,UL2E,UL3E UL1E,UL2E,UL3E VT Connection
U12, U23
U12, U23, Ux
U12, U23, USYN
8141 VT BROKEN WIRE ON OFF VT broken wire supervision
OFF
395 Bus Dead Volt. 0.10 .. 1.20 Un 0.30 Un Busbar Dead Voltage Threshold
397 Line Dead Volt. 0.10 .. 1.20 Un 0.30 Un Line Dead Voltage Threshold
398 Line Dead Cur. 0.02 .. 2.00 I/In 0.10 I/In Line Dead Current Threshold

Informa-
tion
253 VT brk. wire OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-N
256 VT b.w. 1 pole OUT Not applicable to 7SJ686-N
17737 Busbar PT Brk. OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
17729 B1 PT Broken OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
17730 B2 PT Broken OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
17731 Line1 PT Broken OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
17732 Line2 PT Broken OUT Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
2.43.4 CT Broken Wire Supervision
NOTE
i This function is applicable to 7SJ686-A/B/D/E/F/G/J/K/M!
This function allows you to select whether to introduce a voltage criterion or not.
This function sends 17501 CT Broken>12s 12 seconds after a CT wire is broken.
After a power system fault is detected, the CT broken wire supervision function is disabled, and each flag
remains in the state before the power system fault occurs.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic of CT broken wire supervision is as follows:
[lo_CT_breakSupervision, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-198 Logic Diagram of CT Broken Wire Supervision
NOTE
i In 7SJ686-M, 244 Volt for CT Mon is defaulted to NO. This parameter is not displayed in the device.
2.43.4.2 Settings

244 Volt for CT Mon YES YES Voltage for CT Broken Wire
NO Monitor
8132 CT BWD 3I0 1A 0.03 .. 0.50 A 0.06 A CT broken wire 3I0
5A 0.15 .. 2.50 A 0.30 A

Informa-
tion
17501 CT Broken>12s OUT CT Broken wire alarm >12s
2.43.5 CT Broken Wire Supervision (Only Applicable for 7SJ686-C/H/L/M)

The CT broken wire supervision must continuously monitor the disturbance caused by broken wires in the
secondary circuit of the current transformer during steady-state operation. A broken wire in the secondary

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
circuit of the current transformer does not only cause high voltage danger and damage electrical devices, but
also generate differential current, just like an internal failure of the protected object.
During normal operation at the system frequency of 50 Hz, when the 3-phase load current is between 0.1In
and 2In, if the device detects that the sampling value of a certain phase current suddenly decays to 0, it is
considered that there is broken wire in the CT circuit, and then the CT broken wire supervision blocks differen-
tial protection as well as negative-sequence overcurrent and zero-sequence overcurrent protection functions
at related measurement points. After the CT broken wire alarm delay, the device sends the message
Broken wire detected, and indicates the current measurement point and the phase of the broken wire.
When the current is detected again in the phase with the broken wire, the CT broken wire message is returned
and the associated protective blocking is released. If there is a transformer in the protected zone, the 3-phase
differential protection is blocked.
NOTE
i • CT broken wire only blocks the zero-sequence overcurrent protection on local side. For example, in
7SJ686-H (two-side transformer), CT broken wire on the primary side only blocks the zero-sequence
overcurrent, and CT broken wire on the secondary side only blocks the zero-sequence overcurrent #2.
• In 7SJ686-M, when the device on one side detects the CT broken wire, the differential protection of
the phase with the broken wire of the devices on both sides is blocked. After the alarm delay for the
side with the broken wire, the device on local side reports CT broken wire in Phase X, and the
device on the remote side reports CT broken wire in Phase X on remote side.
• CT broken wire detection is limited by practical technical means. It can only be detected when a
steady-state current is flowing through the circuit. In addition, it is difficult to detect if the broken wire
occurs at the moment when the current crosses zero. When the operating frequency exceeds 10% of
the rated frequency, the expected value cannot be calculated. The behaviour of CT broken wire cannot
be accurately simulated by electronic test devices, and therefore may activate protection functions
during the test.
CT Broken Wire
• The parameter 4701 CT BROKEN WIRE is used to set the operation logic of CT broken wire:
– The option BWD Al and Blk means that the CT broken wire signal blocks corresponding protec-
tion functions.
– The option BWD Al and ABlk means that the CT broken wire signal blocks the corresponding
protection functions when the differential current is relatively low, but automatically unblocks these
functions when the differential current is higher than a certain set parameter.
– The option BWD Al only means that only a signal is sent without blocking protection functions in
case of CT broken wire.
• The parameter 4714 T BWD delay is used to set the alarm delay of CT broken wire signals.
• The parameter 4715 ΔI< BWD is used to set the minimum differential current for automatic unblocking
in case of CT broken wire in 7SJ686-C/H/L. When the differential current is greater than this setting, the
blocking of the differential protection by the CT broken wire supervision is released.
• In 7SJ686-M, the parameter 4716 I< BWD:

– When the parameter 620 Diff.Type is set to VLD.Prot, the parameter 4716 I< BWD is used to
set the minimum differential current for automatic unblocking in case of CT broken wire. When the
differential current is greater than this setting, the blocking of the differential protection is released.
– When the parameter 620 Diff.Type is set to CCP. Prot, the parameter 4716 I< BWD is used to
set the minimum current for automatic unblocking in case of CT broken wire. When the phase
current is greater than this setting, the blocking of the differential protection is released.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.43.5.3 Settings

4701 CT BROKEN WIRE OFF OFF Fast broken current-wire supervi-
BWD Al and Blk sion
BWD Al and ABlk
BWD Al only
4714 T BWD delay 0.2 .. 180.0 sec 5.0 sec Delay time for BWd supervision
4715 ΔI< BWD 0.05 .. 5.00 I/InO 1.00 I/InO min differential current for BWD
4716 I< BWD 0.500 .. 20.000 I/In 2.500 I/In min phase current for BWD
Only applicable to 7SJ686-M

Informa-
tion
251 Broken wire OUT Broken wire detected Only applicable to 7SJ686-
30054 Broken wire OFF OUT Broken wire is switched OFF C/H/L
30120 brk. wire IL1M1 OUT Broken wire IL1 measurement
location 1
location 1
location 1
location 2
location 2
location 2
30126 brk. wire IL1M3 OUT Broken wire IL1 measurement Only applicable to 7SJ686-L
location 3
location 3
location 3
location 4
location 4
location 4

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18736 Broken Iwire L1 OUT Alarm: Broken current-wire Only applicable to 7SJ686-M
detected L1
18737 Broken Iwire L2 OUT Alarm: Broken current-wire
detected L2
18738 Broken Iwire L3 OUT Alarm: Broken current-wire
detected L3
18739 ext.Brk.Wire L1 OUT Broken current-wire at other
end L1
end L2
end L3
2.43.6 Parameterisation Errors
When configuring digital channels such as binary inputs and binary outputs, and defining analog channels,
inconsistencies may occur, which are detrimental to the proper operation of protection and monitoring func-
tions.
The protection device checks the consistency of these settings and sends signals when they are inconsistent.
For example, if there is no zero-sequence current input between the starpoint of the protected object and
earth, the restricted earth fault protection cannot be applied.
The inconsistency of these settings is recorded in the operating information and self-generated information
event log.
2.43.7 Cold Load Pickup Signal
NOTE
i This function is not applicable to 7SJ686-L/N!
When the three phase currents I L1, I L2, and IL3 are all less than the setting 212 BkrClosed I MIN for 60 s,
the device sends a cold load pickup alarm. This function only provides an alarm and cannot dynamically
increase the overcurrent protection pickup threshold. With the CFC logics, the setting group can be switched,
thereby raising the operation threshold when the motor starts.
[lo_ColdLoadStartupSignal, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-199 Logic Diagram of Cold Load Pickup Signal

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.43.7.2 Settings
Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments

8164 CLP Active Time Measurem.Superv 0.1 .. 21600.0 sec 5.0 sec Cold Load PickUp Active
Time

Informa-
tion
18338 Cold Load PU OUT Cold Load Pickup
2.43.8 Voltage/Current Phase Sequence Supervision
NOTE
After detecting a power system fault, the voltage/current phase sequence supervision function is disabled, and
each flag remains in the state before the power system fault occurs.
In order to detect phase sequence changes in voltage and current input circuits, it is necessary to monitor the
sequence of the zero crossings of voltages having the same sign to detect the phase sequences of phase-to-
phase voltages and phase currents.
The phase sequence "123" is assumed for the directional measurement of normal voltages, the path selection
for fault location and the detection of negative sequences. The phase sequence reversing function of the
measured values is checked by verifying the phase sequence. For this purpose, the line voltages U12, U23,
U31 are used for phase sequence monitoring.
Voltage: U12 before U23 before U31, and
Current: IL1 before IL2 before IL3.
To determine the voltage phase sequence, each measured voltage must be at least:
|U12|, |U23|, |U31| > 40 V
To determine the current phase sequence, each measured current must be at least:
|IL1|, |IL2|, |IL3| > 0.5 IN
For abnormal phase sequence, the message Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage or Failure: Phase
Sequence Current and Failure: Phase sequence are sent.
When necessary, the device can apply a reverse phase sequence with a binary input and a parameter 209
Phase Sequence. When the phase sequence of the device is changed, Phase 2 and Phase 3 are inverted
within the device (their amplitudes are not inverted), and positive-sequence and negative-sequence currents
are swapped. This does not affect fault quantities, measured quantities or phase-related information.
2.43.8.2 Settings

209 PHASE SEQ. L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Phase Sequence
L1 L3 L2

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
171 Fail Ph. Seq. OUT Failure: Phase Sequence
175 Fail Ph. Seq. I OUT Failure: Phase Sequence Current
176 Fail Ph. Seq. U OUT Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
2.43.9 Voltage Supervision
NOTE
This function provides live/dead voltage signals for the ATS instantaneously.
The validity of the line single phase live voltage criterion is determined by the following configurations:
213 VT Connection 216 U4 Voltage Trans- Line Single Phase Live Voltage Criterion
former Is 203 Unom SECONDARY 203Unom SECONDARY
--- 100 V --- 381 V
UL1E,UL2E,UL3E Udelta transf. Valid Valid
Not connected Valid Valid
Ux transformer
Usy2 transf.
U12, U23 Udelta transf. Valid Invalid
Not connected Invalid Invalid
Ux transformer
Usy2 transf.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The logic of live/dead voltage monitoring is as follows.
[lo_voltageSupervision, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-200 Logic Diagram of Live/Dead Voltage Monitoring
2.43.9.2 Settings

8118 Live Uph-ph 0.300 .. 1.400 Un 0.800 Un 3 Phase live
voltage(ph-ph)
8119 Dead Uph-ph 0.100 .. 1.200 Un 0.300 Un 3 Phase dead
voltage(ph-ph)
8120 Live Uph-gnd 0.100 .. 3.000 Un 0.800 Un 1 phase live
voltage(ph-gnd)
8121 Live Vph-ph S2 0.300 .. 1.400 Un 0.800 Un 3 Phase live Only applicable
voltage(ph-ph) side2 to 7SJ686-F
8122 Dead Vph-ph S2 0.100 .. 1.200 Un 0.300 Un 3 Phase dead
voltage(ph-ph) side2
8123 Live Vph-gnd S2 0.100 .. 3.000 Un 0.800 Un 1 Phase live
voltage(ph-g) side2
8125 Live U 3Ph T 0 .. 100 sec 1 sec Live voltage on 3
phases time delay
8126 Dead U 3Ph T 0 .. 100 sec 1 sec Dead voltage on 3
phases time delay
8127 Live U 1Ph T 0 .. 100 sec 1 sec Live voltage on 1
phase time delay
Note: 3-phase UN is taken from parameter 0203, and 1-phase UN is 1/√3 of 3-phase UN

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
18245 With U on 3ph OUT With voltage on 3 phases
18246 With/O U on 3ph OUT Without voltage on any phase
18247 With U on Ph OUT With voltage on Phase
18550 W. U on 3ph S2 OUT With voltage on 3 phases S2 Only applicable to
18551 W/O U on 3ph S2 OUT Without voltage on any phase S2 7SJ686-F
18552 With U on Ph S2 OUT With voltage on Phase S2
2.43.10 Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring
2.43.10.1 Functional Overview

The circuit breaker wear monitoring function predicts the residual endurance of circuit breakers by calculating
I2t, and reminds the operator to maintain the circuit breaker in time, which helps reduce operation and main-
tenance cost and improve the service life of the switchgear.
This function adopts the adaptive threshold search arc extinguishing points algorithm which is based on the
amount of current change to automatically search for the arc extinguishing point.
2.43.10.2 Basic Principle
[lo_CB wear monitor, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-201 Logic Diagram of Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Functional Description
The circuit breaker wear monitoring function can be activated with the following 4 methods:
• By protection trip
• By external opening commands (operation on HMI, operation using DIGSI, or SCADA remote control)
• By 16019 >Circuit Breaker Wear Start Criteria
• By 4601 >Brk Aux NO turned to OFF or 17625 >CB3 AUX NO (only for 7SJ686-N) turned to OFF
If the circuit breaker wear monitoring function is activated, the device will calculate I2t and display the residual
endurance [%] correctly after the circuit breaker breaks.
The circuit breaker wear monitoring reflects the actual wear of the circuit breaker contacts. To prevent the
simulated fault current from affecting the electrical endurance of the circuit breaker when the device is in Test
mode, the wear monitoring function is automatically blocked when the device is serviced, which is imple-
mented by the default CFC logic of the device.
Statistics
The circuit breaker wear monitoring statistics are displayed in percentages as follows:
• 16014 Re.Endu.[%] L1=
• 16015 Re.Endu.[%] L2=
• 16016 Re.Endu.[%] L3=

A residual endurance of 100.00 % indicates that the contact does not wear, while 0.00 % indicates that the
circuit breaker has reached its maximum wear level and must be maintained or replaced. Under normal condi-
tions, the circuit breaker wear monitoring module automatically updates the statistics in the Statistics menu
according to the switchgear status and does not need any manual setup. After replacement or maintenance of
the switchgear, according to the actual status of the device, the statistics must be set directly in the corre-
sponding entry in Annunciation > Statistics, or be modified by right-clicking Annunciation > Statistics >
Statistics menu on DIGSI.
Function Enable/Disable
The circuit breaker wear monitoring function is only available when 172 CB WEAR MONIT. is set to I2t-
Method, and is disabled when this parameter is set to Disabled.
Function Activation
When the circuit breaker is tripped by a remote control or a control command from HMI, the circuit breaker
wear monitoring function is triggered to monitor the devices specified by the parameter 375 Cmd.via
control.
Circuit Breaker Parameters
• 370 Ir-CB
• 372 Isc-CB
• 373 OP.CYCLES Isc
• 377 T CB OPENING
• 378 T 52 ARCINGTIME
• 379 Mechan.Endu.
• 380 Resid.Endu.[%]<

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
i If the circuit breaker manufacturer does not mention the above parameters, use the default parameter
settings.
Threshold Value Settings

380 Resid.Endu.[%]< is set to 20.00 % by default. When the percentage of remaining electrical endur-
ance of any phase is below the threshold, the signal Thresh.R.Endu.< is sent, indicating that the switch-
gear needs to be maintained or replaced.
If necessary, the threshold can be set manually. The threshold value is set according to the following princi-
ples: An alarm signal must be sent if the number of possible opening and closing operations is less than 2 at
the rated short-circuit opening current. According to this principle, the life threshold value is calculated with
the following formula: 2/Nsc = 2/30 = 6.66 % (Nsc is the setting of the parameter 373 OP.CYCLES Isc).
2.43.10.4 Settings

370 Ir-CB 10 .. 50000 A 1250 A Rated Normal Current (Circuit
Breaker)
371 OP.CYCLES AT Ir 100 .. 1000000 10000 Switching Cycles at Rated Normal
Current
372 Isc-CB 10 .. 100000 A 25000 A Rated Short-Circuit Breaking
Current CB
373 OP.CYCLES Isc 1 .. 1000 30 Switch. Cycles at Rated Short-Cir.
Curr.
375 Cmd.via control Breaker Breaker CB Wear: Open Command via
Disconnect switch Control Device
Earth switch
Custom switch
376 T CB BREAKTIME 1 .. 600 ms 80 ms Breaktime (Circuit Breaker)
377 T CB OPENING 1 .. 500 ms 60 ms Opening Time (Circuit Breaker)
Opening time ≠ break time. Note
the difference!
378 T 52 ARCINGTIME 1 .. 30 ms 15 ms Arcing time (52 Breaker)
379 Mechan.Endu. 100 .. 1000000 30000 Mechanical Endurance
380 Resid.Endu.[%]< 0.01 .. 100.00 % 20.00 % Lower Thres.[%] of CB Residual
Endurance

Informa-
tion
16014 Re.Endu.[%] L1= VI Residual Endurance [%] Phase L1
Accurate to 2 decimal places of the percentage
16018 Thresh.R.Endu.< OUT Dropped below Threshold CB Res.Endurance
16019 >CB Wear start SP >Circuit Breaker Wear Start Criteria
20539 >BLK CB Wear SP >BLOCK Circuit Breaker Wear

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.43.11 Motor Online Monitoring
The motor online monitoring function monitors the current changes during motor operation to detect
mechanical problems such as wear and tear, insufficient lubrication, etc. If a sudden increase or decrease in
current beyond the load change occurs during motor operation, the motor monitoring function detects this
event, takes a reading, and sends an alarm signal when the accumulated value reaches a set amount. This
function is only applicable to motors and is valid when the order number M14 is B and C.
2.43.11.1 Function Description
Motor Startup Current Jump Blocking

The motor online monitoring function only monitors the current change during motor operation, and the
current jump supervision must be blocked during motor startup.
When all the three phase currents are less than the setting value 212 BkrClosed I MIN, the motor is deter-
mined to be in stalled state. On the contrary, when the current of any phase is greater than Closed Breaker
Min. Current Threshold, the motor is considered to be in the startup stage.
When the binary input 4601 >Brk Aux NO is configured, the circuit breaker state is also taken into considera-
tion. When "Circuit breaker open" disappears, that is, the motor starts, the current jump supervision must be
blocked for a period of time to circumvent the startup process.
When the current jump is blocked, the blocking signal is sent.
[lo_current sudden change blocking, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-202 Logic of Current Jump Blocking
Current Detection Channel

The current jump supervision function monitors the changes in the current value during motor operation
instead of the fault value. The monitored current channel can be switched to Prot. CT or Meas. CT with
the setting 9202 I Jump CHL, which is defaulted to Prot. CT.
Current Jump Calculation

The current jump calculation is based on the data window of the current jump detection. The data window of
the current jump detection can be set via 9210 I inc. dt or 9212 I dec. dt.
Alarm Signal Hold Time

Since the jump is generally not an ongoing event, this return signal time can be set via 9213 T I jump DO.
In order to ensure that the jump signal can accurately reflect the jump occurrence when jumps occur
frequently, it is recommended to set this time delay reasonably according to the actual situation instead of
setting it as long as possible.
Current Jump Counts

When a current jump occurs, the device counts the number of occurrences. When the cumulative number
reaches the setting of 9214 No. of I jump, a current jump warning signal is sent, prompting the user to
stop and check.
The jump count can be manually cleared by an external binary input, or automatically cleared by the reset
time set in 9215 T Ij cnt Reset.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.43.11.2 Logic Diagram
[lo_current jump detection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-203 Logic Diagram of Current Jump Supervision

The current jump detects the difference between the current value and the value before the specified dt. The
jump value is the percentage of change relative to the value before jump or the base value.
It can be switched via the setting 9208 I jump of. The base value can be adjusted via the setting 9205 I
jump base

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
For example, when calculated the change relative to the value before jump, the current increasing jump and
decreasing jump are calculated with the following formulas:
The formula for the current increasing jump:
[fo_current sudden rise, 1, --_--]
The formula for the current decreasing jump:
[fo_current sudden drop, 1, --_--]
When the sampling value is small, due to the small value before jump, a minimum current limit is required to
calculate the jump. Below this limit, the jump is not calculated. This limit can be adjusted via the setting 9203
Min I. When it is set to 0, there is no limit for the minimum current.
In addition, current jump supervision only monitors changes during normal motor operation, and must be
disabled when an electrical fault occurs. A limit set by 9204 Max I is required; when it is set to infinity, there
is no limit for the MAX. monitoring current.
NOTE
i The parameter 9202 I Jump CHL is dependent of the presence or absence of a measurement CT in the
16th digit of the MLFB and by the measurement CT setting in the power system parameters. The protection
CT is automatically used for supervision when the device is not configured with a measurement CT.
2.43.11.4 Settings

173 Motor Monitor Disabled Disabled Motor Online Monitoring
Enabled
9201 I Jump ON OFF Current Jump Supervision
OFF
9202 I Jump CHL Prot. CT Prot. CT I jump measurement
Meas. CT channel
9203 Min I 1A 0.05 .. 0.60 A; 0 0.20 A Min supervised current
5A 0.25 .. 3.00 A; 0 1.00 A
9204 Max I 1A 0.80 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A Max supervised current
5A 4.00 .. 10.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
9205 I jump base 1A 0.20 .. 1.50 A 1.00 A I jump base value
5A 1.00 .. 7.50 A 5.00 A
9206 T Start Blk. 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 30.00 sec I Jump Blocking after
motor start
9207 I jump meas. True RMS True RMS I jump measurement
Fundamental
9208 I jump of Before jump Before jump I jump of
Iref
9209 I inc. jump 5 .. 200 %; ∞ 10 % I increasing jump value
9210 I inc. dt 3 .. 500 Cycle 10 Cycle I increasing jump dt
9211 I dec. jump 5 .. 200 %; ∞ 10 % I decreasing jump value
9212 I dec. dt 3 .. 500 Cycle 10 Cycle I decreasing jump dt
9213 T I jump DO 0.00 .. 2.00 sec 1.00 sec I jump dropout time delay

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

9214 No. of I jump 1 .. 100 ; ∞ 3 Max number of I jump
9215 T Ij cnt Reset 1 .. 10080 min; ∞ 30 min I jump counter reset time

Informa-
tion
20436 >Blk I Jump SP >Block Current Jump Supervison
20437 I Jump block OUT Current Jump Supervison is blocked
20438 IL1 inc. jump OUT IL1 increasing jump
20441 IL1 dec. jump OUT IL1 decreasing jump
20444 I jump value VI I jump value
20445 No. of I inc. VI Number of I increasing jump
20446 No. of I dec. VI Number of I decreasing
20447 I inc. jump OUT I increasing jump
20448 I dec. jump OUT I decreasing jump
20449 I jump warning OUT I jump warning
20450 >Reset Ij cnt SP >Reset I jump counter
20542 Ij cnt reset OUT I jump counter reset

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.44 Flexible Protection Function
NOTE
i This function is not applicable to 7SJ686-L/A-C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E/N!
The flexible protection function is a universal function that adopts different protection principles according to
the parameter settings. The user can create up to 20 flexible protection functions. Each flexible protection
function can be used either as an additional protection element to an existing standard protection function or
as a general logic, for example, for monitoring tasks.
The flexible protection function is a combination of standard protection logic and operating characteristics
with adjustable parameters (measured or calculated values). Table 2-10 lists the operating characteristics and
corresponding protection functions.
Table 2-10 Possible Protection Functions
Characteristic Characteristic/Measured Protection ANSI No. Operating Mode

Group Quantity Functions 3-Phase 1-Phase
Current I Effective value - with time 50, 50 N ✓ ✓
of the funda- overcurrent
mental wave protection
Irms RMS value - with time 50, 50 N ✓ ✓
overcurrent
protection
- overload
protection
3I0 Zero- - overcurrent 50 N ✓
sequence protection,
earth
I1 Positive- ✓
sequence
component
I2 Negative- - negative- 46 ✓
sequence sequence
component protection
Frequency f Frequency - Frequency 81 U/O Not related to phase
protection
df/dt Frequency - frequency 81 R
change rate change
protection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Characteristic Characteristic/Measured Protection ANSI No. Operating Mode

Group Quantity Functions 3-Phase 1-Phase
Voltage U Effective value - Voltage 27, 59, 59 N ✓ ✓
of the funda- protection
mental wave - Offset
voltage
Urms RMS value - Voltage 27, 59, 59 N ✓ ✓
protection
- Offset
voltage
3U0 Zero- - Offset 59 N ✓
sequence voltage
U1 Positive- - Voltage 27, 59 ✓
sequence protection
component
U2 Negative- - Voltage 47 ✓
sequence asymmetry
component
du/dt Voltage - voltage
change rate change rate
Power P Active - reverse 32 R, 32, 37 ✓ ✓
power protec-
tion
- power
protection
Q Reactive - power 32 ✓ ✓
protection
cos ϕ Power factor - power factor 55 ✓ ✓
Binary input – Binary input - external trip Not related to phase
command
Up to 20 configurable protection functions operate independently of each other. One of the functions
described below can be applied to other flexible protection functions. For the logic diagram, please refer to
Figure 2-204.
Functional Logic
This function can be switched between ON and OFF, or set to Alarm Only. In the last case, oscillographic
fault recording and the tripping time device are not activated after the operating conditions are met. There-
fore, tripping is impossible.
Changing the system parameter 1 after setting the flexible protection function may result in a function setting
error. This situation is indicated by a message (235.2128 Function $00 has invalid settings). In
this case, the protection function is stopped and the protection settings must be modified.
Blocking Function
This function can be blocked via the binary input (235.2110 >BLOCK Function $00) or via the HMI.
Blocking will reset the function's entire measurement logic as well as all running times and indications.
Blocking the protection via the HMI is very useful and can permanently block the protection function. The
blocking function based on voltage signals can block the protection in case of a voltage signal failure. This
function can also be implemented via the internal voltage monitoring logic of the protection "Fuse failure
monitor" (170 VT Fuse Failure (alarm instantaneous); see section 2.22.2 Setting Notes) or the
PT microswitch auxiliary contacts (6509 >Failure: Feeder VT and 6510 >Failure: Busbar VT). For
the blocking function based on voltage signals, the protection device also has an associated function option
BLOCKED BY FFM. If flexible protection is used as protection function or monitoring function, this function is
automatically blocked when the current falls below 0.03 IN.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Operating Mode, Measured Value, Measurement Method

The programmed functions can be customised to implement a specific flexible protection function by setting
the parameters OPERRAT. MODE, MEAS. QUANTITY, MEAS. METHOD and PICKUP WITH.
The parameter OPERRAT. MODE is used to define the function modes: 3-Phase, 1-Phase or Without Phase
Reference, for example, in a situation where there is no fixed reference phase. In the 3-Phase mode, data from
the three phases are processed simultaneously in parallel, which means that the threshold evaluation, pickup
indications and trip time delay are accomplished selectively for each phase and are parallel to each other (for
example, the typical operating principle of a three-phase time overcurrent protection). When 1-phase function
is selected, the protection processes the data of a single phase (for example, Phase 2 current IL2, zero-
sequence current IE or unbalanced voltage Uen). If the protection characteristic is related to the frequency or
external trip command, there is no fixed reference phase for the protection operating characteristic.
Additional parameters can be set in MEAS. QUANTITY and MEAS. METHOD. MEAS. METHOD defines
whether the effective value of the fundamental component or the true RMS value taking into account all
harmonic components is used for the current or voltage. The effective value of the fundamental wave is used
for calculation of all the other characteristic protections. The parameter PICKUP WITH selects whether the
protection operating is greater or less than the setting.
Characteristic Curve
The function's characteristic curve is always “definite time”, which means that the time delay is not affected by
the measured quantity.
Functional Logic
Figure 2-204 shows the logic diagram of a 3-phase flexible protection function. For 1-phase protection or
protection without reference phase, there is no indication of phase selection and phase fixing.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
[lo_user-defined protection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-204 Logic Diagram of Flexible Protection Function
The parameters can be set to determine whether the operating is picked up above or below the setting. The
set time delay starts from the time the setting is exceeded. When the time delay is reached and the measured
value still exceeds the setting, a fault phase pickup (for example, 235.2122 Function $00 Pickup Phase
L1) and a protection action (235.2121 Function $00 picked up) are reported. If the delay time is zero,
the protection is picked up as soon as a value beyond the limit is detected. If this flexible protection function is
set to active, the pickup signal starts the trip delay timing and record the fault simultaneously. The exception is
when it is set to Alarm Only. If the fault quantity is still present after the trip delay, the trip signal is trig-
gered (235.2126 Function $00 TRIP), and a timeout report is generated by (235.2125 Function $00
Delay Time Out).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The trip delay timeout can be blocked by the binary input (235.2113 >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Time
Delay). When the binary input is valid, the timing is not picked up. If a trip is picked up at this time, the delay
time starts counting from the time the binary input is reset. Therefore, the binary input can be used to skip the
protection delay by setting (235.2111 >Function $00 instantaneous TRIP) to trigger the trip signal as
soon as the protection is picked up and the external binary input is set. The trip signal can be blocked by the
binary inputs (235.2115 >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Phase L1) and (235.2114 >Function $00
BLOCK TRIP). In most cases, the blocking is used to avoid the effects of excitation inrush (see Interaction
with Other Functions, Page 393).
The return factor of the protection can be set. If the measured value returns after exceeding the limit, a delay
timer is started, during which the pickup signal is maintained and the pickup trip delay timing continues.
When the return delay is not reached while the trip delay has already been reached, the trip command only
works if the current exceeds the threshold. This element returns only after the return delay is reached. If the
time is set to zero, the element returns as soon as it falls below the fixed threshold.
External Trip Command

The above logic diagram does not explicitly describe the external trip logic because their functions are similar.
If the binary input is valid for the external trip command (235.2112 >Function $00 Delayed TRIP), then
it is processed logically when the threshold is exceeded. For example, once the binary input is activated, the
start delay starts timing. If the pickup time delay is set to zero, the pickup condition is immediately reported
and the trip delay is picked up. In addition, the external trip logic is the same as described in Figure 2-204.
Interaction with Other Functions

Flexible function can be used in conjunction with many other protections, such as:
• Circuit breaker failure protection:

If this function triggers a trip, the circuit breaker failure protection is automatically picked up. However, if
the current criterion is active at this time, only a trip occurs, for example, the minimum current threshold
setting 212 BkrClosed I MIN (system parameter 1) is exceeded.
• Automatic reclosure (AR):

Automatic reclosure (AR) cannot be directly picked up. In order to work with the automatic reclosure, the
trip command of the flexible protection function must be associated to the binary input code 2716 >
Starts Auto Reclose or 2715 >Starts Zero-Sequence Auto Reclose in the CFC. To utilise
an operating time, the pickup command of the flexible protection function must be associated to the
binary input code 2711 >External start of internal Auto reclose.
• PT Broken Wire Supervision (see the description in Blocking Function, Page 390).
• Inrush restraint:
Direct interaction with the inrush restraint is not possible. In order to block a flexible function by the
inrush restraint, the blocking must be carried out in CFC. The flexible function provides three binary
inputs for blocking trip commands selectively for each phase (no. 235.2115 to 235.2117). In order to
measure the inrush current, they must be associated with each selectable phase (1840 to 1842). The
activated inter-blocking function requires a logical combination between the selectable phase inrush indi-
cation and the binary inputs in order to block the trip command function (235.2114 >Function $00
BLOCK TRIP). The flexible protection function also requires a delay time of at least 20 ms to ensure that
the inrush restraint is picked up before the flexible protection function.
• All device logic:

The pickup signal of the flexible protection function can be attached to the normal protection pickup, and
the trip signal of the flexible protection function can be attached to the normal protection trip (see also
section 2.35 Synchronisation Function). All functions associated with regular protection pickup and trip
are applied to the flexible protection function as well.
After the pickup element returns, the trip signal of the flexible protection function is prevented for at
least the minimum duration of the trip command 210 TMin TRIP CMD.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The configuration of the device allows the user to specify the number of flexible protection functions to be
used (see section 2.1.1 Functional Scope). If a flexible protection function is set to not valid, all default values
for the setting and configuration associated with this function are deleted or reset.
The General dialog box in DIGSI provides the parameter FLEXIBLE FUNC.. It can be set to OFF, ON or Alarm
Only. In Alarm Only mode, the protection function does not open the fault logic, does not pick up Effective
indications or trip commands, and has no effect on the circuit breaker failure protection. If a flexible protec-
tion function is not desired, then it can be set to OFF.
In addition to this, the OPERRAT. MODE can also be set:
• 3-phase - this function calculates the values of a 3-phase measuring system, for example, the values of
the three phases in parallel. A typical example is the 3-phase DMT overcurrent protection.
• 1-phase - this function only calculates the value of a 1-phase measuring system. This can be the value
of a single phase (for example, UL2E) or the value of earth (Uen or In).
• If it is set to no reference, the calculation of measured values is independent of whether the current
and voltage are connected as one phase or three phases. Table 2-10 summarises the operating modes for
various characteristics.
Measured Values
In the MEAS. QUANTITY logic box, the user can select the measured value decided by the protection func-
tion. This measured value can be directly calculated or measured. The provided setting options depend on the
type of measured value, and are processed in the parameter Mode of Operation (see the following table).
Table 2-11 Parameters "Mode of Operation" and "Meas. Quantity"
Settings of Parameter OPERRAT. Setting Options of Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY

MODE
1-phase Current
3-phase Voltage
Active power forward
Active power reverse
Reactive power forward
Reactive power reverse
Power factor
dU/dt rising
dU/dt falling
Irrelevant Frequency
Rate of frequency change df/dt rising
Rate of frequency change (df/dt) falling
Binary input
Measurement Methods
The measurement methods listed in the following table can be used to measure current values, voltage values
and power. The table also explains the differences between the selection of the mode of operation and the
measured values, and which measurement methods are available.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
Table 2-12 Parameters in The "Measured Values" Dialogue Box, 3-Phase Operation
Measured Setting Options Note

Values
Current, Parameter MEAS.
Voltage METHOD
Setting options
Fundamental Only fundamental waves are calculated and harmonics are
suppressed. This is the standard measurement method for protection
functions.
Note: The voltage threshold value is set relative to the phase-to-
ground voltage, independent of the Voltage System parameter.
True RMS The true RMS value is measured. For example, the value of harmonics
is calculated. Used, for example, for simple overload protection imple-
mented based on current measurement when heating is caused by
harmonics.
Positive-sequence In order to implement certain applications, it may be necessary to use
component the positive-sequence component or the negative-sequence compo-
Negative-sequence nent as the measurement method. For example:
component
• I2 (trip monitoring)
Zero-sequence
• U2 (voltage asymmetry)
If the zero-sequence component is selected, additional zero-sequence
current or zero-sequence voltage functions can be implemented.
Current Ratio I2/I1 Calculates the ratio of negative-sequence current to positive-sequence
current
Voltage Parameter VOLTAGE
SYSTEM
Setting options
Phase-to-phase If the device is connected to a phase-to-ground voltage (see the
Phase-to-ground setting 213 VT Connection), the user can select whether the 3-
phase voltage function calculates phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase
voltages. If the phase-to-phase voltage is selected, these values are
calculated from the phase-to-ground voltage. This selection is impor-
tant, for example, for 1-phase faults. If the fault phase-to-ground
voltage drops to zero, the phase-to-ground voltage of the affected
fault phase is equal to zero, while the affected phase-to-phase voltage
drops to equal the phase-to-ground voltage.
If the phase-to-ground voltage is connected, the parameter is implicit.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
i 3-phase voltage protection using phase-to-phase voltage values (measured and calculated) provides a
phase selection pickup function, since the phase selection pickup message Custom 01 Pickup Lx is
assigned to the corresponding measured value channel Lx.
• 1-Phase fault:
For example, if the voltage UL1E drops and both voltages UL12 and UL31 are below their thresholds, the
device sends the messages Custom 01 Pickup Phase 1 and Custom 01 Pickup Phase 3
when this drop signal is detected in the first and third phase channels.
• 2-Phase fault:
For example, if the voltage UL12 drops below their thresholds, the device sends the message Custom
01 Pickup Phase 1 when this decrease signal is detected in the first phase channel.
Table 2-13 Parameters in the "Measured Values" Dialogue Box, 1-phase Operation
Measured Note
Values
Current Parameter MEAS.
Voltage METHOD
Setting options
Fundamental Only fundamental waves are calculated and harmonics are
suppressed. This is the standard measurement method for protection
functions.
True RMS The true RMS value is measured. For example, the value of harmonics
is calculated. For example, this program is used for simple overload
protection implemented based on current measurement when heating
is caused by harmonics.
Current Parameter CURRENT
Setting options
IL1 Determined by calculating the value of the current measurement
IL2 channel through the protection function.
IL3
IE
IEs
Voltage Parameter VOLTAGE
Setting options
UL12 Determined by calculating the value of the voltage measurement
UL23 channel through the protection function. When a phase-to-phase
UL31 voltage is selected, the threshold must be set to the phase-to-phase
voltage value; when a phase-to-ground voltage is selected, the
UL1E
threshold is the phase-to-ground voltage. The scope of the protection
UL2E function text depends on the primary diagram of the voltage trans-
UL3E former (see the addresses 213 VT Connection and 216 U4
Uen transformer).
P Forward Parameter POWER
P Reverse Setting options
Q Forward IL1 UL1E Determined by calculating (current and voltage) the value of the
Q Reverse IL2 UL2E power measurement channel through the protection function. If a
IL3 UL3E phase-to-ground voltage is connected (see the address code 213 VT
Connection), this parameter is hidden.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
NOTE
i In 1-phase voltage protection, the set voltage threshold is the voltage across the protection terminals. In
this case, the settings in 213 VT Connection (power system parameter 1) is ignored.
In the flexible protection function, all U, I, P, Q values are taken from the current and the busbar voltage on
one side.
The forward power values (forward active power and forward reactive power) are towards the line. The flex-
ible protection function ignores the parameters displaying the power symbol conversion in the operational
measured values (1108 P,Q sign).
The parameter PICKUP WITH selects whether this protection function picks up when the value is greater or
lower than the set threshold.
Setting
The pickup threshold, time delay and return factor of the flexible protection function are all set in the
"Settings" dialog box in DIGSI.
The pickup threshold of the protection function is set in the parameter P.U. THRESHOLD. The trip time delay
is set in the parameter T TRIP DELAY.
The pickup time delay is set in the parameter T PICKUP DELAY. If it is desired that this protection function
picks up as quickly as possible, in the practical application (default value), this parameter is usually set to zero.
Setting values other than zero are generally used in cases where false activation of fault recording due to tran-
sient disturbances are not desired. Such cases are used, for example, for line protection, or when this function
is not used for protection but for monitoring.
When set to a low power threshold, it must be noted that the power calculation requires at least 0.03 IN of
current. Otherwise, the power calculation is blocked by low current.
In the parameter BLOCKED BY FFM, the user can specify that the measured value is based on any of the
protection functions of the voltage measurement method (measured voltage value, forward active power,
reverse active power, forward reactive power, reverse reactive power and power factor). This protection func-
tion is blocked in case of a voltage measurement fault or loss of power.
The frequency return differential is set to a value lower than the parameter DO differential. Generally, its
default value of 0.02 Hz can be kept. Higher return differential must be used in weak areas with greater and
shorter frequency fluctuations to prevent information jumps.
In addition, the measured value of the frequency variation rate (df/dt) uses a fixed return differential.
Information Renaming and Configuration Check

After the flexible protection function has been set, the following additional steps must be performed:
• Open the configuration matrix in DIGSI.
• Rename the uncertain information text to fix the purpose.
• Check the configurations of the connection, operation and fault modules or set them according to the
requirements.
Additional Information
The following additional items must also be checked:
• Since it is not possible to distinguish between capacitive and inductive loads based on the power factor,
the sign of the reactive power can be used as an additional criterion.
2.44.3 Settings
This table shows predefined settings for specific regions. In the configuration column, the corresponding
secondary rated currents of the current transformers are indicated.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

0 FLEXIBLE FUNC. OFF OFF Flexible Function
ON
Alarm Only
0 OPERRAT. MODE 3-phase 3-phase Mode of Operation
1-phase
no reference
0 MEAS. QUANTITY Please select Please select Selection of Measured
Current Quantity
Voltage
P forward
P reverse
Q forward
Q reverse
Power factor
Frequency
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Binray input
dU/dt rising
dU/dt falling
0 MEAS. METHOD Fundamental Fundamental Selection of Measurement
True RMS Method
Positive seq.
Negative seq.
Zero sequence
Ratio I2/I1
0 PICKUP WITH Exceeding Exceeding Pickup with
Dropping below
0 CURRENT IL1 IL1 Current
IL2
IL3
IE
IE sensitive
IE2
0 VOLTAGE Please select Please select Voltage
UL1E
UL2E
UL3E
UL12
UL23
UL31
Uen
0 POWER IL1 UL1E IL1 UL1E Power
IL2 UL2E
IL3 UL3E
0 VOLTAGE SYSTEM Phase-Phase Phase-Phase Voltage System
Phase-Earth

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A 2.00 A Pickup Threshold
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A 10.00 A
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A 2.00 A Pickup Threshold
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A 10.00 A
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 0.003 .. 1.500 A 0.100 A Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 2.0 .. 460.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 51.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 0.10 .. 20.00 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 0.5 .. 10000.0 W 200.0 W Pickup Threshold
5A 2.5 .. 50000.0 W 1000.0 W
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 0.5 .. 10000.0 VAR 200.0 VAR Pickup Threshold
5A 2.5 .. 50000.0 VAR 1000.0 VAR
0 P.U. THRESHOLD -0.99 .. 0.99 0.50 Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 15 .. 100 % 20 % Pickup Threshold
0 T TRIP DELAY 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec Trip Time Delay
0 T PICKUP DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Time Delay
0 BLOCKED BY FFM NO YES Block in case of Meas.-
YES Voltage Loss
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 4 .. 100 V/s 60 V/s Pickup Threshold

Informa-
tion
235.2110 >BLOCK $00 SP
235.2111 >$00 instant. SP
235.2112 >$00 Delay TRIP SP
235.2113 >$00 BLK.TDly SP
235.2114 >$00 BLK.TRIP SP
235.2115 >$00 BL.TrpL1 SP
235.2116 >$00 BL.TrpL2 SP
235.2117 >$00 BL.TrpL3 SP
235.2118 $00 BLOCKED OUT
235.2119 $00 OFF OUT
235.2120 $00 ACTIVE OUT
235.2121 $00 picked up OUT
235.2122 $00 pickup L1 OUT
235.2123 $00 pickup L2 OUT
235.2124 $00 pickup L3 OUT
235.2125 $00 Time Out OUT
235.2126 $00 TRIP OUT
235.2128 $00 inval.set OUT

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
235.3000 $00 Fail I2/I1 OUT
236.2127 BLK. Flex.Fct. IntSP

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.45 CFC Function
2.45 CFC Function

The CFC function of this device provides four task modules with different priorities. Among them, PLC1_BEARB
[Slow PLC] and PLC_BEARB [Fast PLC] are scheduled by triggering, where the module tasks are executed once
instantaneously with an error of no more than 1ms whenever a bit change occurs in the input; MW_BEARB
[Measurement Processing] is cyclically scheduled every 600 ms; and SFS_BEARB [Interlock] is cyclically sched-
uled every 1200 ms.
2.45.1 DI_GET_GO_STATUS
Functions
The DI_GET_GO_STATUS function block is used to decode the status of GOOSE double-point signals.
This function block is connected to the left border of the CFC function diagram and is used to process the
GOOSE double-point signals and status.
Here, the structure of a GOOSE double-point signal at input X is divided into the numerical VALUE of the
double-point signal and the status information of the single-point signal.
• DB (Chatter Suppression)
• FG (Test Mode)
• NV (No Update)
[DI_GET_GO_STATUS, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-205 DI_GET_GO_STATUS Function Block
Table 2-14 I/O Assignment of DI_GET_GO_STATUS Function Block
I/O Assignment Name Data Type Comments Default Setting

Input X DIST Single-point infor- (0)
mation with status
Output DB BOOL Chatter ON 0
FG BOOL Test mode 0
NV BOOL No update 0
VALUE WORD Double-point signal 16#0000
2.45.2 SI_GET_GO_STATUS
Functions
The SI_GET_GO_STATUS function block is used to decode the status of GOOSE single-point signals.
This function block is connected to the left border of the CFC function diagram and is used to process the
GOOSE single-point signals and status.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.45 CFC Function
Here, the structure of a GOOSE single-point signal at input X is divided into the numerical VALUE of the single-
point signal and the status information of the single-point signal.
• DB (Chatter Suppression)
• FG (Test Mode)
• NV (No Update)
[SI_GET_GO_STATUS, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-206 SI_GET_GO_STATUS Function Block
Table 2-15 I/O Assignment of SI_GET_GO_STATUS Function Block

Input X DIST Single-point infor- (0)
mation with status
Output DB BOOL Chatter ON 0
FG BOOL Test mode 0
NV BOOL No update 0
VALUE WORD Single-point signal 16#0000
2.45.3 TIME_GET
Functions
The TIME_GET function block outputs the acquired exact clock of the device, including year, month, day, hour,
minute, and second.
[TIME_GET, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-207 TIME_GET Function Block

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.45 CFC Function
Table 2-16 I/O Assignment of TIME_GET Function Block

Output DAY REAL Day 0
HOUR REAL Hour 0
MINUTE REAL Minute 0
MONTH REAL Month 0
SECOND REAL Second 0
YEAR REAL Year 0
2.45.4 RISE_DETECT_NEW
Functions
The edge detecting function rise_detect_new outputs rising and falling edge pulse signals with hold time to
detect the rising and falling edge boundaries of the D-side input signal.
[RISE_DETECT_NEW, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-208 RISE_DETECT_NEW Function Block
NOTE
i This function block is connected to the left border of the CFC function diagram. It operates by default in
Measurement Processing (MW_BEARB), and also can operate in Interlock (SFS_BEARB), Slow PLC
(PLC1_REARB), and Fast PLC (PLC_REARB).
Table 2-17 I/O Configuration

Input D BOOL Edge detection (0)
signal
Output FALLING BOOL Low level output 0
RISING BOOL High level output 0
The hold time of the output pulse depends on the processing level and is about 600 ms in Measurement
Processing (MW_BEARB), about 150 ms in Interlock (SFS_BEARB) and about 800 ms in Slow PLC (PLC1_REARB)
and Fast PLC (PLC_REARB).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.46 Smart Wireless Temperature Monitoring
2.46.1 Smart Wireless Temperature Monitoring on the AIS Switchgear
NOTE
i This function is not applicable to A-C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E!
The temperature online monitoring function in the device supports distributed temperature monitoring
scheme and centralised temperature monitoring scheme:
• Distributed temperature monitoring scheme

The protection device of each bay switchgear is equipped with 1 wireless receiver, which can work with
up to 12 temperature sensors and 2 ambient temperature and humidity sensors in this bay. Its advantage
is the ability to sense and anticipate the faults in the switchgear in advance based on the real-time
current with a unique algorithm.
• Centralised temperature monitoring scheme

The incoming switchgear is equipped with 1 wireless receiver, and wireless temperature sensors are
selectively installed in important heavy load incoming switchgears according to the actual situation. It
can work with up to 60 temperature sensors and 10 ambient temperature and humidity sensors installed
in the 5 switchgears of this busbar. The wireless receiver in this scheme requires the use of an external
high gain antenna.
The installation positions of the temperature sensors are determined by the switchgear manufacturer.

Taking the distributed temperature measurement scheme as an example, the device can collect real-time
current and temperature data. The 4 matrix smart criteria unique to the device can work simultaneously. Once
1 of the criteria is triggered, the device sends a message indicating abnormal temperature at the corre-
sponding measurement point.
The 4 criteria are as following:
• Absolute threshold without current
• In-phase longitudinal criterion without current
• Absolute threshold criterion with compensated current
• Transverse criterion for the same installation position with compensated current
The 4 criteria provide a comprehensive matrix monitoring of the switchgear for the absolute temperature
rises/temperatures of individual measurement points, the longitudinal measurement points and the transverse
measurement points combined with the temperature rise after the current flows through.
Pre-alarm Function
The device contains a pre-alarm criterion and 4 unique smart criteria. When any criterion is met, the device
sends a message indicating abnormal temperature at the corresponding measurement point.
The pre-alarm criterion only compares the temperature of the current measurement point with the pre-alarm
threshold. If the temperature exceeds the threshold, a pre-alarm signal is sent.

This function is effective only when the parameter 165 OTM bay cnt is not set to 0, each bay sensor ID
number has been configured according to the actual situation, and the receiver has been properly connected
to the device communication port A (see 5.2.5 Connector Assignments and 3.2.1 Checking Data Connections
of Time Synchronization and Communication Interfaces for the definition and use of port A).
The current criterion is only effective for Bay 1, and the other bays only support the criterion without current.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
The current criterion can be enabled/disabled via the parameter 7815 Current Crit..
When a temperature sensor or receiver is offline, the device sends the message “Sensor offline alarm” for the
bay where the offline sensor is located; when a receiver is abnormal, the device sends the message “Receiver
fault”.
2.46.1.3 Settings

7801 Busbar L1 ID 180000000 .. 999999999 ; 0 Busbar phase L1 sensor ID
0
0
0
7804 Brk.up L1 ID 180000000 .. 999999999 ; 0 Breaker up position phase L1
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
7807 Brk.down L1 ID 180000000 .. 999999999 ; 0 Breaker down position phase L1
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
7810 Cable L1 ID 180000000 .. 999999999 ; 0 Cable phase L1 sensor ID
0
0
0
7813 Tem.&Hum.1ID 180000000 .. 999999999 ; 0 Env.Temperature and Humidity
0 sensor 1 ID
0 sensor 2 ID
7815 Current Crit. ON ON Current criteria
OFF
7818 Tem.Dlt.Alm.Th. 10 .. 150 °C 65 °C Temperature delta alarm
threshold
7819 Tem.Abs.Alm.Th. 10 .. 200 °C 105 °C Absolute temperature alarm
threshold
7835 T.Abs.PrAlm.Th. 10 .. 150 °C 85 °C Absolute temperature pre-alarm
threshold
0
0
0
0 sensor ID

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0
0
0
0 sensor 1 ID
0 sensor 2 ID
0
0
0
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0
0
0
0 sensor 1 ID
0 sensor 2 ID
0
0

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

0
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0
0
0
0 sensor 1 ID
0 sensor 2 ID
0
0
0
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0 sensor ID
0
0
0

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

0 sensor 1 ID
0 sensor 2 ID
NOTE
i 0 means not configured, and the device cannot get temperature information from this sensor.

Informa-
tion
615.4039 B1 Bus. L1 alm. OUT Bay1 busbar phase L1 alarm
615.4042 B1 CB u.L1 alm. OUT Bay1 breaker up position phase L1 alarm
615.4045 B1 CB d.L1 alm. OUT Bay1 breaker down position phaseL1 alarm
615.4048 B1 Cab.L1 alm. OUT Bay1 cable phase L1 alarm
615.4051 Bay1 Sen.Alm. OUT Bay1 sensor alarm
615.4057 B1 Bus. L1 T MVT Bay1 Busbar phase L1 temp.
615.4060 B1 CB u. L1 T MVT Bay1 Breaker up position phase L1 temp.
615.4063 B1 CB d. L1 T MVT Bay1 Breaker down position phaseL1 temp.
615.4066 B1 Cab. L1 T MVT Bay1 Cable phase L1 temp.
615.4069 Bay1 Env.Tem.1 MV Bay1 environment temperature 1
615.4070 Bay1 Env.Hum.1 MV Bay1 environment humidity 1
615.4073 Bay1 Bat.1 Alm OUT Bay1 battery1 alarm
615.4080 B1 Bus.L1 p.a. OUT Bay1 busbar ph L1 pre-alarm

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
615.4083 B1 CB u.L1 p.a. OUT Bay1 breaker up position ph L1 pre-alarm
615.4086 B1 CB d.L1 p.a. OUT Bay1 breaker down position L1 pre-alarm
615.4089 B1 Cab.L1 p.a. OUT Bay1 cable ph L1 pre-alarm
20323 B1 S1.Prealm. OUT Bay1 sensor 1 pre-alarm
20324 B1 Sen1.alm. OUT Bay1 sensor 1 alarm
20407 B1 Sen1.tem. MVT Bay1 sensor 1 temperature

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
20644 Env.Temp. MV Envirement temperature
20645 Recever Error OUT Recever Error

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
2.46.2 Smart Wireless Temperature Monitoring on the GIS Switchgear

The device supports temperature online monitoring for GIS. A GIS switchgear supports up to 12 temperature
sensors and 2 temperature and humidity sensors. The temperature sensors are fixed to the outcoming line of

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
the GIS switchgear. After reading the temperature value at each temperature measurement point, the device
can transmit the temperature value to SCADA via the protocol. When the temperature or temperature rise
exceeds the threshold, the device sends an alarm.
The measured values of online temperature monitoring can be found in 5.9 Measured Values.
2.46.2.2 Logic Diagram
[lo_GIS Wireless temperature measurement characteristic, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-209 Logic Diagram of Temperature Online Monitoring for GIS
Temperature rise at measurement point = Temperature at measurement point – Ambient temperature
NOTE
i If the parameter 366 3 phases system is set to NO, this function is suitable for 1-phase railway applica-
tions.
2.46.2.3 Settings

0 sensor 1 ID
0 sensor 2 ID
7818 Tem.Dlt.Alm.Th. 10 .. 150 °C 65 °C Temperature delta alarm
threshold
7819 Tem.Abs.Alm.Th. 10 .. 200 °C 105 °C Absolute temperature alarm
threshold
7835 T.Abs.PrAlm.Th. 10 .. 150 °C 85 °C Absolute temperature pre-alarm
threshold
7841 Sensor 1 ID 180000000 .. 999999999 ; 0 Temperature sensor 1 ID
0
0
0
0
0

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NOTE
i 0 means not configured, and the device cannot get temperature information from this sensor.

Informa-
tion
20644 Env.Temp. MV Environment temperature

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

Informa-
tion
20645 Recever Error OUT Recever Error

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.47 External RTD-BOX(ADAM Module 4015)
NOTE
i This function is not applicable to A-C/A-D/A-E/B-C/B-D/B-E/K-C/K-D/K-E!
2.47.1 Application Example
[sc_6 PT connection, 1, --_--]
Figure 2-210 6 PT100 Type Temperature Input
This function uses ADAM module to enable the temperature measurement of motor bearing and stator coil via
RTDs, so that users can monitor the changing motor temperature from the device and background in real
time. The temperature values sent from the ADAM module can be used to enable the temperature alarm func-
tion through the device CFC.
The external sensors communicate via ModBus through the RS485 bus extended from the temperature meas-
urement receiver of the device. The communication parameters of each sensor must be pre-set to 9600, 8, N,
1, and different physical addresses must be used. To ensure proper communication, the physical addresses of
the sensors must be consistent with the physical addresses configured for each external sensor in the DIGSI
configuration tool. When the sensor is not communicating with the device properly, the device sends a
connection interruption alarm. For the wiring diagram of external sensors, please refer to 3.2.1 Checking Data
Connections of Time Synchronization and Communication Interfaces.
In DIGSI Settings > Device Configuration, by setting the parameter 166 ADAM module cnt, you can
connect up to 2 ADAM modules. Each module can connect up to 6 RTD type temperature input, and the actual
temperature value (degrees Celsius) can be viewed on the device after the communication is properly estab-
lished.
The communication between the ADAM module and the device only supports serial modbus protocol, and can
only be conducted via the device communication module A port (see 5.2.5 Connector Assignments and
3.2.1 Checking Data Connections of Time Synchronization and Communication Interfaces for the definition
and use of the A port). When the communication between the ADAM module and the device is interrupted,
the signal 20605 ADAM module1 connection broken or 20606 ADAM module2 connection
broken is issued.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
In the following figure, you can select different temperature ranges by configuring the parameters CH0-CH5.
The temperature range set here is the temperature range that the device is able to display.
[ADAM_configuration interface, 1, en_GB]
Figure 2-211 Interface of ADAM Module Configuration Tool
When different resistances are connected, the actual temperature values corresponding to the corresponding
resistances can be obtained by selecting different temperature ranges.
Calculation
Taking PT100(385) -50-150 as an example, the range of the Modbus protocol value between the device and
the Adam module is defined as 0-65535, with 0 representing the minimum value of -50 and 65535 repre-
senting the maximum value of 150.
The calculation formula is: d = aview ⋅ L/65535 + Tmin. Where aview is the value displayed by Modbus, L is the
input range, d is the calculated value, and Tmin is the minimum temperature value.
For example: When the value displayed by Modbus is 26385, the corresponding temperature value is d =
26385 ⋅ 200 / 65535 + (-50) = 80.52 - 50 = 30.52 °C.
2.47.3 Settings
NOTE
i The ADAM module must be configured with the Adam-4000-5000 Utility software. The communication
address of the ADAM module can be set in the options in Settings -> General Device Settings. The
communication parameter of the ADAM module must be set to 9600, 8, N, 1, and the communication
address must match the device settings.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions

660 ADAM1 address 1 .. 199 1 ADAM module1 address
661 ADAM2 address 1 .. 199 2 ADAM module2 address

Informa-
tion
20605 ADAM1 Conn.Brk. OUT ADAM module1 connection broken
20606 ADAM2 Conn.Brk. OUT ADAM module2 connection broken

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Functions
2.48 Measurement Settings
2.48 Measurement Settings
Measurement Setup
The default units of power, electricity and current displayed in the device are determined according to the
rated values. However, in some cases, the actual operating load and current are very small, resulting in the
displayed units of power, kWh and current being too large or not accurate enough. Users can modify the
settings 8315 MeterResolution, 8316 PowerResolution and 8317 I Resolution according to the
actual load to make the displayed units and accuracy of power, electricity and current meet the requirements.
2.48.2 Settings

8315 MeterResolution Standard Standard Meter resolution
Factor 10
Factor 100
Factor 1000
8316 PowerResolution Standard Standard Power resolution
Factor 10
Factor 100
8317 I Resolution Standard Standard Current resolution
Factor 10

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3 Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections 422

3.2 Checking Connections 451
3.3 Checking Protection Data Interface 455
3.4 Commissioning 456
3.5 USB Disk Operation Functions 471
3.6 Final Preparation of the Device 475

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
! WARNING
Warning of improper transport, storage, installation or assembly of the device.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or serious material damage.
² Trouble-free and safe use of this device depends on proper transport, storage, installation, and
assembly of the device according to the warnings in this device manual.
² Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in a high-voltage
environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and international regulations). These
regulations must be observed.
3.1.1 Configuration Information
Prerequisites
For installation and connections the following conditions must be met:
The rated device data have been checked as recommended in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. It has been
verified that these data comply with the power system data.
General Diagrams
General diagrams for the 7SJ66 device range are shown in 5.2 Terminal Assignments. Connection examples
for current and voltage transformer circuits are provided in 5.3 Connection Examples. It must be checked that
the setting configuration of the Power System Data1 (see 2.1.4.2 Setting Notes) corresponds with the connec-
tions.
Binary Inputs and Outputs

The configuration options of the binary in- and outputs, i.e. the procedure for the individual adaptation to the
plant conditions, are described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The connections to the plant are
dependent on this configuration. The presettings of the device are listed in 5.6 Default Settings. Please also
check that the labeling strips on the front panel correspond to the configured message functions.
Changing Setting Groups

If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, please observe the following:
• Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups when four groups are to
be switched. One binary input must be set for >Setting Group Select Bit 0, the other input for >Setting
Group Select Bit 1. If either of these input functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not
controlled.
• For the control of 2 setting groups one binary input is sufficient, namely >Setting Group Select Bit 0,
since the non-assigned binary input >Setting Group Select Bit 1 is then regarded as not connected.
• The control signals must be permanently active so that the selected setting group is and remains active.
The following table shows the allocation of the binary inputs to the setting groups A to D and a simplified
connection diagram for the two binary inputs is illustrated in the following figure. The figure illustrates an
example in which both >Setting Group Select Bit 0 and >Setting Group Select Bit 1 are configured to be
controlled (actuated) when the associated binary input is energized (high).
Where:
• No = not energized or not connected
• Yes = energized

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table 3-1 Changing Setting Groups Using Binary Inputs
Binary Input Active Group

>Setting Group Select Bit 0 >Setting Group Select Bit 1
No No Group A
Yes No Group B
No Yes Group C
Yes Yes Group D
[lo_setting group switching via 2 binary inputs, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-1 Connection Diagram (example) for Setting Group Switching Using Binary Inputs
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications
3.1.2.1 General
Hardware modifications concerning, for instance, rated currents, the control voltage for binary inputs or termi-
nation of serial interfaces might be necessary. The following procedures in this section describe these hard-
ware modifications.
Auxiliary Voltage
There are different power supply voltage ranges for the auxiliary voltage available (refer to 5.1.1 Ordering
Information). The power supply ranges of the variants are DC 24 V/DC 48 V/DC 110 V/DC 220 V and AC 220 V.
To switch between different power supplies, there is no need to change the position of any jumper.
Live Status Contact

The status contact of the device is Closed normally. It will open when the device is operating.
Nominal Currents
The input transformers of the devices are set to a nominal current of 1 A or 5 A with jumpers. The assignment
of the plug-in jumpers to the nominal current and the spatial arrangement of the jumpers are described sepa-
rately in the following sections, respectively. See Section 3.1.2.6 Jumper Settings of PT/CT Board .
Jumpers of protection current transformers, X1, X2 and X3 must be set for the same rated current, i.e. there
must be one jumper for each input transformer, and the common jumper X 14. For IO7, the common jumper
is X7.
Jumpers of measuring current transformers, X5, X6 and X7 must be set for the same rated current, i.e. there
must be one jumper for each input transformer, and the common jumper X 14.
The 3-phase rated currents of the protection current transformer and the measurement current transformer
must be the same.
With standard 1A/5 A transformer jumper X4 for the ground path is set to 1 A or 5 A irrespective of other
jumper positions and depending on the ordered variant.
With models equipped with a sensitive ground fault current input of setting range 0.002 to 1.500 A, jumper
X4 is positioned as 1 A.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
NOTE
i If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be registered via the
parameters 205 CT SECONDARY / 218 IE-CT SEC in power system parameters (see Section
2.1.4.3 Setting).
Control Voltage for Binary Inputs

When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with a voltage that corre-
sponds to the rated DC voltage of the power supply. In general, to optimize the operation of the inputs, the
pickup voltage of the inputs should be set to most closely match the actual control voltage being used.
A jumper position must be changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The assignment of the
jumpers to the binary inputs and their spatial arrangement are described separately in the following sections.
Binary inputs of the device support AC 110 V/AC 220 V drive. Set 641 BI_Use_AC_Input to YES in General
Device Settings.
Contact Mode for Binary Outputs

Contact mode for binary outputs is normally open.
Terminating of Serial Interfaces

If the device is equipped with a serial RS485 interface, they can be terminated with resistors at the terminate
unit on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. For this purpose termination resistors are provided on the
PCB of the CPU processor module and on the RS485 interface module which can be connected via jumpers.
Here, only one option can be used.
Communication Board Jumper

As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched off. If the terminal resistor is needed, jump to the 120
ohm side.
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
The disposal of our products and possible recycling of their components after decommissioning
has to be carried out by an accredited recycling company, or the products/components must be
taken to applicable collection points. Such disposal activities must comply with all local laws,
guidelines and environmental specifications of the country in which the disposal is done.
3.1.2.2 Disassembly
Work on the Printed Circuit Boards
NOTE
i Before carrying out the following steps, make sure that the device is not operative.
! CAUTION
Caution when changing jumper settings that affect nominal values of the device
As a consequence, the ordering number (MLFB) and the ratings that are stated on the nameplate do
no longer match the actual device properties.
² If such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the device. Self adhe-
sive stickers are available that can be used as replacement nameplates.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
To perform work on the printed circuit boards, such as checking or moving switching elements or exchanging
modules, proceed as follows:
• Prepare working area. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject against damage from
electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed:
– screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip,
– a Philips screwdriver size 1,
– 5 mm socket or nut driver.
• Unfasten the screw-posts of the current terminal connectors on the back panel.
• Remove the four caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become accessible.
• Carefully take off the front cover.
Work on the Plug Connectors
! CAUTION
Mind electrostatic discharges
Non–observance can result in minor personal injury or material damage.
² When working on plug connectors, electrostatic discharges must be avoided by previously touching a
grounded metal part.
² Do not plug or withdraw interface connections under power!
Here, the following must be observed:
• Disconnect the ribbon cable between the front cover and the CPU board at the front cover side (board #1
in Figure 3-2).
• Disconnect the ribbon cables between the CPU unit and the input/output printed circuit boards I/O.
• Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD damage.
• Check the jumpers according to the following information. Change or remove the jumpers if necessary.
Module Arrangement
The following figures show the arrangement of the modules.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
[dw_front_one third, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-2 Front View of 1/3 Housing Device with Front Cover Removed (Simplified And Scaled Down)
[dw_front_one second, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-3 Front View of 1/3 Housing Device with Front Cover Removed (Simplified and Scaled Down)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
[dw_front_mini, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-4 Front View of Mini Housing Device with Front Cover Removed (Simplified and Scaled Down)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.1.2.3 CPU Board Jumper Settings
Device Processor Board M - CPU
[dw_CPU board, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-5 CPU Board
Power Supply
Table 3-2 Processor Board - CPU Board Jumper
Jumper During Normal Use

X1 2-3, Or Without Jumper
X2 2-3, Or Without Jumper
3.1.2.4 Power Supply Board Jumper Settings
110 V/220 V Power Supply Board

There are 2 types of power supply boards, one with operational circuit (operation box function) and the other
without.
Jumper is not required for power supply boards without operational circuit. The power supply itself can be
suitable for DC 110 V/DC 220 V or AC 110 V/AC 220 V.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
A power supply board with operational circuit is as follows:
[dw_PS board 1, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-6 Power Supply Board
The table of functions corresponding to its jumpers is as follows:
Table 3-3 Power Supply Board Jumpers with Operational Circuit
Jumper Power Supply BI Startup Voltage Power Supply BI Startup Voltage

DC 110 V 69 V DC 220 V 138 V
X1 L H
X4-X10 L H
When the X2 jumper jumps to the Y position, tripping position monitoring of the operational circuit is enabled.
24 V/48 V Power Supply Board

The 24 V/48 V power supply board itself can be suitable for DC 24 V/48 V input power supply, without
requiring jumper settings.
The 24 V/48 V power supply board has 4 output contacts and 9 input contacts. Jumpers can be set for these 9
input contacts based on different external input voltages. At the time of shipment, the action range of binary
inputs is set to 24 V "H".

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
The 24 V/48 V power supply board is as follows:
[dw_PS board 2, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-7 24 V/48 V Power Supply Board
The table of functions corresponding to its jumpers is as follows:
Table 3-4 24 V/48 V Power Supply Board Jumpers
Binary Input Jumper Power Supply BI Startup Power Supply BI Startup

Voltage Voltage
DC 24 V 17 V DC 48 V 34 V
BI1 X1 L H
BI2 X2 L H
BI3 X3 L H
BI4 X4 L H
BI5 X5 L H
BI6 X6 L H
BI7 X7 L H
BI8 X8 L H
BI9 X9 L H

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.1.2.5 Jumper Settings of Binary Input Board
[dw_IO board, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-8 Binary Input Board
Table 3-5 Jumper settings of startup voltages for binary inputs from BI1 to BI16
Binary Input Jumper DC 69 V Startup1 DC 138 V Startup2 DC 31.5 V Startup3

BI1 X1 L H H
BI2 X2 L H H
BI3 X3 L H H
BI4 X4 L H H
BI5 X5 L H H
BI6 X6 L H H
BI7 X7 L H H
BI8 X8 L H H
BI9 X9 L H H
1 When the binary input operating voltage of the device order number is DC 110 V.
3 When the binary input operating voltage of the device order number is DC 24/48 V (default: DC 48 V).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Binary Input Jumper DC 69 V Startup1 DC 138 V Startup2 DC 31.5 V Startup3

BI10 X10 L H H
BI11 X11 L H H
BI12 X12 L H H
BI13 X13 L H H
BI14 X14 L H H
BI15 X15 L H H
BI16 X16 L H H
NOTE
i X18 and X19 must jump to the default setting Def side.
When the 24/48 V device leaves the factory, BI is defaulted to 48 V. If 24 V input is used onsite, be sure to
jump the input jumper to L.
3.1.2.6 Jumper Settings of PT/CT Board
PT/CT Board Configuration
AC Board Model Device Selection (The 14th Digit of MLFB)

IO-1 L
IO-2 A,B,M
IO-3 D,J,K
IO-4 E
IO-5 F
IO-6 C,G,H
IO-7 N
3 When the binary input operating voltage of the device order number is DC 24/48 V (default: DC 48 V).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
PT/CT Board IO-1

The following picture illustrates the layout of the PT/CT Board IO-1.
[dw_IO1, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-9 Printed Circuit Board for PT/CT Board IO-1

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Table 3-6 Jumpers of Current Transformer
Jumper 1A 5A Remarks
Protection CT X1 to X9 1A 5A M1, M2 and M3 measurement points IL1/IL2/IL3 jumpers
X10 to X12 1A 5A CT-IX1/2/3 jumper when zero-sequence differential is
enabled
M4 measurement point IL1/IL2/IL3 jumper when zero-
sequence differential is disabled
X13 to X16 1A 5A Common jumper of M1, M2, M3 and M4
PT/CT Boards IO-2 and IO-3

The following picture illustrates the layout of the PT/CT Board IO-2 and IO-3.
[dw_IO2, 2, en_GB]

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
[dw_IO3, 1, en_GB]
Jumper 1A 5A Remarks
Protection CT X1-X3, X14 1A 5A IL1,IL2,IL3, X14 are
common jumpers
X4 1A 5A IE, zero-sequence CT
X8, X15 1A 5A Ix, X15 are common
jumpers
Measurement CT X5-X7 1A 5A IL1,IL2,IL3
The settings of jumpers X1, X2 and X3 must be same. That is, each jumper of CT must be in the same position.
The common jumper is X14.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
The secondary rated currents of the protection current transformer and the measurement current transformer
must be the same.
With models equipped with a sensitive ground fault current input of setting range 0.001 A to 1.600 A, jumper
X4 is positioned as 1 A.
Table 3-8 Jumpers of Voltage Transformer
Transformer Jumper Rated Rated Remarks

100 V 220 V
PT1-3 X11-X13 L H
PT4 Fixed rated 100 V

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
PT/CT Board IO-4

[dw_IO4, 1, en_GB]

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Transformer Jumper 1A 5A Remarks

Protection CT PCT1-3 X1-3, X15 1A 5A Ia,Ib,Ic,X15 are
common
jumpers
PCT4 X4 1A 5A Ie, zero-
sequence CT
Measurement CT MCT1-3 X5-X7 1A 5A Measurement
Ia,Ib,Ic
must be the same.

100 V 220 V
PT1-3 X11-X13 L H
PT5 X16 L H

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
PT/CT Board IO-5

[dw_IO5, 1, en_GB]

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022

Protection CT PCT1-3 X1-3, X15 1A 5A Ia,Ib,Ic,X15 are
common
jumpers
sequence CT
Ia,Ib,Ic
must be the same.

100 V 220 V
PT1-3 X11-X13 L H
PT5-7 X16-X18 L H

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
PT/CT Board IO-6

[dw_IO6, 1, --_--]

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022

Protection CT PCT1-3 X1-X3, X14 1A 5A Ia1,Ib1,Ic1,X14
are common
Jumper
PCT5-7 X8-X10, X15 1A 5A Ia2,Ib2,Ic2,X15
are common
Jumper
sequence CT
Ia,Ib,Ic
The settings of jumpers X8, X9 and X10 must be same. That is, each jumper of CT must be in the same posi-
tion. The common jumper is X15.
must be the same.

100 V 220 V
PT1-3 X11-X13 L H

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
PT/CT Board IO-7

[dw_IO7, 1, --_--]
Jumpers of each current transformer must be in the same positions (excluding zero-sequence CT). For zero-
sequence CT, jumper X4 is set to 1 A or 5 A depending on the order number, independent of other jumpers.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022

Protection CT PCT1-3 X1-X3, X7 1A 5A Busbars
Ia,Ib,Ic,X7 are
common
jumpers
PCT4 X4 1A 5A Busbar Ie, zero-
sequence CT
PCT5 X5,X8 1A 5A Lead-in 1CT
PCT6 X6,X9 1A 5A Lead-in 2CT

100 V 220 V
PT1-8 X10-X17 L H
3.1.2.7 Extension Board
[dw_9BI, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-16 Printed Circuit Board with Extended Input 9BI

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
[dw_5BO, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-17 Printed Circuit Board with Extended Output 5BO

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
[dw_6BI/3BO, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-18 Printed Circuit Board with Extended Input/Output 6BI/3BO

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
[dw_4BI/5BO, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-19 Printed Circuit Board 2 with Extended Input/Output 4BI/5BO
Table 3-17 Input Jumper
Jumper Input Voltage 110 V Input Voltage 220 V

Extended Input 9BI Board X1-X9 L H
Extended Input/Output 6BI/3BO X1-X6 L H
Board
Extended Input/Output 4BI/5BO X1-X4 L H
Board 2

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
[dw_BIO board, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-20 1/2 Housing BIO Board
Table 3-18 1/2 Housing BIO Board Input Jumper
Jumper Input Voltage 110 V Input Voltage 220 V

BIO Board X1-X12 L H
Table 3-19 1/2 Housing BIO Board Selection Jumper
Jumper BIO-1 BIO-2 BIO-3

X13 H L H
X14 L H H

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.1.2.8 Reassembly
To reassemble the device, execute the following steps:
• Insert each circuit board into the housing carefully.
• Use a flat cable to connect each plug-in. Do not bend any connecting pin! Do not use brute force!
• Push the plug-in connector of the flat cable between the processor CPU module and the front panel into
the slot on the front panel.
• Reinstall the front panel.
• Place the screw cover plate of the front panel properly.
• Tighten the retaining screws on the interfaces and terminals at the back of the device housing.
3.1.3 Mounting and Commissioning
3.1.3.1 Panel Flush Mounting

The device housing can be 1/3 and 1/2 19 inches with 4 securing holes.
• Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, to reveal the 4 elongated holes in the mounting
flange.
• Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten it with 4 screws. For dimensions refer to 4.48 Dimen-
sions.
• Put the 4 covers back in place.
• Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the panel using at least
one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of
any other control conductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at
least 2.5 mm2.
• Connections are realized via the plug or screw terminals on the rear side of the device according to the
circuit diagram.
[dw_embeded installation_one third rack, 2, en_GB]
Figure 3-21 Example of Panel Flush Mounting (Housing Size 1/3)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
[dw_embeded installation_one second rack, 2, en_GB]
Figure 3-22 Example of Panel Flush Mounting (Housing Size 1/2)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.2 Checking Connections
3.2.1 Checking Data Connections of Time Synchronization and Communication

Interfaces
Pin Assignments
The following figure illustrates the pin assignments of the communication interfaces and the time synchroni-
sation interface. You can find the position of the connections in the following figure.
[dw_comm_module_ports, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-23 Communication Interfaces
For definitions of pins, see 5.2.5 Connector Assignments.
External Sensor Connection

For the connection to the external sensor, see the following figure:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
[dw_ext_sensor_connection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-24 External Sensor Connection
3.2.2 Checking the System Connections
! WARNING
Warning of dangerous voltages
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial prop-
erty damage.
² Therefore, only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and
precautionary measures should perform the inspection steps.
Before the device is energized for the first time, it should be in the final operating environment for at least 2
hours to equalize the temperature, to minimize humidity and to avoid condensation. Connections are checked
with the device at its final location. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.
Proceed as follows in order to check the system connections:

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
• Protective switches for the power supply and the measured voltages must be opened.
• Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the system and connec-
tion diagrams:
– Are the current transformers grounded properly?
– Are the polarities of the current transformer the same?
– Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct?
– Are the voltage transformers grounded properly?
– Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct?
– Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformer correct?
– Is the polarity for current input Ι4 correct (if used)?
– Is the polarity for voltage input V4 correct (for example, for broken-delta winding or busbar voltage)?
• Check the functions of all test switches that are installed for the purposes of secondary testing and isola-
tion of the device. Of particular importance are “test switches” in current transformer circuits. Be sure
these switches short-circuit the current transformers when they are in the test mode.
• The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. This may be performed
with secondary test equipment or other test equipment for checking continuity. Make sure that terminal
continuity is not wrongly simulated in reverse direction via current transformers or their short-circuiters.
– Remove the front panel of the device
– Remove the ribbon cable connected to the I/O board with the measured current inputs (on the front
side it is the right printed circuit board). Furthermore, remove the printed circuit board so that there
is no more contact with the plug-in terminal of the housing.
– At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that receives current from
the CTs
– Firmly re-insert the I/O board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend any connector pins !
Do not use force !
– At the terminals of the device, again check continuity for each pair of terminals that receives current
from the CTs.
– Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
• Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5 A to 5 A for the
meter is appropriate.
• Switch on m.c.b. for auxiliary voltage (supply protection), check the voltage level and, if applicable, the
polarity of the voltage at the device terminals or at the connection modules.
• The current input should correspond to the power input in neutral position of the device. The measured
steady state current should be insignificant. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the
charging current of capacitors.
• Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches.
• Disconnect the measuring test equipment; restore the normal power supply connections.
• Apply voltage to the power supply.
• Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers.
• Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct.
• Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers and the power supply.
• Check the trip and close circuits to the power system circuit breakers.
• Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
• Check the signaling connections.
• Switch the mcb back on.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.3 Checking Protection Data Interface
3.3 Checking Protection Data Interface
NOTE
Data of protection communication interface card supported by this device is as follows:
Connector Type LC
Fibre Optic Type Single-Mode
Fibre Optic Wavelength 1310 nm
Allowable Channel Attenuation 16 dB
Maximum Transmission Distance 24 km
Checking Communication Topology

When both sides of the device are working, check the device, there should be no channel fault signal and
topology completed should be prompted.
If a channel fault signal occurs, check the event record of the device and pay attention to the following
signals:
Address Information Fault and Troubleshooting

18593 DT inconsistent Check if parameters 2640 and 2641 of this device
are identical
18594 DT inconsistent Check if parameters 2640 and 2641 of the 2
devices are consistent
18603 Equal IDs Check if parameter 2642 of the 2 devices is set the
same
Checking Communication Quality

Under Default Display > Menu > Measurement > Fibre Optic Communication Interface of the device, you
can see information such as the channel delay of the protection channel and the accurate code rate per
minute of the channel, etc.
The number of error messages received per minute and the number of messages lost per minute should stay
stable, and should approach 0 following a period time of observation.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
3.4 Commissioning
! WARNING
Warning of dangerous voltages when operating an electrical device
erty damage.
² Only qualified people shall work on and around this device. They must be thoroughly familiar with all
warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps,
safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
² Before making any connections, the device must be grounded at the protective conductor terminal.
² Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current transformers,
voltage transformers, and test circuits.
² Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been
removed (capacitors can still be charged).
² After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before re-energizing
the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firmly established before the device is
re-energized.
² The limit values given in Technical Data (Chapter 4) must not be exceeded, neither during testing nor
during commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are
connected and that the trip and close circuits to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are discon-
nected from the device.
! DANGER
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current transformers
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
² Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the device are
opened.
Switching operations have to be carried out during commissioning. A prerequisite for the prescribed tests is
that these switching operations can be executed without danger. They are accordingly not intended for opera-
tional checks.
! WARNING
Warning of dangers evolving from improper primary tests
erty damage.
² Primary tests are only allowed to be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules and regulations
(switching, grounding, etc.).

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
3.4.1 Test Mode and Transmission Block
Activation and Deactivation

If the device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA interface, then the information
that is transmitted can be influenced. This is only possible with some of the protocols available (see
5.7 Protocol-Dependent Functions).
If the test mode is switched on, the messages sent by a SIPROTEC 4 device to the main system has an addi-
tional test bit. This bit allows the messages to be recognized as resulting from testing and not from an actual
fault or power system event. Furthermore, it can be determined by activating the transmission block that no
annunciations at all are transmitted via the system interface during test mode.
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description describes in detail how to activate and deactivate test mode and blocked
data transmission. Note that when DIGSI is being used, the program must be in the online operating mode for
the test features to be used.
3.4.2 Testing the System (SCADA) Interface
If the device features a system interface and uses it to communicate with the control center, the DIGSI device
operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted correctly. This test option should however definitely
not be used while the device is in service on a live system.
! DANGER
Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) by means of the
test function
property damage.
² Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only
during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the test function
during “real” operation by transmitting or receiving messages via the system interface.
NOTE
i After termination of the test mode the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If
re-quired, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test.
The interface test is carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode:
• Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear.
• Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
• Double click on the generated information displayed in the list. Open the relevant information dialogue
box (see Figure 3-25).
Structure of Test Dialogue Box

In the column Indication the display texts of all indications are displayed which were allocated to the system
interface in the matrix. In the column SETPOINT Status the user has to define the value for the messages to
be tested. Depending on annunciation type, several input fields are offered (e.g. message ON / message OFF).
By clicking on one of the fields you can select the desired value from the pull-down menu.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
[sc_SCADA_with_dialogue_generating_message_eg, 1, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-25 System Interface Test with the Dialogue Box: Generated Annunciations - Example
Changing the Operating State

When clicking one of the buttons in the column Action for the first time, you will be prompted for the pass-
word no. 6 (for hardware test menus). After correct entry of the password, individual annunciations can be
initiated. To do so, click on the button Send on the corresponding line. The corresponding message is issued
and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC 4 device or from the substation control system.
As long as the window is open, further tests can be performed.
Test in Message Direction

For all information that is transmitted to the central station, test the options in the list which appears in
SETPOINT Status:
• Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any danger (see above and
refer to DANGER!)
• Click on Send in the function to be tested and check whether the transmitted information reaches the
central station and shows the desired reaction. Data which are normally linked via binary inputs (first
character “>”) are likewise indicated to the central power system with this procedure. The function of the
binary inputs itself is tested separately.
Exiting the Test Mode

To end the System Interface Test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service while the start-up routine
is executed. The dialog box closes.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
Test in Command Direction

The information transmitted in command direction must be indicated by the central station. Check whether
the reaction is correct.
3.4.3 Checking the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs
Prefacing Remarks
he binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in
DIGSI. uring commissioning this feature is used to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment
(operational checks).
! DANGER
Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) by means of the
test function
property damage.
² Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only
during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the test function
during real operation by transmitting or receiving messages via the system interface.
NOTE
i After finishing the hardware test, the device will make an initial startup. Thereby, all annunciation buffers
are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test.
The hardware test can be carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode:
• Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear.
• Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
• Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialog box of the same name opens (see
Figure 3-26).
Structure of Test Dialogue Box

The dialog box is classified into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output relays, and LED for lightemit-
ting diodes. On the left of each of these groups is an accordingly labeled button. By double-clicking a button,
information regarding the associated group can be shown or hidden.
In the column Status the present (physical) state of the hardware component is displayed. Indication is made
by symbols. The physical actual states of the binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed
switch symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol.
The opposite state of each element is displayed in the column Scheduled. The display is made in plain text.
The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware
components.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
[sc_checking_binary_input_&_output_eg, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-26 Test of the Binary Input and Output – Example
Changing the Operating State

If you want to change the status of the hardware part, click the corresponding button in the Scheduled
section.
Password (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first hardware modification is
allowed. After entry of the correct password a status change will be executed. Further status changes remain
possible while the dialog box is open.
Test of the Output Relays

Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between the output relay and the
plant, without having to generate the message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of
state for any one of the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device func-
tions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This means, that for example a TRIP command
coming from a protection function or a control command from the operator panel to an output relay cannot
be executed.
Proceed as follows in order to check the output relay:
• Ensure that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see above under
DANGER!).
• Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled-cell in the dialog box.
• Finish the testing (see Exiting the Test Mode, Page 461), so that during further testings no unwanted
switchings are initiated.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
Test of the Panel Output Drive

In order to test if the control wiring between all output relays of the protection device and the system is
correct, you can perform the corresponding output drive on the device panel. At the end of panel output
drive, the device restarts to reset all outputs. The password for output drive is the test / diagnosis password,
which is 000000 by default.
Before performing output drive, make sure that no dangerous situations occur after the relay outputs.
The menu path is as follows:
Main Menu > Test / Diagnosis > BO Action Test.
Test of the Binary Inputs

To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs the condition in the plant which initiates the binary
input must be generated and the response of the device checked.
To do so, the dialog box Hardware Test must again be opened to view the physical state of the binary inputs.
The password is not yet required.
Proceed as follows in order to check the binary inputs:
• Activate each of function in the system which causes a binary input to pick up.
• Check the reaction in the Status column of the dialog box. To do this, the dialog box must be updated.
The options may be found below under the margin heading Updating the Display.
• Finish the testing (see Exiting the Test Mode, Page 461").
If ,however, the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switching in the plant, it is
possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test function. As soon as the first state change of
any binary input is triggered and the password has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the
plant and can only be activated via the hardware test function.
LED Indicator Lamp Test

You can test the LED indicator lamp using the same method as other input / output elements. As soon as the
change of the initial status of any LED indicator lamp is triggered, all LED indicator lamps in internal device
functions are separated, and are only controlled by the hardware test function. This means that, for example,
the protection function or pressing the reset button of the LED indicator lamp does not make the LED indicator
lamp to illuminate again.
Updating the Display

During the opening of the dialog box, Hardware Test the operating states of the hardware components which
are current at this time are read in and displayed.
An update is made:
• for each hardware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully performed,
• for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked,
• for all hardware components with cyclical updating (cycle time is 20 seconds) if the Automatic Update
(20sec) field is marked.
Exiting the Test Mode

To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes unavailable for a brief
start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware components are returned to the operating conditions
determined by the plant settings.
3.4.4 Testing User-Defined Functions
CFC Logic
The device has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially with the CFC logic.
Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
Of course, general test procedures cannot be given. Configuration of these functions and the target conditions
must be actually known beforehand and tested. Possible interlocking conditions of switching devices (circuit
breakers, disconnectors, earth switch) are of particular importance. They must be considered and tested.
3.4.5 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing
≥ 10 % of Load Current
The connections of the current and voltage transformers are tested using primary quantities. Secondary load
current of at least 10 % of the nominal current of the device is necessary. The line is energized and will remain
in this state during the measurements.
With proper connections of the measuring circuits, none of the measured-values supervision elements in the
device should pick up. If an element detects a problem, the causes which provoked it may be viewed in the
Event Log. If current or voltage summation errors occur, then check the matching factors.
Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are asymmetrical conditions in
the network. If these asymmetrical conditions are normal service conditions, the corresponding monitoring
functions should be made less sensitive.
Current and Voltage Values

You can see the current and voltage values in the display area in the front of the device or through the oper-
ating interface of a PC. You can compare the measured values of primary and secondary quantities with the
standard power supply quantity.
If the measured values are incorrect, you must isolate the line and short-circuit the CT loop, and then check
and correct the connection. Then, you must repeat the measurement.
Phase Rotation
The phase rotation must correspond to the configured phase rotation, in general a clockwise phase rotation. If
the system has an anti-clockwise phase rotation, this must have been considered when the power system data
was set (address 209 PHASE SEQ.). If the phase rotation is incorrect, the alarm Failure: Phase
Sequence (address 171) is generated. The measured value phase allocation must be checked and corrected,
if required, after the line has been isolated and current transformers have been short-circuited. The measure-
ment must then be repeated.
Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker (PT mcb)

The PT mcb of the feeder (if used) must be opened. The measured voltages in the operational measured
values appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltages are of no consequence).
Check in the spontaneous annunciations that the VT mcb trip was entered (annunciation >Failure:
Feeder VT “ON” in the spontaneous annunciations). Beforehand it has to be assured that the position of the
VT mcb is connected to the device via a binary input.
Close the PT mcb again: The above messages appear under the spontaneous messages as “OFF”, i.e.
>Failure: Feeder VT “OFF”.
If one of the events does not appear, the connection and allocation of these signals must be checked.
If the ON-state and OFF–state are swapped, the contact type (H–active or L–active) must be checked and
remedied.
If a busbar voltage is used for input U4 (for voltage protection or synchrocheck) and the assigned PT mcb is
connected to the device, the following function must also be checked:
If the PT mcb is open the annunciation >FAIL: BUS VT “ON” appears, if it is closed the annunciation >FAIL:
BUS VT “OFF” is displayed.
Switch off the protected power line.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
3.4.6 Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme
(only if used)
Testing reverse interlocking is available if at least one of the binary inputs available is configured for this
purpose (e.g. presetting of binary input BI1 > BLK I>> andBLK IE>> to open circuit system). Tests can be
performed with phase currents or ground current. For ground current the corresponding ground current
setting values are provided.
The blocking function can either be configured for the pickup current connected (open circuit system) or the
pickup current missing (closed circuit system).
For open circuit system, the following tests are to be proceeded:
The feeder protection relays of all associated feeders must be in operation. At the beginning no auxiliary
voltage is fed to the reverse interlocking system.
A test current higher than the pickup values of I>> and Ip. As a result of the missing blocking signal, the protec-
tion function trips after (short) time delay I>> DELAY.
! CAUTION
Tests with currents that exceed more than 4 times the nominal device current
cause an overload of the input circuits.
² Perform test only for a short time (see 4.1 General). Afterwards the device has to cool off !
The additional voltage used for reverse interlocking is switched to the wire at this point. Repeat the previous
test, and the test result is the same.
Subsequently, at each of the protection devices of the feeders, a pickup is simulated. Meanwhile, another fault
is simulated for the protection function of the infeed, as described before. Tripping is performed within time
I> DELAY (longer time period) (with definite time overcurrent protection) or according to characteristic (with
inverse time overcurrent protection).
These tests also check the proper functioning of the wiring for reverse interlocking.
3.4.7 Direction Check with Load Current
≥ 10 % of Load Current
The correct connection of the current and voltage transformers is tested via the protected line using the load
current. For this purpose, connect the line. The load current the line carries must be at least 0.1 · ΙNom. The
load current should be in-phase or lagging the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive load). The direction of
the load current must be known. If there is any doubt, network or ring loops should be opened. The line
remains energized during the test.
The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured values. Initially the correlation of the
measured load direction with the actual direction of load flow is checked. In this case the normal situation is
assumed whereby the forward direction (measuring direction) extends from the busbar towards the line
P positive, if active power flows into the line,
P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar,
Q positive, if reactive power flows into the line,
Q negative, if reactive power flows toward the busbar.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
[dw_apparent_load_power, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-27 Apparent Load Power
All signs of powers may be inverted deliberately. Check whether polarity is inverted in address 1108 P,Q
sign of 2.1.7 Power System Data 2. In that case the signs for active and reactive power are inverse as well.
he power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured values have the correct
polarity. If both the active power and the reactive power have the wrong sign and 1108 P,Q sign is set to
not reversed, the polarity according to address 201 CT Starpoint must be checked and corrected..
However, power measurement itself is not able to detect all connection errors. For this reason, directional
messages should be generated by means of the directional overcurrent protection. Therefore, pickup thresh-
olds must be reduced so that the available load current causes a continuous pickup of the element. The direc-
tion reported in the messages, such as "phase A forward" or "phase B reverse" must correspond to the actual
power flow. Be careful that the “Forward” direction of the protective element is in the direction of the line (or
object to be protected). This is not necessarily identical with the direction of the normal the power flow. For all
3 phases, the directional messages to the power flow must be reported properly.
If all directions differ from each other, individual phases in current or voltage transformer connections are
interchanged, not connected properly or phase assignment is incorrect. After isolation of the line and short-
circuiting of the current transformers the connections must be checked and corrected. The measurements
must then be repeated.
Finally, switch off the protected power line.
NOTE
i Important! Make sure that pickup values that have been changed for testing are set back to the valid
settings!
3.4.8 Polarity Check for Voltage Input U4
Depending on the application of the voltage measuring input U4, a polarity check may be necessary. If no
measuring voltage is connected to this input, this subsection is irrelevant.
If input U4 is used for the measurement of the displacement voltage UEN (Power System Data 1 address216
U4 transformer = Udelta transf.), the polarity is checked together with the current measurement I4
(see further down).
Only Used for Synchronisation Characteristics in 7Sj686

If the input U4 is used for measuring a voltage for synchronism check (Power System Data 1, address 216 U4
transformer = Usy2 transf.), the following is to be observed:
• The single-phase voltage U2 needed for synchronization is to be connected to input U4.
• The polarity must be checked as follows using the synchronism check function.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
The device must be equipped with the synchronism and voltage check which is to be configured in address
161 SYNC function 1 = SYNCHROCHECK, or 162 SYNC function 2 = ASYN/SYNCHRON or SYNCHRO-
CHECK.
Voltage U2 needed for synchronization is to be set correctly in address 6123 CONNECTIONof U2.
A further aid for checking in the connection are the messages 170.2090 Sync. Udiff too large
(U2>U1), 170.2091 Sync. Udiff too large (U2<U1), 170.2094 Sync. alphadiff too large
(a2>a1), and 170.2095 Sync. alphadiff too large (a2<a1) in the spontaneous messages.
• Circuit breaker is open. The feeder is isolated (zero voltage). The PTmcb's of both voltage transformer
circuits must be closed.
• For the synchrocheck, the program Direct ON-Command is set to Yes (address 6110); the other
programs (addresses 6110). Other programs (addresses 6107 to 6109) are set to NO.
• Via binary input (170.0043>Synchronzation Request) initiate the measuring request. The synchronisation
check must release closing (message 170.0049 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command). If not, check
all relevant parameters again (synchrocheck configured and enabled correctly, see 2.1.1 Functional
Scope and 2.44 Flexible Protection Function).
• Set address 6110 Direct ON-Command to NO.
• Then the circuit breaker is closed while the line isolator is open (see Figure 3-28). Both voltage trans-
formers therefore measure the same voltage.
• Via binary input (170.0043>Synchronzation Request) initiate the measuring request. The synchronism
check must release closing (message 170.0049 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command).
• If not, first check whether one of the aforesaid messages 170.2090 Sync. Udiff too large
(U2>U1), 170.2091Sync. Udiff too large (U2<U1), 170.2094Sync. alphadiff too
large (a2>a1), or 170.2095Sync. alphadiff too large (a2<a1) is available in the sponta-
neous messages.
• For the synchrocheck the program SYNC U1>U2< is set to YES (address 6108) and SYNC function 1
is set to SYNCHROCHECK (address 161).
• Open the PT mcb of the busbar voltage.
• Via binary input (170.0043 >Sync. Request) initiate the measuring request. There is no close release.
If there is, the PT mcb for the busbar voltage is not allocated. Check whether this is the required state,
alternatively check the binary input >FAIL: BUS VT (6510).
• Close the PT mcb of the busbar voltage again.
• Open the circuit breaker.
• For the synchrocheck, the program SYNC U1<U2> is set to YES (address 6107) and SYNC U1>U2< is set
to NO (address 6108).
• Via binary input (170.0043 >Synchronzation Request) initiate the measuring request. The
synchronism check must release closing (message 170.0049 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command).
Otherwise check all voltage connections and the corresponding parameters again carefully as described
in 2.37 External Trip Protection.
• Open the PT mcb of the feeder voltage.
• Via binary input (170.0043 >Synchronzation Request) initiate the measuring request. No close
release is given.
• Close the PT mcb of the feeder voltage again.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
[dw_measuring_vol_of_sync_test, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-28 Measurement Voltages for Synchronisation Check
3.4.9 Earth Fault Check
Ungrounded System
The earth fault check is only necessary if the device is connected to an isolated or resonant-grounded system
and the earth fault detection is applied. The device must thus have been preset during configuration of the
device functions to sensitive Earth fault (address 131) not equal to Enabled
If none of this is the case, this section is not relevant.
The primary check serves to find out the correct polarity of the transformer connections for the determination
of the earth fault direction.
! DANGER
Energized equipment of the power system! Capacitive coupled voltages at disconnected equipment of the
power system !
property damage.
² Primary measurements must only be carried out on disconnected and grounded equipment of the
power system!
Using the primary earth fault method a most reliable test result is guaranteed. Therefore, proceed as follows:
• Isolate the line and ground it at both ends. The far end of the line must be open throughout the testing
process.
• Make a test connection between a single phase and ground. On overhead lines it can be connected
anywhere, however, it must be located behind the current transformers (looking from the busbar of the
feeder to be checked). Cables are grounded on the remote end (sealing end).
• Remove the protective grounding of the line.
• Connect a circuit breaker to the line end that is to be tested.
• Check the direction indication (LED if allocated)
• The faulty phase (1272 for phase A, 1273 for phase B or 1274 for phase C) and the direction of the line,
i.e. Sens E Forward (FNo 1276) must be indicated in the earth fault protocol.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
• The active and reactive components of the earth current are also indicated. The reactive current INsr,
702) is the most relevant for isolated systems. The active current INsa, 701) is the most relevant for
compensation systems. If the display shows the message Sens E Reverse (FNo. 1277), either the
current or voltage transformer terminals are swapped in the neutral path. If message Sens E undef.
(FNo 1278) appears, the ground current may be too low.
• De-energise and ground the line.

The test is then finished.
3.4.10 Polarity Check for Current Input IE
General
If the standard current wiring connection of the device is used with current input IE connected in the neutral
point of the set of current transformers (refer also to the connection circuit diagram in the 2.1.7 Power System
Data 2), then the correct polarity of the ground current path usually occurs automatically.
If, however, current IE is derived from a separate summation CT (see e.g. a connection circuit diagram in the
Appendix 2.1.7 Power System Data 2), an additional direction check with this current is necessary.
If the device is provided with the sensitive current input for IE and it is connected to in an isolated or resonant-
grounded system, the polarity check for IE was already carried out with the earth fault check according to the
previous section. Then this section can be ignored.
Otherwise the test is done with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load current. It must be noted that
during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with situations that may occur in practice, the non-
symmetry of measured values may cause the measured value monitoring to pick up. This must therefore be
ignored during such tests.
! DANGER
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current transformers
property damage.
² Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the device are
opened.
Directional Testing for Grounded Systems

The check can either be carried out with function DMT/IDMT E (address 116) or with the function Sens. E
Fault (address 131), which can be operated as additional fault protection.
In the following the check is described using the DMT/IDMT E function (address 116) as an example.
To generate a displacement voltage, the e–n winding of one phase in the voltage transformer set (e.g. phase
L1) is bypassed (see Figure 3-29). If no connection on the e–n windings of the voltage transformer is
provided, the corresponding phase is disconnected on the secondary side (see Figure 3-30). Only the current
of the transformer which is not provided with voltage in its voltage path is fed into the current path. If the line
carries resistive-inductive load, the protection is in principle subjected to the same conditions that exist during
a ground fault in line direction.
The directional ground fault protection must be configured to enabled and activated (address 116 or 131). Its
pickup threshold must be below the load current of the line; if necessary the pickup threshold must be
reduced. The parameters that have been changed, must be noted.
After switching the line on and off again, the direction indication must be checked: In the fault log the
messages Zero-Sequence Directional Overcurrent Startup and Ground forward must at least
be present. If the directional pickup is not present, either the earth current connection or the displacement
voltage connection is incorrect. If the wrong direction is indicated, either the direction of load flow is from the

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
line toward the busbar or the earth current path has a swapped polarity. In the latter case, the connection
must be rectified after the line has been isolated and the current transformers short-circuited.
If the pickup message is missing, the measured ground (residual) current or the displacement voltage
emerged may be too small. This can be checked via operational measured values.
Important! If parameters were changed for this test, they must be returned to their original state after
completion of the test !
[dw_polarity_check_1, 2, en_GB]
Figure 3-29 Polarity testing for IE, example with current transformers configured in a Holmgreen-connec-
tion (PTs with broken delta connection -- e-n winding)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
[dw_polarity_check_2, 2, en_GB]
Figure 3-30 Polarity testing for IN, example with current transformers configured in a Holmgreen-connec-
tion (PTs Wye-connected)
3.4.11 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices
Control by Local Command

If the configured operating devices were not switched sufficiently in the hardware test already described, all
configured switching devices must be switched on and off from the device via the integrated control element.
The feedback information of the circuit breaker position injected via binary inputs is read out at the device and
compared with the actual breaker position.
The switching procedure is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The switching authority must be
set according to the command source used. With the switch mode it is possible to select between interlocked
and non-interlocked switching. Note that non-interlocked switching constitutes a safety risk.
Control by Protective Functions

For OPEN-commands sent to the circuit breaker please take into consideration that if the internal or external
automatic reclosure function is used a TRIP-CLOSE test cycle is initiated.
! DANGER
A test cycle successfully started by the automatic reclosure function can lead to the closing of the
circuit breaker !
Non-observance of the following statement will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
² Be fully aware that OPEN-commands sent to the circuit breaker can result in a trip-close-trip event of
the circuit breaker by an external reclosing device.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.4 Commissioning
Control from a Remote Control Center

If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system interface, the corresponding switching tests
may also be checked from the substation. Consider that the switching authority is set in correspondence with
the source of commands used.
3.4.12 Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests
General
In order to be able to test the stability of the protection during switchon procedures also, switchon trials can
also be carried out at the end. Oscillographic records obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of
the protection.
Requirements
Apart from the capability of storing fault recordings via pickup of the protection function, the device also has
the capability of initiating a measured value recording via the operator program DIGSI, the serial interface or
binary input. For the latter, the information >Trigger Waveform Capture must be allocated to a binary input.
Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs, for instance, via the binary input when the protection
object is energized.
Those that are externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pickup) are processed by the device
as a normal oscillographic record. For each oscillographic record a fault record is created which is given its
individual number to ensure that assignment can be made properly. However, these recordings are not
displayed in the fault indication buffer, as they are not fault events.
Triggering Oscillographic Recording

To trigger test measurement recording with DIGSI, click on Test in the left part of the window. Double click
the entry Test Wave Form in the list of the window.
[sc_DIGSI_triggering_wave_recording, 1, 1, en_GB]
Figure 3-31 Starting oscillographic recording with DIGSI
Oscillographic recording is started immediately. During recording, a report is given in the left part of the status
bar. Bar segments additionally indicate the progress of the procedure.
The SIGRA or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse the oscillographic data.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.5 USB Disk Operation Functions

The operation parameters of the device can be read or updated via USB disk operation. Insert the USB disk into
the device panel, and then select different operation functions under Main Menu > Test / Diagnosis > stick
Operation. Note that the folder structure is overlapped, and the read or update device can only perform one
type of operation at a time.
1. Reading device operation data
This function saves the device operation data, parameter set PAR.psd, oscillographic fault records, and SRAM
mirror images SRAM.bin into the folder named by a CP number in the USB disk.
2. Reading device parameter configuration
This function saves the parameter set PAR.psd of the device into the folder named by a CP number in the USB
disk.
3. Updating device parameter configuration
This function updates the parameter set file PAR.PSD saved in the folder named by the device CP number in
the USB disk into the device. The device restarts after this operation is completed.
When reading psd. data from the USB disk, check the compatibility between the USB disk storage data P-set
Version and the device FW Version. Message read fails if the storage data P-set version is higher than the
device FW version, and succeed otherwise.
The method for obtaining the PAR.PSD path is as follows:
• Create a new device or select a device for which the parameters are to be updated in DIGSI.
• Right click Object Properties of the device, and select DIGSI Manager.
• Copy Path under DIGSI Manager, such as d: \Siemens\Digsi4\D4PROJ\7sj686\P7DI\GV\SD\00000091.
• Open the preceding path, click on the PARA folder, and PAR.PSD in this folder is the data required for
updating parameter configuration.
4. Updating device firmware version
This function updates the only firmware file *.pck saved under the root directory of the USB disk into the
device. The device restarts after this operation is completed. If there are 2 *.pck files under the root directory
of the USB disk, no upgrades are performed, and a message Firmware Update Failed appears on the
panel. This function also supports download of PDI card firmware program, using the same processing
method.
For firmware version V04.72 and lower, place the *.pck file into the folder named by a CP number.
*.pck can be obtained from the FW installation path of the device.
5. Changing device MLFB
This function saves the update file MLFB.bin saved in the folder named by the CP number in the USB disk into
the device. The device restarts after this operation is completed.
• Provide the complete order number MLFB of the original device (such as: 7SJ6865-6AW90-0FF1-L0X) and
the serial number (such as: CP1209000334). This information can be obtained from the nameplate at the
side of the device or through the menu on the LCD: MENU button > Property > MLFB/Version.
• Send the preceding information to the SPA after-sales service department and advise the reason for
change.
• You receive an mlfb.bin file once the information is verified and approved.
• Store the file in the USB disk, which has the following directory structure:
– X: \CP1209000334\XXXX.XXX
– \CP1209000335\XXXX.XXX
– \CP1209000347\XXXX.XXX
– \CP1209007339\XXX.XXX

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
• When the device is powered up, insert the USB disk into the USB port on the front panel of the device.
a. When the device is in normal working state, select Test / Diagnosis > USB Disk Operation >
ChangeMLFB. Press the OK button and enter your password. At this point, the device panel displays: "In
operate, no pull. Please wait…" and then prompt "Operation success continue". Press
the OK button again, and "Device restart continue" is prompted. Press the OK button again, and the
device restarts. After approximately 1 minute, the device enters the monitor state, and the fault lamp illu-
minates in red. At this point, the MLFB number has been changed successfully. You can use the menu on
the LCD: monitor\property\(MLFB/Version) to confirm if the MLFB number is the MLFB number
changed.
b. When the device is in MONITOR state, select menu: USB\Download MLFB. Press the OK button, the
device prompts "In operation please wait…," and then prompt "Operation success continue". Press the OK
button again, "Device restart continue" is prompted. Press the OK button again, the device restarts. If the
device is still in the monitor state after approximately 1 minute, the fault lamp illuminates. At this point,
the MLFB number has been changed successfully. You can use the menu on the LCD: monitor\property\
(MLFB/Version) to confirm if the MLFB number is the MLFB number changed.
• Power off the device, and change the printed circuit board installed.
• When the device is powered on again, download the DIGSI configuration that matches the new order
number.
6. Import process data from USB disk into DIGSI
This function allows you to read device process data saved in the USB disk within DIGSI. When imported
successfully, you can open and view device information offline.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
• The process data can be obtained by operating Get Process Data on the device panel via the USB disk.
The save path is: Folder named by CP number\DEVICE\FEATURES.SFP.
• Launch DIGSI, right click in the blank area to pop up the menu, select Import process data, and the
dialogue box for searching process data file pops up.
[sc_menu_options, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-32 Menu Options
[sc_search_for_process_data, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-33 Searching Process Data File
• Select the folder named by CP number, click Search to automatically find process data, as shown in the
figure. Click OK to confirm that the import is successful.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
[sc_choose_filefolder, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-34 Selecting Folder

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
3.6 Final Preparation of the Device
3.6 Final Preparation of the Device

Firmly tighten all screws.
! CAUTION
Do not tighten the limit device
Failure to observe the following measures may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
² Do not tighten the limit device, otherwise the terminal block may be damaged!
The settings values should be checked again, if they were changed during the tests. Check if protection,
control and auxiliary functions to be found with the configuration parameters are set correctly (2.1.1 Func-
tional Scope, Functional Scope). All desired elements and functions must be set to Enabled. Keep a copy of
all settings on a PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set or synchronize the clock if the element is not automati-
cally synchronized. For assistance, refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
The annunciation buffers are deleted under Main Menu > Record > Set/Reset, so that future information will
only apply for actual events and states (see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description). The counters in the
switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing (see also SIPROTEC 4
System Description).
Reset the counters of the operational measured values (e.g. operation counter, if available) under Main Menu
> Record > Set/Reset (see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description).
Press the ESC key (several times if necessary) to return to the default display. The default display appears in
the display box (e.g. the display of operational measured values).
Clear the LEDs on the front panel of the device by pressing the LED key, so that they show only real events and
states in the future. In this context, also output relays probably memorized are reset. Pressing the LED key also
serves as a test for the LEDs on the front panel because they should all light when the button is pushed. Any
LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual conditions.
The green “RUN” LED must light up, whereas the red “ERROR” must not light up.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
4 Technical Data
This chapter describes the technical data and functions of the device, including those limit values that may not
be exceeded under any circumstances. After describing all electrical parameters and functional parameters of
the protection device, it further discusses its mechanical data and overall dimension drawing.
4.1 General 479
4.2 Directional Phase Overcurrent 490
4.3 Directional Earth Overcurrent 493
4.4 Displacement Voltage Protection 496
4.5 Overload Protection 497
4.6 Differential Protection 498
4.7 Current Comparison Protection 502
4.8 Vector Line Differential Protection 503
4.9 Magnetic Balance Overcurrent Protection 504
4.10 Restricted Earth Fault Protection 505
4.11 Low Frequency Load Shedding 506
4.12 Low Voltage Load Shedding 507
4.13 Inrush Restraint 508
4.14 Accelerate Overcurrent Protection 509
4.15 Earth Overcurrent Surge Arrester 511
4.16 Sensitive Earth fault 512
4.17 Overexcitation Protection (U/f) 513
4.18 Pole Discrepancy Detection 514
4.19 Earth Overcurrent Low V Side 515
4.20 Synchronisation Function 516
4.21 Auto Reclose Function 517
4.22 FC Circuit Operate Blocking 518
4.23 External Trip Protection 519
4.24 ARC Protection 520
4.25 Switch onto Fault Overcurrent Protection 522
4.26 Definite-Time Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) 524
4.27 Inverse-Time Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) 525
4.28 Startup Supervision of Motors 527
4.29 Motor Restart Inhibit 529
4.30 Load Jam Protection 530
4.31 Thermal Overload Protection 531
4.32 Undercurrent Protection of Motor 533

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.33 Capacitor Current Diff Protection 534

4.34 Capacitor Voltage Diff Protection 535
4.35 Capacitor Current Unbalance Protection 536
4.36 Capacitor Voltage Unbalance Protection 537
4.37 Reverse-Power Protection 538
4.38 Under/Overvoltage Protection 539
4.39 Breaker Failure Protection 540
4.40 Automatic Transfer System 541
4.41 Flexible Protection Function 542
4.42 Monitoring Functions 545
4.43 Voltage Supervision 546
4.44 CFC Function 547
4.45 Additional Functions 552
4.46 Operating Ranges of Protection Functions 556
4.47 Switching Device Control 558
4.48 Dimensions 559

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General
4.1 General
4.1.1 Analog Inputs
Current Inputs (CT)
Rated frequency fN 50 Hz
Rated current IN 5 A or 1 A (adjusted via jumper)
Earth current (sensitive) Ins ≤ linear range 1.6 A
Load of each phase of protection CT
- Inom = 1 A Approximately 0.02 VA
- Sensitive earth fault detection at 1.6 A Approximately 0.1 VA
Load of each phase of measurement CT
Current overload capacity
- Protection CT thermal stability (root-mean-square value) 100 times Inom 1 s
4 times Inom continuous operation
- Measurement CT thermal stability (root-mean-square 20 times Inom 1 s

value) 3 times Inom continuous operation
150 A 1 s
- Sensitive CT thermal stability (root-mean-square value) 6 A continuous operation
Voltage Inputs (VT)
Rated phase-to-ground voltage AC 100 V or AC 220 V (adjusted via jumper)

Range of measured phase-to-ground voltage
- AC 100 V AC 1 V to AC 190 V
- AC 220 V AC 2 V to AC 292 V
Range of measured zero-sequence voltage
- Zero-sequence VT AC 1 V to AC 292 V
At AC 100 V load per phase Approximately 0.15 VA
AC voltage input overload capacity AC 300 V continuous
4.1.2 Device Power Supply
Power supplied by
internal power source
module
Rated input voltage DC 24 V/48 V, DC 110 V/220 V or AC 110 V/220 V
UAux
Permissible voltage DC 19 V to DC 56 V, DC 88 V to DC 253 V or AC 88 V to AC 253 V
range
DC power supply ripple < 15 % rated voltage
peak value

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General
Input power Static Excitation status

1/3 housing <6W <7W
1/2 housing <9W < 10 W
Fault/short circuit transition time ≤ 100 ms when U ≥ DC 110 V
≤ 300 ms when U ≥ DC 220 V
≤ 50 ms when U ≥ DC 24 V
≤ 200 ms when U ≥ DC 48 V
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Binary Inputs (1/3 Housing Binary Input)
Number of binary inputs

7SJ686 device body 16
Power supply board with operation box 3
Type D extension board 9
Type F extension board 6
Type H extension board 4
Range of rated operating voltage DC 110 V or DC 220 V (adjusted via jumper), unipolarity
AC 110 V or AC 220 V
DC 24 V or DC 48 V (adjusted via jumper), unipolarity
Current consumption (voltage independent) < 1.9 mA at DC 110 V or DC 220 V
< 4.6 mA at DC 24 V or DC 48 V
Pickup/Dropout time Approximately 2 ms (DC input)
Pickup voltage DC 110 V Approximately DC 69 V
DC 220 V Approximately DC 132 V
AC 220 V Approximately AC 165 V
DC 24 V Approximately DC 15.5 V
Maximum permissible voltage AC 250 V (DC 110 V/220 V)
DC 58 V (DC 24 V/48 V)
Binary Inputs (1/2 Housing Binary Input)

7SJ686 device body 36
Type D extension board 9
Type F extension board 6
Type H extension board 4
Current consumption (voltage independent) < 1.9 mA at DC 110 V or DC 220 V
< 4.6 mA at DC 24 V or DC 48 V
Pickup/Dropout time Approximately 2 ms (DC input)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General

Maximum permissible voltage AC 250 V (DC 110 V/220 V)
DC 58 V (DC 24 V/48 V)
MINI Housing Binary Inputs

7SJ686 device body (7SJ686-*-C) 6
7SJ686 device body (7SJ686-*-D) 9
7SJ686 device body (7SJ686-*-E) 9
Current consumption DC 110 V Approximately 2 mA
DC 24 V Approximately 4 mA
DC 48 V Approximately 6 mA
Pickup/Dropout time DC 110 V Approximately 2 ms
DC 24 V Approximately 3 ms
DC 48 V Approximately 3 ms
Maximum permissible voltage AC 250 V (110 V/220 V power supply board)
DC 58 V (24 V/48 V power supply board)
Binary Outputs (1/3 Housing Binary Output)
Number of binary outputs

7SJ686 device body 1 normally closed alarm contact
6 normally open contacts
1 normally open, normally closed contact
Type E extension board 5 normally open contacts
Type F extension board 2 normally open contacts
Type H extension board 1 normally open/normally closed contact
Closing capacity (MAKE) 1000 W/VA
Tripping capacity (BREAK) 30 VA or 40 W or 30 W
When L/R ≤ 40 ms (IEC60255-1)
Switching voltage DC/AC 250 V
Admissible current per contact (continuous) 5A
Admissible current per contact (close and hold) 30 A for 0.5 s (for normally open contact)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General
Total current on common path 5 A continuous, 30 A for 0.5 s

Response time Approximately 8 ms
Binary Outputs (1/2 Housing Binary Output)

7SJ686 device body 21 normally open contacts
3 normally open, normally closed contacts (one of them is
used as alarm contact)
Type E extension board 5 normally open contacts
Type F extension board 2 normally open contacts
1 normally open/normally closed contact
Type H extension board 5 normally open contacts
When L/R ≤ 40 ms (IEC60255-1)
MINI Housing Binary Outputs

7SJ686 device body (7SJ686-*-C) 8 normally open contacts
1 normally open/normally closed contact (alarm contact)
7SJ686 device body (7SJ686-*-D) 6 normally open contacts
7SJ686 device body (7SJ686-*-E) 4 normally open contacts
1 normally closed contact (alarm contact)
When L/R ≤ 40 ms (IEC60255-1)
4.1.4 Analog Input/Output
Analog Input AI
Type B extension board 4 paths of 0 mA DC to 22 mA DC, maximum permissible input current is

100 mA
Accuracy 0.2 %⋅20 mA
Internal resistance 120 Ohm
Insulation withstand voltage AC 500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General
Analog Output AO
Type C extension board 2 paths of 0 mA DC to 24 mA DC

Accuracy 0.2 %⋅20 mA
Maximum load 350 Ohm
4.1.5 Operational Circuit
Operational Circuit DC
This operational circuit is suitable for single-trip-coil circuit breakers of 110 kV or lower voltage
Operating voltage DC 110 V or DC 220 V (adjusted via jumper)
Close/trip circuit self-hold current 0.3 A to 4 A adaptive
Input signal Manual trip signal
Protection trip signal
Manual close signal
Protection close signal
Output signal Close signal HWJ

Open signal TWJ
Post-close signal HHJ
Operational circuit abnormal (internal signal)
Fault signal (internal signal)
Operational Circuit AC
This operational circuit is suitable for single-trip-coil circuit breakers of 110 kV or lower voltage
Operating voltage AC 220 V
Close/trip circuit self-hold current 0.3 A to 4 A adaptive
Input signal Manual trip signal
Protection trip signal
Manual close signal
Protection close signal
Output signal Close signal HWJ

Open signal TWJ
Operational circuit abnormal (internal signal)
4.1.6 Communication Interfaces
Front Panel Configuration Interface
Interface type Front side, non-isolated, USB 2.0, Type A port

Connection method Via PC installed with DIGSI4 or USB disk
Maximum transmission distance 5m

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General
Rear GPS Interface
Interface type Port A, RJ45 port, IRIG-B

Interface mode RS485 or TTL (adjusted via jumper, default value is
RS485)
Rear Extension Port
Interface type Port A, RJ45 port, RS485

Baud rate 9600 bps
Rear System Interface
RS485 Interface type Port B, RJ45 port

Supports Modbus, Port C, RJ45 port
IEC60870-5-103, DIGSI4 Interface mode RS485
Transmission speed Min. 300 Bd, max. 57 600 Bd;
Default setting 19 200 Bd
Maximum transmission 1 km
distance
Ethernet Interface type Port B, RJ45 port
Supports Modbus, IEC61850, Port C, RJ45 port
IEC60870-5-103, DIGSI4 Port D, RJ45 port
100BaseT acc. to IEEE802.3
Transmission speed 100 Mbit/s
Maximum transmission 100 m
distance
Ethernet optical interface Interface type Port B, LC optical interface
Supports Modbus, IEC61850, Port C, LC optical interface
IEC60870-5-103, DIGSI4 100BaseF acc. to IEEE802.3
Optical wavelength 1300 nm
Transmission speed 100 Mbit/s
Maximum transmission 1500 m
distance
Protection Communication Interface (PDI)
Connector type LC
Fibre optic type Single-mode
Fibre optic wavelength 1310 nm
Allowable channel attenuation 16 dB
Maximum transmission distance 24 km

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General
4.1.7 Electrical Tests
Product Standards
Standards IEC 60255; GB/T14598; DL/T478
Insulation Resistance Test (Conventional Test)
Standard GB/T14598.27
> 100 MΩ DC 500 V All circuits
Dielectric Voltage Test (Conventional Test)
2.0 kV (AC RMS), 50 Hz, 1 min Binary input, binary output, PT, CT, power supply, operational circuit
2.8 kV DC, 1 min Binary input, binary output, PT, CT, power supply, operational circuit
2.0 kV (AC RMS), 50 Hz, 1 min Test voltage between power supply and SELV/PELV
500 V (AC RMS), 50 Hz, 1 min For isolated communication interface, GPS interface, analog input and
analog output only
Impulse Voltage Test (Type Test)
5 kV; 1.2/50 us Binary input, binary output, PT, CT, power supply, operational circuit
Test voltage between power supply and weak current
1.0 kV; 1.2/50 us Isolated communication interface, GPS interface, analog input and output
ports
Enclosure Port Radiated Emission Test (Type Test)
Standard CISPR 11
40 dB (uV/m) 30 MHz to 230 MHz, quasi-peak value (at 10 m)
Auxiliary Power Supply Port Conducted Emission Test (Type Test)
Standard CISPR 22
79 dB (uV/m) 0.15 MHz to 0.50 MHz, quasi-peak value
66 dB (uV/m) 0.15 MHz to 0.50 MHz, average value
73 dB (uV/m) 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz, quasi-peak value
60 dB (uV/m) 0.5 MHz to 30MHz, average value
Radiated Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 17626.3 (IEC 61000-4-3)

Sweep frequency Frequency sweep range: 80 to 1000 MHz, 1400 to 2700 MHz;
10 V/m (level 3) Amplitude modulation: 80 % AM (1 kHz);
Step ≤ 1 %
Spot frequency Frequency spot range: 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 380 MHz, 450 MHz, 900 MHz,
10 V/m (level 3) 1850 MHz, 2150 MHz;
Amplitude modulation: 80 % AM (1 kHz);
Duty cycle: 100 %

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 17626.2 (IEC 61000-4-2)

8 kV (level 4) Contact discharge
15 kV (level 4) Air discharge
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Test (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 17626.8 (IEC 61000-4-8)

100 A/m (level 5) Continuous
1000 A/m (level 5) 1 s to 3 s
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity Test (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 17626.9 (IEC 61000-4-9)

1000 A/m (level 5) tr/th: 8/20 us
Damped Oscillatory Magnetic Field Immunity Test (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 17626.10 (IEC 61000-4-10)

100 A/m (level 5) 1 MHz/0.1 MHz
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio-Frequency Fields (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 17626.6 (IEC 61000-4-6)

Sweep frequency Frequency sweep range: 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz;
10 V/m (level 3) Impedance: 150 Ω;
Amplitude modulation: 80 % AM;
Step ≤ 1 %
Auxiliary power supply, communication port, binary input, binary output
and functional earth ports
Spot frequency Test frequencies: 27 MHz, 68 MHz;
10 V/m (level 3) Source impedance: 150 Ω;
Amplitude modulation: 80 % AM;
Duty cycle: 100 %
Fast Transient Immunity Test (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 17626.4 (IEC 61000-4-4)

Repetition frequency: 5 kHz
tr/th: 5/50 ns
4 kV (level 4) Power supply, binary input, binary output, PT, CT, operational circuit, analog
input and output circuits
2 kV (level 4) Communication port
Slow Damped Oscillatory Wave Immunity Test (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 17626.18 (IEC 61000-4-18)

Voltage oscillation frequency: 1 MHz, 100 kHz
Voltage rise time: 75 ns
Repetition frequency: 1 MHz/400 Hz; 100 kHz/40 Hz
Output impedance: 200 Ω

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General
Difference mode: 1 kV, Power supply, binary input, binary output, PT, CT, operational circuit,
common mode: 2.5 kV (level 3) analog input and output circuits
Difference mode: 0 kV, Communication port
common mode: 1 kV
Surge Immunity Test (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 17626.5 (IEC 61000-4-5)

Wave front time / time to half value: 1.2/50 (8/20) us voltage (current)
Source impedance: 2 Ω
Line to line: 2 kV (level 4) Auxiliary power supply, coupling resistance: 0 Ω; coupling capacitance: 18
uF
Binary input, binary output, PT, CT, operational circuit, analog input and
output circuits, coupling resistance: 40 Ω; coupling capacitance: 0.5 uF
Line to ground: 4 kV (level 4) Auxiliary power supply, coupling resistance: 10 Ω; coupling capacitance: 9
uF
Binary input, binary output, PT, CT, operational circuit, analog input and
output circuits, coupling resistance: 40 Ω; coupling capacitance: 0.5 uF
Line to ground: 4 kV (level 4) Communication port shield earth, coupling resistance: 0 Ω; coupling capac-
itance: 0 uF
Binary Input Power Frequency Immunity Test (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 14598.26

Difference mode voltage: 150 V Coupling resistance: 100 Ω; coupling capacitance: 0.1 uF
Common mode voltage: 300 V Coupling resistance: 220 Ω; coupling capacitance: 0.47 uF
DC Voltage Dip Test (Type Test)
Standard GB/T 17626.11 (IEC 61000-4-11)

100 ms/DC 110 V 1/3 basic device
300 ms/DC 220 V
50 ms/DC 24 V
200 ms/DC 48 V
100 ms/DC 110 V 1/2 basic device
200 ms/DC 220 V
50 ms/DC 24 V
200 ms/DC 48 V
Protection Degrees
Standard GB/T 4208 (IEC 60529)

Front + side IP51
Rear IP20

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General
4.1.8 Mechanical Vibration Tests
Vibration, Shock and Bump
Standard: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068

Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2; Vibration response: Vibration frequency range: 10 to 150Hz, cross-
IEC 60068-2-6 over frequency is 60Hz, sweep frequency: 1 octave/min, the
displacement amplitude is 0.075mm below crossover frequency and
is 1g acceleration above crossover frequency; 20 cycles along 3
orthogonal axes
Vibration durability: Vibration frequency range: 10 to 150 Hz, sweep
frequency: 1 octave/min, 2 g acceleration; 20 cycles along 3 orthog-
onal axes
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; Shock response: 5 g acceleration, pulse duration 11 ms; 3 shocks on
IEC 60068-2-27 each of the 3 orthogonal axes
Shock durability: 15 g acceleration, pulse duration 11 ms; 3 shocks
on each of the 3 orthogonal axes
Bump Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; 10 g acceleration, duration 16 ms,
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 vibrations on each of the 3 orthogonal axes
Seismic Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-3, Class 1; 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude (horizontal axis)
IEC 60068-3-3 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm amplitude (vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (horizontal axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration (vertical axis)
Frequency refresh rate: 1 octave/min for 1 cycle on 3 orthogonal
axes
4.1.9 Environment Tests
Temperature and Humidity
Standards: IEC 60255-1: 2009

Cold IEC 60068-2-1: 2007
Dry heat IEC 60068-2-2: 2007
Damp heat steady state IEC 60068-2-78: 2001
Operational temperature range -40 °C to +70 °C
Storage temperature range -40 °C to +85 °C
Damp heat steady state test Test temperature: +40 °C, relative humidity: 93 %,
test for 10 days
Insulation resistance > 10 MΩ, dielectric strength >
75 % normal value
Cyclic temperature with humidity test High temperature cycle: +40 °C, humidity 93%; low
temperature cycle: +25 °C, humidity 97 %; 24 h (12 h
+ 12 h) cycle, 6 times
Insulation resistance > 10 MΩ, dielectric strength >
75 % normal value

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.1 General
Permissible normal operating humidity range Mean value per year ≤ 75 % relative humidity;
on 56 days of the year up to 93 % relative humidity;
Condensation must be avoided!
Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor
subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.
4.1.10 Mechanical Dimensions
Device version Housing Dimensions Weight

7SJ686 Flush mounted chassis, 7XP20 1/3 6 kg
7SJ686 Flush mounted chassis, 7XP20 1/2 8 kg
Enclosure Protection Class Inspection

Protection class requirements for individual parts of the device:
Inspection area Performance grade

Front panel ≥ IP 51
Rear panel ≥ IP 20
Side panel ≥ IP 51
Top and bottom sides ≥ IP 51

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Basic Functions
Measurement channel IL1 & IL2 & IL3

Definite-time directional phase I>>>, I>>, I>;
overcurrent Supports forward, reverse or non-directional;
Supports compound-voltage control and undervoltage block
Inverse-time directional phase over- IEC normal inverse/very inverse/extremely inverse/long inverse;
current Supports forward, reverse or non-directional
Measuring Method
All elements: current element, Fundamental component

voltage element
Directional Phase Overcurrent Setting Ranges/Increments
Definite-time directional phase overcurrent

I>>> pickup For IN = 1 A 0.03 A to 40.00 A or Increments 0.01 A
I>> pickup ∞ (disabled)
I> pickup For IN = 5 A 0.15 A to 200.00 A
or ∞ (disabled)
I>>> delay 0 s to 100.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
I>> delay Time delay is: Time delay from
I> delay pickup to trip
U2 overvoltage release threshold (set by 1.00 V to 57.00 V or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 V
phase-to-ground voltage)
Ph-Ph undervoltage release threshold (set 1.00 V to 100.00 V or 0 (disabled) Increments 0.01 V
by phase-to-phase voltage)
Inverse-time directional phase overcurrent
Pickup current Ip (phase) For IN = 1 A 0.03 A to 25.00 A or Increments 0.01 A
∞ (disabled)
For IN = 5 A 0.15 A to 125.00 A
or ∞ (disabled)
Time constant T 0.05 s to 10.00 s or Increments 0.01 s
∞ (disabled)
Dropout delay 0.00 s

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Control word
Directional phase overcurrent (SW link pieces) ON/OFF
I>>> enabled (control word) ON/OFF
I>> enabled (control word) ON/OFF
I> enabled (control word) ON/OFF
Inverse-time stage enabled (control word) ON/OFF
I>>> voltage control ON/OFF

I>> voltage control ON/OFF
I> voltage control ON/OFF
I>>> direction Forward/reverse/non-directional

I>> direction Forward/reverse/non-directional
I> direction Forward/reverse/non-directional
Ip phase direction Forward/reverse/non-directional
PT broken for phase direction Blocked/released

PT broken for voltage control Blocked/released
Definite-Time Directional Phase Overcurrent Characteristics
Pickup times
- 2 ⋅ setting value Approximately 30 ms
Dropout time Approximately 30 ms (the pickup time with directional compound-voltage
control is 40 ms and 30 ms)
Dropout ratio Approximately 0.95 when I/IN ≥ 0.2
Approximately 0.01⋅IN when I/IN < 0.2
Directional Polarisation Cross polarisation voltage; memory voltage is present when measured
element voltage is too low (memorised for 2 s)
Forward range Vref,rot +45° (inductive)
Sensitivity of No limitation for single-phase and 2-phase faults
direction No limitation for dynamics for 3-phase faults
Approximately 7 V (phase-to-phase voltage) in steady state
Tolerances Pickup current 2 % of setting value
Or 10 mA when IN = 1 A
Or 50 mA when IN = 5 A
Time delay 1 % or 10 ms
Directional phase angle fault 1 degree
DC power supply voltage range of 0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1 %
1.15
Temperature range of -25 °C to 55 °C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency range of 0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Harmonics
- Maximum 10 % third harmonic 1%
- Maximum 10 % fifth harmonic 1%
Transient state during fundamental measure- <5 %
ment exceeds τ > 100 ms (completely asym-
metric)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Inverse-Time Directional Phase Overcurrent Characteristics
Pickup threshold Approximately 1.10 Ip

Dropout ratio Approximately 1.05 times setting value Ip when Ip/IN ≥ 0.3;
Equivalent to approximately 0.95 pickup threshold
Directional Polarisation Cross polarisation voltage; memory voltage is present when measured
element voltage is too low (memorised for 2 s)
Forward range Vref,rot +45° (inductive)
Approximately 7 V (phase-to-phase voltage) in steady state
Tolerances Pickup/Dropout threshold 2 % of setting value
10 mA when IN = 1 A
50 mA when IN = 5 A
Dropout time: When 0.05 ≤ I/Ip ≤ 0.90 5 % of calculated value + 2 %
of current tolerance or 30 ms
DC power supply voltage range of 0.8 ≤ UPS 1 %
≤ 1.15
Harmonics
Transient state during fundamental meas- <5 %
urement exceeds τ > 100 ms (completely
asymmetric)
Inverse-time characteristics (take Normal inverse
20 when I/IP > 20)
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
Long inverse

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Basic Functions
Measurement channel IN (optional zero-sequence measurement or calculation)

Definite-time directional earth overcur- IE>>>, IE>>, IE>;
rent Supports forward, reverse or non-directional (measured or calcu-
lated value is automatically selected for zero-sequence voltage
according to PT wiring method)
For In or 3I0 setting selection, whether calculated or external zero-
sequence voltage is used depends on PT wiring method (with
settings)
Inverse-time directional earth overcur- Normal inverse/very inverse/extremely inverse/long inverse;
rent Supports forward, reverse or non-directional (measured or calcu-
lated value can be selected for zero-sequence voltage)
Measuring Method
All elements: current element, voltage Fundamental component

element
Directional Earth Overcurrent Setting Ranges/Increments
Definite-time directional earth overcurrent

IE>>> pickup For IN = 1 A 0.03 A to 40.00 A or Increments 0.01 A
IE>> pickup ∞ (disabled)
IE> pickup For IN = 5 A 0.15 A to 200.00 A
or ∞ (disabled)
IE>>> delay 0.00 sec to 100.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
IE>> delay
IE> delay
U0 voltage control (transformer backup 1.00 V to 57.00 V or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 V
protection)
IEp ON/OFF
Pickup current INp For IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 25.00 A or Increments 0.01 A
∞ (disabled)
For IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A
or ∞ (disabled)
Time constant T 0.05 s to 10.00 s or Increments 0.01 s
∞ (disabled)
Dropout delay 0.00 s

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Control word
DMT/IDMT earth (SW link pieces) ON/OFF
IE>>> enabled (control word) ON/OFF
IE>> enabled (control word) ON/OFF
IE> enabled (control word) ON/OFF
IEp enabled (control word) ON/OFF
IE>>> U0 voltage control ON/OFF

IE>> U0 voltage control
IE> U0 voltage control ON/OFF
IE>>> phase direction ON/OFF

IE>> phase direction
IE> phase direction
IEp phase direction Forward/reverse/non-directional
Forward/reverse/non-directional
PT broken for earth direction Forward/reverse/non-directional
PT broken for U0 block Forward/reverse/non-directional
Blocked/released
Blocked/released
Definite-Time Directional Earth Overcurrent Characteristics
Pickup times
Dropout time Approximately 30 ms
Dropout ratio Approximately 0.95 when I/IN >=0.2; 0.01⋅IN when I/IN <0.2
Directional Polarisation 3V0, 3I0
element Forward range Vref,rot -45° (inductive)
Sensitivity of 3U0, 3I0 Measured zero-sequence voltage ≈ 2.5 V
direction Calculated zero-sequence voltage ≈ 5 V
Tolerances Pickup current 2 % of setting value or 10
mA when IN = 1 A, or 50
mA when IN = 5 A
Directional phase angle fault 3°
DC power supply voltage range of 0.8 1 %
≤ UPS ≤ 1.15
Frequency range of 0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1 %
Harmonics
Inverse-Time Directional Earth Overcurrent Characteristics
Pickup threshold Approximately 1.10 Ip

Dropout ratio Approximately 1.05 times setting value Ip when Ip/IN ≥ 0.3;
Equivalent to approximately 0.95 pickup threshold

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Directional Polarisation 3V0, 3I0 or 3V2, 3I2
element Cross polarisation voltage
Forward Vref,rot -45° (inductive)
range
Sensitivity of 3U0, 3I0 Measured zero-sequence voltage ≈ 2.5 V
direction Calculated zero-sequence voltage ≈ 5 V
3U2, 3I2 Negative-sequence voltage 3V2 ≈ 5 V
Negative-sequence current 3I2 ≈ 45 mA when INom = 1 A
Negative-sequence current 3I2 ≈ 225 mA when INom = 5 A
Tolerances Pickup/Dropout threshold 2 % of setting value or 10 mA
when IN = 1 A, or 50 mA when
IN = 5 A
Trip time: When 2 ≤ I/Ip ≤ 20 5 % of calculated value + 2 %
of current tolerance for 30 ms
each
DC power supply voltage range of 1 %
0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1.15
Temperature range of -25 °C to 0.5 %/10 K
55 °C
Frequency range of 0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1%
1.05
Harmonics
For inverse-time characteristics, see: Inverse-time directional earth overcurrent data

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Basic Functions
Measuring element Ue or 3U0
Displacement Voltage Protection Setting Ranges/Increments
Displacement voltage protec- ON/OFF

tion
Block in case of meas.-voltage Yes/No
loss
UE>> pickup 1.0 V to 200.0 V Increments 0.1 V
UE> pickup
UE>> time delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
UE> time delay
Protection Characteristics
Pickup time Approximately 30 ms (the pickup value is

approximately 70 ms when enabled is
selected for 8141)
Dropout ratio 0.95 (adjustable between 0.91 and 0.99)
Tolerances Tolerance of pickup value 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V
Time tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
DC power supply voltage range of 0.8 ≤ UPS/ 1%
UPSN ≤ 1.15
Harmonics

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Overload Protection Setting Ranges/Increments
Overload I>> For IN = 1 A 0.03 A to 2.00 A or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 A

enabled For IN = 5 A 0.15 A to 10.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
Overload I> enabled
Overload start fan
Overload block tap
trip
Overload I>> delay 0 s to 9000.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.01 s
Overload I> delay
Overload I>> output Trip/alarm
Overload I> output
Control word
Overload protection ON/OFF
Overload I>> enabled ON/OFF
Overload I> enabled ON/OFF
Overload start fan ON/OFF
Overload block tap trip ON/OFF
Overload Characteristics
Pickup times
Approximately 0.9 when I/IN ≥ 0.3 (overload start fan)
Tolerances Pickup current 2 % of setting value or 10 mA when
IN = 1 A, or 50 mA when IN = 5 A
DC power supply voltage range of 1%
0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1.15
Temperature range of -25 °C to 55 0.5 %/10 K
°C
Frequency range of 0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1%
1.05
Harmonics
Transient state during fundamental < 5 %
measurement exceeds τ > 100 ms
(completely asymmetric)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Pickup Value
Differential high set trip IDiff>>/INObj 0.5 to 35.0 or ∞ (invalid) Increments 0.1
Differential pickup IDiff>/INObj 0.05 to 2.00 Increments 0.01
current setting
Pickup value increase coefficient (motor and 1.0 to 2.0 Increments 0.1
reactor)
Additional stabilisation in case of extra-zone fault
(Istab > setting value) IAdd-on/INObj 2.00 to 15.00 Increments 0.01
Additional stabilisation 2 to 250 cycles or ∞ (valid Increments: 1 cycle
time until dropout)
Increments: 1 cycle
Cross block time 2 to 1000 cycles or o (valid
until dropout)
Tripping characteristics See Figure 4-1
Tolerances (default setting, one measurement point at two sides/each side)
Proportional restraint stage 5 % of setting value
Differential high set trip stage 5 % of setting value
[dw_trip_char_of_diff_protection, 1, en_GB]
Idiff
Differential current = |I1 + I2|
Istab
Restraint current = |I1| + |I2|
INObj
Nominal current of protected object

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Operate Delay
Proportional restraint stage TIDiff> 0.00 to 60.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.01 s

delay (without trip)
Differential high set trip TIDiff>> 0.00 to 60.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.01 s
stage delay (without trip)
Set the time as additional delay
Harmonic Restraint (Transformer)
Inrush restraint factor 10 % to 80 % Increments 1 %

(2nd harmonic) I2fN/IfN SeeFigure 4-2
Higher-order harmonic restraint factor (n-th) 10 % to 80 % Increments 1 %
(Third harmonic or fifth harmonic) InfN/IfN SeeFigure 4-3
Harmonic accuracy 5 % (relative tolerance) or 1 % (absolute tolerance) of
setting value
Cross block function Can be enabled/disabled
Cross block time 2 to 1000 cycles Increments 1 cycle
Or 0 (cross block disabled)
Or ∞ (valid until dropout)
Operate Time
Proportional 33 ms
restraint
Differential high - 1.5 ⋅ setting value 26 ms
set trip - 2.5 ⋅ above setting value 16 ms
Dropout time, is approximately 20 ms
Dropout ratio Approximately 0.7
Transformer Parameters
Winding vector group numeral 0 to 11 (⋅ 30 degrees) Increments 1

Neutral point grounding method Earthed or isolated
(Each winding)
Current Measurement
Transformer Accuracy 1 %⋅ of input current or 0.01⋅IN

Measurement range 0 to 40⋅IN
Motor/reactor Accuracy 1 %⋅ of input current or 0.01⋅IN
Measurement range 0 to 53⋅IN
Pickup Value Disturbance
DC power supply voltage range of 0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1.15 1%

Transient state exceeds τ > 100 ms (completely asymmetric) <5%

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
[dw_2nd_harmonic_braking, 1, en_GB]
Figure 4-2 2nd Harmonic Restraint of Transformer Differential Protection
Idiff Differential current = |I1 + I2|

INObj Nominal current of protected object
IfN Fundamental current
I2f 2nd harmonic current

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
[dw_high_harmonic_braking, 1, en_GB]
Figure 4-3 Higher-Order Harmonic Restraint of Transformer Differential Protection
Idiff Differential current = |I1 + I2|

INObj Nominal current of protected object
IfN Fundamental current
Inf Higher-order harmonic current (n = 3 or 5)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Current Comparison Protection Setting Ranges/Increments
Pickup Value
Dynamic pickup threshold For IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A
For IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 100.00 A
Dynamic pickup threshold upon For IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A
closure
For IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 100.00 A
Steady-state pickup threshold For IN = 1 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A
For IN = 5 A 2.50 A to 100.00 A
Control Word
Current comparison protection enabled (control word & SW link pieces) ON/OFF
Send inter-trip command to opposite side
When inter-trip command is received Yes/No
Trip/alarm only
Supports split-phase CT wire broken blocking differential protection
Current Comparison Protection Characteristics
Pickup time 2 times setting < 35 ms

Frequency range 45 Hz to 55 Hz
Tolerances For IN = 1 A 20 mA or 5 %
For IN = 5 A 100 mA or 5 %
Remote Trip
Operate time (including BO operate time) Approximately 15 ms

Binary input stable delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Binary input dropout delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Remote
Operate time (including BO operate time) Approximately 15 ms

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Vector Line Differential Protection Setting Ranges/Increments
Startup Value
I-DIFF>> setting For IN = 1 A 0.80 A to 40.00 A or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 A
For IN = 5 A 4.00 A to 200.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
I-DIFF> setting For IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A
For IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A
Earth fault protection For IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 5.00 A or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 A
setting
For IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 25.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
Control Word
Differential protection (control word & ON/OFF (1/0)
SW link pieces)
Vector Line Differential Protection Characteristics
Trip time
1.2 times setting value
I-DIFF>> ≤ 23 ms
I-DIFF>, earth fault protection ≤ 45 ms
2 times setting value
I-DIFF>> ≤ 21 ms
I-DIFF>, earth fault protection ≤ 43 ms
Earth fault protection starts with a delay of 100 ms after fault is detected
Tolerance Current 5 % of setting value or 15 mA when
IN = 1 A or 50 mA when IN = 5 A
Transformer Condition (Optional)
Transformer rated capacity 0.20 MVA to 5000.00 MVA

Transformer vector group numeral 0 to 11
Transformer neutral point grounding method Earthed or isolated
Automatic Inhibition
CT tolerance at each end of the protection object

Operating and rating accuracy limit factor ratio
(k_alf/k_alf nominal) 1.00 to 10.00
CT composite tolerance at rated current
(CT tolerance at k_alf/k_alf nominal) 0.50 % to 50.00 %
CT composite tolerance at rating accuracy limit factor
(CT tolerance at k_alf nominal) 0.50 % to 50.00 %

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Magnetic Balance Overcurrent Protection Setting Ranges/Increments
Magnetic balance protection For IN = 1 A 0.01 A to 40.00 Increments 0.01 A

pickup threshold A
For IN = 5 A 0.05 A to
200.00 A
Magnetic balance protection 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
operate delay
SW link pieces
Magnetic balance protection ON/OFF
Magnetic Balance Overcurrent Protection Characteristics
Pickup times
2 ⋅ setting value Approximately 30 ms
IN = 1 A, or 50 mA when IN = 5 A
DC power supply voltage range of 0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1 %
1.15
Harmonics
Transient state exceeds τ > 100 ms <5%
(completely asymmetric)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Setting Ranges/Increments
Differential current IREF > INObj 0.05 to 2.00 Increments 0.01

Limit angle jREF 110° (fixed angle)
Tripping characteristics See Figure 4-4
Pickup tolerance (default setting, one 3-phase meas- Is 5 % when I < 5 IN
urement point)
Trip delay TREF 0.00 sec to 60.00 sec or ∞ Increments 0.01 sec
(without trip)
Time tolerance 1 % of set value or 10 ms
Set the time as additional delay
Operate Time
Rated frequency 50 Hz
1.2 ⋅ In Approximately 40 ms
2 ⋅ In Approximately 38 ms
Dropout ratio 0.7
Frequency Effect
Frequency effect Within the frequency identification range
[dw_trip_char_of_3I0‘’_to_310'_ratio, 1, en_GB]
Figure 4-4 3I0''/3I0' Current Amplitude Ratio Tripping Characteristics of Zero-Sequence Differential Protec-
tion
Note: The current is positive for same phase and negative for reverse phase. IREF> is the setting, while IREF is the
tripping current.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Measuring Technique
Number of elements 4 stages; each stage can be set to ON or OFF

Low frequency load shedding minimum 10 V to 120 V Increments 1 V
action phase-to-phase voltage (based on
positive sequence voltage as the bench-
mark)
Low frequency load shedding frequency 45.00 Hz to 49.90 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Low frequency load shedding delay time 0.20 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Low frequency load shedding slip block 0.10 Hz/s to 20.00 Hz/s Increments 0.01 Hz/s
setting
Frequency increase blocking low frequency ON/OFF
load shedding
Control word
LFLSH-4 enabled ON/OFF
SW link pieces
Low frequency load shedding ON/OFF
Low Frequency Load Shedding Characteristics
Pickup times
Low frequency load approx. 100 ms
shedding pickup time
Low frequency load approx. 90 ms
shedding dropout
time
Pickup time df/dt approx. 230 ms
Dropout time df/dt approx. 110 ms
Low voltage block approx. 1.05
dropout ratio
Slip block element 0.05 Hz/s
dropout time
Tolerances Frequency 10 mHz (where, U = UN, f = fN)
15 mHz (fN-5 Hz to fN, except fN)
Delay time 1 % or 10 ms
Voltage 3 % of setting value or 1 V
Slip block element 5 % of setting value or 0.05 Hz/s
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 1 %
≤ UPS ≤ 1.15
Temperature in range -25 °C to 55 °C 0.5 %/10 K
Harmonics
- max. 10 % 3rd harmonic 1%
- max. 10 % 5th harmonic 1%

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Low Voltage Load Shedding Setting Ranges/Increments
Number of elements 4 Stages; each stage can be set to ON or OFF

Low voltage load shedding action line 20.0 V to 120.0 V Increments 0.1
voltage (based on positive sequence voltage V
as the benchmark)
Low voltage load shedding delay time 0.10 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01
sec
Low voltage load shedding slip block setting 4 V/s to 100 V/s Increments 1
(-du/dt) V/s
Voltage rise block low voltage load shed- ON/OFF
ding
Control word
LVLSH-4 enabled ON/OFF
SW link pieces
Low voltage load shedding ON/OFF
Low Voltage Load Shedding Characteristics
Pickup times
Low voltage load shed- approx. 70 ms
ding pickup time approx. 30 ms
Low voltage load shed-
ding dropout time
Pickup time du/dt approx. 230 ms
Dropout time du/dt approx. 110 ms
Voltage element dropout approx. 1.05
ratio
Slip block element 0.05 V/s
dropout time
Tolerances Delay time 1 % or 10 ms
Voltage 2 % of setting value or 1 V
Slip block element 3 V/s
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1%
1.15
Harmonics
Frequency in range 0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Transient overreaction for τ > 100 ms (with full <5 %
displacement)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Controlled Element
Overcurrent element 67-3, 67N-3, 67-TOC, 67N-TOC
Protection Setting Ranges/Increments
Second harmonic content 10 % to 45 % Increments 1 %

Cross block time 0.00 sec to 180.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Control word
Cross block Ia, Ib, Ic Yes/No
Inrush restraint ON/OFF
Function Limit
Minimum current limit For IE = 1 A At least one phase current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) is ≥ 25 mA
(phase) For IE = 5 A At least one phase current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) is ≥ 125
mA
Minimum current limit (zero- For IE = 1 A Zero-sequence current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) is ≥ 25 mA
sequence) For IE = 5 A Zero-sequence current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) is ≥ 125 mA
Inrush restraint maximum For IE = 1 A 0.30 A to 25.00 A (increments 0.01 A)
current For IE = 5 A 1.50 A to 125.00 A (increments 0.01 A)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Accelerate Overcurrent Protection Setting Ranges/Increments
Acceleration stage settings For IE = 1 A 0.03 A to 40.00 A or ∞ (invali- Increments 0.01 A

dated)
For IE = 5 A 0.15 A to 200.00 A or ∞ (invali-
dated)
Acceleration stage delay time 0 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Overcurrent acceleration 1.00 V to 100.00 V, 0 Increments 0.01 V
stage low voltage block
setting
Overcurrent acceleration 1.00 V to 57.00 V, ∞ Increments 0.01 V
stage negative sequence
voltage block setting
Zero-sequence acceleration For IE = 1 A 0.03 A to 40.00 A or ∞ (invali- Increments 0.01 A
stage setting dated)
For IE = 5 A 0.15 A to 200.00 A or ∞ (invali-
dated)
Zero-sequence acceleration 0 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
stage delay time
Control word
Overcurrent acceleration ON/OFF
stage enabled
stage blocked by compound
voltage control
PT broken for voltage control Blocked/Released
Zero-sequence overcurrent ON/OFF
acceleration stage enabled
Reclosing accelerate mode Acceleration before AR/Acceleration after AR
selection
Acceleration-before-AR Forward/non-directional
protection blocked by direc-
tion
PT broken for I> phase acc. Blocked/Released
direction
SW link pieces
protection
Zero-sequence overcurrent ON/OFF
acceleration protection
Accelerate Overcurrent Protection Characteristics
Pickup times
- 2 x set value approx. 30 ms
Dropout time approx. 30 ms
Dropout ratio approx. 0.95 when I/IE ≥ 0.2, 0.01⋅Ie when I/Ie < 0.2

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Directional Polarisation Cross polarisation voltage; memory voltage is present when measured voltage
element is too low (memorised for 2 sec)
Forward range Vref,rot + 45° (inductive)
Approx. 7 V (phase-to-phase voltage) in steady state
Tolerances Pickup current 2 % of set value or 10 mA when IE
=1A
Or 50 mA when IE = 5 A
Directional phase angle tolerance 1°
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ 1 %
UPS ≤ 1.15
Harmonics
Transient state during fundamental meas- <5 %
urement exceeds τ > 100 ms (with full
displacement)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Earth overcurrent surge For IE = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A

IE>> For IE = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A
Earth overcurrent surge
IE>
Surge IE>> delay time 0.01 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Surge IE> delay time
Control word
Earth overcurrent surge ON/OFF
arrester
arrester IE>>
arrester IE>
Pickup times
approx. 30 ms
- 2 ⋅ set value
approx. 20 ms
- 10 ⋅ set value
Dropout ratio approx. 0.95 when I/IE ≥ 0.3
Tolerances Startup current 2 % of set value or 10 mA when IE
=1A
50 mA when IE = 5 A
Power supply direct voltage in 1%
range 0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1.15
Temperature in range -25 °C to 55 0.5 %/10 K
°C
Frequency in range 0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1%
1.05
Harmonics 1%
- max. 10 % 5th harmonic
(with full displacement)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Sensitive Earth Fault Function Setting Ranges/Increments
Sensitive earth fault func- ON/OFF/alarm only Default value: OFF

tion
Sensitive earth fault UE or Ins Default value: UE or Ins
pickup element UE and Ins
IEE>> pickup Sensitive CT 0.001 A to 2.000 A, ∞ Increments 0.001 A
Direction IEE>> Non-directional/Forward/Reverse Default value: Non-direc-
tional
T IEE>> time delay 0.00 sec to 320.00 sec, ∞ Increments 0.01 sec
IEE> pickup Sensitive CT 0.001 A to 2.000 A, ∞ Increments 0.001 A
Direction IEE> Non-directional/Forward/Reverse Default value: Forward
T IEE> time delay 0.00 sec to 320.00 sec, ∞ Increments 0.01 sec
64 3U0> threshold 1.8 V to 200.0 V, ∞ Increments 0.1 V
64 3U0> delay 0.10 sec to 40 000.00 sec, ∞ Increments 0.01 sec
Sensitive Earth Fault Function Characteristics
Sensitive earth fault startup time approx. 50 ms

Voltage dropout ratio 0.95 or 0.6 V
Measurement tolerances
Un> (measured value) 3 % of setting value or 0.3 V
3U0> (calculated value) 3 % of setting value or 3 V
Current dropout ratio 0.95 when Iee > 20 mA
Current measurement tolerance 2 % of setting value or 1 mA

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Basic Functions
Measuring element Phase-to-phase voltage, frequency
U/f > setting (alarm stage) 1.00 to 1.20 Increments 0.01

U/f >> setting (trip stage) 1.00 to 1.40 Increments 0.01
Action delay (alarm stage and 0.00 sec to 60.00 sec, ∞ Increments 0.01 sec
trip stage) (invalidated)
Thermal inverse time charac- 1.05/1.10/1.15/1.20/1.25/1.30/1.35/1.40
teristics setting
Thermal inverse time action 1 sec to 20 000 sec Increments 1 sec
delay
Cooling time 1 sec to 20 000 sec Increments 1 sec
Pickup time approx. 36 ms

Dropout ratio approx. 0.95
Tolerances Tolerance of startup value 3 % of setting value
Time tolerance (alarm stage and 1 % of setting value or 10 ms (at
trip stage) least 1.5 cycles)
Thermal model 5 %, the corresponding U/f charac-
teristic point ± 600 ms
DC power supply voltage in range 1%
0.8 ≤ UPS/UPSN ≤ 1.15
1.05
Harmonics
- Max. 10 % 3rd harmonic 1%
- Max. 10 % 5th harmonic 1%

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Zero-sequence setting For IE = 1 A 0.10 A to 4.00 A or ∞ Increments 0.01 A

(invalidated)
For IE = 5 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A or ∞ Increments 0.01 A
(invalidated)
Zero-sequence setting For IE = 1 A 0.10 A to 0.80 A or ∞ Increments 0.01 A
(invalidated)
For IE = 5 A 0.50 A to 4.00 A or ∞ Increments 0.01 A
(invalidated)
Time 0.10 sec to 10.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Control word
Pole discrepancy detec- ON/OFF
tion
Pickup times
IE = 1 A
50 mA when IE = 5 A
0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1.15
°C
1.05
Harmonics 1%
- Max. 10 % 5th harmonic

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

LV IE>>> For IE = 1 A 0.03 A to 40.00 A or ∞ Increments 0.01 A

LV IE>> (invalidated)
LV IE> For IE = 5 A 0.15 A to 200.00 A or ∞
(invalidated)
Time 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec or Increments 0.01 sec
∞ (invalidated)
LV IEp For IE = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A
For IE = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.01 A
Time 0.05 sec to 10.00 sec or ∞ Increments 0.01 sec
(invalidated)
Control word
LV IE protection ON/OFF
LV IE>>> protection ON/OFF
LV IE>> protection ON/OFF
LV IE> protection ON/OFF
LV IEp protection ON/OFF
LV IEp curve Normal inverse/Very inverse/Extremely inverse/Long inverse
Pickup times
- 2 ⋅ setting value approx. 30 ms
- 10 ⋅ setting value approx. 20 ms
Tolerances Startup current 2 % of setting value or 10 mA when
IE = 1 A
50 mA when IE = 5 A
0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1.15
°C
1.05
Harmonics
- Max. 10 % 5th harmonic 1%
(with full displacement )

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Synchronisation Setting Ranges/Increments
Synchronisation object Without/Circuit Breaker/Disconnect Default Value: Circuit Breaker

Switch/...
Minimum voltage limit 20 V to 300 V Increments 1 V
Maximum voltage limit 20 V to 300 V Increments 1 V
Threshold U1, U2 without voltage 1 V to 140 V Increments 1 V
Threshold U1, U2 with voltage 20 V to 300 V Increments 1 V
Closed at U1< and U2> ON/OFF Default value: Enabled
Closed at U1> and U2< ON/OFF Default value: Enabled
Closed at U1< and U2< ON/OFF Default value: Enabled
Maximum synchronisation check 0.01 sec to 1200.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
duration
Circuit breaker close time 0.01 sec to 0.600 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Usyn wiring method UL1, UL2, UL3, UL12, UL23, UL31, Default value UL12
Beat frequency grid-connecting 0.5 V to 50.0 V Increments 0.1 V
voltage difference
Beat frequency grid-connecting 0.01 Hz to 2.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
frequency difference
Common frequency grid- ON/OFF Default value: 1
connecting method
Common frequency grid- 0.5 V to 50.0 V Increments 0.1 V
connecting voltage
Beat common frequency grid- 2° to 80° Increments 1°
connecting angle difference
Control word
Synchronisation function ON/OFF
Synchronisation Characteristics

Voltage tolerance ≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0.5 % of UE
Frequency tolerance 20 mHz at fNom ± 5 Hz
Angle tolerance 0.5°

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Auto-Reclose Setting Ranges/Increments
Auto-reclose ready time 0.50 sec to 320.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Number of recloses 1, 2 Default value: 1
Dead time 1 0.01 sec to 320.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Dead time 2 0.01 sec to 320.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
2nd AR block time 0.01 sec to 320.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Synchronisation check ON/OFF Default value: 0
Synchronisation angle 2° to 80° Increments 1°
Maximum dead time extension 0.5 sec to 1800.00 sec or ∞ Increments 0.01 sec
Synchronisation voltage wiring UL1, UL2, UL3, UL12, UL23, UL31 Default value: UL1
method
No voltage check ON/OFF Default value: 0
Non-corresponding startup ON/OFF Default value: 0
reclosing enabled
Non-corresponding startup 0.01 sec to 320.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
reclosing delay
Reclosing started by binary input ON/OFF Default value: 0
Control word & SW link pieces
Auto-reclose function ON/OFF
Reclosing Characteristics

Voltage tolerance ≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0.5 % of UN
Frequency tolerance 20 mHz at fNom ± 5 Hz
Angle tolerance 0.5°

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Basic Functions
Measurement channel IL1 & IL2 & IL3, fundamental component
FC block current setting When IE = 1 A 0.10 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A

When IE = 5 A 0.5 A to 100.00 A

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

External Trip Protection Setting Ranges/Increments
Number of external trip protections 5

External trip protection ON/OFF/alarm
External trip protection delay 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Default value: 0.01 sec
External Trip Protection Characteristics
Pickup time Typical value 25 ms (This data does not include the
default binary input filtering time of 10 ms. This time
is adjustable)
Reset time approx. 25 ms

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.24 ARC Protection
4.24 ARC Protection

Basic Functions
Measurement channel IL1 & IL2 & IL3

Arc probe 1
Arc probe 2
Arc probe 3
Arc protection current startup 0.1 I/In to 20.0 I/In; ∞ Increments 0.1 I/In
criteria
Arc-1 delay time 0.08 sec to 0.50 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Arc channel 1 sensor type No sensor installed -
Visible light point sensor
Ultraviolet light point sensor
Visible light line sensor
Arc protection current jump startup ON/OFF -
criteria
Arc channel 1 trip criterion Channel not configured -
Light only condition
Light and current condition
Arc BI 1 trip criterion Channel not configured -
Arc BI 2 trip criterion Channel not configured -
Arc channel 1 trip configuration Trip -
Not trip
Not trip
Not trip

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.24 ARC Protection
Arc BI 1 trip configuration Trip -

Not trip
Arc BI 2 trip configuration Trip -
Not trip
Control word
Arc protection ON/OFF -
SW link pieces
Arc protection ON/OFF -
Arc Protection Characteristics
Pickup times
Pure arc criterion ≤ 5ms
-2 ⋅ set value (double criteria) ≤ 15ms
Dropout time ≤ 15ms
Arc dropout ratio 0.5
Current dropout ratio 0.95 when I/Ie ≥ 0.2
0.01 ⋅ In when I/Ie<0.2
Tolerances Arc 20 % of setting value
Current 2 % of setting value or 0.01 Ie
Delay time 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Basic Functions
Measurement channel IL1 & IL2 & IL3, IE (optional zero-sequence measure-
ment or calculation)
Definite-time SOTF protection A total of 2 stages
Supports compound voltage control and under
voltage block
Definite-time SOTF IE protection A total of 2 stages
Zero-sequence voltage control
Method of Measurement
All elements: current element, voltage element Fundamental component
Switch onto Fault Overcurrent Protection Setting Ranges/Increments
Active time for switch 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
onto fault
SOTF I>> For IE = 1 A 0.03 A to 40.00 A or ∞ Increments 0.01 A
SOTF I> (invalidated)
For IE = 5 A 0.15 A to 200.00 A or ∞
(invalidated)
SOTF I>> delay 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
SOTF I> delay
U2 overvoltage release 1.00 V to 57.00 V or ∞ (invalidated) Increments 0.01 V
threshold (set by phase-
to-ground voltage)
Ph-Ph undervoltage 1.00 V to 100.00 V or 0 (invalidated) Increments 0.01 V
release threshold (set by
phase-to-phase voltage)
SOTF IE>> pickup value For IE = 1 A 0.03 A to 40.00 A or ∞ Increments 0.01 A
SOTF IE> pickup value (invalidated)
For IE = 5 A 0.15 A to 200.00 A or ∞
(invalidated)
SOTF IE>> delay 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
SOTF IE> delay
SOTF U0> 1.00 V to 200.00 V Increments 0.01 V
Control word
SOTF I>> enabled ON/OFF
SOTF I> enabled ON/OFF
SOTF I>> blocked by ON/OFF
compound voltage control
SOTF I> blocked by ON/OFF
compound voltage control
SOTF IE>> enabled ON/OFF
SOTF IE> enabled ON/OFF
SOTF IE>> blocked by ON/OFF
zero-sequence voltage

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
SOTF IE> blocked by zero- ON/OFF

sequence voltage
PT broken for voltage Blocked/released
control
Charging Protection Characteristics
Pickup times
approx. 30 ms
- 2 ⋅ setting value
approx. 20 ms
Tolerances Startup current 2 % of set value or 10 mA when IE
=1A
50 mA when IE = 5 A
Power supply direct voltage in 1%
range 0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1.15
°C
Frequency in range 0.9 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.1 1 %
Harmonics 1%

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.26 Definite-Time Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)
4.26 Definite-Time Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)

Negative-sequence over- When IE = 1 A 0.03 A to 2.00 A, ∞ Increments 0.01 A

current setting When IE = 5 A 0.15 A to 10.00 A, ∞
Negative-sequence overcurrent delay 0.00 sec to 60.00 sec or ∞ Increments 0.01 sec
(prohibited)
Function Limit
Function limit When IE = 1 A All phase currents ≤ 10 A

When IE = 5 A All phase currents ≤ 50 A
Time

Dropout Ratio
2-stage negative-sequence overcurrent element approx. 0.95 when I2/IE ≥ 0.3
Tolerances
Negative-sequence overcurrent When IE = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 10 mA

startup When IE = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 50 mA
Delay I % or 10 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup and Dropout Values
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range of 0.8 ≤ UPS/ 1%

UPSN ≤ 1.15
Temperature in range -5 °C (23.00 °F) ≤ Qamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 %/10 K
(131.00 °F)
Harmonics 1%
Transient state exceeds τ > 100 ms (with full displace- < 5 %
ment )

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.27 Inverse-Time Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)

Negative sequence When IN = 1 A 0.1 A to 2.00 A, ∞ Increments 0.01 A

inverse time pickup
When IN = 5 A 0.5 A to 10.00 A, ∞
threshold
Negative sequence T I2p time dial 0.00 sec to 3.20 sec or ∞ Increments 0.01 sec
(prohibited)
Function Limit
Function limit When IN = 1 A All phase currents ≤ 10 A

When IN = 5 A All phase currents ≤ 50 A
IEC Trip Time Curve
Normal inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
Long inverse
t inverse time trip action time

Tp T I2p time dial
I negative sequence current
Ip inverse time current setting
Pickup threshold Approx. 1.10 times the setting value I2p
Dropout threshold Approx. 1.05 times the setting value I2p, that is, 0.95
pickup threshold
Action time The trip time of I2/I2p ≥ 20 Is Identical to the trip time
of I2/I2p = 20
Tolerances
Inverse time pickup When IN = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 10 mA

When IN = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 50 mA
Action delay When 2 ≤ I/I2p ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value
+ 2 % current tolerance or 30 ms
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range of 0.8 ≤ UPS/UPSN 1 %

≤ 1.15
Temperature range -5 °C (23.00 °F) ≤ Qamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 %/10 K
(131.00 °F)
Frequency range 0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Harmonics 1%
Transient state exceeds τ > 100 ms (with full displace- < 5 %
ment)
[dw_inverse-time neg. seq. OCP curve, 1, en_GB]
Figure 4-5 Negative Sequence IEC Inverse Time Characteristics

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Motor startup current When IN = 1 A 0.40 A to 10.00 A Increments 0.01 A

(block thermal overload,
When IN = 5 A 2.00 A to 50.00 A
start motor startup moni-
toring)
Istartup current
Pickup threshold ΙMOTOR When IN = 1 A 0.50 A to 16.00 A Increments 0.01 A
START When IN = 5 A 2.50 A to 80.00 A
Temperature limit for cold 0 % to 80 % or ∞ Increments 1 % Temperature limit for cold
motor ttemperature limit for cold (prohibited) motor ttemperature limit for cold
motor motor
Permissible locked rotor 0.5 sec to 180.0 sec or ∞ Increments 0.1 sec Permissible locked rotor
time tpermissible locked rotor time (prohibited) time tpermissible locked rotor time
Startup time for warm 0.5 sec to 180.0 sec or ∞ Increments 0.1 sec Startup time for warm
motor Tstartup time for warm (prohibited) motor Tstartup time for warm
motor motor
Motor cold pickup time 1.0 sec to 180.0 sec Increments 0.1 sec Motor cold startup time
Tstartup time Tstartup time
Trip Curve
When Irms > INMOTOR START,
Where,
ISTARTUP Motor startup current setting
Irms Actual current
IMOTOR START Pickup threshold setting, which is used to detect motor startup
tTRIP Trip time
TMax STARTUP Trip time of rated startup current
Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio approx. 0.95
Tolerances
Pickup threshold When IN = 1 A 2 % of setting value or 10 mA


C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range of 0.8 ≤ UPS/UPSN ≤ 1 %

1.15
(131.00 °F)
Frequency in range fN ± 5 Hz 1%
Harmonics
- maximum 10 % 3rd harmonic 1%
- maximum 10 % 5th harmonic 1%

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Motor starting current relative to nominal motor 1.10 to 10.00 Increments 0.01
current
Nominal motor current When IN = 1 A 0.20 A to 1.20 A Increments 0.01 A
When IN = 5 A 1.00 A to 6.00 A
Maximum permissible starting time TSTART Max. 1 sec to 320 sec Increments 1 sec
Equilibrium time TEqual 0.0 min to 320.0 min Increments 0.1 min
Minimum inhibit time TMIN. INHIBIT TIME 0.2 min to 120.0 min Increments 0.1 min
Maximum permissible number of warm startups 1 to 4 Increments 1
nWARM
Number of cold starts - warm starts nCOLD - nWARM 1 to 2 Increments 1
Extension of Time Constant at stop kτ STILLSTAND 0.2 to 100.0 Increments 0.1
Extension of Time Constant at running kτ BETRIEB 0.2 to 100.0 Increments 0.1
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range of 0.8 ≤ UPS/ 1%

UPSN ≤ 1.15
(131.00 °F)
Frequency range fN ± 5 Hz 1%
Frequency jump fN ± 5 Hz Add-on error

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Tripping threshold When IN = 1 A 0.50 A to 12.00 A Increments 0.01 A

When IN = 5 A 2.50 A to 60.00 A
Alarm threshold When IN = 1 A 0.50 A to 12.00 A Increments 0.01 A
When IN = 5 A 2.50 A to 60.00 A
Trip delay 0.00 sec to 600.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Message delay 0.00 sec to 600.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Blocking duration after motor start 0.00 sec to 600.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Timers

Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio tripping stage approx. 0.95

Dropout ratio warning stage approx. 0.95
Tolerances
Pickup threshold When IN = 1 A 2 % of setting value or 10 mA

Time delay I % or 10 ms
Influencing Variables
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range of 0.8 ≤ UPS/UPSN 1%

≤ 1.15
(131.00 °F)
Harmonics 1%
- max. 10 % third harmonic 1%
- max. 10 % fifth harmonic

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Maximum allowable continuous current 0.10 to 4.00 Increments 0.01

Imax/CT primary rating INCTprim
Running time constant 1.0 min to 999.9 min Increments 0.1 min
Thermal alarm stage setting 50 % to 100 % Increments 1 %
Current alarm stage When IE = 1 A 0.10 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A
setting
When IE = 5 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A
Kt-factor when motor stops 1.0 to 10.0 Increments 0.1
Emergency startup time 10 sec to 15 000 sec Increments 1 sec
Temperature rise at rated stage current 40 °C to 200 °C Increments 1 °C
Temperature sensor connected to analog input 1 to 4 Increments 1
Thermal overload maximum freezing time 1 sec to 10 000 sec, ∞ Increments 1 sec
(prohibited)
Dropout Ratio
Thermal overload trip Return when setting thermal alarm stage

Thermal alarm stage approx. 0.99
Current alarm stage approx. 0.97
Tolerances
Thermal overload startup When IE = 1 A 2 % of max. allowable continuous

current Imax or 10 mA
When IE = 5 A 2 % of max. allowable continuous
current Imax or 50 mA
Trip time When I/Imax > 1.25 3 % or 1 sec

≤ 1.15
(131.00 °F)
Frequency range fN ± 5 Hz 1%
Frequency jump fN ± 5 Hz Add-on error

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
[dw_thermal overload curve, 1, en_GB]
Figure 4-6 Trip Time Curves for the Thermal Overload Protection (49)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Pickup threshold When IE = 1 A 0.03 A to1.00 A Increments 0.01 A

When IE = 5 A 0.15 A to 5.00 A
Action delay 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Dropout Ratio
Undercurrent When I/IE ≥ 0.3 approx. 1.05
Tolerances
Startup current When IE = 1 A 2 % of setting value or 10 mA

When IE = 5 A 2 % of setting value or 50 mA
Trip time I % or 10 ms

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Pickup threshold When IE = 1 A 0.03 A to 2.00 A or ∞ Increments 0.01 A

(prohibited)
When IE = 5 A 0.15 A to 10.00 A or ∞
(prohibited)
Dropout Ratio
Differential current When I/IE ≥ 0.3 approx. 0.95
Tolerances
Startup current When IE = 1 A 2 % of setting value or 10 mA

Trip time I % or 10 ms

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Pickup threshold 1 V to 200 V Increments 1 V

Dropout Ratio
Differential voltage approx. 0.95
Tolerances
Pickup threshold 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V

Trip time 1 % or 10 ms

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Capacitor current unbal- For IE = 1 A 0.03 A to 2.00 A or ∞ Increments 0.01 A

ance protection pickup (invalidated)
threshold For IE = 5 A 0.15 A to 10.00 A or ∞
(invalidated)
Capacitor current unbalance protection trip delay 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Control word
Capacitor current unbalance protection ON/OFF
Pickup times
approx. 30 ms
approx. 20 ms
Tolerances Startup current 2 % of setting value or 10 mA when
IE = 1 A
50 mA when IE = 5 A
DC power supply voltage range is 1%
0.8 ≤ UPS ≤ 1.15
°C
Frequency in range 0.95 ≤ f/fE ≤ 1%
1.05
Harmonics 1%

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Pickup threshold 1 V to 200 V Increments 1 V

Dropout Ratio
Voltage unbalance approx. 0.95
Tolerances
Pickup threshold 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V

Trip time 1 % or 10 ms

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Reverse-power protection ON/OFF

Reverse-power protection When IE = 1 A 0.8 W to 10 000.0 W Increments 0.1 W
setting
When IE = 5 A 4.0 W to 50000.0 W
Power direction Forward/Reverse
Reverse-Power Protection Characteristics
Pickup times
- Typical value approx. 120 ms
- Maximum value approx. 350 ms
Tolerances 1 % of setting value or 0.3 W when P is > 1/3 Pn and
when positive sequence current is greater than 0.06
In

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Basic Functions
Measuring element UL12 & UL23 & UL31
Under/Overvoltage Setting Ranges/Increments
Overvoltage protection ON/OFF

U>> 40 V to 260 V or ∞ (invalidated) Increments 1 V
U>
U>> time 0.0 sec to 100.0 sec or ∞ (invali- Increments 0.01 sec
U> time dated)
Undervoltage protection ON/OFF
U<< setting 10 V to 210 V Increments 1 V
U< setting
U<< time 0.0 sec to 100.0 sec or ∞ (invali- Increments 0.01 sec
U< time dated)
Under/Overvoltage Protection Characteristics
Pickup times
- Typical value approx. 50 ms (The startup value is approx. 70 ms
when parameter 8141 is set to Enabled and param-
eter 5124 is set to Yes)
Startup voltage tolerance 2 % of startup voltage or 0.5 V
≤ 1.15
Harmonics

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Basic Functions
Measuring element IL1 & IL2 & IL3
Current Setting Ranges/Increments
Failure protection ON/OFF

Pickup threshold 50BF For IE = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A
Pickup
For IE = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.01 A
Time delay 50 BF-1 TRIP 0.06 s to 60.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.1 sec
Timer
Time delay 50 BF-2 TRIP
Timer
Failure Protection Characteristics

Pickup threshold 2 % of setting value
or 10 mA when IE = 1 A
or 50 mA when IE = 5 A
≤ 1.15
Temperature in the range of -25 °C to 55 °C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic 1%
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic 1%

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Automatic transfer system group action time toler- < 50 ms
ance
Frequency tolerance < 0.02 Hz
Voltage tolerance < 1 % or < 0.2 V
Current tolerance < 0.01 IE
Frequency range 10 Hz to 66 Hz
Frequency difference tolerance < 0.04 Hz
Voltage difference tolerance < 2 % or < 0.5 V
Angle difference tolerance < 1°

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Measured Values/Modes of Operation
3-phase I, IN, IEE, 3I0, I1, I2, I2/I1, U, Uen, 3U0, U1, U2, P, Q,
cos ϕ, du/dt
Single-phase I, IN, IEE, U, Uen, P, Q, cos ϕ
Without fixed phase reference f, df/dt, binary input
Method for measuring I, U Fundamental component
True valid value
Positive sequence system
Negative sequence system
Startup Above setting or below setting
Pickup threshold
Current I, I1, I2, 3I0, IE When IE = 1 A 0.03 A to 40.00 A Increments 0.01 A
When IE = 5 A 0.15 A to 200.00 A
Ratio I2/I1 15 % to 100 % Increments 1 %
Sensitive zero-sequence current Ins 0.003 A to 1.500 A Increments 0.001 A
Voltage U, U1, U2, 3U0 2.0 V to 150.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Displacement voltage Uen 2.0 V to 200.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Power P, Q When IE = 1 A 0.5 W to 10 000.0 W Increments 0.1 W
When IE = 5 A 2.5 W to 50 000.0 W
Power Factor cos ϕ -0.99 to +0.99 Increments 0.01
Frequency When fE = 50 Hz 40.0 Hz to 60.0 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Frequency change df/dt 0.10 Hz/s to 20.00 Hz/s Increments 0.01 Hz/s
Voltage change df/dt 4 V/s to 100 V/s Increments 1 V/s
Dropout ratio > element 1.01 to 3.00 Increments 0.01
Dropout ratio < element 0.70 to 0.99 Increments 0.01
Dropout difference 0.02 Hz to 1.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Pickup delay 0.00 sec to 60.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Command delay time 0.00 sec to 3600.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Dropout delay 0.00 sec to 60.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Function Limit
Power measurement 3-phase IE = 1 A Current > 0.03 A

IE = 5 A Current > 0.15 A
Power measurement 1-phase IE = 1 A Current > 0.03 A
IE = 5 A Current > 0.15 A
Time
Pickup times:
Current, voltage (phase quantities)
2 ⋅ startup value approx. 30 ms

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Current, voltage (symmetrical components)

Power
At typical value approx. 120 ms
Maximum (small signal and threshold) approx. 350 ms
Power factor 300 ms to 600 ms
Frequency approx. 100 ms
Frequency change
At typical value approx. 220 ms
At maximum value 1 sec
Binary input approx. 20 ms
Return time:
Current, voltage (number of phases) < 20 ms
Current, voltage (symmetric elements) < 30 ms
Power
At typical value < 50 ms
At maximum value < 350 ms
Power factor < 300 ms
Frequency < 100 ms
Frequency change < 200 ms
Voltage change approx. 200 ms
Binary input < 10 ms
Tolerances
Pickup threshold:
Current When IE = 1 A 1 % of setting value or 10 mA
Current (symmetric elements) When IE = 1 A 2 % of setting value or 20 mA
Current (I2/I1) 2 % of setting value
Voltage 1 % of setting value or 0.1 V
Voltage (symmetric elements) 2 % of setting value or 0.2 V
Power 1 % of setting value or 0.3 W (for
rated value)
When P is > 1/3 Pn and current is
greater than 0.03 In
Power factor 2°
Frequency ±15 mHz
Frequency change 5 % of setting value or 0.05 Hz/s
Voltage change 5 % of setting value or 2 V/s
Time 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup Values
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range of 0.8 ≤ UPS/UPSN

≤ 1.15 1%
Temperature in range -5 °C ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 %/10 K

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Harmonics

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data

Pickup threshold
IE When Inom = 1 A 0.05 A to 35.00 A Increments 0.01 A
When Inom = 5 A 0.25 A to 175.00 A Increments 0.01 A
3I0 When Inom = 1 A 0.05 A to 35.00 A Increments 0.01 A
When Inom = 5 A 0.25 A to 175.00 A Increments 0.01 A
IEE 0.005 A to 1.500 A Increments 0.001 A
TV Extension time for earth fault detection 0.00 sec to 10.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Tsum sum of detection times 0.00 sec to 100.00 sec Increments 0.01 sec
Tres reset time 1 sec to 600 sec Increments 1 sec
Time
Pickup times
Current = 1.25 · startup value approx. 30 ms
Current ≥ 2 · startup value approx. 22 ms
Dropout time (without time range) approx. 22 ms
Tolerances
Pickup threshold 3 % of setting value or 10 mA when IE = 1 A

Or 50 mA when IE = 5 A
Time TV, Tsum, Tres 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Influence Variables
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range of 0.8 ≤ UPS/UPSN <1%

≤ 1.15
Temperature in range –5 °C ≤ θamb ≤ 55 °C < 0.5 %/K
Frequency in range 0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 5 % related to the setting time

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.43 Voltage Supervision
4.43 Voltage Supervision

Basic Functions
Measuring element UL1 & UL2 & UL3, UL12 & UL23 & UL31
Influence Variables
3-phase live phase-to-phase 0.300 UE to 1.400 UE Increments 0.001 UE

voltage setting
3-phase dead phase-to-phase 0.100 UE to 1.200 UE Increments 0.001 UE
voltage setting
Single-phase live phase-to-ground 0.100 UE to 3.000 UE Increments 0.001 UE
voltage setting
Live and Dead Supervision Characteristics

Startup voltage tolerance 1 % of setting value
Time tolerance 10 ms
≤ 1.15
Harmonics

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.44 CFC Function
4.44 CFC Function

Task-Level Operational and Functional Modules
Functional Block Explanation Task Level

MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB
ABSVALUE Magnitude calculation ✓ - - -
ADD Addition ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ALARM Alarm ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
AND AND - Gate ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ASWITCH Analog input switching ✓ - - -
BLINK Blink block ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to control - ✓ ✓ -
(conversion)
BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to double-point - ✓ ✓ ✓
indication (conversion)
BOOL_TO_IC Boolean to internal SI - ✓ ✓ ✓
(conversion)
BOSTATE B0 output state - ✓ ✓ -
BUILD_DI Create double-point indi- - ✓ ✓ ✓
cation
CMD_CANCEL Cancel command ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CMD_CHAIN Switching sequence - ✓ ✓ -
CMD_INF Command information - - - ✓
CMD_INF_EXE Command information in - - - ✓
real time
COMPARE Metered value comparison ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CONNECT Connection - ✓ ✓ ✓
CV_GET-STATUS Calculated value status - ✓ ✓ ✓
decoding
COUNTER Counter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DI_GET_STATUS Decode status of double- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
point indication
DI_SET_STATUS Generate double-point ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
indication with status
D_FF D-Flipflop - ✓ ✓ ✓
D_FF_MEMO Status memory for restart ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DI_TO_BOOL Double-point indication to - ✓ ✓ ✓
boolean (conversion)
DINT_TO_REAL Adapter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DIST_DECODE Convert double-point indi- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
cation with status into 4
single-point indications
with status
DIV Division ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DM_DECODE Decode double-point indi- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
cation
DYN_OR Dynamic OR ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
INT_TO_REAL Conversion ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
LIVE_ZERO Live-zero, non-linear curve ✓ - - -
LONG_TIMER Timer (max. 1193 h) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.44 CFC Function
Functional Block Explanation Task Level

LOOP Feedback loop ✓ ✓ - ✓
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower limit ✓ - - -
MEMORY Data storage - ✓ ✓ ✓
MUL Multiplication ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
MV_GET_STATUS Decode status of a value ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
MV_SET_STATUS Set status of a value ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
NAND NAND - Gate ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
NEG NOT - Gate ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
NOR NOR - Gate ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
OR OR - Gate ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
REAL_TO_DINT Adapter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
REAL_TO_INT Conversion ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
REAL_TO_UINT Conversion ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
RISE_DETECT Rising edge detector ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
RS_FF RS-Flipflop - ✓ ✓ ✓
RS_FF_MEMO RS-Flipflop with status - ✓ ✓ ✓
memory
SI_GET_STATUS Single-point indication ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
decoding
SI_GET_STATUS Generate single-point indi- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
cation with status
SQUARE_ROOT Square root extractor ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SR_FF SR-Flipflop - ✓ ✓ ✓
SR_FF_MEMO SR-Flipflop with status - ✓ ✓ ✓
storage
ST_AND AND gate with status ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ST_NOT Conversion with status ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ST_OR OR gate with status ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SUB Subtraction ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
TIMER Timer - ✓ ✓ -
TIMER_SHORT Simple timer - ✓ ✓ -
UINT_TO_REAL Conversion ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper limit ✓ - - -
X_OR XOR - Gate ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ZERO_POINT Zero suppression ✓ - - -
DI_GET_GO_STATUS Get test flag bit of GOOSE ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
double-point information
SI_GET_GO_STATUS Get test flag bit of GOOSE ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
single-point information
TIME_GET Get system clock ✓ - - -
RISE_DETECT_NEW Rising edge detector ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(new)
Time Required to Process Individual Elements within TICKS
Individual Element Number of TICKS

Block, basic requirement 5
For normal modules, each input of more than 3 inputs 1
Connection to an input signal 6

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.44 CFC Function

Connection to an output signal 7
Additional requirements for each chart 1
Arithmetic ABS_VALUE 5
ADD 26
SUB 26
MUL 26
DIV 54
SQUARE_ROOT 83
Base logic AND 5
ASWITCH 8
CONNECT 4
DYN_OR 6
NAND 5
HEG 4
NOR 5
OR 5
RISE_DETECT 4
RISE_DETECT_NEW 9
X_OR 5
Information status SI_GET_STATUS 5
CV_GET_STATUS 5
DI_GET_STATUS 5
MV_GET_STATUS 5
SI_SET_STATUS 5
DI_SET_STATUS 5
MV_SET_STATUS 5
ST_AND 5
ST_OR 5
ST_NOT 5
DI_GET_GO_STATUS 5
SI_GET_GO_STATUS 5
Storage D_FF 5
D_FF_MEMO 6
RS_FF 4
RS_FF_MEMO 4
SR_FF 4
SR_FF_MEMO 4
Control command BOOL_TO_CO 5
BOOL_TO_IC 5
CMD_InF 4
CMD_InF_EXE 4
CMD_CHAIn 34
CMD_CANCEL 3
LOOP 8

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.44 CFC Function

Type converter BOOL_TO_DI 5
BOSTATE 6
BUILD_DI 5
DI_TO_BOOL 5
DM_DECODE 8
DInT_TO_REAL 5
DIST_DECODE 8
UInT_TO_REAL 5
REAL_TO_DInT 10
REAL_TO_UInT 10
Comparison COMPARE 12
LOWER_SETPOInT 5
UPPER_SETPOInT 5
LIVE_ZERO 5
ZERO_POInT 5
Metered value COUNTER 6
Time and clock pulse TIMER 5
TIMER_LONG 5
TIMER_SHORT 8
ALARM 21
BLINK 11
TIME_GET 5
General Limitations
Description Limitation Remarks

In consideration of all task levels, 32 When this limit is exceeded, the
the maximum number of all CFC device outputs an error message.
graphs is The device starts detection. The red
LED fault lamp illuminates.
In consideration of certain task 16 Only error message is present
levels, the maximum number of all (Errors generated during
CFC graphs is processing are recorded in the
device error log)
In consideration of all graphs, the 400 When this limit is exceeded, the
maximum number of all CFC inputs device outputs an error message.
is The device starts detection. The red
The maximum number of restart 350 When this limit is exceeded, the
status memory triggers device outputs an error message.
D_FF_MEMO is The device starts detection. The red
Special Limitations for the Device
Description Limitation Remarks

The maximum number of synchro- 165 When this limit is exceeded, the
nous changes in graph input for device outputs an error message.
each task level is The device starts detection. The red
The Maximum Number of Graph 150 LED fault lamp illuminates.
Outputs for Each Task Level Is

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.44 CFC Function
Additional Limitations
Additional limitations4 For the following CFC modules:

Task level The maximum number of modules within the task level
Timer5 6 TIMER_SHORT5 6
MW_BEARB - -
PLC1_BEARB 30 60
PLC_BEARB
SFS_BEARB - -
The Maximum Number of TICKS within the Task Level
Task Level Limitation on TICKS7

MW_BEARB (measured value processing) 10 000
PLC1_BEARB (slow PLC processing) 12 000
PLC_BEARB (fast PLC processing) 1000
SFS_BEARB (interlocked) 10 000
4 When this limit is exceeded, the device outputs an error message. The device starts detection. The red LED fault lamp illuminates.
5 The maximum number of timers applied in the following situations: (Number of 2 TIMER + Number of TIMER_SHORT) < 60. There-
fore, TIMER and TIMER_SHORT share the timer resources available under this inequality framework. Such limitation is not applicable
to LONG_TIMER.
6 The TIMER and TIMER_SHORT block time values must not be shorter than the time distinguishable by the device, because blocking
does not use startup pulse to start.
7 When the number of all blocked TICKS exceeds the limit mentioned above, CFC outputs an error message.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.45 Additional Functions

Running Measured Values
Functions Running Measured Values Range Tolerances8

Current Indicated by A (kA) primary 10 % to 200 % of Inom
IL1, IL2, IL3 and A secondary or by % of IE 1 % of measured value or 1 % of IE
Positive sequence component
I1
Negative sequence component
I2
Zero-sequence component
IE/3I0
Current (measurement CT) Indicated by A (kA) primary 10 % to 120 % of Inom
IL1, IL2, IL3 and A secondary or by % of IE 0.2 % of measured value or 0.2 % of IE
Voltages (phase-to-ground) Indicated by kV primary and V 10 % to 200 % of Unom
UL1, UL2, UL3 secondary or by % of UE 0.2 % of measured value or 0.2 % of UE
Voltages (phase-to-phase)
UL12, UL23, UL31, USYN
UE or Ux
Positive sequence component
U1
Negative sequence component
U2
S, apparent power (protection Secondary side VA indication 0 % to 120 % SE
CT calculation) 1 % of SE
For U = 100 V and I/IE = 0 % to 120 %
P, active power (protection CT With sign, total, secondary 0 % to 120 % SE
calculation) side W indication 1 % of SE
For U = 100 V and I/IE = 0 % to 120 % and |
cos ϕ| = 0.5 (behind) to 1 to 0.5 (ahead)
Where, SE = √3· UE · IN
Q, reactive power (protection With sign, total, secondary 0 % to 120 % SE
CT calculation) side VAR indication 1 % of SE
sin ϕ| = 0.5 (behind) to 1 to 0.5 (ahead)
Where, SE = √3· UE · IN
cos ϕ, power factor Total -1 to +1
1 % or 0.01
S, apparent power (measure- Primary side kVA (MVA or 0 % to 120 % SE
ment CT calculation) GVAR) and %SE 0.5 % of SE
For U = 100 V and I/IE = 0 % to 120 %
8 At Rated Frequency

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Functions Running Measured Values Range Tolerances8

P, active power (measurement With sign, total, primary side 0 % to 120 % SE
CT calculation) kW (MW or GW) and %SE 0.5 % of SE
Where, SE = √3 · UE · IE
Q, reactive power (measure- With sign, total, primary side 0 % to 120 % SE
ment CT calculation) kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) and % SE 0.5 % of SE
For U = 100 V and I/IE= 0 % to 120 % and |
cos ϕ, power factor (measure- Total -1 to +1
ment CT calculation) 1 % or 0.01
Frequency Hz fN ± 5 Hz
20 mHz
Sensitive earth fault detection Indicated by A (kA) primary 0 mA to 2000 mA
current (total current, active and mA secondary 2 ‰ of measured value or 1 mA
current, reactive current)
Ins, Insw, Insb
Phase angle of zero-sequence Indicated by ° -180° to +180°
voltage and sensitive earth ±1°
fault current j (3U0, Ins)
Analog Output (Optional)
Quantity Up to 2
Possible measured value All measured quantities indicated by % that appear in
the DIGSI configuration matrix of the device
Range 0 mA to 24 mA
Precision 0.2 % · 20 mA
Analog Input (Optional)
Quantity Up to 4
Possible measured value Temperature, tap, measured quantities defined in the
DIGSI configuration matrix of the device
Range 0 mA to 22.0 mA
Precision 0.2 % · 20 mA
Record
Storage is maintained by battery if the power supply is lost

Records the last 16 faults and trip messages
Records the last 20 oscillographic fault records
Records the last 16 ground faults
Records the last 512 event records
8 At Rated Frequency

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Time Indication
Resolution for operational indications 1 ms

Resolution for fault indications 1 ms
Maximum time deviation (internal clock) 0.01 %
Battery Lithium battery 3.6 V, type ER 14250
Energy Counter
Metered values for energy Wp, Wq (real and reactive By kWh (MWh or GWh) and by kVARh (MVARh or
energy) GVARh)
Range 28 bits or 0 or 2 68 435 455
Tolerance9 ≤ 2 % for I > 0.1 IE, U > 0.1 UE and | cos ϕ | ≥ 0.707
Switching Statistics
Number of stored trips up to 9 digits

Accumulated breaking current (phase split) up to 4 digits
Operating Hours Counter
Display range up to 7 digits

Standard Exceeding an adjustable current threshold (CB Ι>)
Commissioning Assistance
- Phase-sequence check
- Operational measured values
- Circuit breaker test via control
- Creating a test fault record
Clock
Clock synchronisation IRIG signal (telegram format IRIG-B000)

Binary input
Communication
SNTP
Time tracking running mode
No. Running mode Explanation
1 Internal Internal synchronisation via RTC (default)
2 Time Signal IRIG B External synchronisation via IRIG-B
3 Via binary input pulse External synchronisation with pulse via binary input
4 Fieldbus (Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103, External synchronisation via field bus
IEC 61850)
5 SNTP Simple network clock synchronisation
9 At rated frequency

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Setting Group Change Option of the Functional Settings
Number of available setting groups 4 (setting groups A, B, C and D)

The change can be performed via HMI of the device
DIGSI user interface
Protocol of system (SCADA) interface
Binary input
IEC 61850 GOOSE (Internal Device Communication)
GOOSE communication service of IEC 61850 can transmit single-point, double-point binary inputs and analog
inputs used for interlocking of switchgear and automatic transfer system. The GOOSE information transmis-
sion time depends on the number of IEC 61850 clients.
When GOOSE is used for protection functions for devices of version V4.6 and higher, you must check the
related action time required. To ensure safe application, you must consult the manufacturer if necessary.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.46 Operating Ranges of Protection Functions

Among protection functions of the device, the operating range of some functions is 45 Hz to 55 Hz. The
protection function is blocked when frequency exceeds this range.
Protection Functions Operating Range 45 Hz The Operating Range Is
to 55 Hz Not Affected by
Frequency
Directional phase overcurrent ✓ -
Directional earth overcurrent ✓ -
Unbalance load (negative sequence) ✓ -
Voltage protection Overvoltage ✓ -
Undervoltage - ✓
Manual close fault acceleration protection ✓ -
Low voltage load shedding ✓ -
Low frequency load shedding - ✓
Acceleration before and ✓ -
after reclose
Thermal overload protection - ✓
Undercurrent protection ✓ -
Motor startup protection ✓ -
Load jam protection ✓ -
Motor restart inhibit - ✓
Reverse-power protection ✓ -
Differential protection Magnetic balance differ- ✓ -
ential
Differential high set trip ✓ -
Proportional differential ✓ -
Transformer zero- ✓ -
sequence differential
Phase ratio differential ✓ -
Vector differential ✓ -
Line transformer group ✓ -
differential
1-stage definite-time overcurrent unbalance protec- ✓ -
tion
1-stage definite-time overvoltage unbalance protec- ✓ -
tion
1-stage definite-time voltage difference protection ✓ -
1-stage definite-time 3-phase differential current ✓ -
protection
2-stage earth overcurrent surge arrester ✓ -
2-stage displacement voltage protection ✓ -
Overexcitation protection ✓ -
Overload start fan ✓ -
Overload block voltage regulation with load ✓ -
2-stage overload protection ✓ -
Low voltage side earth overcurrent: 3 definite-time ✓ -
stages and 1 inverse-time stage

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
Protection Functions Operating Range 45 Hz The Operating Range Is

to 55 Hz Not Affected by
Frequency
Flexible functions Undervoltage (funda- - ✓
mental)
Undervoltage (RMS) - ✓
Overvoltage (positive - ✓
sequence)
Undervoltage (positive - ✓
sequence)
Undercurrent (funda- - ✓
mental)
Undercurrent (RMS) - ✓
Frequency - ✓
Frequency change rate - ✓
Binary input - ✓
Others are customisable ✓ -
Switch onto fault overcurrent protection ✓ -
Breaker failure protection ✓ -
Pole discrepancy detection ✓ -
Synchronisation function (common frequency and ✓ -
beat frequency synchronisation functions)
Auto reclose 2nd cycle ✓ -
5 external trip protection groups - ✓
4 · (0 mA to 20 mA) analog protection - ✓
Sensitive fault function ✓ -
Supervision function - ✓
Automatic transfer system function - ✓
2-stage low voltage side overcurrent protection ✓ -
2-stage low voltage side earth overcurrent protection ✓ -
Transformer neutral point earth overcurrent protec- ✓ -
tion
Arc protection (pure arc criterion) - ✓
Arc protection (current plus arc criterion) ✓ -
User-defined functions (CFC) - ✓
Online temperature monitoring - ✓

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.47 Switching Device Control
4.47 Switching Device Control

Number of switching devices Depends on the number of binary inputs and outputs
available
Interlocking Freely programmable interlocking
Messages Feedback messages: closed, open, intermediate posi-
tion
Control commands Single command/double command
Switching command to circuit breaker 1-, 1½ - and 2-pole
Programmable logic controller PLC logic, graphical input tool
Local control Control via menu
Assignment of function keys
Remote control via communication interfaces
via systems control (for example, SICAM)
via DIGSI (for example, via modem)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.48 Dimensions
4.48 Dimensions
4.48.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/3)
[dw_dimension housing size 1_3_7SJ686, 1, en_GB]
Figure 4-7 Dimensional Drawing for Panel Flush or Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/3)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Technical Data
4.48 Dimensions
4.48.2 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/2)
[dw_dimension housing size 1_2_7SJ686, 1, en_GB]
Figure 4-8 Dimensional Drawing for Panel Flush or Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/2)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
5 Appendix
5.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 562

5.2 Terminal Assignments 565
5.3 Connection Examples 581
5.4 Current Transformer Requirements 591
5.5 Conversion Matrix for Transformer Differential Protection 594
5.6 Default Settings 599
5.7 Protocol-Dependent Functions 609
5.8 Alarm Group Indications 610
5.9 Measured Values 611
5.10 Menu Structure of the Protection Device 621
5.11 Terms 623

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
5.1.1 Ordering Information
Posi- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 21 22
tion
Option 7 S J 6 8 6 - 9 - + L 0
Current Input Options Position 7

IPh = 1 A, Ie = 1 A 1
IPh = 1 A, Iee 2
IPh = 5 A, Ie = 5 A 5
IPh = 5 A, Iee 6
IPh = 5 A, Ie = 1 A 7
Working Power Supply of Device Position 8

DC 24 V to DC 48 V 4
DC 110 V 5
DC 220 V 6
AC 220 V 7
AC 110 V 8
Housing Position 9
1/3 19'' 16 binary inputs, 7 binary outputs, 1 device live contact A
1/2 19'' 36 binary inputs, 23 binary outputs, 1 device live contact B
1/3 19'' 6 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, 1 device live contact C
1/3 19'' 9 binary inputs, 6 binary outputs, 0 device live contact D
1/3 19'' 9 binary inputs, 4 binary outputs, 1 device live contact E
Language Position 10
English B
Chinese simplified W
External Extension Modules Position 12

No 0
Yes 1
Operating Environment Position 13

Standard 0
Humid environment 1
Protection Functions Position 14

Feeder protection A
Motor overcurrent protection B
Motor differential protection C
Capacitor protection (current unbalance) D
Capacitor protection (voltage unbalance) E
Capacitor protection (voltage differential) F
Capacitor protection (current differential) G
Reactor protection (differential) H

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
Protection Functions Position 14

Transformer backup protection J
Substation transformer protection K
2 to 4 side differential protection L
Line/Transformer group-line differential protection M
Automatic transfer system N
Extension I/O Module Position 15

No A
4-point 0 mA to 20 mA input module B
2-point 0 mA to 20 mA output module C
9 binary inputs D
5 binary outputs E
6 binary inputs + 3 binary outputs F
3 arc inputs + 2 high-speed binary outputs G
4 binary inputs + 5 binary outputs H
Operational Circuit, Measurement CT Position 16

No, No 0
Yes, Yes 1
No, Yes 2
Yes, No 3
Communication Interfaces (B,C,D) Position 22

2 RS485 ports, 1 GPS port V
2 RJ45 Ethernet ports, 1 GPS port W
3 RJ45 Ethernet ports, 1 GPS port X
2 optical interfaces, 1 Ethernet port, 1 GPS port Y

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
NOTE
i When position 8 = 4, only A and E can be selected for position 9 and 1 or 3 cannot be selected for position
16.
When position 8 = 4 and A is selected for position 9, only N can be selected for position 14.
When position 8 = 4 (DC 24 to DC 48 V), the default BI jumper on the device is placed at 48 V tap.
DC operation board is indicated when position 8 = 5 or 6 and 1 or 3 is selected for position 16.
When position 8 = 7, the operational circuit is the AC operation board if you select 1 or 3 for position 16.
When position 8 = 8, only 0 or 2 can be selected for position 16.
The position 9 = B option is only applicable to cases where position 14 = A, H, M.
When position 9 = B and position 14 = H, the position 15 cannot be G.
When position 9 = C, position 15 must be option F, only A, B or K can be selected for position 14, and there
is only one RS485 (select V for position 22) or network interface (select X for position 22).
When position 9 = D, position 15 must be option D, only A, B or K can be selected for position 14, and there
is only one RS485 (select V for the 22nd digit) or network interface (select X for position 22).
When position 9 = E, only 4 can be selected for position 8.
When position 9 = E, position 15 must be option A, only A, B or K can be selected for position 14, and there
is only one RS485 (select V for the 22nd digit) or network interface (select X for position 22).
When position 12 = 1, only options in which position 9 is A or B are applicable.
When position 14 = J, only options in which position 7 is 1, 5 or 7 are applicable
When position 14 = L, only options in which position 7 is 1 or 5 and position 16 is 0 are applicable
When position 14 = M, position 15 must be A
When position 14 = N, position 7 must be 1, 5 or 7, position 15 must be E, and position 16 must be 0 or 3
When position 15 = G, position 14 only supports A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K
5.1.2 Accessories
Battery
Lithium battery 3.6 V, model ER14250.
Sensors, Modules and Antenna
Name Order Number

Wireless temperature sensor 7XV1952-0BA00
Wireless temperature and humidity sensor 7XV1952-0DA00
Sensor receiving module 7XV1952-0CA00
High gain antenna 7XV1952-0EA00
Advantech ADAM module ADAM 4015

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.2 Terminal Assignments
5.2.1 1/3 Housing
7SJ686-A/B
[dw_7SJ686-A_B 1_3 housing, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-1 7SJ686-A/B Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686-C/G/H
[dw_7SJ686-C_G_H 1_3 housing, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-2 7SJ686-C/G/H Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686 -D/J/K
[dw_7SJ686-D_J_K 1_3 housing, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-3 7SJ686-D/J/K Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686-E
[dw_7SJ686-E 1_3 housing, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-4 7SJ686-E Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686-F
[dw_7SJ686-F 1_3 housing, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-5 7SJ686-F Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686-L
[dw_7SJ686-L 1_3 housing, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-6 7SJ686-L Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686-M
[dw_7SJ686-M 1_3 housing, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-7 7SJ686-M Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686-N
[dw_7SJ686_N_terminal, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-8 7SJ686-N Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.2.2 1/2 housing
7SJ686-A-B
[dw_7SJ686-A_B 1_2 housing, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-9 7SJ686-A-B Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686-H-B
[dw_7SJ686-H-B 1_2 housing, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-10 7SJ686-H-B Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686-M-B
[dw_7SJ686-M-B 1_2 housing, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-11 7SJ686-M-B Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.2.3 1/3 MINI Housing
NOTE
i For more information on the communication port, refer to 2.1.3.4 Communication Port Configuration.
7SJ686-A-C/B-C/K-C
[dw_7SJ686-A-C_B-C_K-C 1_3 mini, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-12 7SJ686-A-C/B-C/K-C Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686-A-D/B-D/K-D
[dw_7SJ686-A-D_B-D_K-D 1_3 mini, 2, en_GB]
Figure 5-13 7SJ686-A-D/B-D/K-D Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
7SJ686-A-E/B-E/K-E
[dw_7SJ686-A-E_B-E_K-E 1_3 mini, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-14 7SJ686-A-E/B-E/K-E Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.2.4 Extension Board Terminal Wiring Diagram
[dw_connection of extension board, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-15 Extension Board Terminal Definition Diagram

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.2.5 Connector Assignments
Ports (B/C/D)
Port Number RS485 (RJ45) Ethernet

1 - Tx+
2 - Tx-
3 - Rx+
4 - -
5 - -
6 - Rx-
7 A -
8 B -
Time Synchronisation/ADAM Module/Smart Temperature Measurement Receiver (Port A)
Pin Number Description Meaning of Signal

1 Not available when M12=0 RS485_A
2 Not available when M12=0 RS485_B
3 Not available when M12=0 Reserved
4 Not available when M12=0 Reserved
5 Not available when M12=0 +5 V output
6 Not available when M12=0 GND
7 P5_TSIG GPS+
8 M_TSIG GPS-

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.3 Connection Examples

CT Connection
[dw_CTconnection-3phase, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-16 3-Phase CT Connection
[dw_CTconnection-2phase, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-17 2-Phase CT Connection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[dw_CTconnection-zero, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-18 Zero-Sequence CT Connection
PT Connection
[dw_3ph PT+zero sequ. connection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-19 3-Phase PT + Zero-Sequence PT Connection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[dw_V_PT connection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-20 V-Type PT Connection
[dw_3VT+UxConnection, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-21 3-Phase PT + Ux Connection

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
3-Side Transformer Differential
[dw_7SJ686-L_3_rolls, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-22 3-Side Transformer Connection Example 7SJ686-L

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[dw_7SJ686-L_3_rolls_ internal, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-23 3-Side Transformer Internal Bridge Wiring Connection Example 7SJ686-L

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[dw_7SJ686-L_3_rolls_ 2_branches, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-24 3-Side Transformer Low Voltage Side 2-Branch Connection Example 7SJ686-L

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
2-Side Transformer Connection
[dw_7SJ686-L_2_rolls, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-25 2-Side Transformer Connection Example 7SJ686-L

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[dw_2 rolls_internal, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-26 2-Side Transformer Internal Bridge Wiring Connection Example 7SJ686-L

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[dw_2 rolls_2_branches, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-27 2-Side Transformer Low Voltage Side 2-Branch Connection Example 7SJ686-L

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[dw_2 rolls_2 branches_internal, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-28 2-Side Transformer High Voltage Side Internal Bridge Low Voltage Side 2-Branch Connection
Example 7SJ686-L

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.4 Current Transformer Requirements

The requirements for phase current transformers are generally determined by overcurrent delay protection,
particularly by the settings of high-current elements. In addition, there is usually a basic requirement based on
experience.
The recommended values are given according to the standard IEC 60044-1.
In order to obtain requirements for knee-point voltage and other transformer classes, refer to standards IEC
60044-6, BS 3938, and ANSI/IEEE C 57.13.
5.4.1 Accuracy Limiting Factors
Rated and Effective Accuracy Limiting Factor
Required minimum effective accu-

racy limiting factor
Minimum 20
with
n Minimum effective accuracy
limiting factor
I>>PU Primary pickup value of the high-
current element
IpN Transformer rated primary current
Result of rated accuracy limiting
factor
with
n Rated accuracy limiting factor
RBC Connected load resistance (device
and cable)
RBN Rated load resistance
RCt Transformer internal load resis-
tance
Calculation Example According to IEC 60044-1
IsN = 1 A
n = 20
RBC = 0.6 Ω (device and cable)
RCt = 3 Ω n is set to 10,
Therefore: 5P10, 5 VA
RBN = 5 Ω (5 VA)
Where,
IsN = transformer secondary side rated current

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.4.2 Class Conversion
British standard BS 3938
ANSI/IEEE C 57.13, Class C
IsN = 5 A (typical value)

IEC 60044-6 (transient response),
Class TPS
K≈1
KSSC ≈ n
Calculation process is the same as 5.4.1 Accuracy Limiting Factors,
Classes TPX, TPY, TPZ where: KSSC ≈ n
TP depending on the power system and the specified closing sequence
With
Uk Knee-point voltage
RCt Internal load resistance
RBN Rated load resistance
IsN Transformer secondary rated
current
n Rated accuracy limiting factor
Us.t.max Secondary terminal voltage at 20
IpN
Ual Secondary magnetization limit
voltage
K Dimensional factor
KSSC Relative coefficient, rated fault
current
TP Primary time constant
5.4.3 Cable Core Winding Balance Current Transformer
Overview
The requirements for the cable core balance current transformers are determined by the Sensitive earth fault
detection function.
The recommended values are given according to the standard IEC 60044-1.
Requirements
Transformer ratio, typical value 60/1

For some cases, select a different transformer ratio to
adapt to special power systems and the sum of
maximum earth fault currents
Accuracy limiting factors FS = 10

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
Minimum power 1.2 VA

Maximum connected load resistance
Secondary current threshold value ≥ 20 mA ≤ 1.2 VA (≤ 1.2 Ω)
Secondary current threshold value < 20 mA ≤ 0.4 VA (≤ 0.4 Ω)
Class Accuracy
Minimum required class accuracy related to neutral point grounding and functional operation principles
Star Point Ungrounded Neutral Compensated High-Resistance Protec-
Point tion Grounding
Directional function Class 1 Class 1 Class 1
Non-directional function Class 3 Class 1 Class 3
For extremely small earth fault currents, it is necessary to correct the angle on the device.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.5 Conversion Matrix for Transformer Differential Protection
5.5.1 7SJ686-H/-L Star-Delta Conversion Matrix with Linear Transformer Group

Vector Differential
vec Isolated Conversion Earthed Conversion

tor
gro
up
0

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix

tor
gro
up
5

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix

tor
gro
up
10
11
5.5.2 7SJ686-M Star-Delta Conversion Matrix with Linear Transformer Group Vector
Differential
Vec Isolated Conversion Earthed Conversion

tor
gro
up
0

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix

tor
gro
up
3

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix

tor
gro
up
9
10
11

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.6 Default Settings

When leaving the factory, the device has been preset with a large number of LED indicator lamps, binary
inputs and outputs, and function keys. See the following table for setting information.
5.6.1 LEDs
Table 5-1 Preset LED Indications
LED Lamp Default Function Function Code Description Remarks

LED1 Relay general trip 511 Latched -
command
LED2 Overcurrent phase 18345 Latched -
L1 pickup
Differential protec- 5672
tion: TRIP L1
L2 pickup
tion: TRIP L2
L3 pickup
tion: TRIP L3
LED5 I> TRIP 18056 Latched -
I>> TRIP 18053
I>>> TRIP 18050
Ip TRIP 18072
IE>>> TRIP 18090 Applicable to 1/3
IE>> TRIP 18087 housing
IE> TRIP 18084
IEp TRIP 18097
LED6 Auto reclose close 2851 Latched -
command
IE>>> TRIP 18090 Applicable to 1/2
IE>> TRIP 18087 housing
IE> TRIP 18084
IEp TRIP 18097

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
LED Lamp Default Function Function Code Description Remarks

LED7 Group alarms 140 Unlatched Applicable to 1/3
PT broken wire 253 housing
CT broken alarm 17501
>12s
CT broken wire 251
detected
Fault in configura- 311
tion/setting
ARC channel 1 self- 18890
checking fail
checking fail
checking fail
ARC channel alarm 20129
ATS blocked due to 20610 Only applicable to -N
inconsistent connec-
tions of incoming
line PTs
LED14 Group alarms 140 Unlatched Only applicable to
PT broken wire 253 1/2 housing
CT broken alarm 17501
>12s
CT broken wire 251
detected
Fault in configura- 311
tion/setting
checking fail
checking fail
checking fail
ARC channel alarm 20129
5.6.2 Binary Inputs
Binary Inputs Presettings of all Non-MINI Devices and Ordering Variants
Binary Default Function Function Code Description Remarks

Inputs
BI1 > Reset LED indicator lamp 5
BI2 >CB1 contact (OPEN, If bkr 17621 Valid for low Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
is open) level
>CB1 contact (OPEN, If bkr 17622
is closed)
BI3 >Manually operate CB1 17864 Only applicable to 7SJ686-N

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix

Inputs
BI4 Circuit breaker Not applicable to 7SJ686-N
>CB2 contact (OPEN, if bkr 17623 Valid for low Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
is open) level
>CB2 contact (OPEN, if bkr 17624
is closed)
BI5 Circuit breaker Not applicable to 7SJ686-N
>Manually operate CB2 17865 Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
BI6 >Testing position of hand-
cart
Disconnect switch
BI7 >Working position of hand-
cart
Disconnect switch
BI8 >Earth switch position
BI9 > Remote/local = 0/1
BI10 >Circuit breaker not ready
for reclosing
BI11 > SF6 loss Not applicable to 7SJ686-N
>CB3 contact (OPEN, if bkr 17626 Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
is closed) (Without operation box)
Circuit breaker CB3 position
BI12 >Test trip in small current Not applicable to 7SJ686-J/L/N
>CB3 contact (OPEN, if bkr 17625 Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
is open) (Without operation box)
BI13 >Block auto reclose 2703 Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/M
>Block ATS 17748 Only applicable to 7SJ686-N
BI14 >Stop auto recloser 18350 Only applicable to 7SJ686-A/M
BI15 >Synchronisation request 170.0043.01 Only applicable to 7SJ686-A
>Synchronisation request 170.0043.02
BI16 > Test enable 15
BI17 >TWJ 18300 Not applicable to 7SJ686-A-B/M-B/L/N
> Circuit breaker auxiliary 4602
contact (normally closed)
>CB3 contact (OPEN, if bkr 17626 Only applicable to 7SJ686-N (with
is closed) operation box)
BI18 >HWJ 18301 Not applicable to 7SJ686-A-B/M-B/L/N
contact (normally open)
>CB3 contact (OPEN, if bkr 17625 Only applicable to 7SJ686-N (with
is open) operation box)
BI19 >HHJ 18302 Not applicable to 7SJ686-A-B/M-B/L/N

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix

Inputs
BI37 >TWJ 18300 Only applicable to 7SJ686-A-B/M-B
BI38 >HWJ 18301
BI39 >HHJ 18302
Binary Inputs Presettings of All MINI Devices and Ordering Variants
Binary Default Function Function Descrip- Remarks

Inputs Code tion
BI1 > Reset LED indicator lamp 5 Not applicable to 7SJ686-*-C
> Circuit breaker auxiliary 4602 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C (without
contact (normally closed) operation box)
Circuit breaker Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C
BI2 > Circuit breaker auxiliary 4601 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C (without
contact (normally open) operation box)
Circuit breaker Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C
> Circuit breaker auxiliary 4602 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-D (without
contact (normally closed) operation box)
Circuit breaker
BI3 >Working position of handcart Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C
> Circuit breaker auxiliary 4601 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-D (without
contact (normally open) operation box)
Circuit breaker
BI4 >Earth switch position Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C
>Working position of handcart Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-D
> Circuit breaker auxiliary 4602 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-E
BI5 >Circuit breaker not ready for Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C
reclosing
>Earth switch position Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-D
> Circuit breaker auxiliary 4601 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-E
BI6 > Remote/local = 0/1 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C
>Circuit breaker not ready for Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-D
reclosing
>Working position of handcart Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-E
BI7 >TWJ 18300 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C (with
> Circuit breaker auxiliary 4602 operation box)
> Remote/local = 0/1 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-D
>Earth switch position Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-E
BI8 >HWJ 18301 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C (with
>Circuit breaker not ready for Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-E
reclosing

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
Binary Default Function Function Descrip- Remarks

Inputs Code tion
BI9 >HHJ 18302 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-C (with
operation box)
> Remote/local = 0/1 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-E
BI10 >TWJ 18300 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-D (with
Circuit breaker
BI11 >HWJ 18301 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-D (with
Circuit breaker
BI12 >HHJ 18302 Only applicable to 7SJ686-*-D (with
operation box)
5.6.3 Binary Outputs
Binary Output Presettings of all Non-Mini Devices and Ordering Variants
Binary Default Function Function Description Remarks

Output Code
BO1 Relay general trip 511
command
BO2 Relay pickup 501
BO3 Relay general trip 511 Not applicable to 7SJ686-
command N
Command: open CB1 17760 Only applicable to
7SJ686-N
BO4 Auto reclose close 2851 Not applicable to 7SJ686-
command N
Command: close CB1 17767 Only applicable to
7SJ686-N
BO5 Circuit breaker (trip) Remote trip Not applicable to 7SJ686-
N
Command: open CB2 17761 Only applicable to
7SJ686-N
BO6 Circuit breaker (close) Remote close Not applicable to 7SJ686-
N
Command: close CB2 17768 Only applicable to
7SJ686-N
BO7 General fault 18306
BO8 Command: close CB3 Only applicable to
BO9 Circuit breaker CB3 posi- Remote trip 7SJ686-N
tion
BO10 Circuit breaker CB3 posi- Remote close
tion
BO11 Load-shedding trip (time 17734
delay 1)
BO12 Command: open CB3 177362
BO16 ARC stage2 trip 18885

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix

Output Code
BO17 ARC channel 1 pickup 20101 Only applicable to arc
ARC channel 2 pickup 20102 protection 1/3 housing
BO32 ARC stage2 trip 18885
BO33 ARC channel 1 pickup 20101 Only applicable to arc
ARC channel 2 pickup 20102 protection 1/2 housing
Binary Output Presettings of all Mini Devices and Ordeing Variants

Output Code
BO1 Relay general trip 511
command
Relay pickup 501 Not applicable to 7SJ686-
*-E
BO2 Auto reclose command 2851 Only applicable to
7SJ686-*-E
Relay general trip 511 Not applicable to 7SJ686-
command *-E
BO3 Circuit breaker (trip) Remote trip Only applicable to
7SJ686-*-E
Auto reclose command 2851 Not applicable to 7SJ686-
*-E
BO4 Circuit breaker (close) Remote close Only applicable to
7SJ686-*-E
BO5 Circuit breaker (trip) Remote trip Not applicable to 7SJ686-
*-E
BO6 Circuit breaker (close) Remote close Only applicable to
7SJ686-*-E
BO7 General fault 18306 Only applicable to
7SJ686-*-C
BO8 No configuration
5.6.4 Function Keys (Only Applicable to 1/2 Housing)
Presettings of Function Keys
Function Key Default Function Description

F1 Event log
F2 Primary operating value
F3 Last fault
F4 -
5.6.5 Default Display
Default display illustrates current operation status and/or selected measured values. You can select parameters
to be displayed during the configuration process.

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[sc_HMI_default display_non-L, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-29 Default Display All Devices except 7SJ686-L/N

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[sc_HMI_default display_L, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-30 Default Display7SJ686-L
[sc_HMI_default display_N, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-31 Default Display 7SJ686-N

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.6.6 Predefined CFC Charts
The device provides some predefined CFC logic diagrams. You can select these predefined logical diagrams
based on different application scenarios.
Data-Transmission Unlocking Activated by External Binary Inputs

The block NEGATOR directly reverses the input signal > stops data transmission and generates an
output.
[dw_pre-CFC_transmission stop, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-32 Unlocking Data Transmission
Remote/Local Authorisation Mode Set by External Binary Input
[dw_pre-CFC_remote, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-33 Remote/Local Signal
Sensitive Earth Fault Test Trip
[dw_pre-CFC_trip, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-34 Sensitive Earth Fault Test Trip Logic 1

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[dw_pre-CFC_trip_2, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-35 Sensitive Earth Fault Test Trip Logic 2

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.7 Protocol-Dependent Functions
5.7 Protocol-Dependent Functions

Protocol IEC 60870–5– Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IEC 60870–5– IEC 61850
103, Serial Port Serial Port Ethernet 103, Ethernet Ethernet
Functions
Operational Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Measured
values
Metered value Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Oscillographic Yes / / Yes Yes
fault recording
Protection value Yes / / Yes Yes
settings
User defined Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
object
Clock synchroni- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
sation
Messages with Yes / / Yes Yes
time stamp
Commissioning Yes / / Yes Yes
assistance
Stop data trans-
mission
Commissioning Yes / / Yes Yes
assistance
Test mode
Physical mode Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Synchronous
Transmission Question and Question and Question and Loop/active Loop/active upload/
mode answer mode answer mode answer mode upload/question question and
and answer answer mode
mode
Baud rate 1200 to 115 300 to 19 200 Up to 100 Up to 100 Up to 100 MBaud
200 MBaud MBaud
Type RS485 RS485 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.8 Alarm Group Indications
5.8 Alarm Group Indications

Number Description Function Number Description
140 Group alarms 145 Error A/D reference
voltage
147 Error power supply
177 Warning: Battery
192 Warning: 1A/5A jumper
different from setting
18010 AC board error
18011 Power supply board error
18012 Binary input board error
18013 Communication board
error
18014 Extension board error
18015 12V power supply error
160 Alarm summary event 175 Warning: current phase
sequence
176 Warning: voltage phase
sequence
171 Warning: phase sequence 175 Warning: current phase
sequence
176 Warning: voltage phase
sequence
255 PT circuit alarm 253 PT broken wire
170 VT fuse failure (alarm
instantaneous)
17501 CT broken alarm >12s

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.9 Measured Values
5.9 Measured Values

Name Description Functions IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in
Matrix
Model
Information Coding
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Default Display
Control Screen Display
170.2050.01 U1 = Synchronisation CFC CD DD
170.2051.01 f1 = Function1 CFC CD DD
170.2052.01 U2 = CFC CD DD
170.2053.01 f2 = CFC CD DD
170.2054.01 dU = CFC CD DD
170.2055.01 df = CFC CD DD
170.2056.01 dα = CFC CD DD
170.2050.02 U1 = Synchronisation CFC CD DD
170.2051.02 f1 = Function2 CFC CD DD
170.2052.02 U2 = CFC CD DD
170.2053.02 f2 = CFC CD DD
170.2054.02 dU = CFC CD DD
170.2055.02 df = CFC CD DD
170.2056.02 dα = CFC CD DD
18323 AI-1 = Analog Input CFC CD DD
18324 AI-2 = CFC CD DD
AO-1= Analog Output CFC CD DD
AO-2= （User-defined） CFC CD DD

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.9 Measured Values

Matrix
Model
Information Coding
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Default Display
17930 IL1 = Measurement 134 137 No 9 1 CFC CD DD
17931 IL2 = 134 137 Yes 3\9 2 CFC CD DD
17932 IL3 = 134 137 No 9 3 CFC CD DD
17967 In = 134 137 No 9 4 CFC CD DD
605 I1 = CFC CD DD
606 I2 = CFC CD DD
831 3I0 = CFC CD DD
17937 IL1(2nd)= CFC CD DD
17940 IL1(3rd)= CFC CD DD
17943 IL1(4th)= CFC CD DD
17964 IL1(THD)= CFC CD DD
621 UL1E= 134 137 No 9 5 CFC CD DD
622 UL2E= 134 137 No 9 6 CFC CD DD
623 UL3E= 134 137 No 9 7 CFC CD DD
624 UL12= 134 137 Yes 3\9 8 CFC CD DD
625 UL23= 134 137 No 9 9 CFC CD DD
626 UL31= 134 137 No 9 10 CFC CD DD
627 Uen = CFC CD DD
633 Ux = CFC CD DD
629 U1 = CFC CD DD
630 U2 = CFC CD DD
632 Usync = CFC CD DD
17933 P= 134 137 No 9 11 CFC CD DD
17934 Q= 134 137 No 9 12 CFC CD DD
17935 S= CFC CD DD
17936 PF = 134 137 No 9 14 CFC CD DD
644 Freq= 134 137 No 9 13 CFC CD DD
17949 UL1E(2nd)= CFC CD DD

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.9 Measured Values

Matrix
Model
Information Coding
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Default Display
17952 UL1E(3rd)= CFC CD DD
17955 UL1E(4th)= CFC CD DD
17961 UL1E(THD)= CFC CD DD
830 IEE = CFC CD DD
30661 IL1M1= CFC CD DD
30664 3I0M1= CFC CD DD
30665 I1M1= CFC CD DD

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.9 Measured Values

Matrix
Model
Information Coding
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Default Display
601 IL1 = Measurement CFC CD DD
602 IL2 = (Protection CT) CFC CD DD
603 IL3 = CFC CD DD
604 IN = CFC CD DD
18510 IL1_S2= CFC CD DD
18513 Ix= CFC CD DD
18514 UL1_diff= CFC CD DD
18517 U_unb= CFC CD DD
18540 IL1_dif= CFC CD DD
30701 P, L1 = CFC CD DD
30702 P, L2 = CFC CD DD
30703 P, L3 = CFC CD DD
30704 Q, L1 = CFC CD DD
30705 Q, L2 = CFC CD DD
30706 Q, L3 = CFC CD DD
30707 PF, L1 = CFC CD DD
7742 IDiff L1 Measurement for CFC CD DD
7743 IDiff L2 Differential and CFC CD DD
Restraint Current
7744 IDiff L3 CFC CD DD
7745 IRest L1 CFC CD DD

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.9 Measured Values

Matrix
Model
Information Coding
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Default Display
17601 IL1_B = Measurement CFC CD DD
17602 IL2_B = (Protection CT) CFC CD DD
17603 IL3_B = CFC CD DD
17604 Ie_B = CFC CD DD
17609 3I0_B = CFC CD DD
17605 Ix_Line1 CFC CD DD
17607 Ix_Line2 CFC CD DD
17594 UL1E_B = CFC CD DD
17597 UL12_B = CFC CD DD
17578 UL1E_B1= CFC CD DD
17581 UL12_B1= CFC CD DD
17616 3U0_B = CFC CD DD
17610 3U0_B1 = CFC CD DD
17613 3U0_B2 = CFC CD DD
17617 U1_B = CFC CD DD
17612 U1_B1 = CFC CD DD
17611 U2_B1 = CFC CD DD
17618 U2_B = CFC CD DD
17614 U1_B2 = CFC CD DD
17615 U2_B2 = CFC CD DD
17592 Ux_Line1 CFC CD DD
17593 Ux_Line2 CFC CD DD
17577 f_Bus = CFC CD DD
17570 f_Bus1 = CFC CD DD
17571 f_Bus2 = CFC CD DD

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.9 Measured Values

Matrix
Model
Information Coding
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Default Display
17572 f_Line1= CFC CD DD
17573 f_Line2= CFC CD DD
924 Wp+= Energy 133 51 NO 205 CFC CD DD
925 Wq+= 133 52 NO 205 CFC CD DD
928 Wp-= 133 53 NO 205 CFC CD DD
929 Wq-= 133 54 NO 205 CFC CD DD
888 Wp(puls)= 133 55 NO 205 CFC CD DD
889 Wq(puls)= 133 56 NO 205 CFC CD DD
1020 Op.Hours= Statistics CFC CD DD
409 >BLOCK Op Count CFC CD DD
1021 Σ L1 = CFC CD DD
– #of TRIPs= CFC CD DD
10027 Start Duration Motor statistics CFC CD DD
10028 Startup Current CFC CD DD
10029 Startup Voltage CFC CD DD
10030 Nr.of Mot.Start CFC CD DD
10031 Motor Run.Time CFC CD DD
10032 Motor Stop.Time CFC CD DD
10033 Perc.Run.Time CFC CD DD
10037 Start Duration CFC CD DD
272 SP. Op Hours> Set Points (Statistic) CFC CD DD

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.9 Measured Values

Matrix
Model
Information Coding
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Default Display
18749 IL1_Local= Line Differential CFC CD DD
18750 IL1_Remote= Protection CFC CD DD
18751 Phi IL1= CFC CD DD
18752 IL2_Local= CFC CD DD
18753 IL2_Remote= CFC CD DD
18755 IL3_Local= CFC CD DD
18756 IL3_Remote= CFC CD DD
18744 PI FO TD PDI Value CFC CD DD
18745 FO A/m CFC CD DD
18746 FO A/h CFC CD DD
18763 OutputPower FO= CFC CD DD
18764 Input Power FO= CFC CD DD
18765 Budget FO = CFC CD DD
18766 Send Tel.min= CFC CD DD
18767 Good Rec.min= CFC CD DD
18768 Bad Rec. min= CFC CD DD
18769 SendTel.hour= CFC CD DD
18770 GoodRec.hour= CFC CD DD
18771 Bad Rec.hour= CFC CD DD
18775 PDI FO: TEMP = CFC CD DD
18776 PDI FO: BIAS = CFC CD DD
18777 Recei.Tel.min= CFC CD DD
18778 Lost Rec.min= CFC CD DD
18779 Recei.Tel.hour= CFC CD DD
18780 Lost Rec.hour= CFC CD DD

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.9 Measured Values

Matrix
Model
Information Coding
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Default Display
615.4057.01 B1 Bus. L1 T Smart Wireless CD DD
615.4058.01 B1 Bus. L2 T Temperature Moni- CD DD
toring1
615.4059.01 B1 Bus. L2 T CD DD
615.4060.01 B1 CB u. L1 T CD DD
615.4061.01 B1 CB u. L2 T CD DD
615.4062.01 B1 CB u. L3 T CD DD
615.4063.01 B1 CB d. L1 T CD DD
615.4064.01 B1 CB d. L2 T CD DD
615.4065.01 B1 CB d. L3 T CD DD
615.4066.01 B1 Cab. L1 T CD DD
615.4067.01 B1 Cab. L2 T CD DD
615.4068.01 B1 Cab. L3 T CD DD
615.4069.01 Bay1 Env.Tem.1 CFC CD DD
615.4070.01 Bay1 Env.Hum.1 CFC CD DD
20644 Env.Temp. CFC CD DD
toring2
616.4059.01 B2 Bus. L3 T CD DD
616.4060.01 B2 CB u. L1 T CD DD
616.4061.01 B2 CB u. L2 T CD DD
616.4062.01 B2 CB u. L3 T CD DD
616.4063.01 B2 CB d. L1 T CD DD
616.4064.01 B2 CB d. L2 T CD DD
616.4065.01 B2 CB d. L3 T CD DD
616.4066.01 B2 Cab. L1 T CD DD
616.4067.01 B2 Cab. L2 T CD DD
616.4068.01 B2 Cab. L3 T CD DD

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.9 Measured Values

Matrix
Model
Information Coding
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Default Display
toring3
617.4059.01 B3 Bus. L3 T CD DD
617.4060.01 B3 CB u. L1 T CD DD
617.4061.01 B3 CB u. L2 T CD DD
617.4062.01 B3 CB u. L3 T CD DD
617.4063.01 B3 CB d. L1 T CD DD
617.4064.01 B3 CB d. L2 T CD DD
617.4065.01 B3 CB d. L3 T CD DD
617.4066.01 B3 Cab. L1 T CD DD
617.4067.01 B3 Cab. L2 T CD DD
617.4068.01 B3 Cab. L3 T CD DD
toring4
618.4059.01 B4 Bus. L3 T CD DD
618.4060.01 B4 CB u. L1 T CD DD
618.4061.01 B4 CB u. L2 T CD DD
618.4062.01 B4 CB u. L3 T CD DD
618.4063.01 B4 CB d. L1 T CD DD
618.4064.01 B4 CB d. L2 T CD DD
618.4065.01 B4 CB d. L3 T CD DD
618.4066.01 B4 Cab. L1 T CD DD
618.4067.01 B4 Cab. L2 T CD DD
618.4068.01 B4 Cab. L3 T CD DD

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.9 Measured Values

Matrix
Model
Information Coding
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Default Display
toring5
619.4059.01 B5 Bus. L3 T CD DD
619.4060.01 B5 CB u. L1 T CD DD
619.4061.01 B5 CB u. L2 T CD DD
619.4062.01 B5 CB u. L3 T CD DD
619.4063.01 B5 CB d. L1 T CD DD
619.4064.01 B5 CB d. L2 T CD DD
619.4065.01 B5 CB d. L3 T CD DD
619.4066.01 B5 Cab. L1 T CD DD
619.4067.01 B5 Cab. L2 T CD DD
619.4068.01 B5 Cab. L3 T CD DD
The measured values of ADAM modules are as follows:
ADAM module 1 20573 ADAM1 Channel 1 MV

20574 ADAM1 Channel 2 MV
ADAM module 2 20581 ADAM2 Channel 1 MV

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.10 Menu Structure of the Protection Device

The menus in this document are illustrated in maximisation. For special device models, some menus or some
subitems may not be displayed.
[dw_menu structure_1, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-36 Menu Structure 1

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
[dw_menu structure_2, 1, en_GB]
Figure 5-37 Menu Structure 2

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.11 Terms
5.11 Terms
IE Rated current
UEN Rated voltage
UENprim Rated primary voltage
UENsec Rated secondary voltage
IL1 Phase L1 current
In Zero-sequence current (measured value, from common current transformer)
Ins Zero-sequence current (measured value, from sensitive current transformer)
3I0 Zero-sequence current (calculated value, from internal program calculation)
I1 Positive sequence current
I2 Negative sequence current
IL1_S2 Second group protection CT, phase 1 current (used for reactor/motor longitudinal differen-
tial)
tial)
tial)
IL1_diff Second group protection CT, phase 1 current (used for motor magnetic balance protection
and capacitor 3-phase differential current protection)
Ix Second group protection CT, Ix current (used for capacitor current unbalance, reactor
secondary side current, transformer gap zero-sequence and substation transformer low
voltage side zero-sequence)
IL1_B Busbar phase 1 current (used for automatic transfer system)
IE_B Busbar zero-sequence current (measured value, used for automatic transfer system)
3I0_B Busbar zero-sequence current (calculated value, used for automatic transfer system)
Ix_L1 Cable 1 current (used for automatic transfer system)
Ix_L2 Cable 2 current (used for automatic transfer system)
IA M1 Operat. meas. current IL1 meas. loc. 1
IB M1 Operat. meas. current IL2 meas. loc. 1
IC M1 Operat. meas. current IL3 meas. loc. 1
3I0 M1 Measurement point M1 zero-sequence current
I1 M1 Measurement point M1 positive sequence current
I2 M1 Measurement point M1 negative sequence current
IDiff L1 Differential phase L1 difference current
IRest L1 Differential phase L1 restraint current
Idiff REF Zero-sequence differential current

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.11 Terms
Irest REF Zero-sequence restraint current

Idiff REF2 Zero-sequence differential current #2
Irest REF2 Zero-sequence restraint current #2
UL1 Phase L1 voltage
UL12 L12 Phase-to-phase voltage
UL23 L23 phase-to-phase voltage
UL32 L31 phase-to-phase voltage
Un Zero-sequence voltage (measured value, from voltage transformer)
3U0 Zero-sequence voltage (calculated value, from internal program calculation)
U1 Positive sequence voltage
U2 Negative sequence voltage
Ux Independent voltage
Usyn Synchronisation voltage
Udelta Open delta voltage
Uphph Phase-to-phase voltage
Uph Phase-to-ground voltage
UL1_diff Capacitor phase L1 differential voltage
U_unb Capacitor voltage unbalance
UL1_B Busbar phase L1 voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
UL12_B Busbar L12 phase-to-phase voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
UL1_B1 Busbar1 phase L1 voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
UL12_B1 Busbar1 phase L12 phase-to-phase voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
UL1_B2 Busbar phase 2A voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
UL2_B2 Busbar phase 2B voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
UL3_B2 Busbar phase 2C voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
UL12_B2 Busbar 2AB phase-to-phase voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
UL23_B2 Busbar 2BC phase-to-phase voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
UL32_B2 Busbar 2CA phase-to-phase voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
3U0_B Busbar zero-sequence voltage (calculated value, used for automatic transfer system)
3U0_B1 Busbar 1 zero-sequence voltage (calculated value, used for automatic transfer system)
3U0_B2 Busbar 2 zero-sequence voltage (calculated value, used for automatic transfer system)
U1_B Busbar positive sequence voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
U1_B1 Busbar 1 positive sequence voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
U1_B2 Busbar 2 positive sequence voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
U2_B Busbar negative sequence voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
U2_B1 Busbar 1 negative sequence voltage (used for automatic transfer system)

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Appendix
5.11 Terms
U2_B2 Busbar 2 negative sequence voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
Ux_L1 Cable 1 voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
Ux_L2 Cable 2 voltage (used for automatic transfer system)
P Active power
Q Reactive power
S Apparent power
PF Power factor
f Frequency
f_B Busbar frequency (used for automatic transfer system)
f_B1 Busbar 1 frequency (used for automatic transfer system)
f_B2 Busbar 2 frequency (used for automatic transfer system)
f_L1 Cable 1 frequency (used for automatic transfer system)
f_L2 Cable 2 frequency (used for automatic transfer system)
AI_1 Analog input 1
AI_2 Analog input 2
AI_3 Analog input 3
AI_4 Analog input 4
PT Voltage transformer
CT Current transformer
7SJ686-A Feeder protection
7SJ686-A-B Feeder protection (1/2 housing)
7SJ686-A-C Feeder protection (Mini)
7SJ686-A-D Feeder protection (Mini)
7SJ686-A-E Feeder protection (Mini)
7SJ686-B Motor overcurrent protection
7SJ686-B-C Motor overcurrent protection (Mini)
7SJ686-B-D Motor overcurrent protection (Mini)
7SJ686-B-E Motor overcurrent protection (Mini)
7SJ686-C Motor differential protection
7SJ686-D Capacitor protection (current unbalance)
7SJ686-E Capacitor protection (voltage unbalance)
7SJ686-F Capacitor protection (differential voltage)
7SJ686-G Capacitor protection (3 phase differential current)
7SJ686-H Reactor/2-side transformer differential protection
7SJ686-J Transformer backup protection
7SJ686-K Substation transformer protection
7SJ686-K-C Substation transformer protection (Mini)
7SJ686-K-D Substation transformer protection (Mini)
7SJ686-K-E Substation transformer protection (Mini)
7SJ686-L 2 to 4 side differential protection
7SJ686-M Line differential protection
7SJ686-M-B Line differential protection (1/2 housing)
7SJ686-N Automatic transfer system device

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
Literature
/1/ SIPROTEC4 System Description, E50417-H1176-C151

/2/ DIGSI 4 User Manual, E50417-G1176-C152
/3/ DIGSI CFC Manual, E50417-H1176-C098
/4/ SIPROTEC SIGRA Product Information, 50417-X1174-C121

C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022
C53000-G1140-C357-G, Edition 11.2022

7SJ686 Manual AG en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7SJ686 Manual AG en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7SJ686 Manual AG en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Purpose of the Manual

SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 3

Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

4 SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual

• Proper storage, setup and installation

• Proper operation and maintenance

Provisions for Ensuring Product Life

SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 5

Typographic and Symbol Conventions

Device-internal logical input signal

Device-internal logical output signal

Internal input signal of an analog quantity

External binary input signal with number (binary input,

Example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with address

6 SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual

Analog input variable

AND-gate operation of input values

OR-gate operation of input values

Exclusive OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the

Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs are active or inactive

Dynamic inputs (edge-triggered) above with positive, below with

Formation of one analog output signal from a number of analog input

Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)

Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and

Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)

Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 7

SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 9

10 SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual

2.8.7 Remote Trip and Remote Transmission.......................................................................141

SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 11

2.15.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................194

12 SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual

2.25 Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)..............................................................................244

SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 13

2.35.3 Asynchronous / Synchronous Mode............................................................................283

14 SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual

2.41 Analog Output................................................................................................................ 359

SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 15

2.44 Flexible Protection Function............................................................................................ 389

3 Mounting and Commissioning................................................................................................................. 421

16 SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual

3.4.2 Testing the System (SCADA) Interface........................................................................ 457

4 Technical Data.......................................................................................................................................... 477

SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 17

4.21 Auto Reclose Function.....................................................................................................517

18 SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual

5.4.3 Cable Core Winding Balance Current Transformer.......................................................592

SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 19

1.1 Functional Configuration 22

SIPROTEC, Multi-Functional Protection Device, Device Manual 21

1.1 Functional Configuration

Table 1-1 Functional Configurations (✓ in the manual indicates selected)

Capacitor Protection (Voltage Unbalance)

Mini Substation Transformer Protection

Mini Motor Overcurrent Protection

Capacitor Protection (Current Diff)